>^ ^ r ?. ;^ _ >^^ f^*^, ^ ii/- v*^*. v^r " ■-■v^J^St^t ^' * ;^-\L,:' -:f4; .-•'^■^?«( *^>^ z^..- . ^ V-^ j*r fir* jy^Ri/iifi HARVARD UNIVERSITY. I. I B K A 11 Y MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY. uoio "b,V^\.0 -- ©(iJtcrW. L.\^ \<^K TRANSACTIONS OF THE CONNECTICUT ACADEMY OF ARTS AND SCIENCES Incorporated A. D. 1799 VOLUME XVI .. Publications of Yale University YALE UNIVERSITY PRESS NEVvA HAVEN, CONNECTICUT THE R. WAGNER SOHN PRESS 1 OFFICERS FOR 1910-11. I'resitlent. Hon. SIMEON E. BALDWIN. Vice- Preside nis. Prof. ALEXANDER W. EVANS, Prof. CLIVE DAY, Prof. HANNS OERTEL. Sccretari/. Dr. GEORGE F. EATON. Treasurer, Mr. GEORGE PARMLY DAY. Jjtbrnrian. Mr. JOHN CHRISTOPHER SCHWAB. Conniiittee on Publication. Hon. S. E. BALDWIN, Chairman, Prof. A. S. COOK, Prof. E. S. DANA, Prof. E. P. MORRIS, Prof. A. W. EVANS, Prof. CLIVE DAY, Prof. H. OERTEL, Mr. J. C. SCHWAB. !i> A COJSTTIilNTS Page Additions to the Library, May 1, 1910 to June 30, 1911 . . vii— xxix Art. 1.— The Ajiphipoda OF Bermuda. By Beverly Waugh Konkel 1—116 Art. II.— The Clausula in Ammianus Marcellinus. By Austin Morris Harmon 117 — 245 Art. III. — Nutrition Investigations on the Carbohydrates of Lichens, Algae, and Related Substances. By Mary Davies Swartz 247-382 Art. IV.— New Spiders from new England. By J. H. Emerton 383—407 ADDITIONS TO THE LIBRARY OF THE CONNECTICUT ACADEMY OF ARTS AND SCIENCES By Gib^t and Exchange from May 1, 1910, to June 30, 1911. Aix-eh-Troxehce.— Unive7-site. Faculte des lettres. Annales I-III, 2. 1907-09. Taculte de droit. Annales I-IV, 2. 1907-10. Faculte de droit et des lettres. Annales I— II; 2. 1905—06. Altenburg, S.-A. Naturforschende Gesellschaft des Osterlandes. Mitteilungen aus dem Osterlande. N. F. 1910. Atnerican Academy of Arts and Sciences. Proceedings. XLVI, 13-24, XLVII, 1-3. 1911. American Antiquarian Society. Proceedings. XX, 2. 1910. American Geographical Society. Bulletin. XXXIX, 1-XLIII, 6. 1907-11. American Museum of Natural History (New York). American Museum Journal. X, 3— XI, 5. 1910—11. Guide Leaflet. 24. 26-30, 33. 1907-11. American Philosophical Society. Proceedings. XLVIII, 194-L, 198. 1909-11. American Society of Sanitary and Moral Prophylaxis. Educational pamphlets. 1—6. 1910. Amherst College. Catalogue. 1910-11. Amiex.s. — Academie des Sciences. Memoires. I.VI. 1909. Sociefe Linneenne du Nord de la France. Bulletin. No. 225, 1891 ; XIX, 381-92. 1908-09. Amsterdam. — Koninkl. Akademie van Wetenschappen. Jaarboek, 1909. Proceedings. Section of sciences. XII, 1-2. 1909/10. Verliandelingen. Afd. Natuurkunde, Sectie II, Deel XV, 1—3, XVI, 1-2. 1909/10. Verslagen van de gewone vergaderingen van de wis- en natuur- kundige afdeeling. Deel XVIJI, 1-2. 1909/10. MaatschappiJ tot nut van 't Algemeen. Publikation. 93, also IX, 4. 1911. The Apteryx. (Roger Williams Park Museum, Providence, P. I.), 1, 1—3. 1910. Argentine Republic. Agricultural and pastoral census of the nation. Monograph. I— III. 1908. VIII Additions to the Library. Australasian Association for Advancettient of Science. Report of Meeting. XII. 1909. Address of President. 1907. Section C. Bamberg. — Remeis Sternivarte. Veroffentlichungen. Reihe II. Band I, Heft 1. 1911. Basel. —Naturforschende Gesellschaft. Bericht. XXI. 1909. Verhandlungen. XX, 3-XXl. 1910. Batavia. — X. Natuurkundige Yereeniging. Natuurkundig Tijdschrift. XL, Ser. 8, I ; XLIII, 1-4. R. Magnetical and Meteorological Observatory. Observations. XXX-XXXI and append. 1907-08. Observatory. Erdbeben Bericlit. 6a~c, 7a-b, 8 a, 9 a, 11a, 12 a. 1909. Seismological Bulletin. Jan. to Dec. 1910; Feb. 1911. Belgium. — Academic 11. d'' Archeologie de Belgique. Bulletin. I-IV. 1910. Bergen. —Museum. Aarsberetning. 1909. Aarbog. 1909, 2 to 1910, 2. Crustacea of Norway. By G. O. Sars. Vol. V, parts XXVII-XXX. Berlin.— JiT. Museum fiir Naturkunde. Mitteilungen aus dem Zoologischen Museum. IV, 3 ; V, 1—2. 1910-11. Bericlit des Zoologischen Museums. 1909. Birmingham.— A^aiM/-a/ History and Philosophical Society. List of Members and Annual Report. 1910—11. Proceedings. I— XII. Bologna. — R. Accademia delle Scienze deW Istituto di Bologna. Memorie. Classe di Scienze Morali. Sezione di Scienze Storico- Pilologiche. Ser. I. T. Ill, 2-IV, 1. 1908-10. Sezione di Science Giuridiche. Ser. I. T. Ill, 2-IV, 1. 1908-10. Adunanza, June 22. 1910. Rendiconti. Classe di Scienze Morali. Ser. I. T. III. 1909_10. Classe di Scienze Fisiche. Anno 1883—4; N. S., V, 1—4. 1900-01; XIII, 1908-09. Bombay. - R. Asiatic Society. Journal, Bombay Branch. LXIV. 1909. Bonn. — Naturhistorischer Verein der preussischen Rheinlande und Westfalens. Sitzungsberichte. 1909, 2 to 1910, 1. Verhandlungen. 1~IV, VI-VII, XXIII, 1-2,1844-66; LKVI, 2. 1910. Bordeau.x. — Commission Meteorologique de la (iironde. Bulletins. 1908, 1909. Societe des Sciences Physiques et Naturelles. Additions to the Library. IX Memoires. T. V, 1. Proces-verbaux. 1908-09; 1909-10. Boston, Mass. — Museum of Fine Arts. Bulletins. 46-51. Annual Report. XXXV, 1910. Society of Natural History. Proceedings. XXXIV, 9-12. 1910. Bradford. — Scientific Association. Journal. Ill, 2. 1910. Bremen. — Meteorologisches Observatoriurn. Deutsclies Meteorologisclies Jahrbuch. XX. 1909. Breslad. — Schlesische Gesellschaft fiir vaterlandische Cultur. Jahres-Bericlit. LXXXVIII, 1909. ■ Naturwissenschaftlicher Verein. Abhandlungen. XX, 1. 1910. Brooklyn. — Museum of the Brooklyn Institute of Arts and Sciotces. Bulletins. IV, 11, 14-16; VI, 3-8, 15. 1910-11. Science Bulletins. I, 17 and Index, 1910. Museum News. V, 6-8; VI, 1-8. 1911. Year Books. 1907/08-1909/10. Brcnn. — Nuturforsihender Verein. Verhandlungen. XLVII. 1909. Brunswick. — Verein fiir Naturwissenschaft. Jahresbericht. XVI. 1907/08-1908/09. Brussels. — Acadanie E. des Sciences^ des Lettres et des Beaux-Arts de Belgique. Annuaire. LXXVI-LXXVII, 1910-11. Bulletins. Classe des Sciences. 1909, 9 to 1911, 4. Memoires. Classe des Sciences. Ser. II. T. II. Fasc. VII— VIII. T. III. Ease. I -IV in 8vo. T. II. Jardin Botanique de VEtat. Bulletin III, 1. Musee R. d'Hisfoire Naturelle. Memoires. T. IV-V. 1907-08. Observatoire Royale. Annales Astronomiques XII, 2— XIII, 1. 1910. Annuaires Astronomiques. 1911—12. Societe Entomologique. Annales. LIII-LIV. Memoires. XVIII. 1911. Societe R. de Botanique. Bulletins. XLVI, 1-4, XLVII, 1-4; also XVI-XVII, 1-3, XVIII, XX. 1878-1881. Societe R. Bclye de Geographie. Bulletin. XXXIII, 1-XXXlV, 6. 19U9-10. X Additions to the Library. Brussels.— S'ocie/e R. Zoologique et Malacologique. Annales. XLIV. 1909. Societe cles Sciences. Annales. XXXIV, 2-4; XXXV, 1-2. 1909/11. Revue des Questions Scientifiques. Ser. Ill, XVII, 1— XIX, 2. 1910-11. Bdcarest. — Observatornl Astronomic si Meteorologic. Bulletin Lunar. XVI. 'l907. Societe des Sciences. Bulletins. XVI, 1-2; XVIII, 5-XXI, 1; also II, 7-12. Ill, 1-2, X, 5. Buchan Field Club Museum, Peterhead. Transactions. X. S. I, 1. Budapest. — Academic Hongroise des Sciences. Matliematisclie und Xaturwissenscliaftliclie Berichte aus Ungarn. XXIV-XXV. 1906-07. Rapport sur les Travaux. 1909. Kiralyi Magyar Tudomdny, Egyetem Tanrede. 1903/04; 1905/06-1908/09; 1910/11. Buenos Aires. —Dn-ecdo« General de Estadistica. Boletin Mensual. X, 108-XI, 120. 1909-10. Museo Nacional. Anales. Ser. III. T. XI-XIII. 1910. Sociedad Cientifica Argentina. Anales. LXIX, 1-LXX, 4. 1910. Buffalo.— S'ociV^?/ of Natural Sciences Bulletins. X, 1. 1910. Caen. — Societe Linneenne de Normandie. Bulletin. Ser. 6, T. II. 1908-09. Memoires. XXIII, 1-2. 1908-09. Calcutta. — Asiatic Society of Bengal. Journal and Proceedings. IV (Index) ; V, 1—11 ; VI. 1—6. 1908-10. Memoirs. Ill, 1. Historical Society. Annual Report. 1910. Journal. V (No. 10). 1910. Halifornia Academy of Sciences. Proceedings. I, pp. 7-288 (4th Ser.); HI, pp. 57-72 (4th Ser.). Cambrai. — Societe d^ Emulation. Memoires. LXIII-LXIV. 1908-09. Cambridge (England).— Observatory. Report. 1909-10. Fhilosophical Society. Transactions. XXI, 12-14: Index to XIII. Addilious to the Library. XI Cameron, J^si.. — Gulf Biologic Staiion. Bulletin. V.. 1910. Cah ADA. — Geological Survey. Depai'tmeut of Mines. Sunimaiy Eeport. 1909. Maps 1006, 1008, 1077, 1082, 1091, 1093, 1101, 1110, 1115. 1137. 1143, 1170. Department of the Interior. Maps, Manitoba, Saskatchewan and Alberta. 1909. Forestry- Branch. Bulletin. 9, 16-20. Canadian Railway Club. Official Proceedings. X, 1-5. 1911. Caradoc and Severn Valley Field Clubj Shrewsbury. Record of Bare Facts. 20, 1910. Transactions. V, 2, Catania. — Accademia Gioenia di Scienze Naturali. Bolletino delle Sedate. Ser. II, 11-17. 1910-11. Societa degli Spettroscopisti Italiana. Memorie. XXXIX, 1-7, 9-11 ; XL, 1-3. 1910-11. Cellule, La. XXVI, 1. 1910. CuAVTJhTKVEG. — Observed or io AstronoDtico National. Anuario. XXXI. 1911. Chemnitz. — Naturwissevschaftliche Gesellschaft. Bericht. XVII. 1909. Cherbourg. — Societe Rationale Academique. Memoires. XVIII. Chicago. — Field Museum of Natural History. Publications. 142-150. Christiania.— A'z/^ Maguzin for Naturcideiiskaberne. XLIX, 1. 1911. V idenskabs-Selskabet . Porhandlinger. 1909. CnuR. — Naturforschende Gesellsc/ia/t Graubiindens. Jahres-Bericht. LII. 1909-10. Cincinnati. — L?o^(^ Library. Bulletins. Mycological Series, 3 (1902), no. 1 ; 13 (1909;, no. 4. Pharmacy Series, 12 (1910), no. 2. Report of Lloyd Mycological Museum. I. 1895. Bibliographical Contributions. 1-2. 1911. Mycological Notes. 32-5. 1909-10. Index to II. 1905-08. Museum Association. Annual Report. XXIX. 1909. Journal. XX 1, 2. 1910. University. Report of Chairman and President. 1909. Observatoiy Publications. 17. 1905—10. Record. VI, 5-VII, 4. 1910-11 University Studies. Ser. IL Vol. VI, 1-4. 1910. XII Additions to the Libra)-}'. Colorado College. Publications. General Series. 50-52. 55. Science Series. XII, 25, 47—49. Social Science Series. II, 3. Colorado Scientific Society. Proceedings. IX, 345 -X, 38. Year-Books. 1882-1910. Colorado. — University of. Studies. Vir, 2-VIIL 3. 1910-11. Comiecticut Historical Society. Annual Eeport. 1910. Copenhagen. — L'.4caf^fmie jR des Sciences et des Lettres de Danemark. Bulletin (Oversigt). 1909, (3-1911, 1. Xaturhistoriske Forening. Viden.skabellge Meddelelser. 1909. CoRDNA. — R. Acadeniia Gallega. Boletin. V, .35-VI, 46. Cracow. — Academic des Sciences. Materyaly. 1907-09. K. K. Sternnrtrte Eesultate. 1910. Meteorologische Beobachtungen. March 1910-May 1911. Croydon. — Microscopical Club. Reports and Abstracts of Proceedings. I-V, VI-VIIl, 1871- 1878. Annual Proceedings and Transactions. 1878/81 to 1909/10 ; In- dex to 1870/83. Natural History and Scientific Society. Annual Proceedings and Transactions. 1909—10. Danzig. — Naturforschende Gesellschaft. Katalog der Bibliothek. Heft 2. Schriften. N. F. Bd, XII, 4. Westpreussischer Botanisch-Zoologischer Vereiu. Bericlite XXVI-XXIX; XXXI-XXXII. 1905-10. Davenport, Ia. — Academy of Sciences. Proceedings. XII, pp. 223-40. Denison University. Bulletin of the Scientific Laboratories. XVI, pp. 1-346. 1910. Detroit. — Museum of Art. Annual Report. 1910. Bulletins. IV, 2-V, 2. 1910-11. Di.ioN. — Academic des Sciences, Arts et Belles-Lettres. Memoires. 3e Ser. T. II-III. ]874-7(;. 4e Ser. T. II. 1907-10. DoRi'AT.— GeZe/tr^e Estnische Gesellschaft. Sitzuuo-sberichte. 1909. Additions to the Library. XIII DoRPAT. — Naturforscher-Gesellscha^t. Archiv. Ser. II, Band VI. Sitznngsberichte. XVIII, 2-4. 1909. Dresden. — Naturwisseiischaftliche Gesellschaft Isis. Sitzungsberu'hte und Abhandhingeii. JuU', 1909 to Dec, 1910. DvBLia. —Eoyal Dublin Society. Economic Proceedings. II, 1—2. Scientific Proceedings. N. S. VII, 24-3B ; Index. 1898-1909. Scientific Transactions. V, 2d Series. VI. R. Irish Academy. Proceedings. Series A, XXVIII, 1-XXIX. 2: Series B. XXVIII, 1-XXIX. 4; Series C, XXVII, 10, XXVIII, 1- XXIX, 4. CJare Island Survey. XXXI, 4-5, 22, 39. Trinity College. Hermathena. 34-36. 1908-10. Dutch East Indies. — K. Natuurkundige Yereeniging. Natuurkundige Tijdsclmft. LXIX. East Kent Scientific and Natural History Society. Transactions and Reports. Ser. II. Vol. IX. HiGmBVRGR.— Botanical Society. Transactions and Proceedings. XXV. Geological Society. Transactions. IX, special part and V. B. Observatory. Annals. III. 1908. R. Physical Society. Proceedings. XVIII, 2. Royal Society. Proceedings. XXX, 5, 7; XXXI, 1-3. Elberfeld. — CJiemisches Untersuchnngsamt. Bericht fiber die Tatigkeit. 1908. Katurivissenschafflicher Verein. Jahres-Bericht. XII. 1909. Elisha Mitchell Scientific Society. Journal. XXV, 3-XXVI, 4. Emden. — Naturforschende Gesellschaft. Jaliresbericht. XCIV. 1908/09. Kleine Schriften. 4, 6-10, 14. Erfurt. — K. Akademie geineimiUtziger Wissenschaften. Jahrbucher. XXXV. 1909. Essex Institute. Annual Eeport. 1910, 1911. Florence.— Bii^toffca Nazionale Centrale. Bolletino. 110-124. XIV Additions to the Libra)-}'. France. — Minidh-e de V Instruction Piibliqne, dcs Beaux-Arts et des Cultes. Rapport sur les Observatoires Astronomiques de Province. XXIV, XXIX, XXXI, XXXVIII, XLIII, LVI, LXII, LXVII, LXX, LXXII, LXXIV, LXXVIII, LXXXI, LXXXIII, LXXX VII, XC, XCIII. 1887-1906. Frankford, Vk.— Historical Society. Papers. II, 2. Frankfurt, a. ^i.— Deutsche Malakologische Gesellschaft. Nachrichtsblatt, XLII, 3-XLIII, 2. 1910-11. Senckenbergische Naturforschende Gesellscha/t. Abluindlungen. XXXI, 1-XXXIII, 3. Bericht. 1-4. 1910. Verein fiir Geographic nnd Stafistik. Jahresbericht. LXXIII-LXXIV. 1909-10. Frankfort, a. O.—Naturwi^senschaftlicher Verein. Helios. XXVI. 1910. Monatliche Mitteilunoen. II, 7-VI. 188.5-87. Franklin Institute. Journal. CLXIX, 3-CLXXII, 1. 1910-11. Fradenfeld. — Thurgnuische Naturforschende Gesellscliaft. Mitteilungen. XIX. 1910, Freibdri;, i. 'B.— Naturforschende Gesellschaft. Bericht. XVIII, 1. 1910. Fribodrc4.— Socie^e Fribourgeoise des Sciences. Bulletins. Ill, 1888/87 ; IV, 1887/90 ; VII, 1893 97-XII. 1903/04 XIV, 1905/OBXV-lI, 1908/09. Geneva. — L'Insfifut National Geneoois. Bulletins. XXXVIII-XXXIX. 1909. Memoires. XIX-XX. 1901-10. Societe de Physique et d^Histoirc Naturelle. Comptes rendus des Seances. XXVII. 1910. Memoires. XXXVI, 2-XXXVII, 1, 1910-11. Ge^oa. — Museo Civico di S'oria Naturale. Annali. Ser. 3. IV. 1908-10. Germany. — Kaiserl. Leopoldinisch-Carolinische deutsche Akademie der Natur- forfcJier. Abhandlungen. Nova Acta. XC, 2-4; XCI, 3; XCII, 1 XCIII, 2. Leopoldina. XLV-XLVI. 1909-10. Giessen. — Oberhesiische Gesellschaft fiir Natur- und Heilkunde. Bericht. N. F. Medizinische Abteilung. \. 1909. Naturwissenschaftliche Abteilung. III. 1908- 1909. Kegister zu Biinden I-XXXIV. Gi^kHGOW'.— Natural History Society. Journal. H, 1-4. 1909/10. Additions to the Library. .XV Glasgow.— Glasgow Naturalist. I— II. 1909—10. -R. Philosophical Society. Proceedings. XLI. 1909-10. GoETEBORG.— X Gescllschaft der Wissenschafteti. Handlingar. 4de folj H. 12. 1909. GoETTiNGEN.— ZiT. GesellscJutft der Wissenschaften. Nachrichten. Geschaftliche Mitteilungen. 1910, 1. JMathematisch-physikalische Klasse. 1908—10. Philosophiscli-historische Klasse. 1910, 1—2. Graz. — Naturicissenschaftlicher Verein fur Steiermark. Mitteilungen. XXVII-XLIV. 1890-1907. Great Britain.— i^02/a^ Photographic Society. Annual Exhibition. LV. 1910. Grenoble.— ["?n'j;ersi/e. Aunales. XX, 2-3; XXI, 1-3; XXII, 1-3, et supplement ; XXIII, 1. Haarlem. — Mttsee Teyler. Archives. Ser. II. XII, 1. 1910. Soeiete HoUandaifie des Sciences. Archives neerlandaises. Ser. II, XV, 1—5. 1910-11. Teylers Godgeleerd Genootschnp. Verhandlingen. N. S. XVII. Hamburg. — Deutsche Seewcirte. Aus dem Archiv. XXXII, 2-XXXIII, 4. 1909-10. Ergebnisse der meteorologischen Beobachtungeu. 1901 -05. Deutsches meteorologisches Jahrbuch. XXXII. 1909. Jahresbericht. XXXIII. 1910. AnnalenderHydrographieundmaritimenMeteorologie. XXXVIII, 4-XXXIX, 6. 1910-11. Xachtrag zum Katalog. IX. 1909-10. Na turivissoischaf/licher Verein. Abhandlungen. XIX. 3—5. Verhandlungen XVII. 1909. Harvard College. — Astronomical Observatory. Annals. LIX, 6; LXV ; LXVI; LXVIII, 1; LXXI, 1. Annual Report. LXV. 1910. Circulars. 153—65. Museum of Comparative Zoology. Annual Report. 1909/10. Bulletins. LII, 15-17; LIII, 5; LIV, 2-5. Memoirs. XL, 1-2; XLI, 1-2; XXVI, 7; XLV, L Havana.— C'o^e^io de Belen. Observaciones meteorologicas y magneticas. 1909. Havre. — Soeiete freoJogique de Normandie. Bulletin. XXIX. 1909. XVI Additio)is to the Library. Heidelberg. — Historisch-philosophischer Verein. Neue Heidelberger Jahrbiicher. XVI, 1-2. 1909. Helsingfors. — Societas Scientiarum Fennica. Acta. XXXV, 1--10; XXXVI, 1-4; XXXVII, 1-2. 4-11; XXXVIII, 1, 3; XXXIX, 4; XL, 1-4, also XIX. 1893. Bidrag till kaniiedom af Fiulands natur ocli folk. 52—53, 1893 ; 67 (1-3), 68 (1-2), 1910. Ofversigt af forhandlingar. VI- VIII, 1863-66 ; LI, A-C, LII, A-C, 1908-10. Meteorologisches Jalirbuch. Ill, 1903 & Supplement. Observations meteorologiques. 1899—1900. Hermannstadt. — Siebenbiirgischer Verein fur Naturwissenschaft . Verhaudluugen und Mitteilungen. LIX. 1909. Hudson Codnty, N. H.— Historical Society. Publications. 1-7. 1908. Illinois. — State Laboratory of Natural History. Bulletins. VIII, 4-5 and Index ; IX, 1-3. 1910. India. — I. Department of Agriculture. Report on Progress of Agriculture. 1909/10. Memoirs. Botanical series. I, Index; 11,9; III, 1-6; IV. 1. Chemical series. 1, 8—9. Agricultural Researcli Institute, Pusa. Report. 1909/10. Bulletin 16, 1910. Geological Survey. Memoirs. XXX VII, 4-XXXVIII. 1910. Palfeontologica In- dica. Ser. XV. Vol. IV, 2-3; VI, 2; X. S. Ill, 1. Records. XXXVIIl, 4-XL, 3. 1910. Meteorological Department. Animal Summary. 1909. Memoirs. XX, 8 and Index; XXI, 2. Monthly Weather Review. Dec, 1910 to Feb., 1911. Rainfall of India. XIX. 1909. Report of Administration. 1909/10. Board of Scientific Advice. Annual Report. 1908/9; 1909/10. Indian Museum. (Calcutta). — Annual Report. 1907—09. Catalogue of the Indian Decapod Crustacea. I, 2. Echinoderma. Part VI, Asteroidea, 2. 1910. Indiana. — Academy of Science. Proceedings. 1909. Iowa. — State University. Bulletins. Laboratory of Natural History. VI, 1. Contributions. Physical Laboratory. I, 4. 1911. 'L'BiKl.kSD.— Pharmaceutical Society. Calendar. XXXV. 1911. Additions to the Library. XVII Italy.— i?. Coinifato Geologico. Bollettiiio. 2-3. 1910. Jamaica Institute. — Journals. I, 1—3 ; II, 2, 5— G. Jenaische Zeitschrift fiir Natnrwissaischaft. XXXIX, 1— XL, 2. 1^*10—11. JoJm Crerar Library. Annual Eeport. XVI. 1910. Handbook. 1910. List of Books ou the Histoiy of Science. Jan., 1911. Johns Hopkins University. — Circulars. 1910, 4—1911, 5. Kansas. — University. Science Bulletin. V, 1-11. 1910. Iv.^Sk'^.—Observatoire Meteorologique. Bulletins. 1904-09. Societe Pliysico-Mathematique. Bulletin. Ser. II, XVI, 3. 1910. Kharkoff. — Societe cles Sciences Physico-Chimiques. Travaux. XXXVI, 1908. KiKL.—Jyonimission zur wissenschaftlichen Untersuchung der detifschen Meere. AVissenschaftliche Meeresuntersuchungen. Abteilung Kiel. N. F. XI-XII. K. Universitdt. Verzeichnis der Vorlesungen. W. 1909/10. S. 1910. Clu-onik. 1909/10. Dissertations. Kiev.- — Societe des Naturalistes. Memoires. XX, 4-XXI, 2. 1910. Kladsenbdrg. — Universite. Annales. 1907/08-1908. 1909. Kodaikanal Observatory. — Annual Report. 1909—10. Bulletins. XIX-XXIII. 1910. KoENiGSBERG, i. Pr. — Physikalisch-ukonomische Gesellschaft. Schriften. L. 1909. Kyoto.— 7. University. College of Science and Engineering. Memoirs. II, 1-14; III, 1-3. 1909-11. La Plata. — Archivos de Pedagogia y Ciencias Afines. 16—23. 1909—11. La Rochelle. — Academic. Section des Sciences Naturelles. Annales. 35. 1906/07. Flore de France. XIV. 1910. Ladsanxe. — Institut Agricole. Observations Meteorologiques. XVIII, 1904 ; XXII, 1908. Societe Vnudoise des Sciences Naturelles. Bulletins. Ser. V, 167-72; also Ser. II, XI, 66, 68. 1871/73. Leiden. — Nederlandsche Dierkundige Yereeniging. Aauwinsten der Bibliotlieek. I. 1908/09. Tijdschrift. Ser. II. Deel XI, 3-XII, 2. II XVIII Additions to the Library. Leiden. — Rijksuniversiteit. Sterrewacht. Verslag. 1908-10. Leipzig. — K. Sachsische Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften. Berichte. Mathematisch-pliysische Klasse. LXI, 4-5; LXII, 1-5. 1909-10. Verein fur Erdkunde. Mitteilungeu. 1908-09. Leriche. Maurice. Les poissons oligocenes de la Belgirpie. Annee 1910. Lemberg. — Seccenko- Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften. Chronik. II, 38 ; III, 39 ; IV, 40. 1909. Sammelsclirif t. Mathematisch - Nat urwissenschaf tlich-Arztliclie Section. VII, 1 : IX ; XIV. Liege. — Societe R. des Sciences. Memoires. VIII. 1909. Limbdrg. — Provinciaal Genoofschap voor Geschiedkundige Wetenschappen, Taal en Kunst. Limburg's Jaarboek. XVI, 4 ; XVII. 1910-11. Linz. —Museum Francisco-Carolinuni. Jahresbericlit. 69. Lisbon. — Sociedade de Geographia. Boletim. Ser. XXVIII, 1-12: XXIX, 1-3. 1910-11. Liverpool. — Geographical Society. Transactions and Annual Eeport. XVIII-XIX. 1909-10. London. — Biological Society. Proceedings. XXIV. 1909/10. R. Geographical Society. Geographical Journal. XXXV, 3-XXXVII, 5. 1910-11. Geological Society. Quarterly Journal. 261-65. 1910-11. Geological Literature added to Librar^^ 1909. Linnaean Society. Journal. Botany. 272. 1909. Zoology. 201, 202, 207. 1910. List. 1910/11. Proceedings. 122. 1909-10. Mathematical Society. Proceedings. VIII, 3-7; IX, 1-7. 1910-11. R. Microscopical Society. Journal. 1910, 1-1911, 3. National Physical Laboratory. Annual Report. 1909, 1910. Collected Eesearches. VI- VII. 1910-11. Patent Office. Catalogue of Library. I. Authors. 1899. Library Series. 1-2, 4-18. 1905-07. Subject Lists. X. S. AA-BE, BF-BL. 1908/09. Additions to the Library. XIX London. — Royal Society. Philosophical Transactions. Ser. A. 161-76.' Ser.B. 273-84. 1910-11. Proceedings. Ser. A. 563-79. Ser. B. 555-68. 1910-11. Louisiana. — State Museum. Natural History Survey. Bulletin. 1. 1911. Ldeneburg. — Naturii'issenschaftlicher Verein. Jahreshefte. XVIII. 1908/10. Ldnd. — K. Universitet. Acta. :N. F. V, 1-2, 1909; Register. 1864-1904. Biblioteks Arsberattelse. 1909. LuxEMBODRGf. — Institut Grand-Ducal. Section des sciences naturelles, physiques et niatheniatiques. Archives trimestrielles. N. S. IV, 1-V, 1. 1909-10. Lyons. — Academic des Sciences. Memoires. Ser. Ill, 11. 1911. Sociefe d' Agriculture., Sciences et Industrie. Annales. 1909. Universite. Annales. Science-Medecine. X. S. 1, 6, 25-29. 1899-1909. Annales. Droit-Lettres. X. S. II, 4, 21, 22. 1900-1910. Societe des amis de I'Universite. Bulletins. XXIII, 1— XXIV, 1, 1910-11. Bulletin Historique du Dioclse de Lyon. I, 6 ; II, 2. 1909. 1911. Madras. — Fisheries Bureau. Bulletins. 4—5. Madrid.— ii. Academia de Ciencias Exactas. Fisicas y Naturales. Memorias. XV. Revista. VIII, 7-IX, 8. Comision del Mapa Geologico. Boletin. X-XI. 1908/09. Observafo7-io. Anuario. 1911. Eesumen de las Observaciones Meteorologicas. 1902—05. MAGDEBDRG.—iVf nse«m fih- Natur- und Heimatkunde. Abhandlungen und Berichte. II, 1. 1910. Maine Agricultural Experiment Station. Bulletin. 190. 1911. Manchester, England —Geographical Society. Journal. XXV, 2-XXVI, 2. 1909-10. Literary and Philosophical Society. Memoirs and Proceedings. LIV, 2-LV, 1. 1909-11. Museum. Publications. 67- 71. 1910. University. Publications. Historical Series. IX— XL 1911. Medical Series. XIII. 1911. II* XX Additions to the Library. Mannheim. — Verein fur Naturkunde. Jalu'esbericlit. 75. 1910. Marburg. — Gesellschaft zur Beforderung der gescnufen Naturwissenschaften. Schriften. X, 2-4, G-7, 10, 12 ; XII, 1-7 ; XIII. 1-6. Sitzungsberichte. 1909-10. Mecklenburg. — Verein der Freunde der Nafurgeschichte. Archiv. LXIII, 2-LXW. 1909-10. Melbourne. — National Museum. Memoir. 3. 1910. Mexico. — Instituto Geologico. Boletin. 25, 27. 1910. Parergones. Ill, 3-8. 1909-10. Instituto Medico Nacional. Anales. July, 1908 to Feb., 1909 and March to April, 1910. Ohservatorio Meteorologico Magnetico Central. Boletin. May, 1909 to Dec, 1909 ; Feb. to June, 1910. Sociedad Cientifica ^'•Antonio Alzate'\ Memorias y Revista. XXVII, 4 -XXVIII, 8. Michigan. — Academy of Sciences. Report. XII. 1910. Middelburg. — Zeeuwsch GenootscJuip der Wttensclm]>pe)i. Archief. 1910. Milan. — jB. Istituto Lombardo di Scienze e Lettere. Rendicouti. Ser. II. XLII, 16-20, XLII, 16. 1910. R. Osservntorio Astronoiuico di Brera. Pubblicazioni. XL VII. 1910. Societa Italiana di Scienze Naturali e del Mnseo Civico. Atti. XLVIII, 4-L, 1. 1910-11. Milwaukee. — Public Museum. Annual Report. XXVII-XXXVIII. 1909-10. Bulletin. I, 1. Minnesota. - Geological and Natural History Survey. Botanical Series. Report of Survey. V. Botanical Studies. IV, 1, VIII; Ser. II, 1-6; Ser. Ill, 1-8. Plant Studies. I-IV. Bulletins. 1, 2, 5, 8, 10. Zoological Series. II— IV. MissovRL—B ota'fiical Garden. Annual Report. XXI. 1910. MoDENA. — R. Accademia di Scienze, Lettere ed Arti. Memorie. Ser. II, T. XII, 1, 1896; Ser. Ill, T. VIII. 1910. Societa dei Naturalisti e Mafematici. Annuario. II-VI, VII, 2-4, XU, 3-4, Ser. II, T. XIV. Atti. Rendiconti. Ser. Ill, T. VII, 2; Ser. IV, T. Ill, 1-2, VI, XI and XII. Additions to the Library. XXI ^o-^Tk-^x.— Agricultural Experiment Station (Bozeman). Annual Report. XVI. 1909. ■ Bulletins. 77-80, 82-83, 85. 1909-11. College of Agriculture and Mechanical Arts. Experiment Station Circular. 4. 1910. University of Montana. Bulletin, m. 1910. Montevideo. —Museo Nacional. Auales. IV, 1-2. 1910 ; also Ser. II, T. I, 3. Observatorio Nacional Fisico-Climatologico. Boletin. 79-84. 1909. MoNTPELLiER. — Academic des Sciences et Lettres. Bulletin Mensual. 1910, 4-7; 1911, 1-4. Memoires de la Section de Medecine. Ser. II, T. III. Memoires de la Section des Sciences. Ser. II, T. IV, 1—2, V, 2. Moscow. — Societe I. des Naturalist es. Bulletins. 1908, 3-1909. N. S. XXIII. MiJNSTER i.'SV. — West fdlischer Provitizial-Verein fiir Wissenschaft undKunst. Jahresbericht. XXXVIII. 1909-10. Munich. — K. Bayerische Akademie der Wissenschaften. Abhaudlungen. Mathematiscli-physikalische Klasse. XXIV, 3 ; XXV, 1-4. 1909-10. Snpplement-Bande. I, 7-10; II, 2; III, 1 ; IV, 1-2. Sitzungsbericlite. Mathematiscli-physikalisclie Klasse. 1909. Abhandlung. 1909, 15-1910, 9. Philosophisch-philologisch und historisclie Klasse. 1909. Abhandlung. 1909. 7-9. 1910. 1-6. Xancy. — Academic de Stanislas. Memoires. Ser. VI. T. VI- VII. 1908-10. N.iPLES.— i2. Instituto d'Incoraggiamento. Atti. Ser. VI. T. LX-LXI. 1908-09. R. Accademia delle Scienze Fisiclie e Matematiche. Atti, Ser. II, T. XIV. Rendiconti. Ser. III. T. XV, ^-XNi, 12. 1910 ; also supple- ment 189. R. Accademia di Scienze Morcdi e Politiche. Atti. XXXIX-XL. 1910. Rendiconti. XLVIII-XLIX. 1909-10. R. Universitd. Museo Zoologico. Annuario. X. S. Ill, 1-12. 1910. Xat.\l. — Government Museum. Annals. II, 2. 1911. Naturae Novitates. 1910, 3 to 1911, 7. Nedchatel.— ,4ca«?emte Facidte des Lettres. Recueil des Travaux. V. 1910. XXII Additions to the Library. Neuchatel. —Societe Keuchateloise des Sciences Natnrelles. Bulletins. XXXV-XXXVIT. 1907-10. New South Wales.— iiwMerm Society. Proceedings. No. 135-8. 1909-10. New York. — Academy of Sciences. Annals. XIX, 2-XX, 2; XXI, pp. 1-86. 1910-11. Botanical Garden. Bulletins. VI, 21-22; VII, 25. 1910-11. Public Library. Bulletins. XIV, 4-XV, 6. 1910-11. State Museum. Memoirs. XII, 1 ; XIII. 1909-10. New Zealand. — Institute. Transactions and Proceedings. XLII. N. S. 1910. Newcastle-upon-Tyne.— iVor//io/J5^7?^te«f/ Institute of Milling and Mechanical Engineers. Transactions. LX, 1-9; LXI, 1-4. 1910-11. Annual Report. 1909/10. Norfolk and Norioich Naturalists' Society. Transactions. IX, 1. 1910. North Carolina. — University. Philological Club. Studies in Pliilology. V-VII. 1910-11. North Dakota. — University. Quarterly Journal. I, 1-4. 1910/11. School of Mines Bulletin. N. S. I, 2, 6. 1909. North Staffordshire Field Club. Annual Report and Transactions. XLIV-XLV. 1909-10. 1910-11. Northamptonshire Natural History Society and Field Club. Journal. XV, 117-24. 1909-10. NortJmmbet-land, Durhat)i and Newcastle-upon-Tyne, Natural History Society. Transactions. I, 1-3; II. N. S. Ill, 1-2. 1911. Nova Scotia. — Department of Mines. Report. 1910. Nova Scotian Institide of Science. Proceedings and Transactions. XI, 3-4; XII. 2. 1904-8. Nuremberg. —A^afwr/jis^onsc/ie Gesellschaft. Abhandlungen. VIII; XV, 1-3; XVIII. Odessa. — Observatoire Mcteorologique et Magnefique. Annuaire. 1908-09. Ohio. - State Academy of Science. Proceedings. V, 6. 1910. Geological Survey. Bulletins. 10-12. 1909-10. O K L ahoma . — Geological Survey. Bulletins. 2, 5. G. 1911. Additions to the Library. XXIII Oklahoma. — State University. Eesearcli Bulletins. 3-4. 1910. Oporto. — Academia Polytechnica. Annaes Scientificas. Ill, 3-V, 4. 1910-11. Oxford. — Eaddiff'e Library. Catalogue of books added during- 1910. University Observatory. Astrograpliic Catalogue. V— VI. 1910. Paedologisches Jaarboek. I, 1900 ; VI-VII. 1906-09. Palermo. — Societd di Scienze Naturali ed Economiche. Giornale di Scienze Naturali ed Economiche. XXVIII, 1911. Paris. — Ecole Polyteclmique. Journal. 2e Ser. XIII-XIV. 1910-11. Ecole Normale Superieure. Annales. XLV, 1-XLVIII, 6. 1908-11. Museum d'Histoire Naturelle. Bulletins. 1909, 8; 1910, 1-5. Laboratoire de Phanerogamie. Xotulae Systematicae, par H. Lecomte. T. I-II, 2. 1909-11. Observatoire. Papport Annuel. 1909-10. Societe Zoologique de France. Bulletins. XVII, 1, 8; XXXIV. Memoires. XXII. 1909. Pasadena. — T/troop Institute. Bulletins. 46-50. 1910-11. Pathological Revista Quindicinale. II. 36—44. 1910. VF.wj.—Ministerio de Fomenlo. Cuerpo de Ingenieros de Minas. Boletin. 75—76. 1910. Philadelphia. — Academy of Natural Sciences. Journal. XIV, 2. Geographical Society. Bulletins. VIII, 2-IX, 2. 1910-11. Wagner Free Institute. Transactions. VII. 1910. Photographic Journal, London. L, 2— LI, 6 and supplement to 5. 1910—11. FiSA.—Societa Toscana di Scienze Naturali. Atti. Memorie. XXV. 1910. Processi Verbali. XIX. 2-5: XX, 1. 1910-11. PiTTSBCRGH. — Camcgie Library. Annual Reports. V— VIII, XIII-XIV. 1901-4, 1909-10. Carnegie Museum. Memoirs. IV, 2, 5—6. Publications. 60, 61, 63, 66. Potsdam. — A strophysikalisches Observatorium. Publikationen. XX-XXII, 1. 1910-11. XXIV Additions to the Libnuy. Potsdam.— Photographische Himmelskarte. V, 1910. Prag. — K; K. Bohmische Gesellschaft der Wissenschaffen. Jahresbericht. 1909, 1910. Sitzuiigsberichte. 1909, 1910.^ Ceske Spoleciwsti Entomologkke. Casopis. VII, 1 -VIII, 1. 1910—11. Deutscher Naturwissenschaftlich-niedizirnscher Verein /«>• Bolnnoi. Lotos. LVri-LVIII. 1909-10. K. K. Sternioarte. Magnetisclie uiid lueteorologisclie Beobachtungen. 1909. Providence. — Roger 'Williams Park Museum. Bulletins. 7-8. Monographs. 14, 1-5, 17. Quebec. — Literary and Historical Society. Transactions. V, 1 ; 1900-1902. ^o. 24. Province. Guides. 1909-10. Societe de Geographic. Bulletins. IV, 1-V, 3. 1910-11. Regensbdrg. —ffis^omcAer Verein von Oberpfalz luid Regensburg. Bericht. VII. 1907-09. Verhandlungen. LXI. 1909. Zoologisch-Mineralogischer Verein. Abliandlungen. Hefte 1, 3, 5, 7-9. 1849-64. Repertoire d''Art et d' Archeologie. Annee I, 1—4. 1910. RiGx.— Naturforscher -Verein. Arbeiten. N. F. XII. 1910. Korrespondenzblatt. LIII. 1910. Bio de Janeiro. — Institute Oswaldo Cruz. Memoria. I[, 1-2, 1910. Rockefeller Institute of Medical Research. Studies. X-XII. Roentgen Society. Journal. VI, 23-VII, 27. 1910-11. Rome.— jR. Accademia dei Lincei. Atti. Serie V. Rendiconti. Classe di Scienze fisiche, mate- matiche e natural!. XIX, 6-XX, 10. 1910-11. Rendiconto dell'adunanza solenne. 1910, II. Accademia Pontifica Romana dei Nnovi Lincei. Atti. LII, 1-2; LXIII, 1-7. 1909/10. St. Louis. — Academy of Sciences. Transactions. XVIII, 6; XIX, 2-11; XX, 1-3. St. Petersbourg. — Academic I. des Sciences. Bulletins. Classe Phys.-Math. Ser. V, 1898, 5 ; Ser. VI, 1910, 6 - 1911, 11. ' Memoires. Classe Phys.-Matb. Ser. VIII, V, 3. T. XVIII, 9, 14, 1.5; XXI, (i; XXrv. 1, 2, 4-10; XXV, 1-8. Additions to the Library. XXV St. Petersbourg. — Memoires. Classe Hist.-Phil. Ser. VIII, T. Ill, ] ; VII, 1-2; VIII, 13-14. I. Botanic Garden. Acta. XXVI, 2 ; XXVII, 3 ; XXVIII, 3. Comife Geologique. Bulletins. XXVIII-XXIX, 4. 1908-10. Memoires. X. S. 40, 51-2, 56-7, 59. 1908-10. I. Bu8sia7i Geographical Society. Bulletins. XLV, 1-9; XLVI, 1-5. 1909-10. Report. 1909. Santi.4Go de Chile. — Dentscher NafunvissenscJiaftlicher Verein. Verhaudlungen. V, 1—2 ; VI, 1. Soeiedad Cientifica de Chile. Actes. XIX. 1909. Sao 'Pavlo.— Soeiedad Scientifica. Revista. Jan., 1909 to Aug., 1910. Schweizerische Naturforschetide GesellscJiaff. Verhandluugeu. XCII-XCIII. 1909-10. Sharp, D.- — Fauna Hawaiiensis. II, part. Ill ; III, part VI. Siena. — ii. .Accademia dei Fisiocratici. Atti. Ser. IV, II, 1-6. Smithsonian Institution. National Museum. Bulletins. 39, 71—4. Contributions from National Herbarium. XIII, 3-9; XIV, 1-2; XV. Proceedings. XXXVII-XXXVIII. 1911. Report. 1910. Bureau of American Ethnolog3^ Bulletins. 37, 43, 45, 49—50. Societa Entomologica Italiana. Bulletins. XLI, 1-4. 1909. South Africa. —i?o^«Z Society. Transactions. II, 1—2, 1910—11, and Index. South-Enstern Union of Scientific Societies (Woking). South-Eastern Naturalist. 1910. South London Entomological and Natural History Society. Proceedings. 1909-10; 1910-11. Staten Island Aftsociation of Arts and Sciences. Proceedings. Ill, 1-2. Staten Island, N. Y. — Natural Science Association. Proceedings. II, 3—4. Stockholm. — /sT. Svenska Vetenskaps-Academi. Arkiv for Botanik. IX, 2-X, 1. Arkiv for Kemi, Mineralogi ocli Geologi. Ill, 4—6; IV, 1. XXVI Additions to the Library. Stockhol:«.— Arkiv for Matematik, Astronomi ocli Fysik. VI. 1-3. Arkiv for Zoologi. VI, 1-4; VII, 1. Arsbok. 1910. Handlingar. XLV, 3-XLVI. 3. Meteorologiska lakttagelser. L, Append., LI. Les Prix Nobel ; 907-8. K. Bibliothek. Accessions-Katalog. 23. 1908. Entomologisk Forening. Eutomologisk Tidskrift. XXXI, 1-4. 1910. Forstliche Vers uch san stalt. Meddelanden. 7. 1910. Stuttgart. — Verein fur Vaterldndische Nafnrkunde in Wilrttemherg. Jahreshefte. 1910, 1. Sydney. — Australian Museum. Memoir. IV, 12. Report. LVI. 1910. Special Catalogue. No. I, Vol. Ill, pt. 1. Tasmania.— Royal Society. Papers and Proceedings. 1909. Texas. — University. Bulletins. 129, 134-8, 140, 142-3, 145-6, 152-3, H;6-7, 170, 178. TiFLis. — Physikalisches Observatoriuni. Beobachtungen. 1899-1904. Seismische Mouatsberichte. 1909. 1—7. Tokyo. — Deutsche Gesellschaft fiir Natur- und Volkerkunde Osfasiens. Mitteilungen. XII, 2. 1910; also XI, 2. 1908. University. Journal of tlie College of Science. XXVII, 7-20. XXXVIII, 1-6. Calendar. 1909-10. Toronto. — Canadian Institute. Proceeding.s. II, no. 12, part 6. Transactions. VIII, no. 19, part 4. University. Publications. Biological Series. 8. G-eological Series. 6—7. Toulouse.— ^ca^^emie des Sciences. Memoires. Ser. X. T. IX. Universite. Eaculte des Sciences. Annales. Ser. II, T. X. 3—1 ; Ser. Ill, T. I, 1, 3. Bihliotheque Meridionale. Ser. I, T. I, 4 XIII, XIV; Ser. II, T. III. VIII-X, XII-XIII. Additions to the Lilrra}'}'. XXVII Toulouse. — Annuaire. 1899—1900. Bulletins. B, 1-2. Observatoire Astronomiqne, Magmiique et Meteorologique. Annales. VI. 1907. Sociefe (VHistoire Naturelle. Bulletins Trimestr. XLII, 3-4; XLIII, 2-8. Triest. — Osservatorio Maritimo. Eapporto Annuale. 190(i. Tromsoe. —Museum. Aarsberetning. 1908-09. Aarshefter. 30-32. 1907-09. Geologiske Undersegelser. IV, Pettersen. Teondheim. — li. Norske Videnskabers Selskab. Skrifter. 1872, I ; 1874, I-II ; 1909. Tufts College. Studies. Scientific Series. Ill, 1. Turin. — Mtisei di Zoologia ed Anatomia Comparatu. Bolletini. XXVI, 616-33 and index. United States. — Department of Agrictdture. Crop Reporter. 1910, 5-10. Library. Bulletins. 46—53. Monthly Bulletins. I, 3-II, 4. Division of Publication. Xo. 713. Weatlier Bureau. Mt. Weather Observatory. Bulletins. II, 4-III, 5 and Index. 1910. Department of the Interior. Geological S^rve3^ Annual Eeport. XXXI. 1910. Bulletins. 323-4, 328, 337, 343, 361, 364-8, 370, 381-2, 385-6, 398, 406-7, 415, 417, 419-20, 422, 425-30, 432-47, 453, 465. Geologic Atlas. Polios 167-176. Professional Papers. 68. Water Supplj^ and Irrigation Papeis. 237, 239, 241, 243-55, 260, 262, 264. Library of Congress. Outline Scheme of Classes (preliminary), Dec, 1909. Publications issued since 1897, Jan., 1911. Report of Librarian. 1910. Naval Observatory. Publications. 2d Ser., VI-VII. 1911. Superintendent. Synopsis of Report. 1910. Upsala. — K. Universitef. Arsskrift. 1909. Geologiska Institution. Bulletins. IX, 17—20, 1908—11 ; and Index, I— X. XXVIII Additions to the Libraiy. Utrecht. — K. NederlandscJi Meteroloyisdi Insiituuf. Annuaire. 1909, A-B. Mededeelingen en Verliandlingen. 102 (10-11), 1910/11. Provinciaal Utrechfsch Genootschap van Kunsten en Wetenschap2>en. Aateekeningen van het Verhandelde in de Sectie-Vergaderingen 1910. Verslag van het Verhandelde. 1910. Vanderbilt Southern History Society. Publications. 1. Vanderbilt University. Oriental Series. VI-VII. 1908-10. Vienna. — K. K. Akademie der Wissenschaften. Erdbeben-Konnnission. Bericht und Chronik. V. 1910. Mitteilungeu. XXXVII. 1909. Sitzungsberichte. Mathenmt.-natiirwiss. Klasse. CXVIII, 8— CXIX, Abt. Ill, 5. K. K. Central-Anstalt f'iir Meterologie und Geodynamik. Jahrbiicher. N. F. XLIII-XLV. K. K. Geologische Eeichsanstnlt. Abhandlungen. XVI, 3; XX, 3; XXII, 1. Jahrbiicher. LX, 1-3. 1910. Verhandlungen. 189B (13-15); 1903 (1); 1909 (15-18); 1910 (1-18). K. K. Naturhistorisches Hofmusenm. Annalen. XXIII, 4 -XX IV, 2. 1909-10. Verein zur Verbreitung Naturwissenscliaftlicher Kenntnisse in Wien. Schriften. L. K. K. Zoologlscli-Botanisdie Gesellschaft. Verhandlungen. LIX, LX. 1909-10. Virginia^ University of. Philosophical Society. Publications. Bulletins. I, 1—4. 1910. Humanistic Series. I. 1. 1911. Scientific Series. I. 1-5. 1910-11. Warren, Pa. — Academy of Sciences. Transactions. I, 2. 1908/09. Western Pennsylvania Engineers' Society. Proceedings. XXVI, 4-XXVn, 5. 1910-11. Wiesbaden. — Nassauischer Verein fiir Naturkunde. Jahrbuch. (J3. 1910. Wilson Ornithological Club. Oberlin, O. Wilson Bulletins. 70-4, 1910-11; also XXIII, 2 ; Indices to XXI-XXII. Wisconsin Geoloyical and Natural History Society. Bulletins. XIX-XXII. Road Pamphlet. 5. Additions to the Library. XXIX Wisconsin Natural History Society. Bulletins. N. S. VII, 3-4, VIII, 4 -IX, 2. 1909-11. Occasional Papers. I, 1, 3, II, 1—3, III. WtJRZBDRG. — Physikalisch-medizinische Gesellschaft. Sitzungs-Berichte. 1909, 1-5; 1910, 1-5. Wyoming Historical and Geological Society. Proceedings and Collections. XI. 1910. Yale University. Astronomical Observatory^. Transactions. II, 2. 1910. Z iJRicH. — Naturforscli ende Gesellschaft. Vierteljahrsschrift. LIV, 3-LV. 2. 1909-10. TRANSACTIONS OF THE CONNECTICUT ACADEMY OF ARTS AND SCIENCES Incorporated A. D. 1799 VOLUME 16, PAGES 1-116. MAY, 1910 The Amphipoda of Bermuda BY B. W. KUNKHL, Ph.D. SHEFFIELD SCIENTIFIC SCHOOL, YALE UNIVERSITY I'UBLISHED UNDER THE AUSPICES OF YALE UNIVERSITY NEW HAVEN, CONNECTICUT 1910 vf AUG TRANSACTIONS OF THE CONNECTICUT ACADEMY OF ARTS AND SCIENCES Incorporated A. D. 1799 VOLUME 16, PAGES 1-116. MAY, 1910 The Amphipoda of Bermuda BY B. W. KUNKEL, Ph.D. SHEFFIELD SCIENTIFIC SCHOOL, YALE UNIVERSITY; PUBLISHED UNDER THE AUSPICES OF YALE UNIVERSITY NEW HAVEN, CONNECTICUT IQIO WEIMAR : PRINTED BY R. WA(JXER SOHN I. — The Amphipoda of Bermuda. By B. W. KuNKEL, Ph.D. The Amphipoda of the Bermudas and West Indies apparently have been almost entirely neglected by systematists. The only notices which we have of Amphipoda from Bermuda are those of Caprella danilevskii (Czerniavski, 1868), recorded by Stebbing in the " Chal- lenger " Report (vol. 39, p. 1364, pi. 145), Cyamns fascicularis (Verrill, 1903) from a sperm whale captured off Bermuda and ex- hibited at St. George's, and Orchestia agilis (Smith, 1873) which Verrill notes as being abundant (Trans. Conn. Acad., vol. XI, p. 21—22, 1903). The greater part of the material for the present study was col- lected by Prof. Verrill and parties during two expeditions to the islands in the spring of 1898 and 1901, and was turned over to the writer for study in the spring of 1906; besides this material, several vials bore the label of G. Brown Goode, 1876—77, several that of W. M. Rankin, 1898, and one vial was received from Dr. L. J. Cole, dated Bermuda Biological Station, July 15, 1903. In general, no exact data regarding the localities and surrounding conditions were recorded, but where such are known due reference will be made to them. The collecting by Verrill was done in shallow water along the shore, at most in only a few fathoms, and nearly all the forms are shallow water species. The most striking peculiarity of the Amphipodous fauna of Ber- muda is its close relationship to that of the Mediterranean. Of the 45 species recorded from Bermuda, 19, or possibly 20, of them occur also in the Mediterranean, and nearly all of these are abundant in European waters. Eighteen of these 45 species are peculiar to Bermuda and only 7 species which are not endemic, are not found also in the Mediterranean. Thus nearly ^25 or 44*^/0, of the known species of Bermuda Amphipoda are Mediterranean. In contrast to the richness of European forms the 9 species common to South and Central American shores is striking, especially in view^ of the fact that 93 ^{^ of the Decapod Crustacea of Bermuda have been re- corded from the Florida Keys and the West Indies (Verrill, Trans. Conn. Acad., vol. XIII, p. 452, 1908). This paucity of forms from Central and South America probably has little significance, however, 4 B. W. Kunket, and is due simply to the small amount of collecting of the smaller Crustacea from these waters. The distribution of the species of Amphipoda known to occur in the waters of Bermuda is designated in the following hst. New species are printed in heavy-faced type and new genera are preceded by an asterisk. 1. Lysianassa punctata. Naples. 2. Amphilochus brunneus. Naples. 3. Leiicothoe spinicarpa. Arctic Ocean, North Atlantic, North Sea and Skagerrak, Greenland ; Norway, British Isles, Azores, France, Mediterranean. 4. Stenothoe marina. North Atlantic, North Sea, Adriatic Sea. 5. kS. valida. Rio Janeiro, Mediterranean ? 6. *Pariphinotus tuckeri. 7. Colomastix piisilla. British Isles, France, Mediterranean. 8. Panoploeopsis porta. 9. Eusiroides crassi. South Atlantic. 10. Pontogeneia verrilli. 1 1 . Melitafirsiielii. Rio Janeiro, Singapore, Port Jackson, N. S. Wales. 12. M. planaterga. 13. CcradocHs orchestiipes. Mediterranean. 14. C. parkeri. 15. C. colei. 16. Maera inaeqiiipes. Mediterranean, Azores. 17. M. raihbunae. Key West, Fla. 18. M. tinkerensis. 19. ElasmopHS rapax. British Isles, Christianiafjord, France, Azores, Mediterranean. 20. E. magnispinatus. 21. E. pocillimauus. Mediterranean, Atlantic coast of North America (Long Island Sound, Vineyard Sound;. 22. Gammarus breweri. 23. *Insula antennulella. 24. Orchestia platensis. Rio de la Plata, Atlantic coast of North America (Bay of Fundy to New Jersey), Mediterranean, Sea of Tiberias. 25. Hyale prevostii. Mediterranean, Atlantic Coast of North America, Rio Janeiro, Valparaiso, Peru. 26. H. ponlica. North Atlantic, North Sea, Mediterranean. 27. H. trifoliadens. 28. *Parhyalella batesoni. The Amphipoda of Bermuda. 5 29. MicrodeutopHs anomalus. Atlantic coast of Norway, Shetland Isles, Black Sea. 30. Autonoe longipes. Naples, Scandinavia, British Isles, Port Jack- son, N. S. Wales. 31. Eurystheus lina. 32. Podoceropsis sophia. Arctic Ocean, Scandinavia, British Isles, Shetland. 33. Isaea longipalpus. 34. Amphithoe longimana. New England coast. 35. A. nibricata. North Atlantic and adjoining seas of Europe. 36. A. pollex. 37. Grubia crassicornis. Naples, Black Sea. 38. G. coei. 39. Ericthonius brazilicnsis. Atlantic coast of North America, Nor- way, Adriatic Sea, Rio Janeiro, San Francisco, Cal. 40. Chelura terebrans. Atlantic coast of North America, Norway to Black Sea. 41. Caprella equilibra. Mediterranean, Norway, Charleston, N. Car., Rio Janeiro, Hong Kong, N. S. Wales. 42. C. bennudia. 43. C. danilevskii. Mediterranean, Black Sea, Copenhagen, Bay of Biscay, Sea of Japan, Port Jackson, N. S. Wales, Rio Janeiro. 44. Protellopsis stebbingii. Gulf of Mexico. 45. Cyatnus fascicularis. The specimens were all of relatively small size, the largest specimen measuring less than 20 mm. in length, which is in accord with previous observations that the Amphipoda of Arctic regions are of larger size than those of warm waters. The classification of the Gammaridea into families is in a rather unsatisfactory condition and no attempt at revision has been made in the following pages. Boeck (i876) divides them into 10 famihes and 22 subfamilies ; Stebbing (1888) in the " Challenger " Report makes 26 families and in his later work on the Gammaridea (1906) he recognizes 41 families; Delia Valle (1893) in his monograph re- cognizes only 10 families which, however, differ from Boeck's ; and Sars (1895) divides the Gammaridea of Norway alone into 26 families. For complete synonomy, reference should be made to the exten- sive works of Stebbing, Sars, and Delia Valle. Acknowledgment is made at this time of the privileges of the laboratory of the U. S. Bureau of Fisheries at Woods Hole, Mass. where part of this work was done in the summer of 1906. Tribe Gammaridea. Head rather small, not fused with first thoracic segment ; e3'es rarely of very large. size, usually compound, first antennae consisting of 3-jointed peduncle and flagellum ; second antennae with peduncle usually consisting of 5 joints and flagellum ; maxillipeds with inner plates free and with 2- to 4-jointed palps. Body usually compressed; thorax of 7 distinct segments, rarely reduced to 6 ; 5 or 6 segments bearing gills ; 4 segments in female bearing marsupial plates; thoracic legs overlapped at base by epi- mera, the first 4 being usually larger than the posterior 3. First 3 abdominal segments always free ; posterior 3 usually dis- tinct ; uropod 1 always biramous. Key to the genera of the Gammaridea. I Guathojjod 2 with tliuxl joint elongate .... Lysiauassa I Gnathopod 2 with third joint short .... 2 IGnathopod 2 with fifth joint greatly prolonged ; telson elongate, tapering, entire Amphilochus Not with same combination of characters . . 3 IGnathopod 1 with chela formed bj^ fifth and sixth joints Leucothoe Gnathoj)od 1 otherwise 4 Epimeron 4 enormously developed Stenothoe Epimeron 4 not especially large 6 Gnathopods 1 and 2 simple ; body depressed and ridged dorsally ; pleopod 3 with j)eduncle ex- panded to form long process Pariphinotus Not with same combination of characters . . G Gnathopod 2 with second joint rather slender and greatlj^ enlarged distally, gnathopod 1 ver3' small Colomastix Gnathopods otherwise 7 Epimera 1—3 tapering acutely ventrally .... Fanoploeopsis Epimera 1—3 more or less rounded ventrally . 8 Antennae with calceoli 9 Antennae without calceoli 10 10 1] 12 13 14 15 The Amphipoda of Bermuda. \ Antenna 1 with accessory flagellum Eusiroides \ Antenna 1 without accessory flagellum .... Pontogeneia Antenna 1 with accessory flagellum of more than 2 joints ; pereiopods 1 and 2 without glands ; uropod 3 projecting beyond others, biramous ; telson cleft 11 Not Avith same combination of characters . 15 \ Uropod 3 with raini'very unequal Melita \ Uropod 3 with rami not very unequal . . 12 Maxillae 1 and 2 with outer and inner plates very setose 13 Maxillae 1 and 2 with outer and inner plates not very setose 14 I Pleon segments 4—6 with dorsal spinules . . . Gammarus I Pleon segments 4—6 without dorsal spinules . . Ceradocus \ Pereiopods 3—5 slender Maera I Pereiopods 3—5 robust Elasmopus Antenna 1 with no accessor^^ flagellum ; mandible without palp ; pereiopods 1 and 2 without spinning glands ; uropod 3 small, uniramous 16 Not with tliis combination of characters . 19 Maxilliped with 3-jointed palp Insula Maxilliped with 4-jointed palp 17 Antenna 1 shorter than peduncle of 2 .... Orchestia Antenna 1 longer than peduncle of 2 . . 18 Maxilla 1 with palp Hyale Maxilla 1 without palp Parhyalella Antenna 1 with accessor^' flagellum well developod ; maxilla 1 with inner plate small ; pereiopods 1 19 I and 2 with spinning glands ; gnathopod 1 larger than gnathopod 2 20 Not with this combination of characters . 21 I Gnathopod 1 in male with fifth joint produced to form a large tooth Micro deutopus Gnathopod 1 in male with fifth joint not so produced Autonoe Antenna 1 with accessory flagellum ; low^er lip with anterior margin of outer plate entire ; 21 I pereiopods 1 and 2 with spinning glands ; uro- pod 3 not uncinate 22 Not with this combination of characters . 24 22 Telson emarginate Eurystheus Telson entire 23 23 I 24 25 26 B. W. Ktmkel, Pereiopods 1—5 not subchelate Podoceropsis Pereiopods 1—5 subclielate Isaea (Lower lip with anterior margin of outer plate in- cised ; pereiopods 1 and 2 with spinning glands ; uropod 3 uncinate 25 y Not with these characters 26 I Antenna 1 without accessory ilagellum .... Amphithoe 1^ Antenna 1 with accessory ilagellum Grubia Antenna 1 without accessory flagellum ; antenna 2 with Ilagellum not spatulate Ericthonius Antenna 1 with accessory flagellum ; antenna 2 with spatulate flagellum Chelura Lysianassa punctata (O. G. Costa, 1840), Stebbing, 1906. 1840. Caliisoma punctata. O. G. Costa, Fauna Reg. Napoli, Crost., Cat. p. 5. 1906. Lysianassa punctata. Stebbing, Das Tierreich, Lief. 21, p. 40. Eyes large, compound, reniform, ocelli large and not crowded together, pigmented in specimens preserved in alcohol. First antennae very short ; first joint of peduncle twice as long as second, third joint shorter than second ; principal flagellum made up of about 10 joints, about as long as peduncle ; accessory flagellum composed of 4 joints, about half as long as principal flagellum. Second antennae shorter than first and more slender ; flagellum shorter than peduncle, made up of 5 joints ; fourth and fifth joints of peduncle subequal ; third joint shorter than fourth. Mandibles with body rather slender ; cutting edge not denticulated ; palp long, 3-jointed, third joint slender and not quite as long as second, provided with several spinules apically ; molar tubercle wanting. Lower lip with inner plates small and rounded ; outer plates triangular, much longer than broad. First maxillae with inner plates very small ; outer plates with branched spines on distal margin ; palp made up of 2 joints, of which the first is very short and the second has a serrated, blunt distal end. Second maxillae with inner plate much broader than outer and of about same length, broader at distal end which is oblique and provided with spinules. Maxil- lipeds with 3-jointed palp having terminal dactyl-like spine ; second joint rather long and slender, with slender spinules on inner margin ; third joint with long spinules apically; inner plates with 3 teeth on round distal margin, fine cilia on inner margin ; outer plates moder- The Amphipoda of Bermuda. 9 ately broad, unarmed, extending nearly as far as second joint of palp. In female, lirst gnathopods with triangular epimeron, with anterior ventral angle rounded ; second joint fairly stout, cylindrical ; third joint broader than long; fourth triangular with posterior margin convex and provided with setae toward apex ; wrist somewhat longer than broad and provided with setae apically ; hand slender and Fig. 1. Lysianassa punctata (O. G. Costa). tapering, not subchelate, posterior margin provided with long setae and sharp tooth-like spines ; linger short and curved, unguiform. Second gnathopods with narrow epimeron more than twice as high as long, rhomboidal ; second joint long and very slender, slightly broader distall}' than proximally ; third joint 4 times as long as broad ; fourth joint about ^l^ as long as third, broader at distal end than at proximal, rounded apically, articulating with wrist by distal half of anterior margin ; wrist longer than third joint, triangular, broad- est at middle, posterior margin convex, anterior margin straight with many fine setae near middle ; hand shorter and narrower than wrist, subrectangular, broader at distal margin which is transverse and concave, anterior margin with abundant fine setae toward apical portion, distal portion of posterior margin with many closely set 10 B. IV. Kunkrl, sharp teeth ; finger very short and curved, not as long as width of distal end of hand. Pereiopods of usual form without spinning glands ; epimera rather high, third epimeron rectangular; fourth greatly elongated at in- ferior margin forming a posterior projection above which the an- terior margin of fifth epimeron fits ; fifth epimeron with inferior margin incised by deep split. Postero-inferior margin of third abdominal segment rounded, entire. Uropods, 3 pairs, biramous ; rami subequal, styliform and slender ; first pair projecting beyond second ; second projecting beyond ter- minal ; in first and second pairs rami and peduncle subequal ; ter- minal uropods short, with rami shorter than peduncle. Telson small, longer than broad, bearing apically a slight de- pression medially and a short toothlike spine on each side. There were only 2 females in the collection. The species has been recorded previously only from Naples. Amphilochus brunneus Delia Valle, 1893. 1893. Delia Valle, Fauna und Flora des Golfes von Neapel, vol. 20, p. 596; pi. 4, fig. 5 and pi. 29, fig. 1-15. Eyes circular, compound, made up of many ocelli closely packed together. Fig'. 2. Amphilochus hriinnetis Delia Valle. First antennae short, first and second joints of peduncle each about as broad as long and about ^/s as long as third which is about twice as long as wide; flagellum short and thick, composed of 8 or 9 segments, each of which is provided with a long and a short spine at distal margin. Second antennae slightly longer than first with moderately slender gland cone ; fourth and fifth joints of equal length, but fourth much thicker than fifth ; flagellum short and thick, about ^/s as long as peduncle, composed of 6 segments. The Ampliipoda of Bermuda. 1 1 Mandibles with slender 3-jointed palp, the third joint of which is longer than second, cutting edge expanded and divided into 7 teeth ; molar tubercle small, with no true triturating surface. First maxillae with inner plate small and Ijroad and bearing a single spine on apex ; outer plate narrow, moderately long, sides parallel to near distal end where plate tapers, inner margin of apex armed with about 12 broad, curved spines: palp 2-jointed, first joint as broad as long, second joint twice as long as broad, rounded at apex which is armed with a tooth and several spines. Second maxillae with inner plate narrow at base and inner edge olDlique and slightly convex ; outer plate narrow, somewhat longer than inner plate, bearing 3 or 4 spines on narrow apex and fine setules on inner margin. Maxillipeds with inner plate long and narrow, having lateral mar- gins parallel and with rounded apex provided with 2 toothlike spines, extending as far as apex of first joint of palp ; outer plate rather large, extending to middle of second joint of palp, oval in form, twice as long as wide, outer margin strongly convex, the distal portion of which bears many fine setae, inner margin distally serrate, proxi- mally bearing several submarginal spines, apex bearing large tooth and spine; palp 4-jointed, first joint longer than broad, with a few spines on outer distal corner and outer margin ; second joint rather narrower than first, slightly longer than broad, with a few spines on distal margin ; third joint about twice as long as wide and not more than half as wide as second joint, provided with spines on apex ; fourth joint clawlike, about ^/s as long as third joint. First gnathopods with oval epimeron, which is higher than long ; second joint long, more than 3 times as long as broad with a few setae on anterior margin and apex ; third joint not as long as broad armed with a few spines apically ; fovirth joint more slender than third, rounded apically, twice as long as broad, with fascicle of spines at apex ; wrist triangular, broader than long, articulating with anterior margin of fourth joint, posterior margin prolonged distall}' to form a triangular process which extends to the middle of the hand parallel to its posterior margin ; hand subtriangular, articulat- ing with wrist by apex, anterior margin slightly convex, palm also slightl}' convex and passing into posterior margin by obtuse angle, marked by 2 prehensile spines, finely serrate and armed with sub- marginal spines ; finger moderately strong, curved, slightly longer than palm, inner margin with fine teeth. Second gnathopods with epimeron 1^/2 times as high as long, ventral margin strongly convex ; second joint very long and slender, more than 4 times as long as broad ; third and fourth joints as in 12 B. IV. Kunkel, first gnathopods; wrist with posterior margin greatly elongated to form slender triangular process which extends as far as apex of posterior margin of hand, which is much larger than that of first gnathopods, more triangvilar in form with palm at right angles to axis of joint and ^/s as long as anterior margin, and finely serrate, and with prehensile angle provided with 2 stout spines ; finger long, curved, with fine teeth on inner margin. Uropods, 3, biramous ; terminal uropods extending beyond others, with outer ramus shorter than inner and somewhat shorter than peduncle which is slender. Telson slender, triangular, entire. The species was represented by several specimens about 3 mm. long from Flalts Village in sand from low water to 2 fathoms, and also from Castle Harbor in dead coral. Delia Valle recorded the species from the Gulf of Naples at 5 fathoms. Leucothoe spinicarpa (Abildgaard, J 789), Boeck, 1860. 1789. Gammarns spimcarpus. Abildgaard, in O. F. Miiller, Zool. Danica, vol. 3, p. 66; pi. 119, fig. 1-4. 1860. Leucothoe spinicarpa. Boeck, Bemaerk. norske Amphip. Forhandl. ved de Skand. Naturforsk., p. 654. Eyes compound, reniform, of medium size. First antennae scarcely ^/s as long as body, slightly longer than second ; peduncle about 2^/2 times as long as flagellum ; first joint moderately stout, cylindrical ; second of about same length but more slender; third joint hardly more than ^/4 as long as second and scarcely to be differentiated from first joint of flagellum which is short and composed of 8 or 9 segments ; accessory flagellum 1-jointed, rudimentary. Second antennae with short flagellum ; third joint of peduncle short, twice as broad as long ; fourth joint long and slender ; fifth joint about -/a as long as fourth ; flagellum about as long as last joint of peduncle and composed of about 7 segments. Mandibles without molar tubercle but with incisive plate well dentated and with numerous spines on spine row ; palp well devel- oped, first joint short, with small process on inner margin ; second joint long with spines on inner margin ; third joint somewhat longer than first and provided with a few spines on rounded apex. Lower lip with plates broad and rounded. First maxillae with inner plates small, triangular and with single spine on apex ; outer plates moderate with usual spines on oblique distal margin ; palp 2-jointed, somewhat longer than outer plate, armed apically with a few spines. Second maxillae The Amphipoda of Bermuda. 13 with outer plates curved, slender and longer than inner plates which are more or less tapering and provided with rather long spines on inner margin. Maxillipeds with inner plate rudimentary^ provided with 4 odontoid spines apically; outer plates likewise rudimentary, represented by small process bearing sharp spine ; palp 4-jointed, all of which are provided with slender spines on the inner and distal margins, first and second joints much wider distally than proximally Fig. 3. Leucothoe spinicarpa (Abildgaard). and subequal ; third joint somewhat club-shaped, about as long as preceding joint ; fourth joint in form of nail bearing single cilium on inner concave margin. First gnathopods with epimeron small, rhomboidal, having antero- ventral angle prolonged slightly ; second joint rather long and stout, and broadest at middle, with short spines on both anterior and posterior margins; third joint moderately long, ^twice as long as broad and broader distally than proximally ; fourth joint somewhat shorter than third and more slender; wrist large, oval, not much longer than broad but bearing by a prolongation of posterior margin a long slender, slightly curved spur which extends as far as distal U B. IV. Kunkel, end of hand and which forms a true chela with hand, anterior margin of spur provided with a few short ciha ; hand long and slender of nearly uniform width throughout, palm not marked off definitely from posterior margin ; finger slender and of usual form. Second gnathopods with oval epimeron longer than high ; second joint moderately long with anterior margin straight and provided with a few slender spines ; third joint about as broad as long ; fourth joint very short, somewhat cup-shaped with distal end broader than proximal ; wrist weak, bearing a long shell-hke process distally and posteriorly which is provided with many slender setae and into which the proximal portion of the hand fits ; hand oval, with posterior margin rather more convex than anterior, palm also convex, not dilTerentiated from posterior margin, bearing distally 3 or 4 tooth- like convexities, hand provided with fascicle of spines apically ; finger long and slender, curved and pointed. Epimera increasing in height to fourth ; third being shortest and terminating rather acutely ventrally ; pereiopods without spinning glands, ending in unguiform dactyls. Uropods, 3 pairs, biramous, first and third ]:)airs projecting be3'ond middle pair; rami subequal except in second pair where outer ramus is rather shorter than inner, more or less styliform ; peduncles of first and second equal respectively to rami in length ; peduncle of third pair rather longer than rami. Telson long and slender, triangular, tapering uniformly to acute apex, 3 times as long as broad, entire. Length 8 mm. Numerous specimens were present in the collection from Harring- ton Sound, from Flatts Village from low water to 2 fathoms, and from Castle Harbor W'here they were found in dead coral. The species is very widely distributed over the North Atlantic, being reported from the Arctic Ocean, Norway, the British Isles, the Azores, France, the Mediterranean. Sometimes it occurs in the l)ranchial sac of Ascidians. Stenothoe marina (Bate, 1857), Boeck, 1870. 1857. Moiitagua marina. Bate, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist., Ser. 2, vol. 19, p. 137. 1870. Stenothoe marina. Boeck, Forh. Videnskabs-Selsk. Chris- tiania, 1870, p. 139. Eyes large, compound, subtriangular. First antennae -/3 as long as body, peduncle short with first joint rather stout, tapering somewhat ; second joint slightly shorter than The Amphipoda of Bermuda. 15 first, cylindrical ; third joint short, hardl}' to be distinguished from first segment of flagellum, which is made up of about 20 segments which are longer than broad ; no accessory flagellum. Second an- tennae slightly shorter than first ; peduncle nearly as long as flagellum ; fourth joint somewhat longer than fifth. Mandibles rather broad, without palp and molar tubercle ; prin- cipal and secondary cutting edges denticulated ; numerous spines in spine row. First maxillae with inner plate small, triangular, furnished with single setule apically ; outer plate short, tapering slightly toward apex, with very minute setules on inner margin and 4 or 5 stout Fig. 4. Stenothoe marina (Bate). spines on apical margin ; palp stout, 2-jointed, with second joint rounded and provided with numerous teeth and spines apically, proximal joint only slightly shorter than second. Second maxillae with plates normally developed, but with inner plate having a single setule. Maxillipeds with inner plate reduced to a slight eminence and (Hiter plate entirely absent so that maxilliped appears to be made up of very small inner plate and a 5-jointed palp, of which all the joints are cylindrical except the terminal one which tapers to a slender point and bears fine cilia on the inner margin. In male, first gnathopods much smaller than second ; epimeron moderate in size ; second joint long and slender of uniform width throughout ; third joint cylindrical, slightly longer than broad ; fourth joint large, more or less cup-shaped with distal margin long and oblique and posterior margin, which bears a few spines, much longer 16 B. IV. Kunkel, than anterior; wrist triangular, about as broad as long, provided with spines on distal margin and posterior apex ; hand oval with distal portion more slender than basal portion and with palm long and oblique, very finely serrate and furnished with long slender spines and 4 prehensile spines , finger moderate with concave margin serrate. Second gnathopods with moderate epimeron which is higher than long with small tooth on postero-ventral angle ; second joint long and slender ; third joint cup-shaped and wider distally than proximally ; fourth joint much wider distally than proximall}' with posterior distal angle acute, articulating with wrist b}' anterior margin ; wrist triangular and broader than long, provided with a few spines on posterior apex ; hand oval, about twice as long as broad with palm long and oblique and bearing near middle a triangular process, also provided with spines and setae and 2 prehensile spines ; finger long and slender. Pereiopods with epimera large, that of fourth being largest; pereiopods slender, provided with unguiform dactyls and without spinning glands. Uropods, 3 pairs ; first extending beyond second which in turn extends beyond the third pair ; first and second biraraous, third with single ramus; rami styliform, subequal, and somewhat shorter than peduncle ; rami of terminal uropods stouter than others. Telson entire, triangular, longer than wide with lateral margins slightly convex and provided with 4 stout spines on each side. There was a single male specimen in the collection which measured about 3 mm. in length. The species has been recorded from the North Atlantic and North Sea and from the Adriatic at a depth of from 19 to 47 fathoms. Stenothoe valida Dana, 1853. 1853. Dana, U. S. Expl. Exped. vol. 13 II, p. 924, pi. 63, fig. 1. Eyes small, compound, reniform, situated between first and second antennae. First antennae moderately long and slender with fiagellum about twice as long as peduncle; first and second joints of peduncle cylindrical and subequal in length and each about as long as head, third joint less than ^j^ as long as second ; fiagellum made up of about 20 segments which are short proximally but become longer and more slender distally. Second antennae shorter than first in female (fiagel- lum broken off in single male specimen at hand) with gland cone small and inconspicuous, third joint cylindrical and slightly longer The Amphipoda of Bermnda. 17 than broad, fourth joint long and cyHndrical, fifth joint somewhat shorter than fourth; flagellum made up of about 17 segments, less than twice as long as peduncle. Mandibles without pal]) or molar tubercle, but with incisive plate moderate. First maxillae with ver}' small, triangular inner plate bearing single spine apically; outer plate rather broad and short, having 4 or 5 rather larger spine teeth on distal margin ; palp 2-jointed, first joint short, second joint rather large, about 3 times Y'm. 5. Stenothoe valida Dana. as long as first, rounded apically and provided with short setae on apex and inner margin. Maxillipeds with inner plates rudimentary and outer plates wanting; palps 4-jointed, rather long and slender, first joint rather short, slightly longer than broad, second joint longer than first, cylindrical, third joint clawlike and slender, as long as third. In male, first gnathopods rather small, with very small epimeron having a few setae on ventral margin, second joint long and slender ; fourth joint oblong with free anterior margin ver}- short and posterior Trans. Conn. Ac-id., Vol. XVI. 2 May, 1910. 18 B. fV. Kiinkel, margin forming an oval lobe which is provided with cilia posteriorly and spines distally, wrist triangular, shorter than fourth joint, with a few long spines on distal apical angle ; hand subrectangular rather narrow, with anterior and posterior margins parallel and with mo- derate palm somewhat oblique, serrated and provided a with few spines, prehensile angle bearing a few stout spines ; finger of usual form and moderate size. Second gnathopods with epimeron higher than long and with ventral margin rounded ; second joint moderately long and slightly curved ; third joint cylindrical, about twice as long as broad ; fourth joint longer than broad, with posterior margin convex and provided with about 6 rounded processes and a few short setae, wrist ex- ceedingly small, triangular; hand large, suboval, anterior margin convex, straight posterior margin, which serves as palm, provided with 2 strong processes near articulation of finger, palm provided with many slender setae ; finger long and very slender and rather strongly curved, with 2 slight processes near proximal end of con- cave margin. First pereiopods with moderate epimeron which is subrectangular and rather higher than long with ventral margin very finely serrate ; fourth joint rather broad with posterior margin straight and anterior margin convex and projecting distally to form rather strong triangular process ; fifth joint about as long as fourth, and more slender ; sixth joint rather longer than preceding with straight posterior margin provided with rather stout spines ; finger clawlike. Second pereio- pods with very large triangular epimeron, greatly expanded ventrally and with ventral margin gently rounded. Third pereiopods with second and fourth joints expanded ; third, fourth, and fifth pereiopods with very small epimera; all pereiopods closely resembling each other in distal segments. Uropods, 3 pairs ; first and second pairs biramous with rami styli- form ; third pair projecting slightly beyond the other two, with single 2-jointed ramus, not as long as peduncle, the distal one of which bears a blunt projection apically and is longer than the proximal. Telson triangular, rather prominent, entire, with 3 lateral spines on each side. Length 5 mm. The species was represented by a male and a female specimen. The female is much smaller than the male and differs from it principally in that the hand of the second gnathopod is broader and the palm is shorter and devoid of the 2 toothlike processes near the finger. The Ampliipoda of Bermuda. 19 The species has also been reported from Rio Janeiro and pos- sibly from the Mediterranean. Pariphinotus gen. nov. Body depressed and ridged dorsally. First and second antennae short ; iirst without accessory flagellum ; flagella of both short. Mandibles without molar tubercle or palp, principal cutting edge denticulated. Lower lip without inner plates. First maxillae with obsolete palp and without inner plates. Second maxillae with inner and outer plates coalesced except at apex. Maxillipeds with short, truncated inner plates not reaching as far as second joint of palp, apical margin with 3 sj^ine teeth ; outer plates broad and rounded, unarmed, extending nearly to distal end of second joint of palp which is moderate in size and made up of 4 joints, the terminal one of which is unguiform. Gnathopods simple ; epimera low. Third pleopods with 2 rami and with peduncle expanded to form arm-like process tipped with 3 coupling hooks. Uropods, 2 pairs, biramous. Telson semicircular, entire, thick. The genus is closely related to Iphinotus (Stebbing) but has only 2 pairs of uropods which are both moderately stout whereas in Iphinotus the first is slender and the second stout. Pariphinotus tuckeri sp. nov. Head provided with broad, square rostrum with rounded corners and with prominent lateral lobes which bear the large, prominent, compound eyes. Antennae short; first being slightly longer than second, with flagellum very short ; first antennae with first joint of peduncle much Ijroader distally than proximally and about as broad as long ; second joint about '^\^ as long as first and about ^2 as wide, with outer margin produced slightly distally ; third joint about ^/s as long as second, cylindrical in form ; flagellum short, about as long as second joint of peduncle, made up of 2 joints of which the terminal one is very short and the proximal one longer than last joint of peduncle, provided with setae distally. Second antennae with flagellum like that of first ; third joint of peduncle cylindrical, about as broad as long ; fourth joint twice as long as broad ; fifth about same length as fourth but narrower. Mandibles oblong with dentated cutting edges, 3 anterior teeth large, posterior ones small ; molar tubercle and palp absent, spine 20 B. JV. KnuM, row witli single spine. Lower lip without inner lobes but with ver}' broad outer ones. First maxillae without palp or inner plate ; outer plate armed on distal oblique margin with the usual forked, toothlike spines. Second maxillae with outer and inner plates coa- lesced except distall}' where a cleft separates the two ; apical margin with a few short setae. Maxillipeds with plates well developed and 4-jointed palp ; inner ]:)lates narrow, subrectangular, reaching scarcel}' as far as apex of first joint of palp, truncated, armed apically with 3 short spine teeth ; outer plates broad, reaching as far as middle of second joint of palp, inner margin straight, outer margin strongly Fig. 6. Fariphhiotxs ti'ckeri sp. nov. convex, armed only with single seta on inner apex ; palps with first joint twice as long as wide, second joint slightly longer than first with setae on inner margin, third joint cylindrical, as long as second, with a few setae on inner margin toward distal end, terminal joint slender, unguiform. In male, first gnathopods with large epimeron, produced slightly anteriorly ; second joint moderatel}'^ stout ; third slightl}^ longer than broad ; fourth slender, somewhat cup-shaped with posterior convex margin provided with several setae ; wrist triangular, about as broad as long with short posterior margin bearing a fascicle of setae ; hand simple, as long as fourth and fifth joints together, tapering slightly, distal posterior angle provided with stout spine and several setae ; finger stout and curved. The Amphipoda of Bermuda. 21 Second gnathopods with subrectangular epimeron higher than long, having rounded angles ; second joint short and stout becoming uniformly broader distally ; third joint slender, twice as long as broad ; fourth joint narrower and shorter than third with posterior margin convex and longer than anterior ; wrist, hand and finger as in first gnathopod. Epimera diminishing in height posteriorly, that of first pereiopod being slighth' lower than that of second gnathopod ; fourth joints rather broad, due to formation of lobe on anterior margin in an- terior group of appendages and on posterior margin in posterior group ; third, fourth, and fifth pereiopods with second and fourth joints broad ; sixth joints of all pereiopods provided with stout spine at apex. Second and third pleopods with both rami well developed and with peduncle bearing a stout prolongation medially which is pro- vided with 3 coupling hooks at apex. Uropods, 2 pairs, biramous; peduncle of both pairs cylindrical and extending to same distance posteriorly ; rami styliform with somewhat rounded apices, outer one much longer and broader than inner one ; outer margin of outer ramus of first with sparse setae, apex with single spine ; second uropods with rami slightly longer than those of first, both rami with outer margin very finely serrated and provided with apical spine. Telson semicircular, not extending as far as peduncles of uropods ; margin entire. Back provided with a rather conspicuous ridge ; abdomen rather small. No sexual dimorphism. Length 5 mm. The species was represented by a male and a female collected by Dr. W. G. VanName in 1901. Colomastix pusilla Grube, 1861. 1861. Grube, Ein Ausflug nach Triest und dem Quarnero, Berlin, 1861. Eyes small, round. First antennae short and stout, slightly longer than second ; ped- uncle, stout and nearly twice as long as head ; flagellum rudi- mentary, consisting of 3 ver\' short segments which are provided with rather long setae; first joint of peduncle slightly longer than either second or third, which are subequal in length, cylindrical 22 B. JV. Kiwkcl, and diminishing in thickness from first to third. Second antennae also with rudimentary flageUum ; third joint of peduncle rather stout and tapering very slightly ; fourth joint longer than third and more slender, slightly wider distally than proximally ; fifth joint C3lindrical and longer than fourth, with row of setae on lower margin. Epistome elongated in front, in form of slender cone. Upper lip large and strong with distal margin bilobed. Mandibles with elon- gated body, principal cutting edge divided into 5 long slender teeth which are serrated distally ; molar tubercle large, cyhndrical ; palp wanting. Lower lip apically broad, center prominent. First maxillae strikingly broad, inner plate wanting ; outer plater short with distal Fig. 7. Coloniastix pusilla Grube. margin provided with 3 odontoid spines ; palp 1 -jointed, curved to apex and terminating acutely so that inner margin of palp strikes against distal margin of outer plate, thus forming a true chela. Second maxillae formed of single plate, the distal margin of which is divided into 2 lobes, a small rounded one externally and a broader one medially, both of which are provided with setae. Maxillipeds very strongly developed ; inner plates fused on middle line to form slender triangular plate ; outer plates moderately broad but not very long, extending just beyond distal end of first joint of palp, inner margin smooth and unarmed ; palp 4-jointed, slender, with first two joints cylindrical and second joint slightly longer than first, third joint a little longer than preceding, rather fusiform with a few setae on inner margin, fourth joint clawlike and about as long as second joint. The Amphipoda of Bermuda. 23 In male, first gnathopods strongly atrophied, rudimentary ; epimeron triangular; second joint rather broader distally than proximally ; third joint rather longer than usual ; fourth, fifth, and sixth joints scarcely distinguishable, last joint forming very weak claw. Second gnathopods with strongl}^ developed hand ; epimeron more or less oval, not large ; second joint very slender at base but broaden- ing regularl}- to distal end where anterior margin is produced to form a rather large rounded lobe ; third joint small ; fourth much narrower than third with a distal triangular process ; wrist triangular, cuplike, not as long as broad, with short posterior margin provided with a number of setae ; hand suboval, about twice as long as broad, anterior margin convex, posterior margin about half as long as anterior, palm oblique and very irregular, bearing 3 deep rounded indentations and numerous setae of different lengths, anterior sub- margin and apex with several fascicles of setae ; finger rather stout and curved, of usual form. Pereiopods rather long and slender and subequal with epimera which are longer than high ; second joint long and slender ; third joint small ; succeeding joints elongated and subequal ; claws small. Pereiopods of posterior group with second joints slender in proximal half, strongly dilated in distal half; succeeding joints very similar to those of anterior pereiopods. Uropods, 3 pairs, biramous, all extending to about same distance posteriorly ; rami broad, styliform, slightly serrated on margins ; rami in all uropods subequal. Telson entire, suboval, rather longer than broad with apical margin very slightly indented. The species was represented by a single male specimen 4 mm. long. It has been reported from the Mediterranean and the British and French coasts. Panoploeopsis gen. nov. Posterior margins of posterior thoracic and anterior abdominal segments produced to form median dorsal teeth. Rostrum acute ; epimera 1—3 more or less acutel}^ tapering, fourth with posterior margin produced to form pointed process. Mandibles narrowl}' tapering to cutting edge, accessory plate narrow, no spine row, molar tubercle rudimentary, palp 3-jointed. Lower lip rather elongate, without inner plate and with anterior margins of outer plates entire. First maxillae with inner plate bearing setae on inner margin and apex, outer plate rather long and nar- 24 B. IV. Kunke/, row, palp 2-jointed, not reaching apex of outer plate. Maxillipeds with inner and outer plates long and narrow, outer fringed on distal part of outer margin, palp 3-jointed, first joint not as long as second and third together. First and second gnathopods very slender, hands simple. Pereio- pods 3—5 with second joint well expanded. Third uropods with narrowly lanceolate rami, not extending as far as others. Telson broadly incised at apex. The genus differs from Panoploea (G. M. Thomson) notably in the fact that the outer plates of the lower lip are not incised, in the shape of the second joint of the palp of the maxilliped and in the simple gnathopods. Panoploeopsis porta sp. nov. Eyes circular, compound, rather small, ocelli closely crowded together. Rostrum well developed, extending beyond first joint of peduncle of first antennae ; interantennal lobes prominent, triangular. First antennae shorter than second, with peduncle rather more than half as long as flagellum ; first joint cylindrical and longer than second which in turn is longer than third joint; flagellum slender, made up of about a dozen segments which are provided with nu- merous threadlike setules. Second antennae much stouter than first, second joint with long slender conical process on dorsal side extend- ing nearly as far as distal end of third joint which is slightly longer than broad ; fourth and fifth joints subequal, cylindrical ; flagellum about as long as last 2 joints of peduncle together. Upper lip very long and slender. Mandibles elongated and slender toward apex, cutting edge very long, divided into 6 very short teeth, the apical one being the longest ; secondary cutting plate very slender ; molar tubercle rudimentary ; palp 3-jointed, first joint slightly longer than broad and with rounded process apicalh', second joint long and slender, of uniform breadth throughout, third joint stouter and shorter than second, with a few short setae on inner margin and with outer margin slightly convex. Lower lip ver}- much elongated and very narrow, with no inner plates and with mandibular processes rather short and with inner margin of outer plate entire. First maxillae with very slender 2-jointed palp not extending as far as apex of outer plate which is rather narrow and triangular with distal margin very oblique, provided with the usual toothed spines; inner plate small, triangular, with setae on inner margin. Second maxillae very long and slender, outer plates longer The Amphipoda of Bermuda. 25 than inner and with outer and inner margins parallel; inner plate triangular. Maxillipeds with 3-jointed palp of which the first is slightly longer than the second and as long as the third which terminates subacutely ; outer plates moderately long with inner margin straight, outer margin convex and apex rather slender ; inner plates moderate, terminal margin transverse and armed with plumose spines. Fig. 8. Panoploeopsis pi>rta sp. nov. {Ep 4 is upmle down.) In female, first gnathopods with rather high epimeron, twice as high as long, triangular, with slight notch on anterior margin ; second joint moderately stout with long setae on anterior and on distal third of posterior margin; third joint slightly longer than broad; fourth joint about as long as third and slightly stouter; wrist slender, tapering toward distal end, about 3 times as long as broad ; hand more slender than wrist and longer, anterior and posterior margins nearly parallel, simple; finger short, curved, with concave margin divided into about 6 hooked teeth and with numerous setae. 26 B. IV. Kimkel, Second gnathopods with epimeron rather higher than that of first and more than twice as high as long, terminating acutely ven- trally : second joint moderately stout ; third joint about as broad as long; fourth joint about twice as long as broad with apex acutely pointed and with long slender setae on distal portion of posterior margin; wrist longer than hand and triangular with distal margin transverse and with anterior margin produced slightl}- distally ; hand simple, about as long as fourth joint, tapering slightly to distal end, provided with row of short setae on posterior margin ; finger short and stout with serrations and setae on concave margin. Epimeron of third pereiopod similar to that of second gnathopod ; that of fourth much higher and longer, terminating ventrall}- in acute angle and with posterior margin concave proximally to ac- commodate succeeding epimeron, and with acute process ventral to recess ; fifth epimeron longer than high with ventral margin bilobed ; seventh epimeron smaller than sixth, both suboval in form. Sixth and seventh thoracic segments and first 3 abdominal seg- ments more or less keeled and with posterior margin produced to a sharp process in mid-dorsal line. First and second abdominal seg- ments with lateral margins produced to form triangular lobes ; third abdominal segment with posterior margins of lateral portions pro- duced to form 2 stout, rather blunt projections. Uropods, 3 pairs, biramous, with rami styliform ; first pair extend- ing slightly be3^ond second and third pairs which extend to same distance ; peduncle of first pair longer than that of second and provided with row of sharp spines on dorsal margin, rami equal and as long as peduncle, each with terminal spine ; second pair similar to first but without spines on peduncle ; third pair with outer ramus shorter than inner, peduncle somewhat more than half as long as inner ramus. Telson about twice as long as broad, with apex divided into 2 triangular lobes whose apices are rather widely separated from each other. Length 7 mm. The species was represented by a single female collected b}- J. M. Jones. Eusiroides crassi Stebbing, 1888. 1888. Stebbing, Rep. Challenger, vol. 39, p. 977, pi. 90. Eyes moderately large, compound, reniform, pigmented. Antennae with calceoli on flagella ; first antennae moderatel}" slender, peduncle very short with first joint slightly longer than broad The Aniphipoda of Bermuda. 27 second joint slightly shorter and narrower, third joint shorter and narrower than second ; flagellum made up of about 15 segments, each of which is provided with setae on distal margin; accessory flagellum made up of 1 joint which is not as long as first joint of principal flagellum. Second antennae somewhat shorter than first; peduncle short, last 2 joints longest and subequal, about twice as long as wide ; flagellum scarcely as long as peduncle, composed of about 9 segments which are provided at distal ends with a few spines. Mandibles with 3-jointed palp and with principal cutting edge not denticulate ; secondary cutting edge divided into 4 slight, rounded teeth ; 3 spine teeth on spine row ; molar tubercle well developed ; third joint of palp longest, second joint rather broad. First maxillae with 2-jointed palp. Maxillipeds with plates normally developed ; Fig. 9, Eusiroides crassi Stebbiiig. inner plate rectangular, not as long as first joint of palp, inner margin with spine row with 4 or 5 spines ; molar tubercle prominent but not very robust. Lower lip with lobes widel}- separated ; inner plates very small ; mandibular processes short and rounded. First maxillae with elongated palp 2-jointed, second joint nearly twice as long as first with 4 or 5 spines on apex and 1 on outer margin at middle ; outer plate broad with 10 branched teeth on oblique distal end; inner plate small. Maxillipeds with 4-jointed palp of which the first joint is triangular, second joint articulating b}' inner margin and bearing 4 setae apically, second joint large, broader at distal end and with row of setae about distal margin and with inner margin denseh' covered with setae, third joint subrectangular, slightly 28 B. W. Kuukel, longer than broad and bearing 2 diagonal rows of setae on surface and with distal margin thickly set with long setae, not more than half as long as second joint, fourth joint unguiform, bearing 2 short setae on concave margin and nearly as long as third joint. In male, first gnathopods with epimeron moderate, ventral margin smooth, posterior margin provided with a spiniform tooth ventral to which are 2 submarginal spines ; second joint rather long and stout bearing a few long setae at distal end of anterior margin which is slightly concave ; third joint about half as long as wide with fascicle of setae on distal posterior angle ; fourth joint not as wide as third, about twice as long as wide, more or less rectan- gular with wrist articulating by anterior margin, the distal part of which bears 4 large spines, and posterior margin elongated to form a distal triangular lobe which bears 4 fascicles of setae ; wrist broader than long, with posterior margin strongly convex so that segment is broader than hand, posterior margin much shorter than anterior and bearing several fascicles of setae ; hand oval, smaller than that of second gnathopod, about twice as long as wide, with posterior margin continuous with palm and bearing about 9 fascicles of long flexible setae, palm oblique, and bearing 6 triangular processes which are accompanied by submarginal teeth and fascicles of setae, pos- terior margin very short ; finger long and stout, of usual form. Second gnathopods with epimeron higher than long with anterior and -posterior margins parallel and with ventral margin slightly convex and bearing a few short setae ; second joint longer than that of first gnathopod ; third, fourth, and fifth joints as in first gnathopod ; hand and finger more slender, but otherwise similar to first gnathopod. Pereiopods slender, provided with dactyls; last pereiopods as long as preceding ; epimera moderate, regularly convex ventrally. Postero-lateral margins of third abdominal segment not serrated. Uropods, 3 pairs, biramous ; first pair with long slender peduncle provided with 5 or 6 spines on inner margin and one on apex, rami also slender and styliform with inner one slightly longer than outer one, extending as far as extremities of terminal uropods, rami nearly as long as peduncle ; second uropods similar to first but with peduncle much shorter and with rami more tapering than in first, inner ramus rather stouter than outer and somewhat longer ; terminal uropods extending well beyond telson, with rami subequal, laminar, P/2 times as long as peduncle, both rami furnished with short setae and plumose spines on inner margin and 1 or 2 on outer margin. Telson laminar, triangular, slender, cleft -/a to base. In one of Tlie Ampliipoda of Bermuda. 29 the specimens at hand the right lobe was shorter than left and more rounded at apex. This may have been the result of injur}-. Each lobe with single spine near apex on outer margin. Length 8 mm. The species has been reported from the South Atlantic at a depth of about 500 fathoms. Pontogeneia verrilli sp. nov. Eyes compound, reniform, closely approximated dorsall}'. Antennae very elongate ; first slightl}' longer than second ; and about half as long as body, much more slender than second pair, Fig. 10. Pontogeneia verrilli sp. nov. peduncle rather short with joints increasing in length distally ; fla- gellum made up of many joints which are very short toward the base but become longer distally, provided with calceoli. Second antennae with peduncle slightly shorter than flagellum and with second and third joints very short, fourth and fifth joints subequal in length, at least three times as long as second and third together ; flagellum with joints very short. 30 B. W. KnnkeU Mandibles with 3-jointed palji of which the first is very short and broadens distally, second and third joints subequal but second much stouter, third joint tapering sHghtly and terminated by several slender spines ; cutting edges denticulated ; molar tubercle prominent ; several spines on spine row. Lower lip with outer plates large and widely separated, inner plates large and oval ; mandibular processes not large. First maxillae with inner plate oval and large, provided with single spine apically ; outer plate moderately slender with distal margin very oblique and armed in usual fashion ; palp long, 2-jointed, with second joint slender and tapering, with few spines on outer and inner margins and apex. Second maxillae with outer plate bearing single plumose spine apically and several simple ones on inner margin, rather slender and shorter than inner plate which is very broad and of oval form, with a few setae on inner margin. Maxillipeds with inner plates small and bearing 3 odontoid spines on transverse distal margin ; outer plates rather large with outer and inner margins parallel and with apical margin rounded, bearing long setae on inner margin; palp 4-jointed and provided with un- guiform spine apically ; third joint with many setae apically where it is broader than at base ; fourth joint with short setae on inner margin ; second joint provided with flat laminar process along entire inner margin which bears long slender setae. First gnathopods with subtriangular epimeron considerably higher than long; second joint moderately long and of uniform thickness, provided with group of spines at antero-distal angle : third joint short ; fourth joint subtriangular with setae along posterior margin ; wrist triangular, broader than long with setae on posterior margin ; hand moderate in size, longer than wrist, oval, palm long and slightly convex, passing into short posterior margin by even curve, provided with about 6 large conical teeth and long setae alternating with them, apex of hand with fascicle of setae ; finger long and slender. Second gnathopods very similar in shape and size to first; hand slightly more slender and palm provided with greater number of teeth. Epimera moderate ; pereiopods without spinning glands, with dactyls. Three anterior abdominal segments with postero-lateral margins serrate. Uropods, 3 pairs, biramous ; first and second with rami styliform and inner longer than outer and with both rami provided with spines, first extending slightl}' beyond second and third, peduncle of first rather longer than rami, that of second considerably shorter ; The Amphipoda of Bcmmda. 31 third pair with rami rather broader and lamellar, tapering to acute point, inner ramus larger than outer, provided with slender setae. Telson long and slender, twice as long as broad, cleft for ^/g of its length, each lobe provided apically with single spine, extending beyond peduncle of terminal uropod. Length 7 mm. This species was represented in the collection at hand by several specimens some of which were found in dead coral from Castle Harbor. Melita fresnelii (Audouin, 1876). 1876. Gaimnants fresnelii. Audouin, Descr. Egypte, vol. I, iv, p. 93, Crust, pi. 11, fig. 3. 1875. Melita fresnelii, Miers, Ann. Nat. Hist., ser. 4, vol. 16, p. 75. Eyes compound, circular, deeply pigmented in alcoholic specimens. First antennae almost as long as body, longer than second an- tennae ; peduncle more than half as long as flagellum, with first joint cylindrical, second joint longer and more slender than first ; third joint very short; flagellum slender and made up of about 40 elongated segments ; accessory flagellum made up of 5 segments. Second antennae extending to about middle of first antennae with peduncle somewhat longer than that of first; gland cone long and slender, reaching nearly as far as end of third joint which is longer than broad ; fourth joint very long and slender ; fifth subequal to fourth in length ; flagellum rather long, made up of more than 14 segments. Mandibles strong with all parts well developed ; principal cutting edge denticulated ; numerous spines on spine row ; molar tubercle large and prominent; palp made up of 3 joints of which the first joint is short, second one moderately long, but shorter than the third and with setae along outer margin, third joint very slender, provided with many long setae on inner margin and apex. Lower lip with outer plates broad, rounded, and with anterior margin entire, inner plates moderate, mandibular processes short. First maxillae with inner plates slender and tapering, moderate, with 2 plumose spines on apex ; outer plates large and curved with usual branched spines on oblique distal margin ; palp 2-jointed with second joint broader apicall}^ and armed with spinelike teeth, apex of first joint provided with fascicle of setae. Second maxillae with oval plates, moderately broad ; outer plates with slender setae on rounded apex ; inner plates with slender setae on apex and inner margin and with an oblique row on outer surface. Maxillipeds with inner 32 B. W. KmikeL plates rectangular, extending beyond first joint of palp and provided with plumose spines on inner and distal margins and also on distal margin with 3 odontoid spines, and submarginally at inner distal angle with 2 conical toothlike spines; outer plates moderate in size, not extending as far as second joint of palp, inner margin straight, outer margin convex, passing over to distal margin by even curve, inner margin provided with toothlike spines which increase in length toward the apex and gradually become long and slender spines on Fig. 11. Melita fresnelii Audouin. distal margin ; palp 4-jointed, first joint sHghtly longer than broad, second joint slender, broadest proximal to middle, 3 times as long as broad, provided with numerous fascicles of slender setae, third joint short and curved, larger at distal end than at proximal, fourth joint curved and tapering, with apical spine and a few large setae on inner margin. In male, first gnathopods with small, rhomboidal epimeron ; second joint long and slender, provided with long setae on anterior and posterior margins ; third joint slender, slightl}^ longer than broad ; fourth joint small, broader distally and rounded, with fine cilia on posterior margin and with setae apically ; wrist long, triangular, 2^ 1 2 times as long as broad with 5 or 6 fascicles of setae on pos- terior and distal margins ; hand subtriangular, somewhat longer than The Aniphipoda of Bermuda. 33 broad and broader distally than wrist, palm nearly transverse, provided with setae on posterior and distal portion of anterior margins and palm ; finger stout and curved. Second gnathopods with small rhomboidal epimeron which is higher than long ; second joint rather long, extending well beyond epimeron ; third joint short ; fourth joint rather long with posterior margin convex and distal margin much longer than proximal ; wrist rather short with posterior margin prolonged to form cuplike pro- cess in which the posterior margin of the hand fits proximally ; hand very large and strong, broader distally, posterior margin pro- longed apically to form strong fingerlike process which tends to make the hand chelate, palm transverse and bearing 3 strong rounded processes near articulation with finger which is strong and not greatl}' ciu^ved, except at apex where it closes past the fingerlike process of the hand, and which is broadest at middle. In female, first gnathopods with quadrilateral epimeron having posterior margin forming a small triangular process and with ventral margin provided with setae and cilia ; second joint long and slender with 5 fascicles of setae on posterior margin and numerous longer setae on distal ^/s of anterior margin ; third joint slightly longer than broad ; fourth somewhat longer than third with anterior margin \:ery short and posterior margin long and provided near distal end w-ith many very fine cilia and several stoiit setae ; wrist longer than hand and as broad as hand, provided on posterior margin with numerous short setae which form a close set mass, and also with a few longer pectinate spines on posterior margin and nu- merous fascicles of setae near margin ; hand subrectangular, less than twice as long as broad with posterior margin provided with many setae of different lengths, some of which are finely pectinate, palm finely serrate and armed with short submarginal spines, an- terior margin with 4 fascicles of setae ; finger of usual form having 2 curved spines on outer convex margin and with several short slender ones on concave margin. Second gnathopods slightly stouter than first, with epimeron very similar to that of first but slightly higher; fourth segment with posterior margin prolonged to form a triangular process and provided with a few long setae ; wrist quite similar to that of first gnatho- pod but larger, posterior margin furnished with fascicles of slender setae among which are a few finely pectinate ones ; wrist as long- as hand which is subrectangular, palm oblique with rounded prom- inence near articulation with finger, finely serrate, furnished also with numerous submarginal setae and with 3 prehensile spines, Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. XVI. 3 May, 1910. 34 B. IV. Kimkel, anterior and posterior margins each with 6 fascicles of setae ; finger strongly serrate and provided with 2 fascicles of setae near middle of outer convex margin. Pereiopods with moderate epimera and with normal dactyls and no spinning glands. Abdominal segments with ventral margins of anterior 3 prolonged posteriorly, first 2 to form simple triangular processes, third with ventral margin very much longer to form a slender process posteriorly; dorsal portion of posterior margins of abdominal segments deeply serrated to form 5 to 7 acutely pointed teeth. Uropods, 3 pairs, biramous ; first pair extending slightly beyond second, rami styliform, inner one longer than outer, peduncle slender, cylindrical, about as long as inner ramus, rami provided with spines on inner margin and apex ; second pair similar in form to first but shorter ; terminal uropods extending considerably beyond others, inner ramus rudimentary, outer ramus long and slender, more or less flat, about twice as long as peduncle, provided with fascicles of setae on outer and inner margins and apically. Telson triangular, slender, lamellar, cleft -'/i to base with lobes rather dehiscent, provided with several sharp spines on outer margin and at apex, somewhat longer than broad. Length 6 mm. Numerous specimens were at hand which were found at Flatts Village, in sand from low water to 12 feet; in Castle Harbor, among dead corals ; and in Harrington Sound. The species has been found on the coast of Brazil, Rio Janeiro, at Singapore at a depth of 9 feet, and according to Haswell it is very common at Port Jackson, New South Wales. Melita planaterga sp. nov. Eyes round, small, compound, deeply pigmented, situated well ventrally between first and second antennae. First antennae long and slender, about -^/j as long as body ; ped- uncle as long as flagellum ; first joint of peduncle stout, more or less fusiform, second joint cylindrical and somewhat longer and more slender than first; third joint short, not more than ^3 as long as second; principal flagellum made up of about 18 slender segments; accessory flagellum short, 2-jointed. Second antennae somewhat shorter than first, but peduncle longer than that of first, wich fla- gellum made up of al^out 7 segments and about as long as last 2 joints of peduncle, third joint of peduncle about as long as broad, fourth and fifth .sub-(|u:il in length, gland cone rather long and slender. The Auiphipoda of Bermuda. 35 Upper lip with small median emargination. Mandibles with dentate cutting edges, prominent molar tubercle and slender 3-jointed palp, the second joint of which is the longest and the terminal joint of which tapers slightly and is a little shorter than second. Lower lip with inner plates distinct. First maxillae with numerous setae on inner plate and with outer plate armed in the usual way ; palp 2-iointed with terminal joint broadened and rounded distally and armed with toothlike projections and setae. Maxillipeds with plates well developed and with 4-jointed palp ; inner plates subrectangular, Fig. 12. Melita pla?iaterga sp. nov. long, extending nearly to middle of second joint of palp, distal margin transverse and provided with numerous setae ; outer plates large, with outer and distal margins convex, inner margin straight and provided with spine teeth which become long and slender apically ; second joint of palp 3 times as long as wide, cylindrical, third joint about ■% as long as second, broader distally than proximally and bearing a rounded triangular process at middle of inner margin, rounded apex ciliated, fourth joint long and slender, unguiform. In female, first gnathopods with oval epimeron, higher than long with ventral margin somewhat convex and provided with fine setae ; second joint very long and slender with setae on both anterior and posterior margins; fourth joint short, posterior margin strongly convex 3(5 B. ir. KnukcL and provided with tine cilia and a few long setae ; wrist triangular, twice as long as wide and longer than hand, anterior margin and distal portion of posterior margin parallel and with a few setae ; hand subchelate, subrectangular, with palm transverse, about twice as long as broad ; finger short and strongly curved. Second gnatho- pods with epimeron rather higher than first ; second joint long and slender with numerous long setae on posterior margin and smaller number on anterior ; fourth joint longer than third with postero- distal angle slightly produced ; wrist triangular, nearly as broad as long, with dense setae on posterior margin and very long ones on anterior; hand oval. In male, first gnathopods like female exce])t that the wrist is much longer and the hand is broader at distal than at proximal end because of rounded lobelike process on posterior margin ; palm very con- vex, bearing a rather marked rounded incision near hinge ; finger short, thick, and somewhat curved. Second gnathopods with rounded epimeron which is higher than long ; second joint moder- atel}^ stout and with a few long setae on posterior margin ; fourth joint about twice as long as bi'oad with posterior margin somewhat produced to acute point ; wrist triangular with posterior margin somewhat rounded and produced distally and provided with a series of transverse rows of setae ; anterior submargin also with rows of setae ; hand oval, nearly twice as long as broad with anterior and jDOsterior margins of nearly equal con vexity and provided with numerous fascicles of setae, palm provided with many long slender setae, rather convex and passing into posterior margin by even curve ; finger rather long and stout and not greatly curved, capable of closing past palm. Epimera of moderate size, fourth one largest, emarginate pos- teriorly ; pereiopods slender and increasing in length posteriori}', the last 2 being subequal ; second joints of third to fifth pereio]->ods well expanded with posterior margins finely serrate. Abdominal segments with posterior margin smooth, third segment with postero- lat3ral margins entire. Uropods 3 pairs, biramous ; hrst and second pairs with lanceolate rami provided with a few stout setae on outer margin and fascicle of setae at apex ; third uropods with inner ramus small, outer ramus greatly elongated and rather foliaceous, with margins slightly convex and apex blunt, provided with stout setae on both margins and apex. Telson as broad as long, cleft to Ijase, each lobe l^earing triangu- lar process distally and several setae, Leniith 9 mm. The Auiphipoda of Bermuda. 37 The preserved specimens were marked with irregular chocolate brown bands on posterior margin of body segments, the bands on the tirst 3 abdominal segments being especially 1)road ; the telson, ]:)eduncles of uropods, and of antennae were marked with very minute brown spots and the proximal joints of pereiopods bore irregular longitudinal brownish lines. The specimens were collectf^d in a brackish pond near Flatts \'illage. Ceradocus orchestiipes A. Costa, 1853. 1853. A. Costa, Rendic. della Soc. Reale Borbon., Ace. delle Sci., NapoH, n. sen, vol. 2, p. 177. Eyes compound, large, round. First antennae about •''/4 as long as body ; peduncle rather long but shorter than flagellum, tirst joint moderately stout, cylindrical, second joint slightly longer than hrst, third joint rather short and slender; flagellum made up of 22 or more segments, the first of which is scarcely to be distinguished from terminal joint of ])ed- uncle ; secondary flagellum made up of 5 segments. Second an- tennae shorter than first, flagellum rather short ; gland cone rather long and slender, extending beyond distal end of third segment which is about twice as long as broad, fourth segment slightly longer than fifth, rather long and slender ; flagellum made up of about 9 joints, al^out equal in length to last joint of peduncle. Mandibles with all parts well developed ; palp 3-jointed, first joint moderately long, broader 'at apex and bearing sharp spinelike pro- cess at inner distal corner, second joint longest, tapering slightly toward distal end and bearing 4 long setae on inner margin ; third joint about ^/2 as long as second with slender rounded apex which bears several long setae and is also provided with 2 setae on inner margin and 1 on outer ; principal cutting edge divided into 2 rounded teeth ; secondary cutting edge broad, made up of 4 equal teeth ; 7 plumose spines on spine row ; molar tubercle moderate. First maxillae with 2-jointed palp, second joint longer than proximal joint and broader at apex which is provided with numerous spines ; outer plate large, with 6 or 7 branched and pectinate spines on oblique distal margin ; inner plate broad, triangular, with inner margin provid- ed with row of long plumose spines. Second maxillae of usual form, plates oval, subequal ; outer plate with apex provided with setae ; inner plate with setae on inner margin as well as apex. Maxillipeds with plates well developed ; inner plate with apex truncate and outer and inner angles prolonged to form toothlike processes, apical 38 B. IV. KunkcL margin with man\' plumose spines; outer plate extending almost as far as second joint of palp with inner margin provided with toothlike spines which become longer toward rounded apex; palp with first joint slightly longer than broad, second joint very long and moderately slender having slender setae on inner margin, third joint short, with distal end larger than proximal ; fourth joint with slender terminal spine as long as joint itself. \\\ male, first gnathopods with epimeron triangular, small : second joint moderately stout with short setae on anterior margin and sev- eral very long ones on posterior margin; third joint short with group of moderately long setae near distal end of posterior margin ; Fig. 13. Ceradocus orchestiipes A. Costa, fourth joint more or less rectangular with 4 fascicles of setae on posterior margin and group of setae on distal margin, both anterior and posterior margins produced distally to form small triangular processes ; wrist very large, triangular, longer and broader than hand, posterior margin very convex and provided with many long setae which also are present on distal margin, anterior margin with 4 quite long setae; hand more or less oval with palm oblique and about as long as posterior margin which bears many setae, palm provided with numerous setae ; finger of usual form moderately stout. Second gnathopods with rectangular epimeron slightly higher than long; second joint short and stout with 2 long setae near proximal end of posterior margin and 1 at distal end and 1 near distal end The Amphipoda of Bermuda. 39 of anterior margin ; third joint short ; fourth about twice as long as broad, subrectangular ; wrist small, triangular, broader than long with many long setae on convex posterior margin ; hand very large, subrectangular, twice as long as broad, with palm oblique and hav- ing moderately deep notch near middle, prehensile angle with stout spine, palm provided with numerous submarginal setae, posterior margin with 6 fascicles of setae and apex with 5 or G long setae ; finger curved, stout and of usual form. Pereiopods with epimera of moderate size, of usual form and provided with dactyls but no spinning glands. Uropods .3 pairs, biramous ; first extending slightly be3'ond second, rami cylindrical, inner one slightly longer than outer, peduncle ^/s longer than rami, provided with sharp spines on inner margin ; second uropods of essentially same form as first but with peduncle much shorter so that rami are slightly longer than peduncle ; terminal uropods reaching much beyond the others, rami very long, equal, laminar, finger with spinules, apices narrowly truncate. Telson flat, slightly longer than broad, with lobes widely separated, cleft ^/a to base ; each lobe terminating in long acute process and bearing 2 long stout spines side by side on inner margin near apex. Length 6 mm. The species was represented by a number of specimens some of which were found in sand at Flatts Village from low water to 2 fathoms. The species has been reported previously only from the Medi- terranean. Ceradocus parkeri sp. nov. Eyes, small round, compound. First antennae long and slender, about 1/3 as long as bodj-, with rather long ]ieduncle, about 1^2 times as long as flagellum which is made up of about 20 segments which are provided with long setae; accessory flagellum half as long as principal flagellum, made up of 6 or 7 segments ; peduncle with first 2 segments cylindrical and equal in length, third joint less than 1/5 as long as second and narrower. Second antennae about ■'/s as long as first, with short flagellum made up of about 8 short segments, slightly shorter than last joint of peduncle, which in turn is about '^/a shorter than the fourth and is provided with setae on the lower margin, fourth joint cylindrical, with setae on lower margin, third joint about 3 times as long as broad, gland cone small and applied closely along lower margin of third joint. 40 B. W. KunkeL Mandibles with principal and secondary cutting edges dentated and with numerous spines on spine row, molar tubercle robust ; palp 3-jointed, with first joint rather short, second joint long and slender with row of long stiff setae on inner margin, third joint shorter and more slender than second with several very long setae on inner margin toward apex which is rather acute. Lower lip with inner plates broad and rounded, outer plates broad with entire margins, mandibular processes short and stout. First maxillae with 2-jointed palp, inner plate triangular with many setae on iimer margin. Second maxillae with plates having apices rounded, outer plate larger than inner, both provided with setae on distal end. Maxillipeds with 4- jointed palp, the first joint of which is about as long as broad, the second is long and slender, cylindrical with setae on inner margin, Fig. 14. Ceradocus fcirkeri sp. nov. the third is less than 1/2 as long as the second with the distal end rather broader than proximal and provided with setae on rounded apex, and the fourth joint is conical with a stovit spine apicall}' ; outer plate rather well developed, extending nearly as far as apex of second joint of palp with outer margin rounded and inner margin provided with broad toothlike spines which become longer toward apex ; inner plate moderate, rectangular, with distal margin trans- verse and provided with a few plumose spines and bearing trian- gular process on outer distal angle. In male, first gnathopods with moderate epimeron, having antero- ventral angle prolonged slightly and provided with several spinules ; second joint rather long, slightly broader distally than proximally and with a few setae on posterior margin ; third joint short ; fourth joint rather longer than broad, subrectangular, with rounded apex The Ampliipoda of Bermuda. 41 bearing- fascicle of setae ; wrist rather large and subtriangular, twice as long as wide, with many fascicles of setae on posterior margin and on lateral surface, and stout spines on apex ; hand shorter than wrist but about as wide, subrectangular with distal end wider than proxi- mal and with palm slightly oblique, finely serrate and provided with short setae, posterior margin provided with 4 or 5 fascicles of long stout setae, prehensile spine present, anterior margin slightly convex and provided with 4 or 5 fascicles of setae ; finger moderately stout and curved with few fine setules on concave margin. Second gnathopods wdth subrectangular epimeron about as broad as long, with ventral margin provided with a few setae ; second joint very stout with 2 long spines on j^roximal third of posterior margin and numerous fine setae on anterior margin and 2 short stout setae on anterior distal apex ; third joint broader than long ; fourth, sub- rectangular, twice as long as broad with single seta on postero-distal apex ; wrist triangular, about as broad as long ; hand stout, subrect- angular, slightly broader distally than proximally, palm slightly oblique, provided with setae, prehensile angle produced to form curved toothlike process and provided with prehensile spine, posterior margin with about 8 fascicles of setae, anterior submargin with about 4 fascicles ; finger of usual form, stout. Epimera of moderate size ; pereiopods of moderate size and pro- vided with clawlike fingers. First 3 abdominal segments with posterior and lateral margins entire and rounded. Uropods, 3 pairs, biramous ; rami of first 2 pairs styliform and subequal, with large .spines apically ; third uropods with rami much longer than peduncle and somewhat flattened, outer ramus longer than inner, with rather long spines on outer margin and apex, inner ramus with long spines apicall}'. Telson subrectangular, about as broad as long, divided to base, each lobe with several long stout spines on inner apex. Length, 6 mm. The species is represented by a single male specimen. Ceradocus colei sp. nov. First antennae slender, longer than second, about half as long as body ; peduncle about -/s as long as flagellum which is made up of nearly 20 segments ; first joint of peduncle swelling somewhat in thickness at middle, about 3 times as long as broad, provided with a few setae, second joint longer and more slender than first and provided with setae, third joint small, scarcely to be distinguished 42 B. W. Kunkel, from proximal joints of principal flagellum ; accessory flagellum short, 2-jointed. Second antennae with flagellum about as long as last 2 joints of peduncle, made up of 8 or 9 elongated segments ; gland cone rather stout and prominent, third joint slightly longer than broad, fourth joint cylindrical and about as long as first joint of peduncle of first antennae, fifth joint longer and more slender than fourth, both fourth and fifth joints with slender setae. Mandibles as in C. parkeri. First maxillae with 2-jointed palp, of which the first is short and the second more or less clubshaped with short spines on rounded apex ; outer plate slightly tapering in form, with usual spine teeth on distal margin ; inner plate some- what rounded with numerous setae on inner margin. Maxillipeds Fig. 15. Ceradocus colei sp. nov. with 4-jointed palp and outer and inner plates well developed ; first joint of palp short, cylindrical, second joint cyhndrical and about 2^2 times as long as broad, third joint slightly thicker distally than proximalty, about twice as long as wide and of about the same thickness at widest part as second, provided with spines and cilia at apex, fourth joint clawlike, curved, with short setae on inner margin ; outer plate extending as far as apex of second joint of palp with inner margin straight and provided with abundant setae, outer margin and apex convex ; inner plates extending scarcely to middle of second joint of palp, apex truncated and provided with short setae which become more slender and extend along distal half of inner margin. In female, first gnathopods with moderate rhomboidal epimeron The Amphipoda of Bermuda. 43 having anterior ventral angle somewhat produced anteriorly ; second joint rather long and slender with margins parallel and with anterior margin having several long setae near proximal end and group of shorter ones at distal end, posterior margin with group of setae at distal end ; third joint small, with few setae on posterior margin near distal end ; fourth joint broader distally than proximally, with posterior margin especially strongly convex toward distal end and provided with a fascicle of rather long setae apically and ciliated for '^\x of its length ; wrist Vs longer than hand, somewhat over Vs as broad as long, of uniform wadth throughout except at proximal end where articulation with fourth joint is oblique, anterior margin with fascicle of pectinate spines at anterior apex, posterior margin with 6 or 7 fascicles of setae, some of which are pectinate, surface of wrist with several groups of setae ; hand subrectangular, slightl}^ narrower at proximal end than at distal end and narrower than wrist, anterior margin slightly convex and provided with several fascicles of setae, posterior margin with several groups of setae, palm transverse, slightly convex with submarginal setae toward posterior margin ; finger of usual form, extending as far as prehensile angle of hand. Second gnathopods with epimeron twice as high as long with ventral margin evenly rounded ; second joint moderate with long setae on posterior margin and a few near distal end of anterior ; fourth joint with posterior margin elongated to form triangular pro- jection; wrist triangular, about 1^3 times as long as broad, with an- terior and posterior margins provided with numerous fascicles of setae ; hand suboval, somewhat longer than wrist and of same width, anterior margin twice as long as posterior, with numerous fascicles of setae, posterior margin with long setae, passing into oblique convex palm liy even curve, prehensile angle with several stout setae, palm provided with setae of various lengths ; finger moderatel}' long and curved with setae on middle of convex margin. Pereiopods and epimera as in C. parkeri. Third abdominal seg- ment with postero-lateral angle prolonged somewhat posteriorly, posterior margin entire. Uropods, 3 pairs, biramous ; rami of first and second styliform, those of first pair extending beyond second ; third pair long and rather flattened. Telson subrectangular, about as long as broad, divided to base, each lobe somewhat acutely pointed and provided with group of several setae of different lengths. Length 5 mm. There was a single female specimen in the collection. 44 B. IV. Knukcl, Maera inaequipes (A. Costa, 185 Ij, Stebbing, 1906. 1851. Amphithoe inaeguipes, A. Costa, Cat. Crost. Ital., p. 45. 1906. Maera inaequipes, Stebbing, Das Tierreich, Lief. 21, p. 435. Eyes small, rounded, compound, deeply pigmented in alcoholic specimens. Interantennal lobes rather prominent and rounded. First antennae about ^,'2 as long as body, slender, peduncle longer than flagellum, second joint rather longer than first which tapers slightly; third joint very short; flagellum made up of about 18 seg- ments gradually increasing in length distally; accessory flagellum long, made up of 7 segments, more than half as long as principal flagellum. Second antennae extending to about middle of flagellum Fig. 16. Maera inaequipes (A. Costa). of first ; peduncle about as long as that of first antennae ; gland cone rather long and acutely pointed, extending to middle of next segment; third joint more than ^2 as long as fourth which is the longest and is very slender ; fifth joint about •^/4 as long as fourth ; flagellum about as long as fourth joint of peduncle, consisting of about 10 segments. Mandibles triangular, with all parts well developed ; palp 3-jointed, third joint longest, tapering somewhat in form ; second joint slightly shorter than third, about 3 times as long as broad, cylindrical ; first joint longer than broad ; principal and secondary cutting edges both denticulated, secondary plate rather broad ; molar tubercle very large, 5 or 6 spines in spine row. Lower lip broad, having anterior margin of outer ])lates incised ; inner plates large ; mandibular The Auipliipoda of Bermuda. 45 processes elongate. First maxillae with 2-jointed palp having proximal joint broader apically, distal joint about 3 times as long as broad, rounded apically and bearing a number of setae at apex ; outer plate not reaching to middle of second joint of palp, with truncated apical margin which bears about 8 branched and furcate spines ; inner plate small, triangular, bearing about 4 plumose spines apically. Second maxillae with oval plates having apices rounded ; outer plate slightly longer and broader than inner one. Maxilli])eds with 4-jointed palp and well developed plates ; second joint of palp rather, long about 3 times as long as broad, third joint about twice as broad as long with rounded apex, fourth joint conical, armed with terminal claw nearly as long as segment itself; outer plate oval, extendmg about -/a to distal end of second joint, provided with odontoid spines along inner margin which become longer toward apex and on the broad distal margin ; inner plate rectangular having plumose spines on distal margin which bears a small triangular process at outer corner and a single toothlike spine apically and externally. In female, first gnathopods with small epimeron produced to form acute angle anteriorly, ventral margin slightly notched and provided with fine setae ; second joint of moderate proportions with long setae on posterior margin ; third joint longer than broad, bearing group of setae on posterior margin ; fourth joint rectangular, bear- ing rounded process on postero-distal angle, distal end provided with row of short setae and a number of longer ones ; wrist very long, as long as hand, triangular, articulating with anterior margin of fourth joint, anterior margin indented slightly near distal end, posterior margin provided with 8 or 9 fascicles of setae and bear- ing, proximal to articulation of hand, a row of pinnate spines ; hand rather small, regularly oval, posterior margin more convex than anterior, palm oblique passing by even curve into posterior margin, with short submarginal setae and several fascicles of longer setae and 3 prehensile spines ; finger rather long and curved. Second gnathopods with small rhomboidal epimeron having setae on antero-ventral margin ; second joint of same form as that of first with long slender setae on anterior margin at proximal and distal ends; third joint short; fourth rectangular, as in first; wrist very small, triangular, with lobe on free posterior margin which is rounded and provided with numerous fine setae ; hand very large and oval, twice as long as broad and broader than wrist, palm variable in character but moderately long, often with 3 rounded processes near articulation with finger and provided with numerous submarginal setae of various lengths, and with posterior margin produced to 46 B. IV. Kiuikel, form triangular process behind \\hich the extremit}' of finger fits ; finger very long and strong. (Palm usually transverse and with rounded notch in the middle; in one specimen the hands on the 2 sides were quite different.) Gnathopods of male quite similar to those of female. Pereiopods of moderate length, those of posterior group being rather stout and fourth and fifth being subequal, all furnished with tricuspidate dactyls ; epimera of moderate size, subrectangular ; third to fifth pereiopods with second joints moderately expanded, posterior margin produced slightly distally. Uropods, 3 pairs, biramous ; first pair with moderately long ped- uncle, bearing stout spines on outer margin, inner ramus slightly longer than outer; second uropods shorter than first, extending posteriorly about as far as first pair ; third pair of flattened form, extending scarcely beyond others, peduncle short, rami with truncated apices, provided with fascicles of setae on outer margin and apex of outer ramus which is rather broader and longer than inner. Telson longer than broad divided nearly to base, lobes widely dehiscent ; each lobe terminating in triangular point bearing small toothlike process at base of outer margin, and accompanied by toothlike spine. Third abdominal segment with postero-lateral corners not serrate. Length 7 to 8 mm. The species was represented by numerous specimens which were rather variable. Specimens were collected at Flatts Village in sand from low water to 2 fathoms, in dead coral in Castle Harbor, in corallines from Bailey Bay, and in Harrington Sound. It has been previously recorded from the Mediterranean and the Azores. Maera rathbunae Pearse, 1908. 1908. A. S. Pearse, Proc. U. S. National Mus., vol. 34, p. 29. Eyes round, small, compound, deeply pigmented. First antennae longer than second, with peduncle longer than flagellum, first joint rather stout, slightly tapering in form, second joint very slender, longer than first; third joint short, hardly to be tlistinguished from first joint of principal flagellum, which is made up of about a dozen segments ; accessory flagellum as long as first 7 segments of principal flagellum, composed of many joints. Second antennae with rather short flagellum, about as long as fourth joint of peduncle, made up of 8 segments; gland cone prominent, ex- tending nearly to end of third joint of peduncle ; fourth joint slightly longer than fifth, and like the fifth provided with long setae. The Amphipoda of Bermuda. 47 Mandibles with all parts well developed, palp 3-jointed, the ter- minal joint of which is bluntly styliform, shorter than second and provided with long setae on inner margin. First maxillae with 2- jointed palp of uniform thickness throughout and with apex rounded and provided with short setae ; outer plate of usual form with forked and branching toothlike spines on oblique distal margin ; inner plate Pig. 17. Maura rathbunae Pearse. triangular, of moderate size, with 4 setae on apex. Second maxillae with subequal, oval plates having setae on distal margins. Maxillipeds with 4-jointed palp and well developed plates ; inner plate subrectan- gular, extending somewhat beyond lirst joint of palp with outer margin slightly convex and with distal margin armed with plumose .spines ; outer plate rather large, armed with setae on inner and distal margins, oval, extending nearly as far as second joint of palp which is the longest und cylindrical ; third joint about ^/a as long 48 B. W. Kunkel, as second and slightly long-er than first ; fourth joint clawlike, about as long as third. In male, tirst gnathopods with suboval epimeron and moderately slender second joint which bears several long setae on posterior margin ; third joint short ; fourth joint slightl}- longer than broad with numerous setae on rounded apical margin ; wrist rather large and triangular, more than twice as long as broad, with posterior margin well rounded and with distal margin provided with numerous setae, anterior margin produced to form a triangular process ; hand about as wide as w^ist but not so long, suboval in form, posterior margin more convex than anterior margin and passing into oblique palm by an even curve, palm slightly irregular in contour and provided with setae of various lengths ; finger moderately long and slender. Second gnathopods with small, subrectangular epimeron; second joint fairly short and third joint a little longer than broad; fourth smaller than third with anterior margin much longer than posterior ; hand very large, subtriangular in form with base of triangle form- ing palm, posterior margin produced to form a triangular process, palm very irregular in contour, more or less incised in posterior half and with rounded prominence near articulation with finger provided wath stout spine ; finger very large and strong, of curved form with concave margin bearing a slight eminence toward middle. Epimera low, suboval in form, third slightl}- bilobed ventrally, second epimeron highest. Uropods, 3 pairs, biramous ; first pair with peduncle longer than the styliform rami ; second pair rather stouter than first, rami pro- vided with numerous stout setae ; third pair with short peduncle and rather broad, subrectangular lamelliform rami of which the inner one is shorter than the outer one and provided only at apex with setae, outer ramus also wdth setae on outer margin, third uropods extending slightly beyond first and second. Telson rectangular, slightly broader than long, incised for -/s of its length with the lobes widely dehiscent, lobes truncate and distal angles provided with several setae. Length of single male specimen which was in the collection. 5 mm. The species has been reported by Pearse from the Gulf Stream, off Key West, Florida, in 98 fathoms. Station 7279, U. S. Bureau of Fisheries, steamer Fish Hawk; and 122 fathoms, Station 7296. The Amphipoda of Bermuda. 49 Maera tinkerensis sp. nov. Eyes rather large, circular, with ocelli very widely separated, hiterantennal lobes of head not prominent. Back sparsely setose. First antennae with long peduncle, somewhat longer than fiagellum, more than ^/2 as long as body ; first joint of peduncle tapering slightly, rather longer than head, bearing on proximal half of lower margin 3 setae equidistant from each other and on upper margin, numerous very fine setae, apically a single seta and fascicle of setae; second joint more slender than first and slightly longer, ]:)rovided with fascicles of setae on upper margin and short setae on lower; third joint less than ^/s as long as second; principal fiagellum composed of many segments, provided apically with short Fig. 18. Maera tinkerensis sp. nov. setae ; accessory fiagellum long, made up of 5 segments. Second antennae only slightly longer than peduncle of first, with gland cone long and slender ; third joint about 3 times as long as broad ; fourth and fifth joints slender, fourth being slightly longer than fifth ; fia- gellum scarcely longer than last joint of pedimcle, made up of about 6 segments. Mandibles with denticulated cutting edge and all parts moderately developed ; palp 3-jointed, with second joint longest ; third joint of tapering form and provided with long setae on inner margin. Lower lip of ordinary form, rather broad and furnished with strong mandib- ular processes. First maxillae with 2-jointed palp of uniform width and with square apex and furnished with 7 or 8 plumose spines, proximal joint of palp with numerous very fine setae on outer margin ; outer plate extending beyond middle of second joint of palp, some- Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. XVI. 4 May, 1910. 50 B. W. Kunkel, what tapering with apex truncate and provided with about 8 branched (antler-Hke) spines ; inner plate small, triangular, with 3 spines api- cally. Second maxillae of usual form with oval plates, outer plate broader distally, inner one broader proximally. Maxillipeds with 4-jointed palp, second joint long and slender, more than 4 times as long as broad, third joint as long as fourth including terminal spine ; outer plate rather narrow and slender, reaching nearly to end of second joint of palp, provided on inner margin with row of closely set toothlike spines which become longer toward distal end of plate where they become plumose ; inner plate rectangular, with plumose, spines on apical margin and distal portion of inner margin, which bears at distal end a submarginal toothlike spine and external to this a fascicle of simple setae. In male, first gnathopods with epimeron which is higher than long and which projects strongly anteriorly, with a short seta just behind anterior ventral corner; second joint moderately long with several setae near middle of posterior margin ; third joint slightly longer than broad with fascicle of setae near distal end of posterior margin ; fourth joint short with posterior margin very convex so that joint is ^/s as broad as long, posterior margin with numerous setae on distal portion ; wrist subrectangular, widening somewhat toward distal end, as broad as hand and slightly longer, posterior margin with 8 or 9 fascicles of slender setae which increase in length distally, surface of wrist provided with many fascicles of short simple setae and longer pectinate spines ; hand oval, with more or less convex palm passing by even curve into posterior margin, provided with 2 prehensile spines, posterior margin with 3 fascicles of setae, palm finely serrated and provided with numerous submarginal setae, surface of hand and anterior margin further furnished with fascicles of setae ; finger of usual form with single seta on outer margin near base and 5 or 6 blunt spines on inner margin. Second gnathopods with epimeron about as broad as long, with ventral margin slightly convex and furnished with 4 or 5 setae; second joint long, with posterior margin convex and furnished with 4- or 5 setae placed at equal distances from each other ; third joint somewhat longer than broad ; fourth joint twice as long as broad, broadening somewhat distall}', with posterior margin elongated to form a sharp projection having 2 setae at base ; wrist triangular, not as wide as hand, with posterior margin rounded to fit internal to projection on fourth joint, rounded portion covered with setae of various lengths, the longest being on the margin ; hand large. The Aniplilpoda of Bermuda. 51 oval, nearl}' twice as long as wide, with anterior margin having a number of fascicles of setae, palm oblique, more than ^/2 as long as hand, posterior margin furnished with 5 or 6 fascicles of setae, prolonged to form a notch behind which the end of the dactyl fits, notch provided with fascicle of long setae and with 2 spines bearing cilia-like appendages, palm serrated and provided with submarginal setae of various lengths; linger of usual form with 3 slender setae on convex margin and 9 submarginal filiform spines on internal margin. Pereiopods moderately slender, seventh slightly longer than sixth ; epimera of moderate size with ventral margin convex and furnished with a few setae. None of the segments dentate dorsally. Postero-inferior margin of third abdominal segment entire. Uropods, 3 pairs which are biramous, first extending as far as second and having rami subequal and longer than peduncle, the inner margin of which is furnished with 6 spines and apex with several rather long spines, rami with 4 spines on inner margin and group of longer ones at apex ; second uropods with peduncle shorter than that of first and also relatively much shorter than rami which are subequal and stouter than those of the first ; terminal uropods extending far beyond others, with peduncle short and provided with setae on distal margin, outer ramus somewhat longer than inner, of uniform width, furnished externally with 4 notches in which are fascicles of setae, inner margin with 4 short spines and fascicle of long spines apically, inner ramus of slightly tapering form with outer margin furnished with 3 spines and inner with 4 and apex with a fascicle of setae. Telson longer than broad, deepl}' cleft, each lobe being incised to form a triangular notch in apex and armed with one spine and fine seta. Length 4 mm. The species was represented in the collection by several males from Harrington sound. Elasmopus rapax A. Costa, 1858. 1853. A. Costa, Rendic. della Soc. Reale Borbon., Ace. delle Sci., Napoli, n. ser.. vol. 2, p. 175. Body moderately compressed and stout, back without carinae or spines but with sparse, very fine setules. Postero-lateral angle of first 2 abdominal segments about 90 ", third segment rather rounded 52 B. If\ Kuiikci and slightly acute ; ventral mariiu(hi. 67 First antennae terminating about on level with first third of fla- gellum of second antennae ; peduncle slightly less than ^j^ as long as flagellum, first joint longest and stoutest, third slightly shorter than second which in turn is about ^2 3-S long as first; flagellum composed of about 12 elongated segments. Second antennae not as long as body, with peduncle less than ^/a as long as flagellum ; third joint scarcely as broad as long, fourth and fifth joints subequal in length, fourth much thicker than fifth ; flagellum composed of about 16 elongated segments. Mandibles strong, oblong, principal and secondary cutting edges divided into 3 or 4 teeth of difterent sizes, molar tubercle very Fig. 25. Hyale jnero'-fu (^Miliie-Edwards). large and cylindrical with flat grinding surface, palp absent. Lower lip with no inner plates, outer plates stout, rather widely separated from each other, anterior margins rather short and densely ciliated, mandibular processes short but strong. First maxillae with 1-jointed palp which does not extend beyond apex of outer plate, provided with single apical seta ; outer plate large, having oblique apical margin with numerous stout, forked and pectinate spine teeth ; inner plate slender, triangular, with 2 plumose spines at apex. Second maxillae with inner plate rather shorter than outer and about as wide, both plates provided with setae apically. Maxillipeds with 4-jointed palp; inner plates rectangular extending nearly as far as apex of first joint of palp and provided on distal margin, which is transverse, with 3 triangular odontoid spines and numerous plumose spines which also occur on the straight inner margin ; outer plate 68 B. IV. Kunkel, extending slightly beyond apex of tirst joint of palp, outer margin convex and apical margin rounded and provided with numerous submarginal setae ; palps strong, first joint with outer margin about 3 times as long as inner, second joint nearly twice as long as first and ver}^ broad on account of presence of broad lobe on inner side which is produced distally and bears numerous long, stout setae at apex and distal part of inner margin ; third joint about as long as first, provided with broad, rounded lobe on inner side at distal end so that joint is much broader distally than proximally, outer apex also provided with small, rounded lobe, distal margin and lobes armed with many long, stout setae ; fourth joint about as long as third, clawlike, with concave margin provided with numerous setae. In female, first gnathopods somewhat smaller than second ; epim- eron rather deeper than long with anterior ventral angle rounded and not greatly produced ; second joint moderately stout, with an- terior margin slightly concave, posterior margin convex and prox- imal end much thinner than distal, anterior distal angle produced to 'form rounded lobe, posterior margin with 2 rather stout pectinate spines near middle ; third joint short, with posterior distal angle provided with long pectinate spine and several setae ; fourth joint subrectangular, more than twice as long as broad, provided with several pectinate spines on distal margin ; wrist ^/a as broad as long, articulating with fourth joint by entire anterior margin of fourth, posterior margin forming a semicircular lobe which is provided with closel}' set row of pectinate spines ; hand subrectangular, slightly broader at distal end than proximal, posterior margin provided with row of pectinate spines occupying middle third of margin which at this point is slightly convex, outer surface of hand provided with diagonal row *of stout, plumose spines, palm slightly oblique and convex, provided with several setae and 2 prehensile spines ; finger of usual form, short and stout and provided with several setae on con- cave margin. Second gnatho])ods similar to first but having epimeron subrect- angular with ventral margin rounded and palm of hand slightly more oblique than that of first ; whole appendage stouter in all respects than first. In male, first gnatho])ods with e])imeron having anterior ventral angle not greatly produced ; second joint stout, with anterior margin straight and posterior margin convex with several sharply pointed spines at nearl}- equal distances from each other; third joint about as long as wide ; fourth subrectangular with anterior margin forming articulation with wrist which is triancfular, much longfer than wide The Aniphipoda of Bermnda. 69 and with posterior margin produced to form prominent semicircular lobe which is provided with row of stout, pectinate spines ; hand suboval, slightly longer than wrist, posterior margin with single stout toothlike spine situated submarginally ; palm rather oblique and slightly convex, provided with a regular row of submarginal setae and a very large prehensile spine; finger of usual form, moderately stout. Second gnathopods with rounded epimeron, about as high as long ; second joint rather short with anterior margin prolonged distally to form triangular process ; third joint short ; fourth joint quadrilateral, posterior margin much longer than anterior, distal margin rather longer than proximal ; wrist articulating with anterior margin of fourth and having form of equilateral triangle ; hand oval, with base incised to form 2 equal lobes, the anterior one of which forms articu- lation with wrist, about twice as long as wide, palm rather longer than posterior margin which is separated from it by several pre- hensile spines and distinct prehensile angle, provided with double row of rather stout submarginal setae ; finger rather long and curved in usual way. Fourth epimeron much higher than fifth which is suboval. Fifth and sixth pereiopods with sixth joint having spine and setae on posterior margin. Uropods essentially . as in H. pontica ; telson semicircular, broader than long and divided by deep incision nearly to base. Length 7—9 mm. The species, which is apparently one of the commonest species in Bermuda, occurs very abundantly among the fronds of Ulva in the Mediterranean and is reported from the east coast of North America, Rio Janeiro, and Valparaizo, Peru. Some of the specimens were collected on Somerset Island by W. M. Rankin in 1898, there were some also collected from dead coral from Castle Harbor. Hyale pontica Rathke, 1837. 1837. Rathke, Mem. Acad. Imper. des Sci. de St. Petersbourg, vol. 3, p. 378, pi. 5, fig. 20-28. Eyes large, compound, subtriangular, ocelli small and arranged close together. First antennae about '/s as long as body, extending as far as middle of second antennae; peduncle short, more than '/s length of entire appendage ; first joint fairly stout, abovit twice as long as wide with a few setae around distal margin; second joint more 70 B. JV. Kimkel, slender and not so long as first ; third more slender than second and slightly shorter; flagellum with 13 segments. Second antennae with flagellum much longer than peduncle, fourth segment about ^/s shorter than fifth ; first, second, and third joints short and jjro- vided on distal ends with setae ; flagellum made up of about 20 segments j^rovided with setae on distal ends. Mandibles strong, palp wanting ; Ijotli cutting edges divided into 5 or 6 teeth ; 5 plumose spines on spine row ; molar tubercle large ; Fig. 26. Hyula punfict H. Katlike. bearing plumose flagellum. Lower lip with no inner plate ; outer plate broad, with anterior margin entire and mandibular processes rather small. First maxillae with inner plate slender, triangular and furnished with 2 plumose spines apically ; outer plate moderateh' large with 9 stout pectinate spines in a double row on distal margin which is transverse ; palp small and slender, one-jointed, furnished with setae at apex. Second maxillae with inner plate somewhat smaller than outer ; both oval in form : inner plate provided with pectinate spines on apex and distal half of inner margin ; outer plate witii The Amphipoda of Bermuda. 71 numerous setae on apex, and several small setae on inner margin. Maxillipeds with 4-jointed palp, the fourth joint of which is conical and provided with a fascicle of fine setae on apex ; third joint very broad, narrower at base than at apex, with many long setae near distal margin; second joint about as long as third, with rounded process on distal end of inner margin which is provided with setae ; first joint short, with outer margin much longer than inner; outer plate reaching nearly to distal end of second joint of palp, provided with setae on rounded apex and inner margin; inner plate long and narrow, with fine setae on outer and inner margins and several toothlike spines on apex. In male, first gnathopods smaller than second, with epimeron elongated anteriorly and having ventral margin only slightly convex and provided with many submarginal setae ; second joint projecting half its length beyond epimeron, constricted proximally, provided with 2 stout curved spines on posterior margin ; third joint as broad as long ; fourth joint about twice as long as wide, articulating with wrist by anterior margin ; wrist triangular, having rounded lobe on posterior side which is provided with many setae ; hand subrect- angular, not so broad as wrist and having palm slightly oblique, provided with diagonal row of plumose spines across surface and with group of setae -\-i distance to distal end of posterior margin, palm provided with many submarginal setae of various lengths and with prehensile spine ; finger strong, curved, and provided with a few setae on inner margin. Second gnathopods with epimeron rounded ventrally, higher than long and bearing triangular lobe on posterior margin and submarginal setae ventrall}' ; second joint extending considerably be3-ond epimeron, with roimded lobe at antero-distal angle ; third and fourth segments essentially as in first gnathopod ; wrist triangular and smaller than in first ; hand large, oval, about twice as long as broad, posterior margin continuous with palm by even curve and provided with many teeth and setae of various lengths, prehensile spine present ; finger strong and curved, having a few setae on concave margin. Pereiopods furnished with dactyls, last 2 pairs subequal ; epimera moderate with margins entire except for rounded notch on first 3 ; that of second pereipod largest of series. Uropods, 3 pairs ; first and second biramous, first longer than second and third, wnth rami somewhat shorter than peduncle, the inner one of which is slightly longer than the outer, provided with 2 or 3 spines on dorsal margin and several on apex ; second with peduncle relatively shorter than that of first, otherwise of similar 72 B. W. Ktmkel, form ; terminal uropods quite short, uniramous, with ramus shorter than peduncle and bearing several spines on apex, peduncle extend- ing beyond telson. Telson thick, very deeply cleft, broader than long. There were present in the collection only a few males having a length of about 15 mm. The species has been previously recorded from the North Atlantic, the North Sea, and the Mediterranean. Hyale trifoliadens sp. nov. Eyes small, compound, deeply pigmented in alcoholic specimens. First antennae with peduncle half as long as flagellum ; lirst joint slightly longer than second, stout, scarcely twice as long as broad ; third joint short and slender, very similar to first joint of flagellum which is made up of about 9 segments. Second antennae much Fig. 27. Hyale trifoliadens sp. nov. longer than first, scarcely V2 as long as body; peduncle nearly as long as entire first antennae ; first and second joints short and broad with gland cone slender ; third joint not as long as broad ; fourth joint twice as long as broad and shorter than fifth which is more slender; flagellum made up of al)out 15 segments ]:)rovided with setae on distal margins. Mandibles strong ; palp wanting ; princi]:)al cutting edge divided into 3 teeth ; secondary cutting edge with 2 processes, much smaller than principal ; spine row with a munber of short plumose spines ; molar tubercle .large, furnished with a plumose seta. The Amphipoda of Bcrunida. 73 Lower lip and first and second maxillae as in H. pontica. Maxilli- peds with inner plates well developed, narrow, extending as far as first joint of palp, provided with plumose spines on inner margin and apex which also bears 3 odontoid spines ; outer plate extending well beyond inner and bearing 2 plumose spines apically and m;iny setae on inner margin; palp well developed with second joint sub- rectangular and bearing a semicircular lobe on inner distal angle and with many setae on inner margin ; third joint about as long as first, broader distally than proximally and bearing many setae on distal margin; fourth joint more or less clawlike, not as long as preceding joint. In male first gnathopods with epimeron longer than high, rounded ventrally but with anterior angle projectmg well forward ; second joint moderately stout, projecting well beyond epimeron, bearing on anterior margin 2 or 3 short setae and several long setae on distal posterior angle ; third joint about as long as broad with a few setae on distal posterior angle ; fourth joint about twice as long as wide with a few setae on posterior distal angle ; fifth joint articulating with fourth along nearly entire anterior margin, more or less triangular with prominent semicircular lobe bearing long setae on posterior margin, anterior margin moderately convex ; hand sub- rectangular, rather more than twice as long as broad, not as broad as wrist, posterior margin bearing single fascicle of setae near middle, palm transverse and furnished with setae, the longest of which are at the prehensile angle ; finger fairly stout, of usual form. Second gnathopods with epimeron slightly shorter than that of first gnathopods with ventral margin evenly rounded ; second joint robust but slender at proximal end, bearing a few setae on anterior and posterior margins ; third joint as long as broad, with a few setae on distal posterior angle ; fourth joint triangular, articulating with wrist by distal portion of anterior margin, bearing several setae on apex ; wrist rather short, bearing long curved process on posterior side which renders wrist broader than hand which bears a fascicle of setae apically ; hand oval, rather broader distally than proximally, about twice as long as broad, palm somewhat oblique, straight, provided with numerous setae of various lengths and prehensile spine, posterior margin with fascicle of setae near middle ; finger of usual form and size ; second gnathopods in every way stronger than first. In female, first gnathopods with wrist longer than in male and provided with many more setae on posterior margin ; hand shorter than in male and furnished with many setae on posterior margin, 74 B. IV. Ktuikel, provided with prehensile spine. In second gnathopods, wrist shorter than in first and hand more nearly oval with palm qnite obhque and posterior margin much shorter than palm and provided with several groups of spines, palm with numerous submarginal spines of various lengths and 2 prehensile spines ; finger moderately stout, provided with 2 short cilia on inner concave margin. Other characters as in H. poniica. The species was represented by several individuals 6—8 mm. in length. Parhyalella gen. nov. First antennae longer than peduncle of second ; first maxillae with palp wanting ; maxillipeds with 4-jointed palp, last joint being ungui- form ; gnathopods subchelate ; telson entire. This genus is closel}^ related to H3'alella but differs from it in the alisence of a maxillary palp. Parhyalella batesoni sp. nov. Eyes moderately large, compound, situated well toward dorsal side of head. First antennae nearly as long as second ; peduncle longer than flagellum which is composed of about a dozen rather short segments which are markedly broader at the distal than at proximal end ; first joint of peduncle very stout, scarcely longer than broad, second joint subequal in length but much narrower, third joint shorter than second and about twice as long as broad. Second antennae with first and second joints of peduncle short and coalesced with head, gland cone absent, third joint about as broad as long, fourth joint rather more than twice as long as broad, fifth joint somewhat longer and more slender than fourth ; flagellum very short, scarcely longer than last joint of peduncle, m.ade up of onl}' a few segments which rapidly become shorter and thinner distally. Mandibles with principal cutting edge divided into 6 teeth of which the second and third from the anterior end are largest, sec- ondary edge divided into 5 nearly equal teeth, molar tubercle ver}' strong, palp wanting. First maxillae with palp wanting, outer plate rather large with pectinate and branched spine-teeth on distal end ; inner plate rather short and slender with 2 plumose spines on apex. Second maxillae with outer and inner plates rather narrow and sub- equal, outer one with setae on distal margin, inner one with setae also on distal half of inner margin. Maxillipeds with inner and outer plates rather small, outer plates extending as far as apex of first The Ampiiipoda of Bermuda. 75 joint of pal[) and inner one extendincr not quite so far ; distal margin of inner plate provided with 3 odontoid spines and numerous plu- mose spines, outer plates with inner margin and a]:)ex which is rounded, provided with setae ; palp 4-jointed with first joint ver}' short and outer apex rather prolonged, second joint not as long as broad with broad lobe extending along inner side provided with row of stout spines, fourth joint clawlike, about as long as third joint. In male, first gnathopods with moderately high epimeron produced at antero- ventral angle ; second joint stout ; wrist triangular, about Fig. 28. Parhyalelld hatesoni sp. iiov. as broad as long and bearing prominent rounded lobe on posterior margin ; hand subrectangular, not as broad as wrist, nearly twice as long as wide, palm rather short and nearly transverse, provided with setae of various lengths, prehensile angle rounded and furnished with stout spine ; finger short and ver}' stout. Second gnathopods ver}- large with subrectangular epimeron which are higher than long ; second joint of moderate proportions with projecting lobe on anterior side ; fourth joint with anterior and pos- terior margins nearly parallel and with posterior apex somewhat produced ; wrist triangular, short, with very broad lobe from distal posterior angle which projects as far as posterior margin of fourth joint; hand oval, about twice as long as wide, with base deeply 76 B. W. Kunkel, incised, palm oblique and furnished with submarginal setae, prehen- sile angle moderately prominent and bearing two stout setae ; finger long and curved. Telson triangular, about as broad as long with apex rounded. Length 9 mm. There was a single specimen in the collection. Microdeutopus anomalus (Rathke, 1843) Bate, 1862. 1843. Gauunanis anomahis. Rathke, Nova Acta Acad. Caesa- real Leopold. Carol. German., vol. 30 I, p. 63, pi. 4, fig. 7. 1862. Microdeutopus anomalus. Bate, Cat. Brit. Mus., p. 164, pi. 30, fig. 3. Eyes small, round, compound, widely separated from each other dorsally, and very close to margin of interantennal lobes. Head produced to form short, rather acutely pointed rostrum. First antennae about one half as long as body and with principal flagellum longer than peduncle, made up of about 25 segments and provided with accessory flagellum of 4 or 5 elongated joints ; second joint of peduncle longest, third joint not more than one half as long as first. Second antennae somewhat shorter than first, with very short flagellum of about 8 joints furnished with setae ; glandular cone long and slender; third joint less than twice as long as broad, fourth and fifth joints very long and slender, subequal in length. Mandibles with all parts well developed, palp 3-jointed, with third joint longer than second and with proximal half broad and distal half tapering to a point and provided on inner margin with setae ; primary and secondary cutting edges denticulated. Lower lip with outer plates having anterior margin entire and widely separated from each other and with inner plates wide, mandibular processes long and slender. First maxillae with inner plate small, triangular, provided apically with single plumose spine, outer plate of moderate size with oblique distal margin armed in usual w^a}- ; palp well devel- oped, 2-jointed, second joint curved and moderatel}' long, with apex rounded and furnished with group of setae. Second maxillae with plates moderately broad and rounded apically, furnished with abun- dant setae on distal end ; outer plate slightly longer and broader than inner. Maxillipeds with large rectangular inner plates extend- ing as far as apex of first joint of palp, and furnished with slender spines apically ; outer plates broad, extending nearly as far as apex of second joint of palp, outer margin and apex rounded, inner mar- gin straight and furnished with short odontoid spines which become longer at apex ; palp 4-jointed and slender, second joint longest, terminal joint provided with claw^like spine. The Amphipoda of Bcrnnida. 77 First gnathopods of female larger than second ; epimeron moderate, third and fourth joints small ; wrist rather large, nearly oval in form, about twice as long as broad, posterior margin more convex than anterior and provided with slender setae ; hand subrectangular, more than twice as long as broad and somewhat longer than wrist, broader at distal end than at proximal, jialm slightly oblique, irreg- ular in shape, with stout spine tooth sejiarating it from posterior margin ; linger moderate in size, of usual form with concave margin serrated. Second gnathopods with small rounded epimera as long as high ; second joint long and slender, of uniform thickness ; third and Fig. 29. Microdentopus aiiomalus (H. Ratlike). fourth joints small ; wrist triangular, twice as long as l)road, provided with numerous long setae on posterior margin ; hand subrectangular, shorter than wrist, palm nearly transverse, posterior margin and palm provided with abundant setae ; finger similar to that'of first gnathopod. Marsupial plates oval, about two and a half times as long as broad. Pereiopods of middle group short, with epimera of moderate size, longer than high ; posterior pereiopods very long and slender with second joints moderately expanded. Uropods, 3 pairs, biramous, first pair extending slightly beyond other two ; rami styliform with stout spines at apex and along inner margin, inner rami of first and second longer than outer, inner rami of third uropods slightly shorter. 78 B. IV. Kuiikcl, Telson oval, longer than broad, apex truncated, furnished with 2 symmetrical fascicles of moderately stout spines. Length, 8 mm. A single female represented the species in the collection. The species has been previously reported from the Atlantic Coast of Norway, the Shetlands, and the Black Sea. Autonoe longipes (Liljeborg, 1852) Bruzelius, 1859. 1852. Gammarus longipes. Liljeborg, Ofversigtaf Kongl. Vetens.- Akad. Forhandl. Stockholm, p. 10. 1859. Autonoe longipes. Bruzelius, Skandinavian Amphipoda Gammar., Kongl. Sv. Vetens.-Akad. Handl., vol. 3, p. 28. Eyes moderate, compound, reniform, approaching very close to- gether on dorsal side of head. First antennae rather long and slender with long flagellum com- posed of more than a dozen rather elongated segments; peduncle with first joint rather stout, nearly as long as head, second joint slender and longer than first, third joint small, about ^3 as long as second ; accessory flagellum made up of 5 joints. Second antennae with peduncle much longer than that of first ; gland cone prominent, third joint longer than broad, fourth and fifth joints subequal in length ; flagellum about as long as last joint of peduncle, composed of about 5 joints. Mandibles with principal cutting edge divided into several teeth ; secondary cutting edge also denticulate and rather narrow ; 4 spines on spine row ; palp 3-jointed with third joint longest, about as long as first and second together, inner margin straight, outer margin convex, provided with plumose spines on both margins, second joint about twice as long as first and somewhat stouter, with several long setae on inner margin, first joint rather short, broader at distal end than at proximal. Lower lip with outer plates rounded, anterior margins entire, not very broad ; mandibular processes long and pointed, diverging considerably ; inner plates broad, rounded. First maxillae with inner plates rudimentary and l^earing single long plu- mose spine apically ; outer plates broad, with distal margin oblique, inclining toward inner margin, furnished with usual spine teeth ; palp 2-johited, first joint as broad as long and with single seta on outer distal margin, second joint 4 times as long as broad with blunt apex pro- vided with a number of slender teeth and setae. Second maxillae with oval plates which are rather broad ; outer plates provided with many long setae distally ; inner plates smaller than outer with The Amphipoda of Bermuda. 79 plumose spines on inner margin and setae on distal margin and in a row extending obliquely from middle of distal margin to inner margin proximally. Maxillipeds with inner plates short and provided with plumose spines on transverse distal and inner margins ; outer plates extending as far as second joint of palp, having outer margin convex and unarmed and inner margin, which is straight, provided with broad toothhke spines which become more slender distally and become plumose spines around distal margin ; palps long, 4-jointed, of which the first joint is longer than broad, the second joint 3 times as long as broad with a number of long setae on inner margin ; Fig. 30. Autotioe longipes Bruzelius. third joint about -/a as long as second, being broader at di.stal end and provided with many long setae ; fourth joint as long as third and unguiform. In male, first gnathopods with small subrectangular epimeron; second joint very stout, ^/y as broad as long, widest in middle ; third joint very short with several setae on postero-distal angle; fourth joint longer than third and more slender with a few setae on posterior margin ; wrist triangular, broader than long, having posterior margin provided with long setae ; hand large, oval, with anterior margin rather convex and much longer than posterior which bears several fascicles of long setae, palm oblicjue, not very long, provided with 80 B. W. Kiinkel, deep notch near prehensile angle and provided with numerous setae, apex of hand with fascicle of long setae ; linger rather large, of usual form with concave margin provided with numerous cilia. Second gnathopods much smaller than first, with rhomboidal epimeron about as long as high ; second joint moderate in width, fairly long, anterior margin curved, posterior margin rather strongly convex ; third and fourth joints as in first gnathopods but third rather more slender ; wrist triangular, rather large, longer and broader than hand, provided with very short setae on anterior margin and with several fascicles of setae on posterior margin ; hand subrect- angular, provided with setae on anterior and posterior margins, palm moderate, with long prehensile spine and fascicle of setae ; finger very large with concave margin serrated. In female, first gnathopods with second joint much more slender than in male ; third and fourth joints provided with many more setae which are also longer than in male ; wrist longer than in male, and hand more slender, being subrectangular, with ]3alm somewhat oblique and sinuous, provided with prehensile spine and setae of various lengths, posterior margin with many long setae and anterior submargin with several fascicles of slender setae ; finger slender, with concave margin serrated. Second gnathopods smaller than first, with second joint more slender and wrist broader than in male ; hand subrectangular, not unlike that of male but setae rather longer. E])imera moderately low, l^eing longer than high in each case, diminishing slightl}' in height posteriorly, those of fourth and fifth pereiopods being not more than half as high as long and suboval in form ; fourth not emarginate posteriorly ; third, fourth and fifth pereiopods with second joints normally expanded ; last pereiopods longest, with fourth, fifth and sixth joints especially long and slender ; first and second pereiopods with spinning glands. Uropods, 3 pairs, biramous ; first pair longest with peduncle some- what longer than rami which are equal in length and provided with stout spines ; second pair extending posteriori}^ as far as first ; ter- minal pair very short, not extending as far as preceding, rami styliform. Telson slightly broader than long, with distal margin slightly concave, postero-lateral angle provided with a spine and several longer setae. Length 5.5 mm. This species has been previously reported from Naples, the coast of Scandinavia, Great Britain, and Port Jackson, Australia. The Amphipoda of Bermuda. 81 Eurystheus lina sp. no v. Eyes compound, suboval, situated well on lateral aspect of head on prominent interantennal lobes and widely separated from each other. Antennae subequal ; first antennae rather stout with peduncle somewhat longer than fiagellum ; first joint of peduncle cylindrical Fig. 31. Enrysthens lina sp. nov. and about 3 times as long as broad, second joint nearl}- twice as long as first and more slender, third joint somewhat shorter than second, all joints provided with abundant setae, especially on lower margin ; principal fiagellum made up of about 1 1 joints, also pro- vided with abundant setae ; accessory fiagellum made up of 4 or 5 joints. Second antennae with gland cone rather prominent and moderately long ; third joint hardly twice as long as wide and with Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. XVI. 6 May, 1910. 82 B. W. Knukel, distal end somewhat wider than proximal and provided with rather long setae on ventral margin ; fourth joint rather long and slender, cylindrical ; fifth joint shorter than fourth ; flagellum about as long as fourth joint of peduncle, made up of 4 or 5 short, stout segments which are provided with setae. Mandibles triangular, with principal and secondary cutting edges denticulated, with 9 or 10 spines on spine row and with prominent molar tubercle ; palp 3-jointed, first joint short and cup-shaped with proximal end very narrow, second joint about 3 times as long as broad, slightly broader distally and with rather long setae on inner margin, third joint slightly shorter than second with rounded apex which is provided with abundant setae. Lower lip with outer plates having anterior margin entire. First maxillae having inner plate tri- angular and with numerous setae on inner margin ; outer plate of usual form with stout spines on oblique apex ; palp 2-jointed, of which the first is about as long as wide and the second is some- what curved and club-shaped with setae on rounded apex. Second maxillae of usual form with plates rounded distall}'. Maxillipeds with plates well developed and with 4-jointed palp ; inner plates rectangular with distal margin provided with abundant setae and a few spines ; outer plates extending nearly as far as distal end of second joint of palp, with inner margin straight and armed with broad toothlike spines and abundant setae, outer and distal margins convex, distal margin with long setae ; palp with first joint short, hardly as long as broad, second joint cylindrical, 3 times as long as broad and with long and abundant setae on inner margin, third joint 2/3 as long as second with rounded apex having abundant setae, fourth joint less than ^/2 as long as third with rounded apex as in third joint. In male, first gnathopods with moderate epimera having anterior ventral angle only slightly produced and with ver}' short setae on ventral margin ; second joint moderate in size, third joint rather shorter than broad; fourth joint broader toward distal end than proximal with posterior margin much longer than anterior and with 4 or 5 fascicles of setae ; wrist as long as second joint, subtriangular with distal margin somewhat oblique, posterior margin with 5 or 6 fascicles of setae and with similar number of fascicles along axis of joint; hand suboval, slightly broader than wrist, more than ^j^ as broad as long, anterior and posterior margins slightly convex, posterior margin passing by even curve into palm which is slightly convex and provided with setae of various lengths, prehensile angle with spine, posterior and anterior margins with numerous fascicles- of setae ; finger long and moderately slender, serrated. Tlic ^{lupliipoda of Bcriiiuda. 83 Second gnathopods very much larger in every way than first, epimeron small, rounded and not higher than long; second joint large and stout with fascicles of setae on both anterior and posterior margins ; fourth joint hardly longer than third which is provided with rounded lobe on anterior distal apex ; wrist short and triangular, articulating with fourth joint by most of posterior margin, distal l)art of margin in form of lobe extending over distal end of fourth joint and provided with numerous setae; hand very large, subrec- tangular, twice as long as broad with posterior margin provided with numerous setae, posterior margin prolonged distally so that prehensile angle is acute and palm is more or less concave ; finger very stout, tapering and rounded apically, concave margin provided with a triangular process near base. Epimera rather low, first 2 pereiopods with spinning glands, last pereiopod slightly longer than preceding. Uropods 3 pairs, biramous ; posterior pair extending- shghtly beyond second which in turn extend slightly beyond first ; inner rami slightly longer than outer, styliform. Telson subrectangular, stout, bilobed, with lobes well separated by triangular emargination and armed apically with 2 or 3 stout spines. Length 6 mm. The species was represented by 2 specimens which were collected in 1903. Podoceropsis sophia Boeck, 1861. 1861. Boeck, Forh. Skand. Naturf, vol. 8, p. 666. Eyes compound, reniform, situated very close to front margin of head. First antennae slightly longer than second, with first 2 joints of peduncle rather stout, cylindrical and equal in length, last joint 2/3 as long as first; principal flagellum made up of 5 elongated joints, about as long as last 2 joints of peduncle ; accessory flagellum short, consisting of 2 unequal joints, the first of which is much longer than the second. Second antennae with second joint rather short but with gland cone rather long and slender ; third joint more than twice as long as broad, slightly thicker distally than proximally ; fourth and fifth joints subequal, about as long as first joint of first antennae ; flagellum made up of 6 joints, somewhat shorter than that of first antennae. Mandibles with 8-jointed jialp and denticulated cutting edge ; first joint short ; second and third subequal in length, second C3iindrical ; 84 B. IV. KxinkeL third broader at distal end which is rounded and provided with numerous long setae, some of which are plumose ; secondary cutting edge long ; molar tubercle prominent. Lower lip with outer plates having anterior margin entire. First maxillae with small triangular inner plate and 2-jointed palp, having terminal joint rounded api- cally and provided with a few setae ; outer plate with distal margin obliquely truncate and provided with toothed and branching spines. Second maxillae with inner ]:)late rounded apically with setae on inner margin ; outer plate somewhat longer than inner one and provided with long setae apically. Maxillipeds with plates well developed and 4-jointed palp ; inner plate rather slender, triangular, provided with fairly stout spines apically ; outer plate with rounded apex, furnished with odontoid spines and setae on inner margin and apex; last joint of palp cylindrical, furnished with single stout spine apicall}^ Fig. 32. Poduceroims SDjthia Boeck. In male, tirst gnathopods with trapezoidal epimeron projecting well forward, ventral margin provided with short setae ; second joint very stout and of moderate length, provided with long setae at distal end of posterior margin; third joint short; fourth some- what longer than broad and broader at distal end, articulating with wrist by anterior margin ; ])osterior margin and apex provided with long setae ; wrist triangular, somewhat longer than broad, with setae on posterior and distal margins; hand oval, somewhat longer than wrist and slightly broader, posterior margin passing by even cur\e into palm which is convex and provided with submarginal setae and a rather large prehensile spine ; hand also furnished with fascicles of setae on anterior margin and apex ; linger of usual form, rather long and bearing a single cilium near apex on inner concave margin. Second gnathopods with subrectangular epimeron much higher than long with ventral margin rounded; second joint stout and The Ampkipoda of Bermuda. 85 moderately long, anterior margin straight and provided with numerous ver}' long setae ; third joint very short ; fourth joint small, rectan- gular, about twice as long as broad with group of setae at apex, articulating with wrist by entire anterior margin ; wrist small and cup-shaped, broader than long, with a fascicle of setae on very short free portion of posterior margin ; hand large, much larger than that of first, subrectangular, palm rather irregular, convex near articulation of finger, bearing decided cavity with broad bottom in region of prehensile spine, posterior margin prolonged to form triangular process behind which the apex of the finger fits, posterior and an- terior margins provided with fascicles of setae, palm provided with a few setae of various lengths ; finger rather stout, of usual form. In female, gnathopods smaller than in male ; first gnathopods with relatively longer and more slender finger; second gnathopods with palm regularly convex and lacking prolongation of posterior margin of hand to form triangular process. Pereiopods of usual form, provided with pointed dactyls, first 2 pairs with spinning glands. Uropods, 3 pairs, biramous ; second pair projecting beyond first and third ; terminal uropods having rami nearly as long as ped- uncle and provided with several stout spines apically. Telson thick, short, entire. The species was "represented in the collection by a male and a female 2.5 mm. in length, collected by W. G. VanName, 1901. It has been recorded from the Arctic Ocean, Scandinavia, the British coast, and Shetland Isles (70—90 fathoms). Isaea longipalpus sp. nov. Eyes small, compound, circular. First antennae long and slender, more than ^\i as long as body, with elongated flagellum ; first joint of peduncle stout and armed with stout setae ; second joint slender, slightly longer than first ; third joint short and narrow, about ^/s as long as second ; principal flagellum considerably longer than peduncle, composed of numerous elongated joints ; accessory flagellum long, made up of at least 4 segments. Second antennae shorter than first ; gland cone rather prominent but not long ; third joint of peduncle slightly longer than broad'; fourth and fifth joints long and subequal in length ; flagellum about as long as last joint of peduncle, composed of about 6 joints. Mandibles strong, triangular, with principal cutting edge denticu- lated and all parts well developed ; palp 3-jointed, the first of which is rather long, only half as broad as long, second joint stouter than 86 B. IV. Kitnkel, tirst and about 3 times as lont : cf. 1. 112. 14 : 1 [. G8. 4 s. \?> responderunt scripsi: responderant V 158 Ai(sti}i Morris Harmon, excussam sibi proiecisse longius sphaeram I iS quam ipse dextera manu gestabat. I ;• id autem permutationem temporum indicabat, III d licet interpretaiites placentia responderent. Ill 6 (2) 5 post haec confessus est iunctioribus proximis II 6 quod tamquam desolatus III d secretum aliqviid videre desierit II y quod interdum adfuisse sibi squalidius aestimabat ; III fS et putabatur genius [esse] quidam tutelae salutis adpositus II ;' 10 eum reliquisse mundo citius digressurum. III(^ (3) ferunt enim theologi II 7 in lucem editis hominibus cunctis 1 6 (salva firmitate fatalij I y huiusmodi quaedam 7 velut actus rectura numina sociari, III d 15 admodum tamen paucissimis visa \6 quos multiplices auxere virtutes. I y (4) idque et oracula et auctores docuere praeclari, I ;' inter quos est etiam Menander comicus, lid ajjud quern hi senarii duo leguntur : I ;' {versus omisi) (5) 20 itidem ex sempiternis Homeri carminibus 11/ intellegi datur I (3 non deos caelestes cum viris fortibus conlocutos, III 6 nee adfuisse pugnantibus vel iuvisse, Illds sed familiaris genios cum isdem versatos. I ;' 25 quorum adminiculis freti praecipuis II;' Pythagoras enituisse 7 dicitur et Socrates III <3 g Numaque Pompilius 7 et superior Scipio II d et, ut quidam existimant, Marius II d et Octavianus cui Augusti vocabukmi delatum est primo, I (3 30 Hermesque Termaximus et Tyaneus Apol- lonius, II;' 11^3 atque Plotinus I;' ausus quaedam super hac re disserere mystica lid alteque monstrare I ;' quibus primordiis 7 hi genii animis conexi mortalium II ;' 9 esse seclnsi Gelenhnn secutus The Clausula in Anmtianus Marcellinus. 159 eas tamquam gremiis suis susceptas tuentur I ;' [quoad licitum est] docentque maiora si senserint puras \y 16 et a conluvione peccandi I ;' inmaculata corporis societate discretas. I ;' (X"\^ 1) 5 ingressus itaque Antiochiam festinando Con- stantius II ;' ad motum certaminum civilium ut solebat III 6 a avide surrecturus III (S paratis omnibus exire properabat inmodice, II ;' renitentibus plurimis murmure tenus : I 6 10 nee enim dissuadere palam audebat quisqiiam vel vetare. Ill 6 e (2) autumno iam senescente profectus, I / cum ad suburbanum venisset I ;' disiunctum exinde tertio lapide, II d Hippocephalum nomine, 116 15 lucente iam die \y6 cadaver hominis interfecti III 6 dextra iacens capite avulso conspexit I ;' contra occiduum latus extensum ; I y territusque omine, II 6 20 finem parantil^us fatis, I d destinatius ipse tendebat ; I ;' venitque Tarsum, I 6 ubi leviore febri contactus I y ratusque itinerario motu I 6 25 inminutae valetudinis excuti posse discrimen I ;' petit per vias difficiles Mobsucrenas, III 6 Ciliciae ultimam hinc pergentibus stationem III tV sub Tauri montis radicibus positam ; II 6 egredique secuto die conatus I y 30 invalente morbi gravitate detentus est ; II ;' l, paulatimque urente calore nimio venas I 6 ut ne tangi quidem corpus ems posset 1 6 in modum foculi fervens, I 6 cum usus deficeret medelarum III 6 35 ultimum spirans 1 6 deflebat exitium. II ;' 1 quoad licitum est seclnsi tit interpolata vel ex inargine in textitin intro- dncta : v. p. 235 32 e'lus 7'. /. 224 160 Austin Morris Hannoji, mentisque sensu turn etiam integro II ('i successorem suae potestatis statuisse dicitur lulianum. Ill ^ (3) deinde anhelitu iam pulsante letali conticuit, 11 ;- diuque cum anima conluctatus iam discessura, Ill;'(^ 5 abiit e vita I ;- 6 tertium nonarum Octobrium II y imperii (tricesimo octavo; vitaeque anno quadra- gesimo (quarto) (1 d) et mensibus paucis. I d (4) post quae supremis cum gemitu conclamatis, III 6 10 excitisque lamentis et luctu, I yd deliberabant locum obtinentes in aula regia primum 1 6 quid agerent quidve moliri del^erent ; I ;' paucisque occulte super eligendo imperatore temptatis I ;' incitante ut ferebatur Eusebio II ;- 15 quem noxarum conscientia stimulabat, III 6 cum novandis rebus imminens ol:)sisteret lulianus, 111 6 mittuntur ad eum Theolaifus et Aligildus tunc comites, II ;' 6 mortem indicantes propinqui, 1 ;' et oraturi ut mora omni depulsa I y 20 ad obtinendum obtemperare sibi paratum ten- deret orientem. Ill 6 (5) fama tamen rumorque loquebatur incertus 1 / Constantium voluntatem ordinasse postremam, 1 ;' in qua lulianum ut praediximus scripsit [et] heredem, ijy) et his quos diligeljat fidei commissa detulit et legata. llldt (6) 25 uxorem autem praegnantem reliquit, 1 y unde edita postuma eiusque nomine appellata II 6 III 6 cum adolevisset matrimonii iure copulata est Gratiano. Ill;' (3 (XVI. 1) bonorum igitur vitiorumque eius differentia vere servata I ;' 7 tricesimo octavo, rt quarto nc/i/. Jl'agnci-. J/ai quidem opinione nihil inutandmn : sin aittem niuldnditiii, alio inodo id fieri oporfrt 23 et delevi Acciirsium sccutns The Clausula in Aiiuiiianus Marcelli/iiis. 161 praecipua prima conveniet expediri. Ill cV imperatoriae auctoritatis cothurnum ubique custo- diens, II ;' popularitatem elato animo contemnebat et magno ; I ;' A erga tribuendas celsiores dignitates inpendio parens, I (^ 5 nihil circa administrationum augmenta I y praeter pauca novari perpessus, I ;' numquam erigens cornua militarium. IV (V (2) tiec sub eo dux quisquam cum clarissimatu pro- vectus est : II ?' ? erant enim ut nos quoque meminimusperfectissimi. IV 6 10 nee oceurrebat magistro equitum pro vinciae rector, I 6 nee eontingi ab eo civile negotium permittebat. Ill 6 sed cunctae castrenses et ordinariae potestates III 6 ut honorum omnium apicem II 6 priseae reverentiae more I d 15 praefectos semper suspexere praetorio. II ;' (3) in conservando milite nimium cautus, I (V examinatormeritorumnonnumquamsubscruposus, III 6 palatinas dignitates velut ex quodam tribuens perpendiculo : IV d' et sub eo nemo celsum aliquid acturus in regia II ;' 6 20 repentinus adhibitus est vel incognitus, 11/^7 sed qui post decennium officiorum magisterium vel largitiones vel simile quicquam esset recturus I ;' apertissime noscebatur. Ill 6 valdeque raro contigerat II y . ut militarium aliquis II 6 25 ad civilia regenda transiret, I ;' contraque non nisi pulvere l^ellico indurati III 6 praeficiel3antur armatis. I y (4) doctrinarum diligens adfectator, III 6 sed cum a rhetorica per ingenium desereretur obtvuisum I y 30 ad versificandum transgressus I ;' nihil operae pretium fecit. I 6 (5) in vita parca et sobria II yd 20 melhis caJit si est secludis, tct fiat adliibitus vel iucognitus (IV) : sed vide p. 2oy 22 magisterium vel largitiones quintam efficr't fornmni 162 Austin Morris Harmon, edendi potandique moderatione valetudinem ita retinuit tirmam I 6 ut raros colligeret morbos, I 6 sed eos non procul a vitae periculis : 11 y id enim evenire corporibus a lascivia dimotis et luxu I ;- d 5 diuturna experimenta 7 et probationes medendi monstrarunt. I y (6) somno contentus exiguo II ;' cum id posceret tempus et ratio, \\y^ perque spatia vitae longissima II y inpendio castas I 6 10 ut nee amaro ministro I ;' saltern suspicione tenus posset redargui : II y quod crimen etiam si non invenit malignitas tingit I 6 in summarum licentia potestatum. Ill 6 (7) equitandi et iaculandi 7 maximeque perite diri- gendi sagittas I ;' 15 artiumque armaturae pedestris I / perquam scientissimus. IV 6 quod autem nee tersisse umquam nares in publico II y^ nee spuisse nee transtulisse in partem alterutram vultum 1 6 aliquando est visus \y6 20 nee pomorum quoad vixerat gustavisse (III 6) ut dicta saepius praetermitto. Ill 6 (8) dinumeratis carptim bonis quae scire potuimus, II y nunc ad explananda eius vitia veniamus. Ill 6 cum esset in negotiis aliis II 6 25 principibus mediis conparandus, III 6 si adfectatae dominationis amplam quandam falsam reperisset aut levem, 1yd banc sine tine scrutando, I ;' fasque eodem loco ducens et nefas, \y6 Caligulae et Domitiani et Commodi \ly6 inmanitatem facile superabat; IIIc^ 30 quorum aemulatus saevitiam II ;' inter imperandi exordia 11/ cunctos sanguine et genere se contingentes stir- pitus interemit. Ill S 10 trxtiis incertus mare miuistro V 14 perite malim peritus 20 vixerat gustavisse scripsi vixerat gustaverit V The Clausula in Ammianus Marcelliims. 163 (9) addebatur miseronim aerumnis I y qui rei maiestatis imminutae vel laesae defere- bantur III ;' acerbitas eius 7 et iracundae suspiciones III / in huiusmodi cuncta distentae. I y 5 et siquid tale increpuisset III ;' in quaestiones acrius exurgens quam civiliter IV;'f spectatores adponebat his litibus truces ; I (5 mortemque longius in puniendis quibusdam I y si natura permitteret II y 10 conabatur extendi, I ;' in eiusmodi controversiarum partibus etiam Gal- lieno ferocior. II ;' (10) ille enim perduellionuni crebris verisque adpetitus insidiis, II ;' Aureoli et Postumi et Ingenui IV dt et Valentis cognomento Thessalonici III y 15 aliorumque plurium 7 mortem factura crimina ali- quotiens lenius vindicabat : III 6 hie etiam ficta vel dubia II ;' 6 adigebat videri certissima II ;' vi nimia tormentorum. Ill 6 (11) iustumque in eiusmodi titulis l\S 20 capitaliter oderat, II d cum maxime id ageret ut iustus aestimaretur et Clemens. I ;■ 6 et tamquam ex arida silva I 6 volantes scintillae I y flatu leni ventorum I / 25 adusque discrimina II / vicorum agrestium II ;' incohibili cursu perveniunt, II y ita ille quoque ex minimis causis I cV malorum congeries excitabat, III 6 30 Marci illius dissimilis principis verecundi, III 6 qui cum ad imperiale culmen in Syria Cassius surrexisset, III 6 epistularum fascem ab eo ad conscios missum, I 6 perlatore capto sibi oblatum, I y 6 quam v. p. 227 164 Austin Morris Harmon, ilico si^natum exuri praecepit, 1 y agens adhuc in Illyrico, H/^J' ne insidiatoribus cognitis II d invitus quosdam habere posset offenses. I ;' (12) 5 utque recte sentientes quidam arbitrabantur, III ;' virtutis erat jiotius indicium magnae I d imperio eundem Constantium sine cruore cessisse I ;' quam vindicasse tarn inclementer. Illj'd (13) ut Tullius quoqiie docet, I d 10 crudelitatis increpans Caesarem II 6 in quadam ad Nepotem epistula, II ;' ' neque enim quicquam aliud est felicitas ' inquit I 6 • nisi honestarum rerum prosperitas. [II ;■] vel ut alio modo detiniam, [II j'] 15 felicitas est fortuna adiutrix consiliorum bonorum, [I ;-] quibus qui non utitur [*] felix esse nullo pacto potest. ['^] Ergo in perditis impiisque consiliis [II ;'] quibus Caesar usus est [*] 20 nulla potuit esse felicitas [II ;'] feliciorque meo iudicio Camillus exvilans [*] quam temporibus isdem Manlius, [*j etiam si — id quod cupierat — regnare potuisset.' [*] (14) id Ephesius quoque Heraclitus adserens monet I d 25 et ab inertibus et ignavis III 6 a eventus variante fortuna I ;' superatos aliquotiens viros fuisse praestantes : I ;' illud vero eminere inter praecipuas laudes, I tV cum potestas in gradu I ;' 6 30 velut sub iugum missa nocendi saeviendi(que) cupiditate et irascendi Ill/rf in arce victoris animitropaeum erexeritgloriosum. Ill 6 (15) ut autem in externis bellis hie princeps fuit saucius et adflictus, III (S e ita prospere succedentibus pugnis civilibus tumidus, II (3 et intestinis ulceribus rei publicae IV (5^ 35 sanie perfusus horrenda : I ;■ quo pravo proposito magisquam recto vel usitato, III yd triumphalis arcus ex clade provinciarum III ;' 12 s. Tyrrell T'l. p. 2g2 : cpistnla no)i alibi traditur 30 (que) Gr/. The Clausula in Ammiamts Marcellinus. 165 sumptibus magnis erexit 7 in Galliis et Pamioniis, IV ^£ titulis gestorum adfixis, I ;' quoad stare poterunt moiiumenta lecturis. I ;' (16) uxoribus et spadonum gracilentis vocibus et pa- latinis quibusdam I / 5 nimium quantum addictus I y ad singula eius verba plaudentibus II y et quid ille aiat aut neget \y6 ut adsentire possint obseriiantibus. IV ^^ (17) augebat etiam amaritudinem temporum lid 10 flagitatorum rapacitas inexpleta, III 6 plus odiorum ei quam pecuniae conferentium ; IV 6 hocque multis intolerantius videbatur III 6 quod nee causam aliquando audivit I ;' nee provinciarum indemnitati prospexit I y 15 cum multiplicatis tributis et vectigalibus vexa- rentur. Ill 8 eratque super his adimere facilis quae donabat. III(5t (18) Christianam religionem absolutam et simplicem 11;- (3 anili superstitione confundens, I ;' in qua scrutanda perplexius quam conponenda gravius (versabatur), (III (5) 20 excitavit discidia plurima, II ^ quae progressa fusius aluit concertatione ver- borum, I ;' ut catervis antistitum iumentis publicis ultro ci- troque discurrentibus IV rf per synodos quas appellant, III(5£ dum ritum omnem ad suum trahere conantur arbitrium, II y 25 rei vehiculariae succideret nervos. I d (19) figura tali situque membrorum : I y subniger, luce oculorum edita, cernensque acutum, I ;' moUi capillo, 1 ;' rasis adsidue genis I c\ 30 lucentibus ad decorem, III(5f usque ad pubem ab ipsis colli continiis longior II (5 brevissimis cruribus et incurvis. Ill 6 s [unde saltu valebat et cursu.] (20) pollinctum igitur corpus defuncti ly 8 possint obseruantibus 7'. pp. 182, 233 19 versabatur insend Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. XVI. 11 Oct., 1910. 166 Austin Morris Harmon, conditumque in loculis II /(^ lovianus etiamtum protector domesticus II y cum regia prosequi pompa 7 Constantinopolim usque iussus est II (5 cj prope necessitudines eius humandum. I ;' (21) eique vehiculo insidenti 7 quod portabat reHquias, II / 5 ut principibus solet, I 6 annonae militaris offerebantur indicia II y (ut ipsi nominant probaj I rf et animalia publica monstrabantur III (5 et ex usu crebrescebant occursus. I y 10 quae et alia horum similia II / eidem loviano imperium quidem I rf sed vicarium et umbratile (IVc^t) ut ministro rerum funebrium portendebant. III ^ 12 sed vicarium scripsi, sede et assum V^ sed et cassum Acciirs.^ unde sed cassum Gelen. v. p. 173 Chapter i. Nature of the Clausulae. The most casual glances at the pages of the foregoing selection from the Histories cannot but reveal the fact that Ammianus secured a rhythmical effect in his prose through the constant repetition of a limited number of accentual clausulae. It is almost equally obvious that the nature of each clausula is chiefly determined by two factors which must enter into it — the accentual cadence pure and simple, and the caesura. Founding our classification of the clausulae, therefore, upon these two essential features, we shall discuss first the divers accentual cadences or forms that Ammianus uses, and next the various word-groups or types by which each form is rendered. Were Ammianus' clausulae purely accentual, we should not need to carry our investigation any farther; but although accent is always the principal factor in his rhythm, syllable-quantity is not left entirely out of account in it. We must therefore give this element a place in our discussion of the nature of his clausulae, which we shall conclude with a brief inquiry into the matter of their origin. rORMS. The following table displays the various forms that occur among the clausulae in Book XXI (I) and in the collection of sentence- endings previously described (II), and records the frequency with which they recur. In compiling these statistics I have departed from Gardthausen's text only in two sentence-endings. ^ In the latter collection all direct quotations are left out of account; in Book XXI only two citations from Cicero. Table of I'orms. Coll. I J I r\j n'^ rsj r^ r\j 648 II r^n^r^i^ 1^ rsj Y) rLi r\j rvj r\j r\j ^ Uncertain 1425 Coll. ] 19 5 7 4 \_ 36~~ 1461 1787 3212 Coll. II Total 13 32 3 8 5 12 2 6 1 2 24 60 1811 3272 These results manifest unequivocally the uniformity of Ammianus' rhythm. His style is chiefh^ characterized b}' the inordinate re- petition of the cadences I, II and III, .which are presented in about 95 per cent of the clausulae. This proportion remains approximately the same whether we take all the clausulae into consideration or only those which end a sentence, although the discrepancy in the relative frequency of II and III in the two collections reveals the fact that II is used more often within the sentence than at its end, while the reverse is true of III. There can be no doubt, then, that these three are par excellence the favored forms. Since cadence IV is counted in tens whereas the cadences just mentioned are counted in hundreds, I must set forth the reason that has governed me in classing it with these. It is primarily that IV would naturally be a rare clausula, because when it is con- structed in two words it requires that the sentence or kolon end in a word of 5 or 6 syllables with antepenultimate accent imilitibus obscurissimis , constanti sollicitndine), and such words are not common.^ Furthermore, its occurrences are guaranted by sound texts and its rhythm emphasized by responsion, since most of the cases in Book XXI stand in close proximity to one another.^ It is therefore a good clausula, though, in comparison with the others, not a frequent one. In connection with these four clausulae two other forms 'come up for discussion which are so rare that I have not found a single certain instance of either one in either of my two collections. In spite of this their status is quite different from that of the cadences which I have listed as irregular. These forms are : VI PLir\jrK/r^r\jr\jr\jr'Lir\jn^ ' The actual cases are for the most part present participles in the dative or ablative plural, and superlatives. 2 See p. 204. The Clausula in Amiiiia/iits Marcellinus. 169 Of V I can cite five examples in Ammianus : II. 24. 25 pondere cir- cumveniretur ; 212. 27 venerint allegationum; 242. 18 ve'ritus ut adhiic durdiHem ; 268. 20 eminuit at Sebastidiii ; 269. 19 e'rat cum moderatione. To these should perhaps be added three ambiguous clausulae in Book XXI.^ Of VI I have only two instances : II. 79. 19 postea Co}istantinop6leos \ 214.6 Ae'sopi cavillationibus. It is possible that some instances of one form or the other may have escaped me, but they cannot be numerous. Consequently both the forms are extremely rare. But we must not let this move us to doubt their legitimacy, for all of the texts in which they occur seem to be sound and are very difficult to assail. Moreover, their rarity finds adequate explanation in the motive that prompted their use : they were brought into employment simply as a means of handling long words which' could not easily be disposed of otherwise.^ It is noteworthy that, if we except the three ambiguous cases of V in Book XXI, all the examples come from the last 9 books — in fact, 5 of them froni the last two books. This appears to indicate a late recognition of these forms, and a slightly increasing tendenc}' to use them, once they are recognized. The fact that their occur- rences are not in responsion but isolated is somewhat surprising. I can account for it only on the hypothesis that Ammianus regarded them as extensions of III and IV, and did not feel that they broke the rh3thm. It is obvious that forms V and VI stand in the same relation to III and IV in which the latter stand to I and II. Using metrical terms to define accentual rhythm (as we do in dealing with English poetry) we may say that each of these clausulae has 1 P. 142, 1. 14 trahendumque si reniterehir^ listed as doubtful (see below) ; p. 154, Q>S fal/acissintae geittis obse7-7'dntiir axidi tirgentia velut pugnatiiriis — two clausulae in apparent responsion, listed as examples of A (see below). * I note tlu-ee cases in wliicli a final word of 6 syllables witli penul- timate accent is not preceded by an antepenultimate Avord, but they are all corrupt. In I. 83. 5 correxerit et libera I /tate the Ms. reads correxit et libertaie (III), whicli should be retained in spite of tlie change in tense eget-it-correxit. (v. Lofstedt, Beitrdge ziir Kcnnt)iis d. spdter. Lett. p. 70 ff.) In II. 12. 14 amittit intempestuosos the ms. lias inteinpesiiosos., corrected into intempesiuosos by a later hand : the reading of Accursius intempestivos is in better accord with the usage of Ammianus. In IT. 64. 20 somniorum adsiduitate we have a case of hidden corruption : a verb has fallen out (v. Giinther, Phil. 50, p. 69) and it is most natural to supply it at the end of the clause, after adsiduitate. As for words like cavillatioiiibus.^ I have not found any instance of their employment before a pause except in the two cases cited above. 170 Atistin Morris Harmon, a dactylic-trochaic cadence — they differ from one another only in the number of trochees that follow the dactyl.^ The longer forms, in consequence of this similarit}', might well be used out of responsion, and the lack of it is certainly not a suflicient reason for expelling them from our text. Coming now to the four cadences A, B, C and D, listed as irregular, we may sum up their status in saying that the}^ were certainly avoided by Ammianus and probably avoided altogether. None of these cadences is of such a sort as to be naturally un- common. In a text in which no attention is paid to rhythm (there are few, if any, such among the ancient authors, but a modern writer of Latin will do for a test) all of them must needs occur very frequently. But in Ammianus, taken all together, they are less frequent in our text than the cadence IV, which would naturally be very rare. This fact can only be interpreted as evincing a strong disinclination on the part of Ammianus to employ these cadences. It justifies us in the statement that his rhythm is as much charac- terized in a negative way by their avoidance as it is in a positive way by the abnormal frequency of the cadences I, 11 and III. Under these circumstances it is natural to draw the inference that the cadences in question were avoided altogether, and that their appearance in our text is to be attributed to corruption. And in fact a study of the individual passages in which they occur makes it evident that not one of the four cadences can be called valid with any degree of certainty : on the contrary it is extremely prob- able that they are each and all corrupt. To put the reader in possession of sufficient evidence on this point I submit a full list of the instances found in Book XXI and in my collection of sentence- endings. ^ ' Tims I pnndere veiiit = dactyl -|- trochee, III poudere cjrcum- veiiit =^ dactyl -\- 2 trochees, V poiidere ci'rcumveniretur = dactj^l -|- 3 trochees; II pondere veniet = dactyl -\- 1^2 trochees (or dactyl-dactyl), IV pondere circumveniet = dactyl -j- 2 7^ trochees (or dactyl -trochee- dactyl), VI pondere circuravenientibus = dactyl -j- 3 '/a trochees (or dactyl-trochee-trochee-dactyl). ^ Cases from the former som-ce are cited in the order In which they occur, with references to page and line of this treatise; those from the latter are grouped according to the cadence represented, and the refer- ences are to page and line of Gardthausen's edition. V = Vat. Lat. 1873, of which all other existing codices are copies. The Clausula in Animianus Marcelliims. 171 Book XXI. (1) p. 125. 1. 18 multa et urgentia Omit et. Cf. curabat urgentia 254. 8 ; residua urgentia 294. 8. (2) 127. 21 coniectura fallerentur. interdumque Read fallerentur interdum. quae with Bcntlcy and Madvig. (3) 128. 7 prospecta revertatnur Perhaps proposita rev. Cf. I. 14. 28: II. 237. 22: II. 126. 11 proposita veniamus. (4) 129. 14 Vadomarii exorsos Read N^.^iOvcv^x\\'. for evidence that Amrnianus uses both forms of the genitive see p. 2j^. (5) 131. 19 diversorium rediit Read redit {Amrnianus always ac- cents rediit, interiit, etc. on the penult: v. p. 211). (6) 131. 20 agi conveniret F conveniet, which should be retained, in accordance with the usage of Amrnianus: cf. I. 20. 7, and Petschenig Phil, /o p. J48. (7) 133. 8 potuerunt et probari The sense demands poterunl, as Haupt has pointed out (Ind. Led. Berol. iSjf). (8) 133. 9 abiectius absolvam V abiectis : // is better to assume a lacuna with Wagner and Eyssenhardt than to read abiectius tvith Valcsius and Gardthausen. (9) 134. 17 sedulam et solitam F sollitam : r. 2jf) and velut propugnaturus {Gelenius).. The latter view seems to me preferable. The Clausula in Ammianus Marcellinus. 173 (27) 154. 26 stipatus armatorum V armorum, zvhich should be re- tained: cf. p. I J 4, note. (28) 155. 18 celso sistens Read insistens : cf. p. ijy, note. (29) 157. 11 ibant suam The verb is omitted in V: ibant Haupt {a suggestion on which he himself laid no iveight). Read traxerat ivith Gelcnius, comparing I. 112. 14 and 11. 68. 4 ff. (30) 157. 13 benivole responderant Read responderunt. (31) 159. 1 quoad licitum est A gloss on the foregoing words. (32) 160. 23 scripsit et heredem The word et {which is entirely out of place in the text) is not to be found in the earlier editions. (33) 162. 20 vixerat gustaverit Read vixerat gustavisse : the cor- ruption is due to the influence of the preceding word vixerat aided by a certain similitude in the endings -erit and -isse. (34) 165. 19 conponenda gravius /// my opinion a tvord {perhaps versabatur) has been lost after gravius : as the text stands, the relative clause zvhich ends in these words has no verb, for excitavit is the verb of the main clause. (35) 166. 12 sed cassum et umbratile V sede et assum, hence sed et cassum Accursius {Eyssenhardt), sed cassum Ge- lenius {Gardthausen). I am convinced that the proper reading is sed vicarium. This is just as near the read- ing of V as Accursius' sed et cassum, but in the latter conjecture et is indefensible and cassum is nearly synon- ymous with umbratile. On the other hand vicarium not only is recommended by the rhythm but adds point to the sentence. Jovian, riding on the bier of Con- stantius, received homage in lieu of the dead emperor : it portended for him imperium quidem sed vicarium, et umbratile ut ministro rerum funebrium. And there is especial point in the adjective in view of the con- fusion caused among the soldiers when he was pro- claimed emperor by the similarity of the names lovianns and lulianus {see XXV. 5. 6). 174 Austin Morris Harmon, Sentence-endings {arranged according to cadence) A (1) 1.26.28 agitari conperissent f^ nove res agitari conpissent; in this one needs only to correct conpissent to coe- pissent with Gelenius. On coepi and coeptus sum see Novak, p. 8o. (2) 102. 5 stetere cuneati V cunctanti, Reinesiiis cuneati, Read CLinctantes. (3) 103. 16 verbis hortabatur. The intolerable baldness of this expression makes it evident that something has fallen out of the text. The ivhole passage needs an over- hauling, for as Langen long ago pointed out {Emend. Ammian., Dilren, iS6j), the words cautior sui in the following sentence constitute an undeserved slur on Jidian^s courage of which Ammianus would have been incapable. As an attempt at reconstruction I offer'. verbis hortabatur et (factis), quoniam .... Augustus existimabat cautior sui. hostium(que) tela etc. (4) 118. 32 signis ostendentes Fsignibus {followed in Cod.Petrinus), v^ and Gelenius signis. For his signis read msigrnhw^i. (5) II. 250. 1 cruditate festinal^at V {cf. Eyssenhardt) festinabat : read firmabat. (6) 273. 20 quibus petebantur Pronounce qiiibus: see p. 228. (7) I. 70. 26 difficile pervadunt V pervaduntur, Haupt pervadunt. The passage should be so reconstructed as to retain pervaduntur. (8) 82. 13 munera curabant Valesius inserted munera: substitute, perhaps, munus. (9) 175. 21 febrium arescunt V arescentes, Gelenius arescunt; arescentes is perhaps defensible on the assumption that contra is a preposition. (10) 194. 18 eximit abruptis Read exemit {Gelenius). (11) 84. 11 exarserat in mains in is conjecturally supplied'. better exarsit in mains. (12) 191. 32 globos se inmisit se Gelenius : read sese or trans- pose. (13j II. 206. 29 secius hoc modo F rectus : read secus with Accursius, comparing I. 320. 23. {On the inconsistent accentuation hoc modo, huiusmodi see p. 210 The Clausula in AtiimiauHs Marcellinus. 175 B (14) I. 18. 11 lapsorum ac lasciviam Fad: read atque : cf. I. 16. 26. (15) 142. 5 dedendi se consilium. Read sese or transpose. (16) 159. 3 afuit quin caperer Ffuit: perhaps this reading should be retained. But quin may be pronounced as a dissyl- lable : V. pp. 22"], 22<). C (17) I. 145. 7 destinatas remearunt sedes Miiller inserted ad before destinatas : / should put it before sedes. (18) 145. 23 ad res consurrexit novas V consurrexerit {Clark). (19)11.161. 4 misitplebem Transposition must be resorted to {^\&he.m. misit conductam) unless one reads conducticiam m. p. (20) 196. 8 trucidari securum fecit Haupt conjectured secure fecit, Eyssenhardt reads securum efficit. In my opinion Ammianus wrote secure praecepit : cf. II. 173. 21; I. 62. 31; 94. 33; 137. 27. (21) 237. 19 portendatur norunt V portetur, Eyssenhardt porteu- datur. I should prefer •po?,c\i\\r : c/.poscebatur II. 168.12. D (22) II. 226. 3 esse [invidiam] sociam Gardthausen brackets invi- diam : read individuam with Valesius. (23) 271. 25 arduo in munimento conditos Set arduo after con- ditos : V reads ardor, which shows that the eye of the scribe ivas caught by ardor, below. Hence the trans- position might easily occur. The only irregular cadence which, on a priori ground, might be expected to occur in Ammianus is that type of A in which the word-division follows the tirst unaccented syllable ((ille properdbat). As Meyer has pointed out, there are some writers who use this clausula, though few of them employ it in any great frequency.^ He accredits Ammianus with sporadic use of it, on the basis of about 15 cases in 800 sentence-endings. But in this matter there is a discrepancy between Meyer's results and mine.^ Among the 1461 clausulae in Book XXI I find 10 cases, among 1811 sentence- 1 See p. 121, and Ges. Abh. p. 260, p. 263 Anm. 1. * The difference is probably due to the fact that long and careful study of the Histories has enabled me to ascertain a number of peculi- arities in the pronunciation of Ammianus which he was naturally unable to notice in the hasty examination of a limited material. 176 Austin Morris Harmon, endings 6: in all, 16 cases in 3272 clausulae, not one-fourth the proportion that Meyer's figures assign to Ammianus. Furthermore, a careful scrutiny of the preceding list will disclose that, in point of fact, there is very little evidence for the occurrence of this clau- sula in our author at all. Of the 10 instances in Book XXI, 4 are isolated ; in 2 of the 4 (nos. 6 and 27) the reading of the manuscript, which gives a reg- ular clausula, is every wa}' preferable, and of the other two (10, 16) we may say at least that transposition gives a better word-order in view of Ammianus' excessive fondness for traiectio. The other 6 instances form 3 cases of apparent responsion. But 2 of these cases must be ruled out of court, for in one of them (11—12) it is unlikely that the irregular cadences precede pauses, and in the other (25—26) the interpretation of the cadences as A is uncertain. In the remaining case (2—3), we have two sentences ending in Meyer's clausula, separated by about half a page of text : in this interval there is a quotation from Cicero, in which the same clau- sula terminates a sentence. At first sight this seems a striking ex- ample of responsion, motivated b}' the Ciceronian cadence. It is indeed the strongest example that I have been able to find in Am- mianus, but it is not as satisfactory as it appears. For in the first place, however natural such a procedure may appear to us, nowhere else in Ammianus is an irregular cadence in a quotation balanced by irregular cadences in the text.^ This case is therefore exceptional, and the very fact that seems to argue in favor of it is in reality an argument against it. Secondly, the first occurrence of the clau- sula is easily disposed of l^y revising the punctuation. Thirdly, the sentence that follows the quotation is a revocatio, marking a return to the subject. But elsewhere in Ammianus these revocationes always terminate in a regular cadence.^ Moreover, in the phrase ad explicanda prospccta revertanmr we have a figurative use of pro- specta which is unparalleled : the word usually emplo3'ed in this sense is proposita. On all these grounds I consider that we should read proposita here. 1 Cf. XV. 5. 23 : XVI. 1. 5 ; XIX. 12. 18 ; XXII. 7. 4 ; XXIX. 5. 24. In the fu'st citation, however, the reader should be warned that ipshts proniulgatafn does not correspond with fortnna revocatur^ but (in virtue of Ammianus' pronunciation ipsius^ on which see p. 211) with the prece- ding sententiam Tiillianam^ with which it also rhymes. * Cf. proposita veniaimis II. 126. 11 : proposittim revertanmr I. 14. 28 ; propo- siti revertanmr II. 237. 22 ; propositi revertetur L 228. 29 (where Gardthausen admits the mistaken conjecture rei^erteretur) \ restautia venianms I. 72. 3; The Clausula in Ammianus Marcellinus. 177 Turning- now to the instances of Meyer's clausula among the sen- tence endings, we find still less evidence than in Book XXI. Four out of the six cases (1, 2, 4, 5) are not founded on the manuscript, which gives in each instance a regular clausula. Another (3) is certainly to be held corrupt on internal evidence, and the sixth may be explained on the basis of the peculiar but not otherwise unsub- stantiated pronunciation qiiibus} None of these cases is supported by responding clausulae in the surrounding text. If the testimony for this clausula is weak, it is weaker still for the other types of A, and for the cadences B, C and D, for the admission of which there is no a priori argument. Yet it differs only in degree and not in kind, since there are examples of each of these clausulae that are superficially sound. More than that, we have among the sentence-endings (17, 18) an example of responsion in C quite as specious as the case in Book XXI just discussed, and I can cite one in D (II. 215. 15 proferrc gestiens = aequitatis tramitem) which can only be disposed of by transposition in both clausulae. For this reason it would not be logical to admit Meyer's clausula and exclude the others. Nor would it be logical to hold that cases of responsion in any cadence are valid, and to shut out the isolated cases, for in the first place the responsions are entirely too few in proportion to the isolated cases, and in the second place they are no more difficult to dispose of than the latter. Therefore we must assume either that Ammianus made an illogical and extremely in- frequent use of all these irregular cadences, or that he did not employ any of them at all. Between these alternatives the decision must be made, it seems to me, in favor of the latter, when the general condition of the text of Ammianus is taken into consideration. Were his text- tradition perfect, we should of course have a perfect reproduction of his clausulae; but, as we have already seen, it is so far from mstittita iavt revertamtir I. 201. 13 ; ordines r. II. 100. 24 ; ordinem r. II. 315. 25; fleximus r. II. 137. 27; dedinavimus r. II. 214. 18; tandem ad coepfa I. 75. 23 ; referamus ad coepta II. 103. 21 ; ad ordinem remeabo coep- torian I. 306. 32 ; (cf. II. 134. 18) redejindum ad texttim I. 23. 6 ; pergamns ad reliqua I. 284, 7; II. 66. 5; ad residua narranda pergamns II. 63. 15 ; rfde- amtis ad cetera II. 151. 22 ; hinc ad exorsa I. 128. 3 ; repetetur ordo gestorum I. 30. 29 ; redeam unde diverti I. 87. 14 ; II. 246. 10 ; regrediar institiitum II. 209. 28. The list is, I think, complete; transitiones^ marking the introduction of a new subject, are of course omitted. » See p. 228, 230. 178 Austin Morris Harmon, perfect as to be nearly the worst possible.^ Consequently, in case Ammianus consistently restricted himself to the use of the regular forms, we could not expect to tind a consistent reproduction of these forms in our text of his work. We should look for the introduction of a moderate number of irregular cadences of all descriptions ; naturally some few of these cadences would be in close enough proximity to suggest responsion, and in some few of them the cor- ruption would be latent. And this is precisely the state of affairs that we find in our text. The probabilities, then, are strong against the validity of any of the irregular cadences. We may therefore bring to a close our long discussion of the forms employed by Ammianus with the statement that except for two forms V and VI, used for the handling of long words and so infrequent as to play but an infinitesimal part in his rhythm, he seems to have used only the four forms I-IV, which, even in our corrupt text, are well-nigh universal. TYPES. To name the types in which the four regular forms occur I have adopted the system devised by Zielinski for the quantitative clau- sula. This consists simply in taking the longest form (IV) and as- signing a Greek letter to each place in it where a caesura may occur. Thus : ^ y (V t ^ 1] & Consequently a clausula having but a single caesura will be denoted by a single Greek letter, which will be /3 if the caesura follow the first syllable, ;' if it follow the second syllable, and so on: a clau- sula having two or more caesuras will be denoted by two or more Greek letters, each determined after the method just described. A clausula having no caesura is signified by the letter u. Under this nomenclature the types which occur in Book XXI (Coll. I) and among my sentence-endings (Coll. 11) are classified in the following list, which, for the second collection, also gives com- plete statistics as to the length of the first word in each type. » See p. 122. The Clausula in Amniianus Marcellinus. 179 Table of Types. Form I. Coll. I Coll. II nosse confingit 171 perculsus abscessit 140 353 509 periere conplures 143 509 posteritatis ostendit 45 obstinationis extremae 10 90 104 223 24 5 22 38 112 46 6 23 24 1 2 0 3] (5 210 223 passibus citis confluxerit Romam inferentibus plura seditionibus possint j'd 75 112 vilis et parva defensor et cautus aestimatur et salus instituere non pauca /3 7 24 sol aestimatur Thebais adpellatur ^r 1 2 hinc ad exorsa ^r6 1 1 0 3 (id prae me ferens) toleraturi 648 873 Coll. I Coll. II Form II. semper innocui 21 vertuntur indaginem 25 195 99 properabat intrepidus 41 velocitate letabilis 11 adulatione flagrantium 1 opifex callidus 18 104 28 suppeteret copia 7 civitatibus perviis 3 asper et vehemens 7 68 46 ademptis et dentibus 19 instrumenta non levia 17 lacesseretur ut ceteri 3 vivLis exustus est 8 7 26 fateri conpulsus est 8 374 199 99 28 yd 68 46 ademptis et dentibus 19 46 26 180 Austin Morris Harmon, Coll. I Coll. II 374 199 remeare j^ermissus est 9 continuare praeceptus est 1 (5^ 4 2 acta vel dicta sunt 1 cadavera tracti sunt 1 (Tyaneus Apollonius) 0 haec et similia 1 (turn apud Naessum) 0 (haec prosecutus est) 0 Form III. /3 1 0 ^Y 3 1 ^6 2 0 r^ 1 0 885 202 Coll. I Coll. II magna decernebatur 25 y 37 55 monstrare poUicebatur 18 55 altiora meditaturum 9 perrumperetur impropugnata 3 collibus abdiderunt 284 6 285 540 memoria commendarent 197 540 confidentius inruperunt 51 incitatissimo tribuentes 8 foedus ut apparebat 16 yd 83 43 certabant et dignitate 13 43 documentis et vindicanda 12 felicitatis ut videbatur 2 de 35 36 rexerat pro praefectis 25 36 docebimus et aperte 9 exercitibus et salutem 2 advectae sunt per Catonem 2 obiecti sunt praeter morem 2 fuisse quod evenit 3 Form IV. tristium clamitantibus 6 15 discrimine penetrabile 9 laturus et necessaria 4 24 19 yds 4 yH 0 ya 1 345 2 2 3 681 Coll. I y 18 Coll. II 15 yd 6 4 The Clausula in Amniiatiiis Marcclliuus. 181 Coll. I Coll. II 24 19 12 4 7 0 r& 0 76 iC 7^6 47 0 31 ^f 12 4 eminuit ut docebimus 4 /us Marcellinus. 189 Antepenultimate Words long short total "/^ short antepenult antepenult I (first word) 143 80 223 36 II (first word) 18 11 29 38 (last word) 1^00 74 174 43 III (first word) 368 207 575 36 IV (first word) 11 15 26 (last word) 23 8 26 663 390 1053 37 In the dissyllables^ leaving out of account the three collocations of which there are only two examples each, we observe that in every position in which they occur the ratio of short penults is approximately the same as the mean ratio of 23 per cent, the min- imum being 20 and the maximum 26. Compare with this the state of affairs in the antepenultimate words. Passing over for the moment the figures for IV, we find that the lowest proportion of short syl- lables under accent is 36, the highest 43, with a mean of 37.^ Between the highest ratio of short accented syllables in dissyllabic words and the lowest in antepenultimates there is a difference of 10 per cent, and between the two averages of 23 and 37 a difter- ence of 14 per cent. The dissyllables accordingly present a very constant ratio of approximatel}' three with long penult to one with short, while the antepenultimate words present an equally constant but considerably higher ratio of approximately three long accented syllables to two short. On the supposition that Ammianus chose his words with any re- ference to the quantity of their accented syllables the constanc}' of each of these ratios and the fact that they differ from one an- other cannot be explained. On the contrary, such a result is just what we should look for if we knew him to have observed nothing but accent. For it is obvious that in the Latin vocabulary the dis- syllables with short penult must stand in a certain numerical relation to those with long penult, and the words with short accented an- tepenult to those with long ; and it is highly improbable that the nvunerical relation would be the same in both cases. In any chance collection of dissyllables or of antepenultimate words, the one ratio ^ In IV the lai-ge proportion of short syllables in the first word is due purely to chance ; the small proportion in the second word, on the contrary, bears witness to the fact that the ratio is naturally smaller in pentesyllables than in trisyllables and tetrasyllables. See below. 190 Austiji Morris Harmon, would show itself in the diss3dlal)les, the other in the antepenulti- mates. The presumption is therefore that the two different ratios which we actual!}' find are these two natural ratios of frequency ; and this presumption is not difficult to confirm. In order to establish the natural proportion of longs to shorts under accent a count in the dictionary is the first means that sug- gests itself, but not the best, for it does not take into consideration the relative frequency of words. I made a small test, however, on this basis. For the dissyllables I selected the letter F in order to avoid prepositions, which would cause an abnormal proportion of long penults, and found that of the dissyllables beginning with that letter 24 per cent had a short accented syllable. For the antepen- ultimates I counted three pages at random under each letter of the alphabet, and found that 42.6 per cent had a short antepenult. A better means of proof would be afforded by prose writers, could we hit upon one who did not use ciausulae.^ Unfortunately it is only in modern Latinity that we can be sure, without investigation, that quantity is neglected, and I therefore selected Ritschl's Latin speeches {Opusc. V, 627—684) for examination. The count was made in the last two or three words preceding each heavy stop, and yielded 267 dissyllables, of which 25 per cent had a short penult, and 358 words with antepenultimate accent, of which 43 per cent had the syllable short. For the dissyllables it was also possible to make a test in hexameter verse, which admits all the varieties of scansion that they can assume. Choosing for this purpose the first Epistle of Horace, I found that 24 per cent of the diss3ilables occurring in it had a short penult. Of course we must not press these figures too close, for they are all of them founded on small counts. But they certainly show clearl}' that the natural proportion of short accented syllables to long is much lower in diss3'llables than in antepenultimate words, and that in the case of dissyllables this natural proportion must be about 3 long to 1 short, in the case of antepenultimates about 3 long to 2 short. Consequently the ratios which we found in Am- mianus accord with the natural ratios. To remove any lingering doubt we may pursue the investigation a little farther. Up to this point we have lumped all antepenulti- 1 Tliinking that this might be the case in Tacitus I counted the dissyllables occurring in the chapter-endings of the Histories and found a proportion of 36 per cent short ! This heavy proportion is abnormal — it is appai-ently due to his avoidance of the cretic-trocliaic clausula. The Clausula in Aunmanus Marcellinus. 191 mate words together. Let us now classify them according to length and see what ratio we find in Ammianus in trisyllables, in tetra- syllables and in pentesyllables. The facts are expressed in per- centages in this table. ^ I II III IV (first word) (last word) (first word) (first word) (la St word) "/o short o/o short "/o short <'/o short average tris3-llables 29 33 36 29 34 tetrasyllables 46 50 42 [63] 46 pentesyllables [38] 11 11 17 The results are illuminating. Each sort of word shows a different ratio, which is constant no matter in what clausula or in what place in the clausula the word occurs.^ Such a condition cannot be due to anything but the working of natural laws of frequency, and we ma}^ spare ourselves the pains of seeking confirmation of each ratio from outside evidence. In all words, then, in which the Latin language admits short ac- cented syllables, we find short syllables occurring in the clausulae of Ammianus in a proportion which shows no trace of intentional tampering with quantities, and which can only be ascribed to the influence of natural laws of frequenc}'. The conclusion therefore is inevitable that Ammianus was indifferent to quantity under accent. QUANTITY IN UNACCENTED SYLLABLES. It remains to be demonstrated that in unaccented syllables Kn\- mianus observed quantity by position and neglected vowel-quantity. His regard for position evinces itself in two ways : (1) in an effort to avoid positional lengthening in the case of the first unaccented syllable, and (2) in an effort to secure positional lengthening in the case of the second unaccented syllable.^ The effort to avoid positional lengthening asserts itself in all forms, but onl}^ in types with ;' caesura [nosse confingit). For in all other * Words of 6 syllables are too few to give a ratio of any value. * In the two percentages bracketed the count is a very small one (19 tetrasyllables as the first word in IV, 24 pentesyllables as the first word in I). The percentages given under III are based on the largest counts. Statistics as to the length of the first word as well as that of the last are given for all forms in the tables of types, p. 179 ff). * The first of these two observations is Meyer's {Ges. Abh. II. 264 — 265), the second is my own. 192 Austin Morris Harmon, clausulae with the exception of I ii the first unaccented syllable is the penult of a word with antepenultimate accent {Claudius Caesar, opijex callidus etc.) and of necessity is always short, except in rare cases of abnormal accentuation.^ In I [i {sol aestimatur) Ammianus might easily have shortened the syllable in question, but as a matter of fact it is long in all 24 cases and long by position in all but 3.^ In types with y caesura {y and ;' (V in each form) the tendency to avoid positional lengthening manifests itself clearly. These are the statistics. makes does not make position position total Hiatus Vowel -f cons., V owel + 2 Final -7it. ,-ns cons. -f cons. Form cons . -f- vowel cons. -\- vow el I 60 486 38 22 17 623 II 17 133 8 7 8 173 III 21 73 2 3 6 105 IV 2 2 0 0 1 5 100 694 48 32 32 906 It will be remarked that cases in which a syllable ending in -nt or -ns precedes a vowel (redieruw/ infecto) are registered among the combinations which do not make position. Although according to classical usage -7tt and -ns should suffice in themselves to lengthen the syllable which they terminate, it is certain that they do not in Ammianus, for when such a syllable precedes the ;- csesura it is customarily followed by a word beginning with a vowel, while when it precedes the () ceesura in types in which our second rule is observed it is followed by a word beginning with a consonant.-^ These syllables are therefore treated exactly as if they ended in a single consonant. ' Five cases are registered under III in our table above : I. 28. 17 Amano disparanUtr ; I. 43. 21 in Aegypto trucidantnr ; I. 27. 30 CalycaJmts interscindit ; I. 178. 30 de'inceps prohibcrent ; I. 130. 32 deinde sunt progrcssi. Tliey show how far Ammianus went in his indifference to quantity. ^ This must not be interpreted as evidence of a desire to lengthcfi the syllable. In this type Ammianus paid no attention at all to quantity. See pp. 193, 196. ' In the first case there are 27 instances of -nt and 5 of -ns before a vowel (as in redierunt infecto) against 3 of -nt before a consonant {remanerent magistris) : in the second case there are 26 instances of -nt and 7 of -ns before a consonant (as in nesciens missum) against 2 of -nt and 1 of -ns before a vowel {snfficiens aqua). The phenomenon is due to the nasalization of n. The Clausula in AuDiiiaiius Marcclliinis. 19 3 This point understood, the language of the table needs no further interpretation.^ And its testimony is extremely clear. We find that when the first unaccented syllable is followed by caesura it makes position in less than 3 per cent of the cases in form I, less than 5 per cent of those in form II and less than 6 per cent of those in form III. As for form IV there are only 5 cases among the sen- tence-endings, one of which lengthens the syllable by position. The material is so small that we must bring in further testimony. Among the clausulae from Book XXI I note that of 9 cases of IV with y caesura position is made in onl}^ one; and in the 17 cases of IV ;' cited on page 182 there are only 3 in which the syllable in question is lengthened. Consequently in this form as well as in the others Ammianus' inclination to avoid position manifests itself. It is plain, therefore, that when the first unaccented syllable came before a caesura, Ammianus did not like to lengthen it by position. But he had no scruples against allowing it to be long by nature, for it is thus long in 30 per cent of its occurrences. This proportion leaves no room for assuming the slightest preference on his part for a short syllable, since we may ascribe the predominance of shorts to the fact that almost all finite verb-forms have a short final syllable. 2 We may note further that Ammianus was very little troubled by hiatus, for it occurs in 11 per cent of the clausulae. Let us turn now to a consideration of the state of affairs in the second unaccented syllable. The tendency here is not to avoid position, but to secure it. It is not displayed in all forms, but only in I and II, and is not quite universal within these limits. In I j3 there is no inclination at all to lengthen the second unac- cented syllable, which is short in 12 of the 24 cases. In I y and II ;' the tendenc}' comes to the surface. Here the syllable follows the caesura, and is in the one case the first syllable of a penultimate trisyllable (nosse confingit) and in the other the first syllable of an antepenultimate tetrasyllable (semper innocui). Examination shows that in I ;' the syllable is long by position in 1 The fact that to the ear of Ammianus a syllable terminating in a vowel does not make position before a word beginning with 2 consonants {venire praecepit) is in accordance with the prevailing practice of the poets and we need not dwell upon it. ' The proportion is approximately the same in all forms : in 1 it is 3G per cent, in II 27 per cent, in IH 42 per cent. This is as close an agreement as we could reasonably expect. 194 Austin Morris Harmon, 79 per cent of the cases, long by nature without making position in 17 per cent and short in 4 per cent. In II ;' it is long by pos- ition in 76 per cent of the cases, long by nature without position in 16 per cent, and short in 8 per cent. To ascertain how far these proportions vary from the natural, I took as the basis for an estim- ate the penultimate trisyllaliles and antepenultimate tetrasyllables that begin the clausula in various forms and types (as venire prae- cepit, conjluxerit Romam). Here I found that words like venire had the first syllable long by position in 31 per cent of their occur- rences, long by nature without position in 34 per cent, and short in 85 per cent, while words like conjluxerit showed 52 per cent long by position, 20 per cent long by nature only, and 28 per cent short. These ratios may not be very accurate, for they were not based on large counts ; but they are accurate enough for our purpose. They show clearly that there is a marked tendency toward po- sitional lengthening of the syllable which we are considering. Though the actual results attained are similar in both forms, the tendency is stronger in I than in II, for in the latter form the natural ratio of syllables long by position is much higher than in form I.^ We come now to the d and ;' cV types, in which the second un- accented syllable precedes a caesura (as passiZ'//^ citis, vilis et parva). The two tables which follow will show that position is sought in I d and ;' 6 and in II ;' cV, and that it is neglected in II (5 and in all types of III and IV with 6 caesura. aj Quantity observed makes position does not make position total cons. -j- cons, vowel -^2 final -nt, -ns vowel -|- cons., hiatus Form consonants -|~ "^'owel cons. -|- vowel I (J 201 7 1 14 0 223 yd 110 0 1 10 112 II 7 d 46 0 1 0 0 47 357 7 3 15 0 382" * In I y there seems to be a slight inclination toward conscious lengthening- of tlie syllable befoi'e the caesura when the S3^11able follow- ing it is short, as in remanerejit magistros. It is not at all consistently carried out, for it is only illustrated in 7 sentence-endings, while thei-e are on the one hand 15 cases in which the short syllable is not preceded by a lengthened one (as in ruentes aperta^ ferieiida dederimt)^ and on the other hand 10 in which the lengthened syllable is not followed by a short one (as in tandem perveni). Yet in view of the fact that each of The Clausula in Annniauus Marcellinus. 195 « b) Quantity neglected makes position does not make position total cons. 4" cons. vowel -[-2 final -nt, , -ns vowel -f- cons., hiatns Form consonants + ■ v^ow el cons. -|- vow 'el lid 15 4 2 7 1 29 \\\d 160 29 7 329 15 540 yd 35 0 4 7 1 47 di 12 0 1 22 1 36 IV (all 6 types) 12 2 3 13 1 ^31 These tables require very little comment. At first glance one might be tempted to include III ;' (V among the clausulae in which position is sought, inasmuch as it has its monosyllable long by position in 75 per cent of the cases. But the ratio is purely natural, for in I /3 {sol aestimatur) and in III ^ t {poterant nee cavcri) the monosyllable makes position to precisely the same extent. Our investigations have shown us that under certain circum- stances Ammianus made a distinct effort to avoid positional leng- thening in the first unaccented syllable and to secure it in the second. It should be mentioned further that in 28 cases of form II with C caesura {vivus exustus est) and 6 of IV with /> caesura {fiden- tius absolutus est) the next-to-the last syllable uniforml}' fails to make position. This fact, however, may be quite unintentional, for even if no attempt were made to avoid position here it would seldom occur.^ Consequently it is hardly on a par with the phenomena that we have been discussing. We may note, though, that the syllable is long by nature 6 times in II and once in IV. When it is not in caesura {semper innocui etc.), it is bound to be short as a result of the penultimate law. In forms III and IV the third and fourth unaccented syllables show no trace of any attention to position. But the fact that they are so often both long {cernebatur) and so rarely both short {tribu- entes) appears to be indicative of a slight abnormality which I should refer to Ammianus' desire to avoid the hexameter close. these two peculiarities is so rare, tlie occurrence of both together in so many cases cannot be set down to mere coincidence. It points to a futile desire to avoid the hexameter tag — ^-^ --^ . ' The combinations of participle and auxiliary that would naturally occur most frequently do not give position {tractns, tracta, tractum est : tracti^ tractae^ tracta sunt). 196 Austin Morris Ilarnion, Our investigations thus far have been based on statistics from the collection of sentence-endings. If we extend them to the inte- rior clausulae we shall find that there also the same tendencies to- ward the avoidance of position in the first unaccented syllable and the effort to secure it in the second assert themselves, but to a less extent. It will be of advantage to make this evident in such a way as at the same time to summarize our results for the final clausulae. The estimates for interior clausulae are founded upon Book XXI. In form I, type ;' {nosse confingit) when the clausula is final the syllable preceding the caesura fails to make position in 97 per cent of the cases, and the syllable following the caesura makes position in 79 per cent; when the clausula is interior the respective per- centages are 87 and 68. In I y6 (vilis et parva) final clausulae show the syllable preceding the ;' caesura positionally short in 97 per cent of the cases and the monosyllable long by position in 98 per cent ; interior clausulae in 95 per cent and 91 per cent respectively. In I (3 (passihus citis) the first unaccented syllable must always be short in virtue of the penultimate law: the second displays posit- ional lengthening in approximateh^ 90 per cent of the clausulae both final and interior. In II ;' [semper innocui) the syllable preceding the caesura fails to make position in 94 per cent of the final clausulae and in 82 per cent of the interior; the syllable following the ceesura makes position in 76 per cent of the final clausulae, and in 72 per cent of the interior. In II y(^ (asper et vehemens) the syllable preceding the / caesura fails to make position in 100 per cent of the final clausulae, 94 per cent of the interior ; the monosyllable makes position in 98 per cent of the final clausulae and 85 of the interior. In III ;' and ytS {magna decernebatur) the syllable before the cae- sura is not lengthened by position in 94 jjer cent of the final clau- sulae and in 86 of the interior. There are onl}' 5 cases of IV with ;' caesura among the sentence- endings, and 9 among the clausulae in Book XXI ; one example in each case has the syllable before the caesura positionally lengthened. In I ^, in II /:; and II 6 and in all types of III and IV without ;' caesura quantity by position plays no part. We find, then, that Ammianus' inclination to observe quantity by position is nowhere carried out with strict regularit}', and that it is considerabl}' less prominent in interior clausulae than in final. The explanation of this fact is that observance of quantity in the The Clausula in Atnniiaiuis Marcellitms. 197 clausulae is subordinated to observance of accentual rhythm. A clau- sula quantitatively imperfect is now and then (often, it is to be presumed, unconsciously) admitted by Ammianus because it satis- fies the accentual requirements, which are more important ; and such clausulae are more frequent in the body of the sentence than at its end, because a cadence which precedes a slight pause is much less deeply impressed on the ear than one which comes before a full stop, and any quantitative fault that it may have is therefore less obvious not only to the reader but to the writer as well. ORIGIN OF THE ACCENTUAL CLAUSULA. In our study of the nature of Ammianus' clausulae we have de- termined that his rhythm is based on the recurrence of four ac- centual cadences : I r\j r\j rv P^ r\j II rO r\j r\j r^ r^^ rsj III 1^ f\j rsj r^ r'^ r^ rsj IV (^r\jr^^rsjr\jr^r\jr\j Though the rhythm in these cadences is primarily accentual it is not purely accentual, for in the first and second unstressed syllables quantity by position plays a certain part in the form of a tendency to shorten the one and lengthen the other. It is beyond dispute that these clausulae derive their origin from corresponding quantitative forms. The metrical prototypes, in the establishment of which the researches of Meyer and Zielinski have featured most prominently, are 1 ^ ^- 2 -^ ^ 3 -^ — - 4 '- ^ - The clausula 4 is rare: it is chiefly used, like its accentual deri- vative, as a means of handling long words, and not all writers employ it. The other three, however, are extremely frequent, and show a steady increase in popularity. Without taking into con- sideration the modifications of these forms produced by substitution and resolution we find that in entire purity they constitute nearly 45 per cent of Cicero's sentence-endings and 69 per cent of Cyprian's clausulae. Ziehnski would interpret all of Cicero's clausulae in terms of these cretic-trochaic forms. However it may be with that theory (for which I do not hold a brief), it cannot be denied that Cyprian's Traxs. Coxx. Acad.. Vol. XVI. 13 Oct., 1910. 198 Austin Morris Hariuo)i, clausulae are to l:)e thus interpreted, for beside the three pure forms the only clausulae that he uses with any frequency are ^ -^ ^ — : — ^=^ itineris errore ^ ^ v.. ^ : -1- :=i ipse teneatur j^^ — : -:!- w ^ rursus imposuit These are obviously all modihcations of form 1, each produced by the resolution of a single long. All together, the three simple forms and the three moditications of the tirst form are found in about 92 per cent of Cyprian's clausulae, and are therefore become practically universal in him.^ The connecting link between these quantitative clausulae and the accentual clausulae in Ammianus is to be found in the coincidence of accent and ictus in the former. Just as through coincidence of accent and ictus the hexameter-close in Latin usually presents the accentual scheme fu r>^ ij \ r^ r^ r^ r\j . This latter clausula, being the accentual equival- ent of a resolved form of the metrical clausula (^. ^ j ^^^^i) should logically have gone out of use, as did the accent scheme of the other resolution -^ _ .--I ^ ^=^, but it is conserved, as we have said, by Sedulius and many others. Its retention seems to be solely due to the fact that its metrical prototype was the Ciceronian esse videatur clausula which is recommended b}' all grammarians in chorus from Quintilian on. Although in . this re- * These words were written in 1908. Ow^ing to an unfortunate coni- bination of circumstances I am unable to turn to account several dissei'- tations which have appeai'ed since then. 200 Aitstin Morris Harmon, sp;_'Ct and in the disuse of IV Sedulius differs slij^htly from Ammianus, he is in essential agreement with him in his attitude toward quan- tity, for he too disregards quantity under accent, and observes quantity by position in unaccented syllables. Failure rightly to appreciate this fact has materially lessened the value of Candel's work upon Sedulius.^ Yet he himself noted that Sedulius in I ;' and II ;' freely allows the syllable before the caesura to be long by nature, but does not allow it to make position.^ And there is another obvious peculiarity of the same sort (not noted by Candel) in the clausula i■ Cic. /. .-. ; Quint. IX. 4. 125. ^ Tor a discussion of the meaning of the word pei-iod see Blass, Rkythmen der asian, ti. rom. Kunstprosa, p. 'd ff. 202 Austin Morris Harmon, We have seen that there is no essential distinction in Ammianus between the clausulae which end sentences and those which end interior kola. In both cases the same forms and types occur. "We fomid, however, that in the interior clausulae he displayed somewhat more laxity in his observation of positional quantity than in the final clausulae because it is the final clausulae that dwell longest in the ear. And we noted in passing another difference which was reserved for fuller consideration here, in the point that neither in the relative frequency of the forms with reference to one another, nor in the relative frequency of the various types of each form is there close agreement between the statistics furnished from Book XXI and those from the collection of sentence-endings. As to the fre- quency of the forms the statistics are here expressed in percentages. Book XXI vSentence-endi I 45.5 48.8 II 27 11.3 III 24.2 38 IV B.2 1.8 Following the hint given b}' this comparison I have examined the facts in Book XXI ; they are Interior Final I 45.6 45.7 II 30 11.1 III 20.9 40.4 IV 3.3 2.6 The relative proportions of the forms are obviously the same in the final clausulae in this book as in the other nine books, though I is slightly less frequent, IV slightly more frequent than usual. But the relative proportions in the interior clausulae are quite different. Form II shows a great increase, form III a great decrease in fre- quency, while I and IV remain aliout the same. We find, then, that II is preferred over III before minor pauses and that III is much more favored than II as fiual clausula. If we pursue the in- vestigation into the typology of these cadences, it becomes clear that thr falling off in III as an interior clausula is all in type 6 icollibiis abdiderunt) ; the falling off in II as a final clausula is marked in all t3i)es, but greatest in () (opifcx callidus)} Furthermore, though * The fact that II ('lausulae with f caesura (v/vus exiistus est) are more comniou at the end of the sentence than in the interior has uo signif- icance; it is simply because verbs are more frequent at the end of the sentence. The Clausula in Aiuiuia)iiis Marcellinus. 203 I is equally common both at the end of the sentence and within it, the tyjje I 6 is in slightly greater favor as an interior than as a final clausula, and, strangely enough, I /3 (50/ aestimalur) is more common as a final clausula than it is within the sentence. Beyond this slight contrast between interior and final clausulae, there is little art superficially discernible in the arrangement and the sequence of the cadences. In general they seem to follow one another almost at hap-hazard, and there is little attempt to group them on principles of balance and contrast. But passages that are more carefully constructed sometimes occur. Far and away the best of these is the lofty flight of rhetoric in which Ammianus epit- omizes the rise and dechne of the Roman commonwealth (XIV. 6. 3—6). This is well worth quoting in its entirety. Tempore quo primis auspiciis in mundanum fulgorem surgeret ut victura dum erunt homines Roma, ut augeretur sublimibus incrementis foedere pacis eternae Virtus convenit atque Fortuna plerumqiie dissidentes, quorum si altera defuisset ad perfectam non venerat summitatem. eius populus ab incunabulis primis adusque pueritiae tempus extremum quod annis circumcluditur fere trecentis circummurana pertulit bell^., deinde aetatem ingressus adultam post multiplices bellorum aerumnas Alpes transcendit et fretum, in iuvenem erectus et virum, ex omni plaga quam orbis ambit immensus reportavit laureas et triumphos, iamque vergens in senium et nomine solo aliquotiens vincens ad tranquilliora vitae discessit. ideo urbs venerabilis post superbas efferatarum gentium cervices oppressas latasque leges fundamenta libertatis et retinacula sempiterna velut frugi parens et prudens et dives Caesaribus tamquam liberis suis regenda patrimonii iura permisit : II, I III, I III I, I III III III 16 ir 1/ Id ir I/' !;'() I 7 (J Ir III II r6 I (5, Id I7 II I I m I I I 204 Austin Morris Harmon, el olim licet otiosae sint tribus I pacataeque centuriae 11 et nulla suffragiorum certamina II set Pompiliani redierit 7 securitas temporis ; II per omnes tamen quotquot sunt partes terrarum I ut domina suscipitur et regina, III et ubique patrum reverenda cum auctoritate canities II populique Romani nomen circumspectum et verecundum. Ill We need not undertake a minute analysis of this passage, for its rhythmical structure is quite apparent. Even in the sentence which opens it and in the two sentences at its close there is more regu- larity displaj'ed in the disposition of the cadences than is character- istic of Ammianus' ordinary style. But their structure is not nearly so studied as that of the four connected periods which embrace the whole history of Rome. The first of these, describing Rome's infancy, is made up of four kola, while the other three, dealing respectively with Rome's youth, manhood and old age, are of three kola each. While all these kola are about of the same length, it is worth while to notice that in the first period we have three long kola of 13 syllables each, followed by a shorter one of 10 syl- lables, in the second, two of 11 syllables followed by one of 8, and in the third and fourth a long central kolon of 13 syllables (which in the fourth is broken into two responding kommata) between shorter kola of al)out 10 syllables. Equally artificial is the responsion of the clausulae, all in I until we come to the last kolon of the third period, which is in III (/aureas et triumphos), the change in rhythm adding emphasis to the kolon, which contains the climax of the whole thought. From this climax through the medium of a ca- dence in II we are brought back to the old rh3thm again, in the two responding kommata and in the close of the sentence. It should be noted, too, that the responsion extends even to the types. This is certainl}' a remarkable piece of composition : artifice could hardly be carried further. But it stands quite by itself in Ammianus, of whose general style one can get a satisfactory idea from Book XXI. Though resi^onsion is not regular in Ammianus, it is conspicuous. The three more favored clausulae occur so freely that in their case it would be difficult to show this in any way except by referring to the text itself. Form IV, however, being much less frequent, furnishes us with interesting results. Its occurrences in Book XXI are as follows: p. 125, 9; 126, 29; 127, 13, 23; 130, 13, 18; 131, 6, 21,30,32; 133,2; 135,33; 136,1; 137,11,12,14,19; 138,7,27; The Clausula in Animiamis Marcellimis. 205 141,4; 142,2,20; 143,3,32; 145,32; 146,17,21; 148,17; 149, 8; 150,34; 153,6, 11; 155, 8, 11; 156, 8; 157, 21; 161, 7, 9, 18; 162, 16; 163, 6, 13; 164, 34; 165, 1, 8, 11, 22. Instead of occurring regularly once in every page, the cadences are mostly in groups ranging from 2 to 7 clausulae. But there are also numerous more or less isolated occurrences. The two facts point at once to the predominance of responsion in Ammianus, and to the lack of S3'stem in it. Responsion of course brings it about that in short passages of Ammianus' text the relative proportions of the clausulae vary con- siderably. But any passage of three or four pages will be found to reproduce quite closely the ratios which occur in Book XXI, and which may be mentioned again here as the general norm of use in Ammianus : I 46 II 27 III 24 IV 3 In proof of this consistency in practice I cite the relative per- centages of the cadences in the sentence-endings of the nine books that I have examined. Being linal clausulae, they naturally do not correspond to the ratios in continuous composition, but the uni- formity which exists in them testifies to a like uniformity in general st3le. XIV XV XVI XVII XVII XIX XXIX XXX XXXI Average I 48.8 51.2 56 46.7 44 42 49 53.9 52.1 48.8 II 9.5 12.1 9 14.6 11.2 8.9 11.7 11.8 11.7 11.3 III 41.1 35 34.3 37.5 41.6 46.8 36.2 34.2 33.9 38 IV 0.4 1.5 0.5 1.1 3.2 2 2.9 2.1 1.8 There are discrepancies in these ratios, to be sure, but they are really small — never large enough to indicate any abnormal difference in composition. The incessant repetition of so limited a number of cadences gives rise to two phenomena which deserve brief comment : the produc- tion of unintentional clausulae and of prolonged clausulae. In m}' text of Book XXI I have signalled the existence of numerous ca- dences which upon the whole do not seem to me to be intentional because the pauses which they precede are very slight. ^ But there ' Naturally I do not maintain that I have drawn the line bet^veeu intentional and unintentional clausulae with any gieat accuracy ; the definition is, and must needs l.e, subjective in large measure. 206 Austin Morris Harmon, are also cadences in plent}- which I have not noted, which do not precede pauses but occur in the midst of a grammatical construc- tion.^ Tliese cadences certainl}- cannot be intentional, for the}' con- tradict the whole theory of the clausula, which requires that the clausula should terminate a word-group and not break it. They ought, therefore, theoretically speaking, to have been eliminated ; they occur probably because Ammianus' choice and arrangement of words was so determined b}' rhythm at the end of the clause that ' the numbers came ' in spite of him where they were not in place. To the same cause we must also assign prolonged clausulae like pueriiiac ianpus extremum and aetdtem ingrcssiis adi'tltam, and interlocked clausulae like insidiis fallcrctur occi'tltis and celsiore fidi'icia repugnarent. The interlocked cadences are rather rare ; the prolonged ' dactylic ' rhythms are numerous. There is great danger of error in ascribing to the clausula any profound influence upon the manner of Ammianus. Inquiry would better be directed into the influence of Ammianus' manner upon the clausula. But for such an inquiry there is as yet too little material to give any satisfactor\- results. INFERENCES BASED UPON THE CLAUSULA. Chapter III. Matters Of Proxun'Ciatiox. While the pronunciation of Ammianus in the main conforms to that which we regard as classical, the clausula reveals many parti- culars that are important. They are for the most part phenomena either of accentuation or of syllabication, and we shall discuss them under these two captions. The illustrative material cited is drawn from the entire text of the Histories, although, in the case of phenomena which occur frequently, no attempt has been made to register every instance. ACCENT. In the construction of Ammianus" cadences phrase or sentence accent, as distinguished from word accent, plays very little part. I find no instances in which this factor produces a shift of word- ^ The reader will find examples in almost any page of Book XXI. The Clausula in Aminiamts Marcclliuus. 207 accent, — .such a shift, for example, as ap])ears to occur in ilium patreni and the hke in Plautus and Terence. To its influence, however, we must attribute encHsis and prochsis, of which the ex- amples in Ammianus are frequent but not especially remarkable. As a rule they are monosyllaljles, including forms of esse, prepo- sitions, conjunctions, and pronouns. But proclitic dissyllables, usu- ally prepositions, sometimes occur, as in I. 11.2 tunc apud Siden, II. 41. 21 dimicans inter primos, I. 235. 27 discubuit inter ceteros. It is noteworthy that Ammianus' usage is not entirely con.sistent, since on the one hand words ordinarily atonic sometimes bear accent, and on the other hand words that are ordinarily accented are sometimes atonic. Thus monosyllabic forms of esse are not uncommon as the first word in I (so I. 9. 18 scopulis sunt controversa ; 16. J 4 inditutn est cognonientum ; II. 224. 23 iustuni quid sit ignoranti), and vice versa we find monosyllabic nouns deprived of their natural accent in cases like I. 167. 27 sagittariorum pars maior; 256. 19 mea mens mtgurat; II. 267. 17 splendore liinari nox fulgens. So there are many diss\'llal)les that seem to have an abnormally heavy accent (as I. 14. 7 pubc tc'nus amicti; 16, 26 atque macstitiain-^ 235. 13 erat acturus; 256. 17 esse vertendum; 256. 30 iter si'iuin pracire; II. 136. 19 saevum quideni d rudein ; 144. 9 ille Cretrnsis), and a few that are used as if they were atonic, of which the most conspicuous case is I. 51. 16 noyi potest corpus. Such peculiarities may fairl}^ be as- cribed to the working" of sentence-accent, although we cannot ex- clude the possibility that in some cases the stress or the lack of it may be effected arbitrarily in the effort to secure a clausula. Though the clausula teaches us little about sentence-accent, it brings out a number of interesting points in regard to word-accent. Let us first consider the composita. In uiagisquam and potiusquam we have two compounds not previously recognized. For the one I may cite I. 248. 24 magisquam consultius and II. 127. 29 magisquam severus: for the other, I. 298.3 potiusquam fluit, 137. 12 potiusquam simultate, and II. 41. 8 potius- quam tdel)atur} Another new compound is rtiamtum, as in II. 162.4 ctia Inst. XV. 29; cf. XV. 10. * Hence II. 105. 21 aliquando Romanorum is to be emended into ali- qiia7ido Romanum, comparing the instance last cited. » E. g. Priscian, Inst. V. 63 and Part. 26; cf. Sommer, p. 101. * Inst. VIII. 35 ; Part. 127 ; cf. Sommer, pp. 102—103. 210 Austin Morris Harmon, The most interesting observation of this nature in that in hoc modo the accent falls upon the noun, whereas in Jmiusniodi and various other compounds of the sort the noun is enclitic. hoc modo : I. 162. 25 paulatim hoc modo ; II. 85. 10 prudens hoc modo; 176. 16 inscdens hoc modo; 1.328. 24 autem hoc modo huiusmodi : I. 13.14 cogitabat hiiinsmodi ; 33. 1 huinsmodi scru- tahaiiir: 313. 15 huinsmodi forma est; cf. I. 148. 10; 236. 13; II. 178. 30 uniusmodi : II. 205. 26 uniusmodi pcrfcrentcs -modo- I. 248. 5 qiioqnomodo corrigcudnm; 305. 19 qnodammodo spirant; II. 49. 6 tantummodo tcncbatnr; 96. 31 tantununodo vulneratis -modum. : I. 28. 2 admoduni pattca ; II. 20. 26 propcmodnm in- acccsso Word-accent in Ammianus conforms almost entirely to the classi- cal usage ; there are, however, a few noteworthy points which must be enumerated. Penultimate vowels followed by a mute and a liquid do not take the accent unless they are long by nature. Thus we have magnae delubra (I. 285. 18), visitur ant dcliibrum (II. 237. 11), and longius circnmldtrans^ (I. 305. 16), but — tenel:)ras : I. 84. 2 tenebras adfulsisse ; II. 222. 1 1 tenebris amcn- dasset; 172. 7 tenebris reptabamus latebris: II. 119. 16 latebris amendarunt; 197. 11. /. oportunis inlecebris: I. 288. 1 rapicbatur inl; II. 14. 24; 123. 31 ; 271. 20 integrum: I. 51. 11 absolvitur integris; 118. 26; 198. 29; II. 175.4 muliebri : I. 1 66. 24 muliebri sexu lugubres : II. 171.22 higubres inchidebat The results coincide again with the testimony of the gramma- rians, which is opposed, however, to that of the Romance languages. Lindsay is apparently right in assuming that in vulgar speech a .short penult followed by a mute and a liquid took the accent, while in educated speech it did not do so.- The only case in Ammianus of a verb which has shifted con- jugation is oriri (II. 234. 11 oritur potest; I. 16. 19 adoritur Pauhim; 335.22 inde exoritur; cf 208.21; II. 192.15). This phenomenon, however, is not confined to late writers.^ 1 On the quantity of the a in latmns see Marx, Hiilfsbiichlein^ s. v. * Lindsay, p. 164. * Neue, Formenl. III. 253. TJie Clausula in Aiiniiianus MarcclliiiHs. 211 In the clausula fortuito monstravit 'I. 303. 17) we may note the penultimate accent oi fortuito. In all perfect forms endin^- in -iit the accent falls upon the penult : interiit: I. 50.4; II. 36.10; 90. 15; 130.5; 160.4; 207.13. introiit: I. 248. 11 ; II. 59. 9; 78. 29 ; 118. 3 abiit : I. 268. 1 ; II. 139. 23 transiit: II. 116. 31 desiit : II. 36. 3 For this also we have testimony from other sources.^ Both the perfect subjunctive and the future-perfect indicative seem to have an accented penult in the first and second persons ])lural ; in I. 57. 8 legerimus is subjunctive, while in 11. 10. V^ fecerimus ^.Yl<\ (31) egeritis are indicative. I find no instance of either form with antepenultimate accent.^ There are several cases in which the third person plural of the perfect indicative appears to be accented on the antepenult, not only when the endings is -eruut, but also, oddly enough, where it is -ere. Thus II. 145. 7 oppositis coeperimt; 147. 6 proccsserunt lon- gius; 215. 29 coinpulerunt sedes (where V, however, has compulit], and I. 75. 19 inviae fuere (cf. II. 121. 2fuere gestarum) ; II. 109. 17 intercessere pauci; 194. 22 parave re casus. As it is hardly possible to do away with the cases in -ere by changing them all to -erunt, we must exjDlain them by the inference that the}' derive their accent by analogy from that of forms in -erunt, which, though exceptional, are legitimate. It is an interesting example of reciprocal influence, inasmuch as the usual long e in erunt is thought to have come from -er-e. In the case of genitives in -ius we may assume that the accentu- ation varied from one word to another in ordinary speech. Among the words of this sort employed by Ammianus totius (I. 102. 23 : 154.27; 160.31; 211.11; II. 156.6) and tinius (II. 270. 20) have penultimate accent. On the other hand, I find antepenultimate ac- cent in ipsius (I. 58. 10; II. 220. 2b), illius (I. 21. 7; II. 86. 1 ; 151. 3) and alterius (I. 131. 15; 314. 18). The only marked lapse from correct pronunciation in the direc- tion of Romance development is to be found in the penultimate ^ Cf. Serv. ad Aen. I. 451; Lindsay, p. 182; Sommer, p. 612 ; Bednara, Archiv fiir lat. Lex. XIV. 850. - See Lindsay, p. 500 and Sommer, p. 623. In II. 206. 24 quoque voierinuts is ambiguous, for quoque may be pronounced in three sj-llables (see below). 212 Austin Morris Harmon, accentuation of iiidiciolnm in the clausula noti iudicioli est nostri (II. 119. 30 and 146. 11), which is a distinct vulgarism. ^ But he ac- cents malleolus on the antepenult (I. 244. 14; II. 99.11), and also Pute'olos (II. 147. 9). The evidence for the accentuation of words borrowed from other languages, which has heretofore been somewhat scanty, is con- siderably increased by the material which we get from Ammianus, who often employs foreign words in the clausula. Far the greater part of these words is derived from the Greek, as we should ex- pect, or from some other language through the mediation of the Greek. Such words are not affected by the penultimate law, but they bear an accent derived from the Greek. In support of this statement I shall adduce first a list of words borrowed from the Greek or through the Greek, which according to the penultimate law should be accented on the penult, but are accented by Ammianus on the antepenult. OviJiyya^ appellamus I. 127. 1 6()iL,0PTag. appellamus I. 161. 17 Graeco sermone (Siyo/iitjrig I. 200. 21 vocamus (Xjr67i(>ov6iv I. 201. 1 fragmentis et cylindris II. 274. 12 architecti^ promittebant II. 49. 8; cf. II. 18. 15 et prima species luis pandemus adpellatur, . . . secunda epidemus, . . . tertia loemodes I. 176. 8 monstrat amphicyrti I. 200. 24 heroi consecratis I. 281. 17 Misopogonem appellavit I. 294. 19 Epiphania dictitant I. 2.33. 22 ; cf. Bcfana operatur Adrastia I. 42. 5 ; cf. 269. 10 Antiochiam venimus II. 58. 13; Antiochiae claudi I. 293. 16; cf. I. 25.6; 29.6; 153.27; 195.19; II. 59.4; 143.25; 259. 27 Alexandria et Hermupolis 1.331.2; cf. 329.22; Alexandriae contigit II. 93. 15 Nicomediam pergit II. 83. 18; cf. 84. 23; Nicomediae clades I. 125. 11 • Cf. filioli\ magistro in Commodian {Iiis/r. II. 26. 6, p. 45 Ludwig)^ Faviola and Liliola in Venantius Fortunatus (VIII. 1. 42; 3. 43). See Lindsaj', p. 164 ; Sommer. p. 103 ; Nyrop, Gramm. histor. d. I. Franfaise I (2nd. ed.), p. 161, 137, 7; Jespersen, Lrhrh. d. Phonetik p. 192 §198. "- From u{)-^iiiy.T(><;^ not any^ai-ATMv. V. Saalfeld, Tois. Italogracc. s. v. The Clausula in Amniiamis Marcellinus. 213 Apamiam positi II. 140. 7 prope Ba.siliam II. 207. 18 Abdera visitur I. 275. 9 Ancyram redit I. 285. 32 ; cf. II. 60. 22 Edessam venit I. 222. 3 Arethusae captus I. 51. 18 Calycadnus interscindit I. 27. 30 ingrossus est Perinthum I. 266. 23; cf. II. 274. 30; 275. 18; Apris et Perintho II. 103. 5 Aegyptum petens I. 271. 24; Aegypto circumlata I. 306. 1 ; cf. 306. 12; 295. 21; 43. 21 Euxinus appellatur I. 281. 7; Euxino ponto II. 204. 15 sunt in Hellespontum II. 246. 17 ; cf. 85. 2 ; contentus Hellesponto I. 160. 23 ; cf. II. 242. 5 Cherronesus est propinqua I. 280. 30 ; cf. II. 90. 31 colonia Miletus II. 126. 9 protentam ad Pachynum I. 242. 8 contingit et Abydon I. 275. 20 est Criumetopon I. 278. 26 Darei pater I. 327. 24. Seleuci regis I. 27. 31 ; Nicatoris Seleuci 325. 32 Aesopi cavillationibus 1 II. 214.7 magnus somniabat Alexander I. 45. 22 ; cf. II. 86. 31 ; rapuissent Alexandrum I. 321. 14; cf. 152. 22; 309. 21 ; vicum Alex- andri I. 119. 25; cf. 321. 20; credatur Alexandre I. 214. 6 Menander comicus I. 257. 23 Miconas videbis et Lachetas II. 149. 29 apud Platonem legitur II. 39. 29 Arachotoscrenem appellatam I. 335. 29 transiere Thermodontis I. 278. 19 cognominantur Acontisma II. 101. 30; cf. 81. 28 Tios et Amastris I. 277. 29 These words obviously derive their accent from the Greek : it .should be observed, however, that they are emancipated from the working of the Greek ultima law. For instance, the word cyliudris in being accented on the antepenult not only violates the Latin law because of its long penult but also the Greek law because of its long ultima; both languages (though for different reasons) demand an accent on the penult. We must conclude, therefore, that in such words the antepenultimate accent is brought over from the ' See p. 168 ff. regarding this form of clausula. Trans. Coxn. Acad., Vol. XVI. 14 Oct., 1910. 214 Austin Morn's Hannofi, Greek casus recti (cylindrus = xrAn'(^()oi;), and then retained through- out the Latin inflection in accord with the spirit of the Latin lan- guage. This slight concession to the Latin genius is significant, for it indicates that the mode of accentuation with which we are deal- ing was not peculiar to Ammianus, but was at least more or less general in his time.^ The next list contains words which Ammianus accents in Greek fashion upon a short penult. ^aOLlia et reliqua L 122. 2 ut hvijd^ii Graeci dicimus stultum, et noctem evcfQODjV et furias Evfitvidug I. 281. 8 metuens tyrannidis ^ II. 106. 9 pansa chlam3^de I. 83. 14 Rhodopen et fretum II. 253. 7; cf. 101. 25 Anaphe et Rhodus I. 127. 20 Helicen exsurgens I. 278. 25 Meroe et Delta I. 298. 17 dicitur Orsiloche I. 281. 11 portus Acone I. 278. 3 Jovis filius et Danaes I. 28. 5 latitudinem Sauromatas I. 280. 18 ; II. 235. 1 memorantur Odrysae II. 102. 6 Leontino Gorgia II. 209. 22 Anaxagoras adfirmat L 127. 2; cf. 275. 30 Pythagorae decrevit I. 69. 16 dicitur et Socrates I. 258. 2; cf. II. 146. 14 sollertia Dinocratis I. 303. 13 idem Arsaces II. 51. 11 ; cf. 121. 30 Aristoteles adfirmat I. 232. 12 Aristomenes e latebris II. 160. 7 Hermogene defuncto I. 241. 4 Asclepiades philosophus^ I. 293. 20 philosophus Simonides 11. 169. 19 lyrici Bacchylidis II. 40. 3 Euripidis sepulchrum II. 102.1 ;cf.Sidon.Apoll.IX. 234 Thucydides exponit I. 175. 27 > See pp. 218—220. ■^ The word occurs also in Sedulius with this accentuation : see p. 220. note 1. ' On the accent of philosophus see below, p. 217. The Clausula in Ammiatius Marcellinus. 215 inLsse Persidos I. 328. 16; Persidis I. 28. 24; 319.4; 321.6; II. 54. 18; Persidem 74. 17; 206. 11; Perside I. 321. 26 Hesperidas appellant I. 303. 4 clauditur Maeotidos I. 276. 23. Chalcida transmissi sunt II. 3. 27 Propontideni et Thracias I. 322. 11; cf. 11. 44. 11 insulaeque Stoechades I. 73. 26 atque Cycladas I. 275. 2 sunt Symplegades I. 277. 13 Teredona porrigitur I. 323. 5 The third list comprises a few words that have an accented ultima. Thebais adpellatur I. 117. 17 Copton et Antinou I. 302. 22 Seston et CallipoUn I. 275. 19 Poliorcetes appellatus est II. 9. 9 Perseus memoratur I. 28. 4 Tyaneus Appollonius I. 258. 6 This list is short, but it should be noted that on the analogy of Thebais we can postulate nominatives with accented ultima from the oblique cases of such words as tyrannidis, chlamyde, Persidis, Maeotidos, Chalcida, Propontideuu and probably Teredona. We find, then, in Ammianus a great number of instances in which the Greek accent is taken over with the borrowed word. Against these I can set only a few exceptional cases in which the Greek accent is not preserved. Exceptions are proportionally most frequent among those words which in Greek have an accented ultima. With Seston and Copton in the last list we may compare the following words. choros I. 279. 12 chamiilcis I. 119. 26 Thessali I. 282. 21 Adiabenam I. 310. 25 lyricus I. 18. 11 hydraulica I. 21. 19 hieroglyphicas I. 118. 16 physicae I. 118. 29 mystica I. 171. 19; cf 258. 7 In these cases the accent is thrown back, and its place is appa- rently determined by the penultimate law. But in Aegyptidcae i\. 296. 17 j and Constantidcas (I. 247. 12j it goes back only to the a, which is short. This is paralleled by the statement of a grammarian 216 Austin Morris Harmon. {de acccntilms liber: K. III. 525. 27) : quae autem habent c inter / et u in paenultimo loco, corripiuntur, ut portions Gallicus Italicus Ale- mannicus Romanicus : excipiuntur ea quae habent a, ut Taurinacus. The phenomenon is perhap.s attril^utable to a tendency to accent the broader vowel.^ Against Teredona, in which the accent is probably on the ultima in the nominative, we may set Amdzones i\. 278. 9 : II. 235. 22) and especially Chalccdona (I. 267. 12: 272. 10: II. 89. 27), with recessive accent. There is nothing to show how Ammianus accented the nominative in these two words. In Paphlago (I. 239. 18) it appa- rently falls on a short penult : if this assumption is correct, it may be derived from the oblique cases iPaphldgonis)?- But it is ill arguing from isolated instances. From our limited material it wovild seem that only unfamiliar proper names retain their Greek accent when that would fall upon the ultima — that familiar words, and especially common nouns, throw their accent back to a place usually but not invariabl}' determined by the penultimate law. Ammianus almost always retains the Greek accent when it falls upon the penult or the antepenult. A notable group of exceptions however, is formed by place-names ending in -la, all of which he accents on the antepenult, whether they come from the Greek or not. Thus Bithynia I. 37. 34 : 276. 5 : II. 85. 1 Sicilia I. 43. 22 Dacia I. 48. 17: II. 101. 20 Syria I. 76. 7 Aegyptia I. 119. 4 Mesopotamia I. 123. 3: 154. 18: 208. 18 Pannonia I. 135. 1 : 189. 19 Armenia I. 222. 2 Hiberia I. 241. 1 Mygdonia I. 277. 6 Paphlagonia I. 277. 27 Cilicia I. 309. 32 iMedia I. 311. 22 Assyria I. 324. 9 Phrygia I. 324. 25 Arachosia I. 335. 25 Cajipadocia II. 59. 19 > Cf. hidicioli above, p. 212. * See p. 171. The Clausula in Animiatius MarcelUmis. 217 Galatia II. 87. 6 Lycia II. 87. 10 Asia II. 125. 15 Francia II. 208. 22 Thracia II. 240. 20 Pamphylia II. 245. 26 Macedonia II. 245. 27 Moesia II. 252. 18 This practice is of course due not only to the long usage of Greek names in -m like Mesopotamia, but to their analogy with names purely Latin like Italia, Graecia. It would have been utterly impossible to preserve any rational distinction. The clausula The- baidem et Libyain (I. 302. 17) shows that Libya (Aii-iv)i) belongs in this category. From Eusebia (I. 94. 15; 12G. 11; 240. 7j, ecclesia (II. 160. 3) and philosophia (I. 326. 14) we may perhaps conclude that not only names of countries but also all other Greek loan-words in -ui were accented on the antepenult by Ammianus.^ No such convenient and sensible rule prevailed in later times- -in fact, so great confusion arose that even native Latin words in -ia occasionally had penultimate accent. 2 There are in Ammianus a few compound words with exceptional accentuation for which the reason is not clear to me : theologi I. 127. 16 philosophus I. 298. 20; II. 169. 19 lotophagi I. 22. 6 galactophagi I. 333, 14 Beyond these exceptions I have observed only the following : Helena I. 279. 22 Homerus I. 296. 32 ; 276. 6 ; 257. 27 ; 334. 15 Milonem II. 221. 2 Theodoras II. 163.5; 169. 1 Nicaea II. 82. 13; 83. 26; 89. 16; 111. 18 Homerus and Helena may perhaps be accounted for as names known mainly from books and Latinized through long currency in the speech of educated men : they are not quite on a par with names like Alexander, for instance, which on account of its frequency in every-day use could not be Latinized so easily. A Greek slave would probably have answered more readil}^ to Alexander than to Alexander. The pronunciation Milonem as against Platonem may > Cf. K. III. 522. 9. « E. ff. I'ltalie, from Italia. 218 Austin Morris Harmon, be due to the influence of the Latin name Milo, but I can see no satisfactory reason for Theodorus. The penultimate accentuation of Nicaea is especially odd in view of the fact that the modern names of the two prominent cities formerly called Nicaea, Isnik in Bith3-nia (to which Ammianus refers), and Nizza in Italy, both testify to an original antepenultimate accent. We cannot suspect Ammianus of ignorance, for having seen much military service in those parts, he probably had visited the city, and certainly had often heard its name spoken. Can it be due to some whim of his own or of his imme- diate circle that the name is not derived from the name of the daughter of Antipater, but from the adjective vr/.aXo^'i^ The upshot of our investigations is that words having penultimate or antepenultimate accent in Greek are with few exceptions ac- cented on the same syllable by Ammianus, and that even among words with accented ultima some (apparently such as are less familiar) retain the accent on that S3dlable. This result tallies with testimony from two other sources, — from the Latin grammarians and from the language itself. The grammarians, to be sure, are not all in agreement. Diomed and Servius, followed by many later and lesser lights, hold that Greek words should be accented in Greek fashion when the Greek inflectional forms are preserved, but in Latin fashion when the Latin terminations are used.- This would sanction Ammianus' pronuncia- tion Persidos, but not Persidis. hi his case no such distinction can be drawn, for if we can put any faith at all in the text tradition he uses Greek and Latin forms indiscriminately and accents all alike in the Greek fashion. But this distinction has the ear-marks of pedantry upon it. The pseudo-Sergius, who gives us the fullest discussion of the question (K. IV. 526. 9—528. 27), is at once more liberal and more trust- worthy. His passage is too long to quote in its entirety, though it merits reading as an example of the work of the Roman grammarian at his best, displaying unusually careful observation mingled with a modicum of pedantr}-. According to him, Greek words when they keep the Greek forms of inflection must retain the Greek ac- ' Cf. Steph. Byz. s. v. 'kiytica Sk nQonaQo^vioyioi. al rf' eari Nixcciog, to i)-riXvxot' N/xaia. Compare also the fact that Nicaea in Phocis had penul- timate accent (Forbiger, A/t Geog. III. 612), and the tradition that Nicaea in Bithynia was founded hj people from this latter Nicaea (Memnon in Photius. Bihl. 233 Bel-heri). 2 Diomed K. I. 433. 4: Servius in Do7i. K. IV. 427. 10: 525. 8: ad Georg. I. 59. The Clausula in Animianus Marcellinus. 219 cent. Similarly, Latin words inflected after Greek models must be accented as their models are accented ; for instance, Scipiades, Mem- miades with stressed penult. But Greek words taken over into the Latin inflectional system may be treated in two ways ; the}' may be accented either on the Greek basis, as ae'ris^ aethe'ris, Evander, tyrannus, or on the Latin basis, as deris, ae'theris, Evander, tyrdnmts. But although the Greek system may be followed at will, it must be used correctly if at all : in quibiisdam enim nominibus licet vidcre plerosque, recti casus ambiguo tenore deceptos, mendose oblicos pro- ferre, ut qui in patrico casii Evandri et tyranni primam syllabam acuunt potius quam mediant, nullam secuti rationem. This grammarian, then, freely concedes the propriety of accenting Greek loan-words in Greek fashion as Ammianus does, and even acknowledges, though only to censure, the practice of carrying antepenultimate accent through the inflection regardless of the quantity of the final .syllable. Donatus and Sergius go eveiT farther than our unknown, for they no longer admit a choice between the Greek and the Latin basis of accentuation, l^ut insist upon the Greek : in the words of Sergius (K. IV. 483. 29) the rule is stated, Graeca autem sins accentibus pro- nuntianda esse noscamus} It has seemed best to me to dwell upon the precepts of the gram- marians at some length in order to bring out the value of the passage in the pseudo-Sergius, which has heretofore received little attention. The evidence of the language itself may be despatched briefly. A certain amount of information as to the pronunciation of loan- words is obtained from the late poets, in whom we find false quan- tities which can only be due to Greek accentuation. For example, Venantius Fortunatus employs scansions like Cycladas (and often -ades, -idis and the like), Ardtus, eniblema, probleuia, idolutn.'^ But the bulk of the evidence is afforded by the Romance languages, in which the rule holds that words introduced into Latin from the Greek retain the Greek accent in their Romance derivatives, except when the Greek word was oxytone.'^ In a general way, then, we learn nothing from Ammianus that is startlingly new. His testimony is chiefly valuable because it emphasizes with enormous weight a feature of late Latin pronunci- * Donatus (K. IV. 371. 27) saA^S, sane Graeca verba Graecis accentibus efferimus. This is quoted from Diomed verbatim, but the siguificant proviso of Diomed, si isdem Utteris emintiaveri»tus^ is left off. "^ See Leo's metrical index. ' Meyer-Liibke, Roma?!. Gramm. I. p. 3-4 : Gramm. Storico-comp. delta Ling. Ital. p. 84. 220 AHsti)i Morris Harmon, ation that we have been inchned to overlook, and because it shows that this accentuation was not confined to vulgar speech, but was in vogue in the best circles as early as the fourth century. It would be beyond the scope of this treatise to consider how much older than Ammianus the custom of Greek accentuation may be. In any case such an investigation would bear little fruit at present, owing to the paucity of data. Further study of Latin prose- rh3^thm may eventually help to solve the problem.^ We come now to the matter of loan-words derived from languages other than the Greek. In the lists of Greek words given above a number of words like Calycadims are cited, which were borrowed from some other language through the medium of Greek : their treatment is of course in no wise different from that of pure Greek words. So in Ldranda (I. 11. 10) and in Artogc'rassa CAQTCcyfjQai'. II. 123. 18) Ammianus' accent agrees with the Greek. The curious name Caenos Gallicanos (I. 38. 1) evidently is influenced by the Greek : it may be corrupt, for Gallicanus, with which it appears to be connected, uniformly has an accented penult in Latin (I. 201. 21 : II. 60. 7 ; 228. 15). Bardxmalcha (II. 5. 24) and Nadrmalcha (II. 6. 24; 21. 29) are not to my knowledge mentioned elsewhere, so that we are ignorant of the accent which they bore in Greek. How Am- mianus pronounced Amida is uncertain, for we find both Amida (I. 168. 2) and Amida (222. 6). Perhaps he was uncertain himself in the matter. In Amano (I. 28. 17) and Naessum (II. 71. 13; I. 246. 12 ; 247. 30) Ammianus accents the antepenult, whereas in Greek the accent is certainly on the ultima in the one {rb 'Af/avor) and probably in the other {iVicior>6<^). The pronunciation of Abarne (I. 167. 10) with antepenultimate accent is paralleled by the Greek form "i(jf«(>ro^, but the word itself is a transliteration of 'A^uitvii. A similar thing occurs in Bczabde (I. 253. 18; 222. 16), a transliteration of B%iCi^^ ^n^j rsj i See Miiller de Re Metr. p. 249 ff. : Lindsay, p. 142 ff. : Sommer, pp. 144, 145. * It is possible that some cases which I have listed under forms II and IV {adulatioiie Jlagrantintii : decerneret in pla7xitie) should be read with synezesis as I and III. But I liave preferred not to assume it when unnecessary. * Priscian K. II. 287. 8 classes Troia with Italia. Phrvgia, Lydia, etc. Cf. Part. K. III. 467. 12. * In pure Latin words it is very rare : see L. Miiller, de Re Metr. p. 264. Harper's Lexicon (and others') register Pompejus {trisyl.) or Pompeius [qiiadrisyl.)., plebeiics {-ejus) and Fon tents— on what grounds I know not. The Claitstila in Amniianus Marcellinus. 225 only does it occur freely, but it is the rule rather than the exception. At least we may safely assert it to be the rule in the words Trai- anus, Pompeiiis, plebeitts, Aquileia, Troia, Fonteius, for the clausulae cited, in which / counts as a syllable, are the only clausulae in which they occur.^ But in the clausula xit amnt in flammam (11. 131. 4) aiimt has consonantal i, eius often has it (e. g. I. 235. 2; 264. 6; II. 20. 22; 35. 28; 91. 3; 99. 1), and mains occurs several times with consonantal i (I. 80. 25; II. 45. 31; 136. 7), but not to my knowledge with syllabic /. Furthermore, intervocalic i seems to be always (except in Traiamis) consonantal when it is pre-tonic; thus aiebat I. 94 5; II. 175. 14 akbant I. 318. 22 maiora I. 23. 28 maiore I. 90. 2 maiores II. 145. 18 projecit I. 116. 28 eiectat 11. 19. 30 seiunctum I. 119. 25 Since the syllabication of i regularly appears in certain words, it follows that we are dealing not so much with a metrical expedient on the part of Ammianus as with a characteristic feature of his ordinary pronunciation. Is it peculiar to him, or does he share it with his times ? Lack of positive information as to the pronunciation of his period precludes our answering this question definitely, but it may be pointed out that Ammianus was a Greek, and that pre- cisely this peculiarity was noted by Consentius as a fault in the pronunciation of Latin-speaking Greeks.- Coming now to the instances of the syllabication of n, we may remark first that the word behia is always a trisyllable in Ammianus (I. 15. 11 ; 283. 30; II. 32. 13; 46. 31). In this, of course, he agrees with classical usage. After 5 in suesco, snadeo and the like u is always syllabic. suesco I. 89. 15 adsuesco L 137. 19; 11. 232. 28 adsuetus, consuetus I. 11. 20; 88.8; 113.1; 136.31; 271.2; IL 112. 19 etc. adsuefactus I. 269. 26; II. 38. 16 suadeo L 124. 23; 308. 31 ; 318. 17 ; H. 247. 8; 262. 21 suasorum I. 219. 15 A fairly extensive search in the poets for an instance of the quadri- syllabic scansion of Pompehis has not proven fruitful. For Trota see Sen. Troad. 824, 853. ' Except those in which the word containing i comes last and which are consequently indecisive ; for example, ventttm est Aqm'leiam (I. 49. 31) may be read either as III or IV. - Consentius K. V. 394. 11 ff. : Lindsay p. 45. 226 Aitsti)i Morris Harmon, In the usage of the poets suesco not infrequently is trisyllabic, suadeo occasionally.^ It is not surprising, then, that Ammianus should make use of this pronunciation, but very surprising that he should use it always. At once the most wide-spread and the most striking phenomenon of this nature is that u may count as a syllable in the combination qu-. Though the following list of instances is long, it is by no means exhaustive. The words cited are classified for the sake of convenience into three groups according as qu heads a post-tonic tonic or pre-tonic syllable. Dialysis in post-tonic syllable aquis undabundis I. 127. 1 aquae furtim I. 177. 13 aquis et externis I. 280. 4 equis et morigeris I. 134. 15 equis concidit I. 318. 11 equi terrebantur II. 32. 5 eqiios aut aurigas II. 145. 15 eqiiis velocissimis II. 201. 8 eqiiis evolarunt II. 244. 2 antiquum timens I. 242. 27 antiquam sobolem I. 279. 16 antiqiia sed deserta I. 303. 2 longinqiia pertimescens I. 64. 18 longinqiia formidabat I. 236. 7 aeqiium nee laudari II. 57. 9 aequum nee sileri II. 180. 3^ propinquo convectari II. 185. 13 oblique tenebantur I. 218. 31 sequens Lunae I. 295. 29 (cf. I. 71. 18; 79.6) (enclitic -que) legibusqiie discrepantes I. 72.7; cf. 86.9; 168.9; II. 236.2; 245. 28 ; 256. 22 ; 268. 26 ^ uterque etc. I. 75. 26; 230. 8 ; 252. 17; II. 15. 17; 17. 2 quisque I. 286. 7 ; II. 4. 30 plerique I. 28. 13; 36. 17; 331. 13; II. \'6. ,32 usque I. 286. 4 ; II. 110. 16 ^_ * With, reference to suadet see also Serv. ad Aen. I. 857 secundum nattiram dtiae sunt syllabae^ sed multi trisyllabnm putant. Cf. Lindsay, p. 53. * This justifies aeqiium nee taeeri I. 207. 11, where aequum is inserted by Gelenius. ' Only a few instances out of many score are here cited. The Clausula in Af^niiu'anus Marcellinus. 227 quoque II. 143. 25 ; 206. 24 ubique II. 274. 24 (enclitic -quam)— quisquam I. 16. 32; 128. 28; 145. 16; 146. 11 ; 154. 6; 231. 22; 258. 17; 272. 1; 281. 18; 286. 31; II. 265. 16 perquam I. 189. 5 (p. gnarus) = 147. 20 = II. 104. 12 = 126. 31 = 190. 18 ; I. 260. 29 (p. scientissimus) = II. 2. 21 ; II. 50. 25 (p. oportunum) = 214. 30 ; I. 15. 30 ; 185. 28 ; 331. 1 ; II. 167. 31 ; 235. 10 (trisyllabic in all the cases that I have found) umquam I. 14. 14; 91. 7 numquam I. 15. 25; 70. 21 ; 167. 13; 260. 5; 325. 6 nusquam I. 300. 30; usquam 319. 30 potiusquam I. 298. 3; cf. I. 65. 24; 124. 13; 137. 12; II. 41. 8 Dialysis in tonic syllable casu propinquabant I. 11. 13 urbi propinquaret I. 91. 22 ambitioso propinquantis II. 104. 11 editum aequabant II. 14. 20 celsitudinis aeqiiatae I. 179. 20 ominis loquamur II. 144.22 Pannonias et Quadi II. 71. 1 ; cf. 216. 32; 239. 30; I. 134. 5 divisa quattuor I. 72. 24 modis quattuor I. 127. 17 ambigerentur quaedam I. 32. 27 membra quaedam I. 123. 28 opinantur quidam I. 137. 14 (relative pronoun) relaturi quae audirent I. 7.5; cf. 99. 24; 135. 26; 218.10; 277. 17 ; II. 16. 11 ; 162. 18 ; 207. 6 ; 219. 13 exposuisse quod elegi I. 65. 26; cf. 66. 13; 140. 15; II. 61, 23 discant qui ignorant I. 119. 7 iste qiiem videmus I. 94. 3 adventanti quas petebat II. 214. 21 pacem quam poscebant I. 137. 6; II. 58. 18 nocilura quam delictis II. 125. 8; cf. I. 66. 30; 261. 16 Dialysis in a pretonic syllable recreati et quiete I. 11. 11; cf 99. 18; 152. 4; II. 199. 14 nimio quassatus II. 21. 24 peritos quaeritabant I. 173. 6; cf. II. 45. 9 regale quaerebatur I. 32. 18 : cf. 292. 31 228 Austin Morris Harmon, iusta querelarum I. 130. 4; II. 195. 14 tumultuando querebatur I. 288. 31 eum sequebatur I. 98. 16; cf. 178. 21 Combination of dialysis in tonic syllable with shift of accent quies data I. 225. 29 qiiies daret II. 48. 31 quies dedit II. 189. 29 qiiies parta II. 115. 17 quies prima II. 193. 12 quies oportuna 11. 22. 8 quibus inhiabant I 269. 26 quibus sperabatur II. 98. 21 quibus petebantur II. 273. 20 quibus habitant II. 234. 8 quidem sed deformibus II. 233. 12 quidem aliquotiens I. 247. 31 (p. 146. 1. 27) Although this phenomenon is frequent, it is not constant like the vocalization of n in shcsco, sitaiico. In the collection of 1811 sen- tence-endings which has often heretofore supplied us with statistics there are in all 71 clausulae in which a word containing qu appears.^ In 35 of these clausulae the n counts as a syllable, while in 36 it does not. On this basis we may conclude that in general u is syllabic in about 50 per cent of the instances in which it follows q. It should be pointed out, however, that this is merely an average, and that the ratio is not the same for all words. In reliquus and similar words syllabication does not take place at all, for the manifest reason that it would be impossible without a prior shift of accent from the antepenult to the penult. With this exception qu may count as a syllable, as far as I know, in any word, no matter what position it occupies in the word. The rela- tive frequency with which it so functions in any given word depends upon the word itself rather than upon than the position of qn in the word. In some words syllabication is optional, while in others it is the rule. It is optional in -qtie, occurring in about half the cases. In pronouns and adverbs ending in -qttani, in potiusquam and the like, it is very nearly universal, for out of 12 clausulae containing such words, -qnaui counts as a dissyllable in 11. The relative pronoun is oftener a dissyllable than a monosyllable. Syl- ^ This does not include clausulae like sufficiens aqua^ in which the qu follows the last clausula-accent. In these cases either pronunciation would give a regular clausula. The Clausula in Afnnn'ajius Marcellifius. 229 labication is certainly the rule in adjectives like aequus, and is uni- versal in the nouns equus and aqua. It is universal also in quies, both in the nominative, where it is combined with a shift of accent (qiiies) and in the oblique cases {qiiiete). \\\ some other words, such as Quadi, quattuor and querela, it seems to be universal, but they do not occur often enoui^h to conclude this with certainty. In quaeritabat, in sequcbatur and in propi}iquabaut, among- other words, s3dlabication is optional. So unusual is this feature of the pronunciation of Ammianus that at first it seems almost incredible. But it is certain beyond all per- adventure, inasmuch as the strength of the evidence which supports it is in no wise conditioned upon the validity of the h3'pothesis that all of the clausulae in Ammianus were originall}^ ' regular.' Even if we reject that hypothesis, we must still admit that ' irregular ' cadences are very infrequent and exceptional. This admission ampl}' suffices to establish the point in question, for clausulae such as those cited above are too frequent to be classed as ' irregular.' The truth comes out unequivocally if we look at the matter in the light of statistics. In 1811 sentence-endings there are 22 which, taking Gardthausen's text as it stands, unquestionably present irregular cadences, and, as we have just seen, 35 which become irregular unless the syllabication of // after q be admitted. To count these 35 clausulae as irregular would not greatl}' alter the relative status of the regular and the irregular cadences. But it would bring it al:)Out on the one hand that irregular cadences, though constituting but 3 per cent of the total number of clausulae, would occur in 50 per cent of the clausulae which contain the combination qu, and on the other hand that clausulae containing qu, though amounting only to 4 per cent of the total number of clausulae, would form 60 per cent of the irregular cadences. It is plain, therefore, that to avoid creating an inexplicable abnormality we must admit that all or nearly all the apparently irregular clausulae containing the combination qu are in reality regular. And they cannot l^e regular unless qu counts as a syllable in them. Not only is the principle certain in itself, but there is ample justification for applying it wherever its application will make a cadence regular. On this point it will take but little reflection to convince the most sceptical. For instance in assuming, in order to explain a single clausula,^ that quin counts as a dissyllable, we are sup])orted by the analogy of the relative pronoun. If quod may so count, why not quin ? And in asserting that quod ma}' so count, ' I. 159. 8 afuit quin caperer. v. p. 175. Trans. Conn. Aoad., Vol. XVI. 15 Oct., 1910. 230 Austijt Morris Harmon, we are governed by the fact that the ordinary pronunciation of quod would create an abnormally large number of irregular cadences containing this word— a fact that hardly calls for proof, as it should be evident merely from the number of instances cited in the list above. But to remove any possible doubt we may point out that in the collection of sentence-endings the relative occurs in only 8 instances, of which 4 are irregular if we give the word its usual pronunciation, whereas the monosyllable et occurs in 97 clausulae, not one of which is irregular. While this comparison is not as im- pressive as it would be if we took the entire text of Ammianus into consideration, it nevertheless shows clearly that the relative is not handled like other monosyllables. Hence we must infer that it is not on all occasions monosyllabic. Again, in the three words quies, quibus, qiiidein we have asserted not only that the // counts as a syllable but that it bears the accent. This remarkable phenomenon is far harder to admit than any other application of the princijile of syllabic w. Yet it must be admitted, for in every single clausula in which the word qnics appears it is treated as if it were an antepenultimate trisyllable like requies instead of a dissyllable. 1 Since this fact cannot possibly be due to the blind working of chance, the onl}' admissible explanation is the obvious one that to the ear of Ammianus the word had the effect of an antepenultimate trisyllable— an effect which can have been secured only by pronouncing it qi'iies. Thus the evidence for quies is just as strong as the evidence for, let us say, subinde. And from quies we get the key to the explanation of the apparently irregular ca- dences in which quibus and quidem appear.^ It is very clear, then, that in Ammianus the syllabication of u after q must be admitted. In trying to account for a feature of his pronunciation so contrary to good usage as exemplified in the poets, one is naturally tempted to see in it an idiosyncracy due to his Greek birth, inasmuch as transliterations like Koivtoz. indicate that to the Greeks the Latin u seemed syllabic.^ This consideration should not be ignored, yet we must not overrate its importance. In the first place it should be ^ Except in patitur quies (II. 67. 32), where either trisj'-llabic or dis- s^'llabic pronviiiciation of qides would give a regular form. ^ That quibus should occur in 3 appai-eiitly irregular clausulae is in itself suspicious, in view of the fac^t that it is rareh' to lie found in a regular cadence. ^ This is shown not only by the fact that the u is represented by a vowel, but even more conclusively by the accent which falls upon the vowel. The Clausula in Anntiiaints Marcelliints. 231 kept in mind not onl\- that the Histories were intended to appeal to a more or less cultivated ])ublic, but that the}" were actually read in sections before an audience and were received, if we are to believe Libanius, with great applause. Consequentl}' we should be chary of assuming the existence of any conspicuous idiosyncracies or Hellenisms in the pronunciation of Ammianus ; the}- would not have escaped attention and censure at the first reading. ^ Further- more, there is some little outside evidence to show that this phen- omenon was not entirely foreign to the Latin ear. Lachmann long ago pointed out that in the earl}' poets the word aqua is in several instances trisyllabic (aqua).^ This is certainly the case in Lucretius VL 552 and 1072, and again in VL 868 if we follow Lachmann in substituting aquae for laticis on the authority of an unknown grammarian.'^ The same scansion is found in Ennius in one place {Ann. 1 68 Vahlen), and perhaps in another [Ann. 379j.* Lachmann, seconded by Bergk, maintained its occurrence in the drama also ; this Ritschl stoutly denied,^ and the Plautine scholars have acquiesced in his view. However it may be with this matter, which in the absence of any new evidence it would be out of place to discuss, it is certain that u after q in Plautus was not entirely without effect upon the metre, for Lindsay notes that words like loqui resist ' iambic ' shortening of the ultima. He explains this by saying" — "so to the ear of Plautus qu almost made a preceding vowel long by position, unless ive say that loqui etc. sounded to Plautus something like a trisyllable.'^ Surel}^, ceteris paribus, the latter of his alternatives is preferable. After the time of Lucretius this license apparently is avoided by * Of course this argument does not apply with the same force to an inconspicuous feature like the syllabication of intervocalic ?', which we have hesitatingly ascribed to Ammianus' Greek origin, and wliich affects so few clausulae that it may well have passed unnoticed. ^ See his note on Lucretius VI. 552. * In the latter passage Lachmann's reading, vigorousl}' defended by Bergk and as vigorously opposed by Ritsciil, has been adopted by Bockemiiller and by Munro. Giussani retains laticis. * Cf. Bergk, Opusc. I. 309, 345. In Atui. 379 he would read erugit for exerngit. In Ann 155 Vahlen rejects Tarcuini corpus (Servius) in favor of exin Tarqiunium (Donatus). » Lachmann ad Liter. VI. 552; Bergk, Cpusc. I. 72; 345: Ritschl, Opine II. 600, 604 ; Schroeder, Stndemund's Studien II. 20. * Lat. Lang. p. 87. The italics are mine. The fact that such words are occasionally shortened does not invalidate the general truth of his remark. 232 Austin Morris Harmon, the poets, even by those of Ammianus' own age.' Nor have I l)een able to find any certain indication of its occurrence in tlie rhythmical prose of Sedulius, Cassiodorus or Ennodius.^ In the grammarians, however, there are some traces of the phenomenon. Velius Longus says,^ aquani qnoqiie per q scribcntes nomen ostendiiinis, per c vera verbum ab eo quod est aciio, utinam acuam. Now if men had to be told to write aqiiam when they meant water and acuam when they meant sharpen, we can fairly infer that they made little if any distinction between qu and cu in pronunciation. The remark of another grammarian,* vacua uoii vaqua, vacui nan vaqui, points in the same direction. And there is still more significance in the state- ment of Consentius,^ u qnoquc litteram aliqui pingnius ecferunt, ut cum dicunt ueni putes trisyllabuui iucipcre. To be sure it is the syllabication of initial ii to which his words primarily bear witness, but it stands to reason that any i)erson who made ueni a trisyllable would have treated Quadi, for example, in the same way. In fact, qu appears to have been much more subject to syllabication than initial u, inasmuch as Ammianus, who makes so free with qu, does not allow initial u to count as a syllable. There is then some evidence for the existence of a considerable tendency- in Latin toward the syllabication of qu. For aught I see to the contrary, the tendency may have been especially strong in late Latin. Even if a pronunciation as Inroad as that of Ammianus were general in his time, we could not expect to find adequate recognition of the fact either in the poets, who would follow tra- dition, or in the grammarians, whose concern was always with the written rather than with the spoken language. Tliis consideration undeniably lends much weight to the scanty evidence that we ac- tually find, which, although it is far from strong enough to be de- cisive, is yet sufficient to make us hesitate to ascribe the broadness of Ammianus' pronunciation to Greek influence. Another fact still remains to be recorded in regard to Ammianus' > Yet the syllabication of n in ciii (e. g. Martial I. 104, 22) is parallel. ' Subsequent investigation may reveal it in the usage of other writers — juay perhaps reveal also that some writers who do not allow qu to ooniit as a syllable have a tendency to avoid using words containing qti in the clausula, which would be hardly less significant than positive testimou}'- in support of our point. » K. VII. 75. 10. * Probi App. K. IV. 197. 23. » K. V. 395. 15. Tlie Clausula in AniDiiamis Marcclli)iiis. 233 treatment of ^/— namely, that syllabication occurs also after r in the words seruo and obseruo (I. 254. 8 ; 263. 11 ; II. 117. 3; 269. 23; 273. 23), and possibly in paruus (II. 269. 5 ; 33. 1 7). Herein, of course he again contravenes poetical usage, in which the only approximation to a parallel is the ante-classical lania, laruatiis, and /(T/nW/s (^Friap. 32. 13j. Neither initial nor intervocalic u appear to be sul)ject to syllabi- cation in his pronunciation. 1 QUANTITY. For the sake of completeness mention should here be made of the fact already established that Ammianus was to all intents in- different to vowel-quantity but not to syllabic quantity produced by position, which within certain limits is observed in his clausulae.^ It has also been demonstrated previously that in his observance of positional quantity syllables ending in -ns and -nt are not considered long.'^ FORMS. In regard to the form of the genitive singular of nouns witli -io- stems the clausula reveals nothing new in the usage of Ammianus and simply confirms the testimony of the manuscript to the effect that in proper names both the old form in -/ and the newer form in -// are used indifferently, while in common nouns only the newer form is employed.* In proper names the old form in -/ is demanded Ijy the clausula (sometimes against the manuscript) in Constant! I. 67. 6; 25. 26; 38. 15; 284. 13 Antoni I. 319. 8 Eusebi I. 153. 22 Theodosi II. 185. 26 Vadomari I. 233. 27 Danubi I. 139. 1 The new form is demanded, either with or without manuscript sanction, in * There are so many instances in which he does not resort to it tliat we can hardly employ it to explain the two clausulae Masso Vetemeusi (I. 42. 30) and saevum reperton-m (IT. 193. 8). » p. 187 ff. » p. 192 and note 3. * Neue, Formenl. I. 154. 234 Austin Morris Harmon, Constantii 1. 46. 1 ; 150. 21 ; 251. 26 Craugasii I. 168. 19; 208. 18 Chnodomarii 1. 102. 82 Aesculapii I. 296. 9 Procopii II. 89. 17 Strategii II. 75. 16 Vulcatii I. 253. 4 The only case, as far as I know, of a common noun with the genitive in -i is triclini (I. 48. 17), which is called for by the manu- script as well as by the clausula, and which is to be accounted for b}^ the fact that the title triclini rationalis had become formulaic through long use. Instances of the ordinary genitive in -;'/ may be found in the following passages: I. 96. 11 ; 103. 15; 113. 4; 175. 25; 193. 11; 279. 17; 284. 13: 317. 16; II. 4.9. Other points that I have noted in this connection are liut few. The laws of the clausula support the manuscript reading commmiibal in I. 163. 7 and require the introduction of the same form in II. 138. 1, and custodibat in II. 84. 30. They reject praesagiebat in I. 310. 34 (where V has praesagebat), and require either praesagibat or praesagabat. Again, in II. 78. 15 they condemn the traditional detestabant and favor the substitution of the usual form detestabantur (cf. I. 291. 15). Chapter IV. CRrricisM. The observation that Ammianus favored certain cadences in his clausulae and avoided others is of course one of great im]:)ortance for text-criticism. Its practical significance is but little limited by our uncertaint}' as to the exact status of the avoided cadences, for even if the}' were not rejected altogether they were certainly so seldom used that any reading which jiresents one of them is thereby rendered suspicious and subject to emendation if emendation is ])ossible. The principal matter of critical interest tliat has come to my attention in working through the Histories is that in those cases in which lacunae are filled out by Gelenius his suppleta conform to the requirements of the clausula.^ We must therefore consider them 1 E. g. I. 265. 17; 288. 18-20; II. 24. 5; 25. 28-29; 26. 3; 83. 2. This fact has already been pointed out by Clark (Text Traditioji of Am. p. 65), who also refers to Mommsen's vindication {Hermes 15. 244) of one of these suppleta (II. 98. 14) on an epigraphic basis. The Clatisula in AniniiaiiHS Marcelliniis. 235 genuine and attritjute them to the lost Marl^urg manuscript ; for that Gelenius himself did not appreciate the nature of Ammianus' clau- sulae is shown by many instances in which his attempts to better the text have resulted in the introduction of irregular cadences. For example, the words which he omits in II. 140.21; 142.28; 143.20; 145.11, and which Gardthausen brackets in deference to him, are necessary to till out the clausula in each case. Here and there in the text of the Histories interpolations have been observed and bracketed by the editors. Sure cases are to be found, for instance, in I. 77. 18 (Julian; ita . . . conluxit iit prudentia jVespasiani filius] Titus alter aestimaretur, in I. 81. 18 tamqiiam ad- strictus sumptitariis legibus viveret — quas ex rhetris Lycurgi [id est axilnis] Roiiiam translatas, etc., and in II. 210. 5 Callistratus quern jiobilcm illam super Oropo causaui |qui locus in Euboea est] per- oranteiu, etc. With such precedent I feel no reluctance in holding that interpolations occur in a number of other places where the clausula shows that the text is suspicious. In I. 70. 1 [vias rex Cottius) ill amicitiam Octaviaiii receptus [principis] molibus inagnis exstruxit the removal of the superfluous word principis is advan- tageous to the rhythm. Similarly RJicnum is superfluous in I. 96. 17 alii occupatis insulis sparsis crcbro per fluiuen [Rhenum] ululantes lugubre, etc. In I. 73. 22 (Rlwdaiiits) paludi sese iiigurgitat | nomine Lemanno] eanique intenueans, etc., the words nomine Lenianno are not superfluous, to be sure, but they break the rhythm. In the amusing description of Constantius (I. 92. 17 ff.) — nam et corpus pcrhumile curvabat portas ingrediens celsas, et veliit cello niunito rectam aciem luminum tcndens nee dextra vultum nee laeva Jleciebat [tamquam flgmentum hominis] non cum rota concul/ret nutans, nee spuens aid os aul nasum tergens vel fricans mamtmve agitans in'sus est umquam—ih.Rt tamquam figmentnm hominis is an interpolation is indicated not onh^ b}' the dn'thm but also by the fact that Am- mianus has previously introduced a simile in the phrase velut collo munito. Two instances in Book XXI have already engaged our attention — I. 250. 14 et quidam elatis super capita scutis [ut j^ugnaturi levius] alii vehentes umeris ut antea scalas ferventique impetu pro- currentes pectora multiformium telorum ictibus exponehant, where the bracketed words can have been added onh' by a person who did not understand the meaning oi elatis super capita scutis, and 258, 9—10 monstrare quibus primordiis hi genii animis conexi mortalium eas tamquam gremiis suis susceptas tuentur [quoad licitum est] do- centque maiora si senserint puras et a conluvione peccandi inmacu- lata corporis societate discretas, where the restriction quoad licitum 236 Austin Morris Harmon, est may, I think, be safely assij^ned to Christian influence. In II. 25. 25 (]HO(i et civitas situ ipso [inexpugnabilis] defendebatur, ct cum mducnda multitudine protinus rex ad/ore crcdebatur, the word inex- pugnabilis is more easy to account for as a marginal note than as an original element of the sentence. In II. 185. 4 intcrque gemitus mortis et vulnermn audicbaiitur barbaroritm ululabiles fletus [captorum et caesoruin] the sense as well as the rhythm of the passage con- demns caesorum ; and finally, in II. 193. 22 (Icsa/enses) per tramites adortus obliqiios [unde parum sperari potuit] ad penuriam vastavit extremanu the words bracketed may well have been added to ex- plain tramites obliquos. To examine in detail every passage in which the clausula dis- closes a fault hi the accepted text and to essay the correction of them is the task of an editor — a task, be it said, to which Clark is doing full justice in the preparation of his new edition of Am- mianus.^ I shall simpl}' submit here by way of illustration a few corrections which seem to me to be fairly certain.^ I. 27. 29 (Isauria) uberi palmite viget et frugibus minutis. The ms. reading multis should be kept. 33. 3 caeli reserato tepore /?^rt(/reserata temperie ; cf. 240. 27. 82. 21 poeticam mediocriter et rhetoricam (amavit) The addition is Wagner s : it ivould better be changed to amans. 112. 9 duci praecipit Read praecepit. 204. 10 in stativa solita cesserunt Read recesserunt ivith Gc- lenius ; in 293. 25 accensisque cereis ex usu cessit read recessit (usuccessit V). 204. 14 omnes petiverant palatium V petiverat ; read petivere. 210. 1 cum auxilio equitum ilico ob repentinum malum inclu- sorimi malum is a conjecture on the part of Castellus ; V reads ad, ivhich points toivard aditum. 219. 24 in locum Florentii praefectum praetorio Nebridium tum cjuaestorem eiusdem Caesaris promoverat Read pro- movebat. 228. 15 interiores (undaei sine ulla concretione caerulae Read caeruleae. 228. 19 apud poetas legimus saepe Irim de caelo mitti Read hue mitti ivith Accnrsius : V has hinc, ivhich is omitted al- together by Gelenius. * In process of publication by Weidmann. * Otlier passages are handled in the commentary' to Book XXT, and in the followiug places ; p. 167, n. 1 ; 169, n. 2 ; 171-175 ; 176, n. 2 ; 184, n. 2; 185-186; 208, n. 1; 209, n. 2; 226, n. 2: 283-234: 241, n. 1. The Clausula in Ammianus Marcellinus. 237 290. 27 (plebs omnis) Georg-ium petit raptumque diversis mul- candi j^eneribus proterens et conculcans divaricatis pc- dibvis Giinther (Quacst. Aiiini. Crit. p. 36j pointed out that a verb is zvai/fing at the end of the sentence and suggested divaricatis (conficit/ pedibus, ivhich Jills out the clausula. 294. 17 Galli similis fratris licet incruentus Insert hie, compar- ing II. 258. 26 semet ad vana stadia Caesaris Commodi convertisset licet hie incruentus. 27 quorum proceritatem Homerus in inmensum tollit Read extollit. 31 stipatusque mulierculis litabat litabat is Gardthausen s conjecture for the ms. laetabatur, ivhich should be retained. See Schneider p. 20. 302. 19 Pentapolim a Libya sicciore disparatam V dissoratam, Gelenius disparatam ; read discretam. 306. 14 The clausula confirms Valesius' emendation of non to Platon, thus disposing of Gutschmidfs suggestion Jesus. 308. 24 interitum jiropinquare monstrabatur This is the reading of Accursius: V has monstrabant. i?*'^!*^/ monstrabat iBentl. j. II. 31. 21 ita capitibus diligenter apta ut inbracteatis, etc. Read aptata ut with Gelenius; V aptauit. Cf I. 102. 24. 47. 27 riparum aggeribus humana manu structis structis is Haiipt's conjecture : V~ distructis. We should probably read exstructis. 53. 2 aliaque herbarum genera tristissima. The manuscript reads genera ut tristissima, which Giinther (Philol. 50. p. 72) properly corrects to vel. 71. 29 Read jiartiti ^sunt) numeri. 84. 19 Read suorum (est) manibus, 108. 18 nihil alienum putare quod ad Romani imperii pertinet salutem salutem is Haupt's conjecture : V reads latus, which gives a good clausula. The figure of speech is not bolder than many in Ammianus. 114. 11 ex eo anhelantes The rhythm warrants C. F. IV.Miiller's reading ex eo (altius) anhelantes. 129. 7 cuius hunc novimus esse textum. This is the reading of Gelenius and Accursius : V has fuisse novimus textum ivhich is commended not only by the clausula, but by the recurrence of a similar phrase in 200. 6 (cuiusi hanc primordialem fuisse novimus causam. 238 Aiisti)i Morris Harmon, 157. 25 Romanus quas ol) res venerat ante praestructurus prae- striicturus Gardlhansen ; V praestructus, vjhich gives praestructis. 164. 2 nee carceres pul)lici iam distenti inclusorum iam catervas The second iam should be deleted. 183. 14 (cuius virtutes) prae ceteris nitebant Read eminebant. 219. 29 (death of Valentinianus) ne laberetur spectantibus et vilibus concursu ministrorum vitae secretioris ad con- clave ductus est intimum To better the rhythm, read spectandus et vilibus. 256. 6 ut ([uidam laudes extoUendo jirincipis iactarunt Read iactitarunt; compare I. 8.28, 19.6 260. 27 (Sebastianus Gothorum vastatorios cuneos) opertus ag- geribus et frutectis obscura nocte suspensis passibus inct)npositos adgressus est Vs reading is conpositos, ivhich should be corrected to consopitos. 272. 17 jjer Christianum quendam portatis scriptis et recitatis utque decebat contemplatis contemplatis Accursius; contemptatis V Read contemplis, ivhich the sense demands {v. I. 11-12). In a number of passages apparent breaks in the rhythm are due not to the condition of the text but to the punctuation of it. A few cases of this sort may be cited here.^ I. 46. 22 ut quondam Domitius Corbulo dicitur caesus in con- luvione ilia Neroniani saeculi provinciarum fidus defensor et cautus Gardthausen sets a comma after saeculi. 96. 19—20 qui graviore motu animi percitus ad corripiendos aliquos septem a Barbatione petierat naves G. sets a comma after aliquos. 118. 13 utque fobeliscus) radium imitetur gracilescens paulatim sjiecie quadrata in verticem productus angustum G. punctuates after gracilescens. 190. 24 staliant incurvi longe alia quam quae gestu praeferebant et verbis altis mentibus perpensantes. G. sets a comma after altis. 210. 28-211. 1 petitusque ballistarum ictibus certis et sagittarum, densitate opertus armorum, etc. G. punctuates rr//^/"densitate. ' One instance (I. 88. 1) has been already discussed p. 167 n. 2. No note is here taken of mere typographical errors such as II. 139. 16 barbarictis prosilrt.it, globus and I. 234. 3 mainis, praedatorias, nor of 'gram- matical ' punctuation where there is no pause {is, qui) and the like. The Clausula in Ammiainis Marceltinus. 239 . 250. 6 datoque signo in receptuni ex more anibo digressi G. punctuates after receptum. 309. 15-16 rumore praecurso hostiles occupare properans terras, nondum adulto vere missa per militares numeros ex- peditioiiali tessera etc. G. punctuates ajter vere. 323. 11 venitur ad Carmaniae sinum orienti obiectum. Intervallo Cantichus nomine panditur sinus australis. G. sets the period after intervallo : the error was corrected by Pet- schenig (Phil. 50. 351) a7id the rhythm confirms him. II. 41. 15 (Juliani) Fortitudinem certaminum crebritas ususque bel- lorum ostendit et patientia frig-orum immanium et fer- voris. quamquam corporis munus a milite ab impera- tore vero animi poscitur, ipse etc. For quamquam [Kellerbauer) V. has quoque, which G. retaitis, setting a period after it. 88. 10 eumque secuti conplures iam pila quatientes et gladios ad imperatorem transeunt cum vexillis scuta perversa gestantes G. sets comma after transeunt. 112. 20 ff. exinde transmeato lentius freto tranquillam. Unde cum consecuti Batavi venissent et Heruli loviique et Victores fidentes viribus numeri egressus etc. This is the traditional reading, in ivhicli unde of course is to be construed with egressus. G. writes tranquilla unda. Cum, etc. 140. 4—6 At procul tamquam horum similia agitantibus furiis per omne latus Maratocupreni grassatores acerrimi vagaban- tur G. sets a comma after latus. 174. 11 qui cum abstinere inconsolabili malo rogaretur obnixe, inflexibilis mansit G. sets a comma after rogaretur. 206. 22 quia rem Romanam alius cirtumsteterat metus totius Gothiae Thracias licentius perrumpentis. G. sets a comma after Gothiae. Turning now from the field of text criticism to that of higher criticism, let us examine the conclusions which can be reached by the aid of the clausula. The facts may be summed up in the state- ment that except for a few direct quotations the whole text of the Histories conforms to the rules that we have laid down in regard to the practice of Ammianus. This proves first that the Histories contain no interpolations of any significance, and secondly that very little of the material upon which they were based was taken over b}^ Ammianus verbatim. This latter point is one that 240 ^Instill Morris Harmon, merits some emphasis. It is onh' natural, to be sure, that in a geographical excursus, for instance, he should recast the data which he obtained from pul:)lished sources ; but that he should rewrite all the letters and sjjeeches which his work incorporates is a matter of more moment. A recent writer has ventured to assert that " Ammianus, unlike other Latin hi.storians whom we have read, does not make speeches for his characters to deliver." ^ Yet both speeches and letters conform throughout to the manner of Ammianus and cannot be authentic except perhaps in their general tenor. An interesting letter may l)e instanced — the enigmatic warning of Prc- copius to Ursicinus, originally written in short-hand, which in Am- mianus' version runs as follows (I. 160. 22 ff.) Amendatis procul Graiorum legatis I forsitan et necandis III rex longaevus non contentus Hellesponto II iunctis Granici et Rhyndaci ponti1:)us II Asiam cum numerosis populis pervasurus adveniet, II suopte ingenio II inritabilis et asperrimus, IV auctore et incensore III Hadriani quondam Romani j)rincipis successore : III actum et conclamatum est IV ni caverit Graecia. II We may be sure that this is not the way in which Procopius ex- pressed himself. Other good examples are the letter of Sapor to Constantius (I. 122. 16 ff.) and the reply of the emperor (I. 223. 22 ff.). As for speeches, the reader will find in Book XXI the addresses of Julian and of Constantius to their respective fcirces, both in the style of Ammianus. A detailed analysis of the speeches of Con- stantius, Julian and Valentinian brings out the fact that all three agree with one another and with Ammianus not only in the ca- dences which they employ but fstill more significantl}) in the relative frequency of the various cadences. This is brought out in the fol- lowing table, based on three speeches of Constantius (I. 64. 29 ff. ; 143. 7 ff.; 255. 13 ff.), three of Julian (I. 99. 20 ff . ; 236. 28 ff . ; II. 37. 21 ff.), and two of Valentinian (II. 67. 4 ff. ; 106. 28 ff.j. The results are expressed in percentages, and compared with the normal ratios in Ammianus.^ ' Grlover, Life and Letters in the Fourth Century^ p. 29. * See p. 205. The Clausttla in Aimnianus Marcellinus. 241 irni Ammian. Constautii -IS Julian Valentin (2tl clausu^ lae) (154 clausulae) (1 14 clausulae) I 46 47 47 52 II 27 28 22 21 III 24 23 27 22 IV 3 2 4 4 So unequivocal is this evidence that I should as soon think of main- taining the authenticity of the speeches in Vergil as of those in Ammianus. In fact, with the exception of occasional citations from books almost everything in the Histories that purports to be a direct quotation owes its present form to the pen of Ammianus. From the line of battle a standard-bearer calls out to Julian (I. 101. 21) perge felicissime omnium Caesar quo te fortuna prosperior ducit : tandem per te virtutem et consilia niilitare sentimus i praevius ut faustus antesignanus et fortis : experieris quid miles sub conspectu bellicosi ductoris testisque individui gerendorum (modo adsit superum numen) viribus efficiet excitatis. Sulla in the excitement of battle shouts to his wavering men (I. 106. 5) ite socii periculorum electi et scitantibus ubi rel ictus sim imperator respondete nihil fallentes : solus in Boeotia pro omnibus nobis cum dispendio sanguinis sui decernens. When a bailiif violated good form by holding out both hands to receive a present from the emperor instead of allowing it to be dropped into the folds of his garments, Julian remarked ' rapere non accipere sciunt agentes in rebus ' ; and again, when he was re- proached with leniency, he said incusent iura clementiam, sed imperatorem mitissimi animi legibus praestare (ut) ceteris decet.^ When a gentleman named Nigrinus was asked for a position, he replied laughingly I. 83. I retain the ms. reading ceteris in the last clause, and Insert Gardthausen follows Kellerbauer's conjecture seven's. 242 Austi)i Morris Harmon, fac me imperatorem si id volueris impetrare. Occasionally Ammianus seems to retain the actual words of a short quotation, but fills out his clausulae with a verbum dicendi. An example is the exclamation of the actor in Antioch, when the Persians surprised the jteople in the theatre : " nisi somnus est " inquit " en Persae ! " The remark of Iphicles when the emperor asked him if the people of Epirus spoke from their hearts in prais- ing their prefect, may also be cited: " Gementes " inquit "at in viti." I can refer to but two quotations of this sort which have irregular clausulae : when Gratian was elevated to the purple, Eupraxius exclaimed familia Gratiani hoc meretur, and wlien Valentinianus had ordered a wholesale execution of dignitaries in several cities, Flo- rentius remarked ecquid agetur si oppidum aliquod curiales non hal)eret tantos? inter reliqua id quoque suspend! debet ut cum habuerit occidantur. Even in Ammianus' citations from books a few trifling changes in the direction of a better rhythm are discernible, but it may well be that these are unintentional.^ ' Thus I. 9. 2 (order); 232. 23 {erraverit for erravertmt); II. 149. 26 (transposition of sc). It should be noted that many of Ammianus' quo- tations cannot be tested, as the works from which the^^ were taken liave perished. FOKM I. ^ y d yi — _ : 3 — fir 34 22 57 10 [i| 8 9 11 — w - 20 2 22 12 - 1 1 13 ^ 14 ^ 15 ^ — ^ le ^ ^ ^ 24 509 223 112 2 870-^ Form II. y cf ycf rC Varia Total 1 ^__^ _- 33 7 16 13 1 70 2 . 9 12 5 26 3 ^ ^ — 2 6 1 1 10 4 - ^ ^ 2 5 1 8 5 -- - - 1 1 6 - - ^ 2 2 7 ^ — ^ 2 2 H ^ ^ ^ 1 1 9 -^ -- — •■ vi. w- — 35 5 13 53 10 8 2 10 11 _ ^ _ 2 1 1 4 12 — ^ -- 1 1 ]3 _ 14 2 1 3 15 -- 1 1 16 - ^ -^ 2 2 17 j^ __ ; JL — 4 4 18 1 I 19 ■ ^ 1 1 OQ ^<_ ._ _ -. ^ _ :=^ [11 1 21 [11 1 99 28 46 26 3 202 at ' The brackets mark an instance ordinarily impossible to the type, occurring in virtue of exceptional accentuation. * I do not count the three cases registered as possible one-word clausulae 244 Austin Morris Harmon. Form III. y S yd St Varia Total 1 _x_.^^ ; ._, X ^ 8 62 5 3 1 79 2 " 4 [1] 8 1 14 3 — 34 1 3 38 4 ^ 1 53 3 2 59 5 1 2 3 6 — 1 1 2 7 -- -^ 8 ^^^ 26 3 29 9_x___: J^ — 7 91 10 9 117 10 5 6 1 12 11 ^ ^ _ 55 2 57 12 - ^ ^ 76 1 3 1 81 13 ^ 2 2 14 1 fl] 1 3 15 w _ ^ [1] 1 16 ^ ^ ^ 34 3 37 17->L__:_,_^- 8 33 3 2 46 18 3 [1] 1 1 6 19 -^ ^ - 20 2 22 20 - - - 4 10 1 1 1 17 21 ^ 1 [1] 1 3 22 3 3 23 - - — 24 -- ^ w 6 6 25^ : ^ — 3 9 12 26 1 1 27 ^- 11 11 28 - - -- 2 10 1 13 29 - w — 6 6 30 ^ _ _ : _ ^ ^ _i 1 1 55 540 43 36 7 681 * ej'iagis et drasidas (I. 69. 11) : various instances in which the List accent of this clausuhi falls on a short syllable may be found in the lists given on p. 214. The Clausula in Aiimiia)ius Marcelli)ius. Form IV. 245 (f y6 15 - -^ - 1 1 16 ^ ^ ^ : X ^ — 1 1 17 ^ ^ ^ " 1 1 18 ^ ^ -^ .; ^^ ,_ _X 1 1 15 4 4 8 31 TRANSACTIONS OF THr, CONNECTICUT ACADEMY Of ARTS AND SCIENCES Incorpor.vted A.D. 1799 VOLUME 1 6, PAGES 247-382 APRIL 1911 Nutrition Investigations on the Carbohydrates of Lichens, Algae, and Related Substances BY MARY DAVIES SWARTZ FROM THE LABORATORY OF PHYSIOLOGICAL CHEMISTRY SHEFFIELD SCIENTIFIC SCHOOL YALE UNIVERSITY NEW HAVEN. CONNECTICUT, U. S. A. YALE UNIVERSITY PRESS NEW HAVEN, CONN. 1911 # TRANSACTIONS OF THE CONNECTICUT ACADEMY OF ARTS AND SCIENCES Incouporated A.D. 1799 VOLUME 16, PAGES 247-382 APRIL, 1911 Nutrition Investigations on the Carbohydrates of Lichens, Algae, and Related Substances BY MARY DAVIES SWARTZ FROM THE LABORATORY OF PHYSIOLOGICAL CHEMISTRY SHEFFIELD SCIENTIFIC SCHOOL YALE UNIVERSITY NEW HAVEN, CONNECTICUT, U. S. A. YALE UNIVERSITY PRESS NEW HAVEN, CONN. 1911 COMPOSED AND PRINTED AT THE WAVERLY PRESS By The Williams & Wilkins Company Baltimore, U. S. A. CONTENTS. I. INTRODUCTION. PAGE Lichens, Algae, Tree Bark and Certain Tubers and Foodstuffs 253 II. HISTORICAL PART. Introduction 259 Cellulose 262 (a) Occurrence and Nature 262 (b) Occurrence of Cytases (Cellulases) 264 (1) In the Vegetable Kingdom 264 (2) In Lower Animals 266 (3) In Higher Animals 267 (c) Digestion and Utilization 268 (1) By Animals 268 (2) By Man 269 The Pentosans 272 (a) Occurrence and Nature 272 (b) R61e in Plant Physiology 274 (c) Occurrence of Pentosanases 275 (1) In the Vegetable Kingdom 275 (2) In Lower Animals 276 (3) In Higher Animals 276 (d) Digestion and Utilization 278 (1) By Animals 278 (2) By Man 278 The Galactans 282 (a) Occurrence and Nature 282 (b) Occurrence of Galactanases 284 (1) In the Vegetable Kingdom 284 (2) In the Anhnal Kingdom 285 (c) Digestion and Utilization by Animals and Man 285 The Mannans 289 (a) Occurrence and Nature 289 (b) Occurrence of Mannanases 291 (1) In the Vegetable Kingdom 291 (2) In the Anhnal Kingdom 292 (c) Digestion and Utilization by Animals and Man 293 The Levulans 295 (a) Occurrence and Nature 295 (b) Occurrence of Levulanases 296 (1) In the Vegetable Kingdom 296 (2) In the Animal Kingdom 297 (c) Digestion and Utilization by Animals 297 249 250 Contents The Dextrans . 300 (a) Occurrence and Nature 300 (b) Occurrence of Dextranases 301 (1) In the Vegetable Kingdom 301 (2) In the Animal Kingdom 302 (c) Digestion and Utilization by Animals and Man 302 III. EXPERIMENTAL PART. Introduction 306 Chemical Investigations. General Methods 307 Pentosan Preparations 309 (a) Dulse (Rhodymenia palmata) 309 (b) Hawaiian Seaweeds 313 (1) Limu Lipoa {Haliseris pardalis) 313 (2) Lunu Eleele (Enteromorpha intestinalis) 313 (3) Limu Pahapaha {Ulza lacluca, etc) 314 Galactan Preparations 314 (a) Irish Moss {Chrondus crispus) 314 (b) Hawaiian Seaweeds 316 (1) Limu Manauea {Gracilaria coronopifolia) 316 (2) Limu Huna {Hypnea nidifica) 316 (3) Limu Akiaki {Ahnfeldtia concinna) 316 (4) Limu Uaualoli (Gynmogongrus vertnicularis Americana, etc) 316 (5) Limu Kohu (Asparagopsis sanfordiana) 316 (c) Slippery Elm {Ulnius fulva) 317 A Mannan Preparation — Salep {Orchis) 318 A Levulan Preparation — Sinistrin (from Scilla Marilima) 321 Summary 322 bacteriological investigations. Introduction 323 Trials with pure cultures of aerobes 324 Trials with mixtures of aerobes 325 Trials with anaerobes 327 Discussion and summary 328 l'HYSIOLOGIC.\L INVESTIGATIONS. Introduction 331 Experiments with Enzymes 332 Parental Injections 332 (a) Methods and Technique 332 Contents 25 1 (b) Subcutaneous and Intraperitoneal Injections 335 (1) Dulse 335 (2) Irish Moss 336 (3) Salep 338 (4) Sinistrin 340 Feeding Experiments 342 (a) Methods and Technique 342 (b) Digestibility of Pentosans 344 (1) Dulse 345 (2) Limu Eleele 346 (3) Limu Pahapaha 347 (4) Limu Lipoa 347 (c) Digestability of Galactans 348 (1) Irish Moss 349 (2) Limu Manauea 350 (3) Limu Huna 351 (4) Limu Akiaki 351 (d) Digestibility of Mannan 353 (1) Salep 354 Discussion and Sxmimary 356 IV. CONCLUSIONS. V. BIBLIOGRAPHY. Lichens and Algae — Composition and uses 365 Cellulose 366 Pentosans 369 Galactans 373 Mannans 376 Levulans 379 Dextrans 381 This paper has been prepared from the author's dissertation submitted for the degree of doctor of philosophy, Yale University, 1909. I. INTRODUCTION. Lichens, Algae, Tree Bark and Certain Tubers as Foodstuffs. From the earliest times, the food of man has included lichens and algae, and even the tender branches and inner bark of certain trees and shrubs, such as elm, birch, pine, and the staff-tree or bitter-sweet {Celastrus scandens). When the bark of trees is so used, it is freed from cork and the hard outer rind; is cleaned, dried, mixed with more or less meal, and made into "bark bread." Such substitutes for bread are commonly resorted to only in northern lands where there is scarcity of cereal crops, or in other regions during periods of famine. Johnson (7) records that elm bark is so employed in some continental countries, and Dillingham (4) relates that certain tribes of North American Indians, 'in times of extreme dearth, were accustomed to keep body and soul together by boiling and eating the bark of the staff-tree.' Poulsson (17) states that in Finland and northern Russia, sphagnum mosses are similarly employed; and Schneider (21) agrees with these other writers, saying that in general lichens are used as articles of diet only in cases of special need, principally because all lichens contain a bitter principle, which not only gives an unpleasant flavor and is difficult to remove, but also exerts an irritating effect upon the digestive tract, causing inflammation. Nevertheless, in the northern parts of the Scandinavian Peninsula, where cereal crops are always scanty or uncertain, great interest attaches to two species of lichen widely distributed through Europe, and through Arctic anc^ Antarctic regions: namely, Celraria islandica and Cetraria nivalis, which, as Poulsson (17) observes, 'have been considered nutritive and easily digestible since olden times. ' Cetraria islandica, whitened and freed from its bitter principle by washing with dilute alkali, is a rather appetizing substance; it has sometimes been used as a foodstuff by Polar navigators, and Dr. Hansteen, chief lecturer in the Agricul- tural school at Aas, Norway, has gone so far as to prophesy that moss is destined to become the great popular food for the masses, because of its cheapness and nutritive properties. Of marine algae, many tons are gathered and eaten annually in various parts of the world, the largest quantities being consumed 253 254 Mary Davies Swartz, by the Japanese, Chin-ese, and Hawaiians. These algae are found in great variety and widely distributed. In Japan, the general name applied to them is "Nori," which is also given to several prepared products. According to H. M. Smith (23), the most important Japan- ese seaweed preparations are: "Kanten," or seaweed isinglass, made from various species of Gelidium, the principal one being Gelidium corneum, often adulterated with similar seaweeds; "Kombu" made from Kelps, especially numerous species of Laminar ia, Arthothamnus, and Alaria; "Amanori," from species of Porphyra; and "Wakame," from Undaria pinnatifida. Kanten is used largely for food, in the form of jellies, and as an adju- vant of soups and sauces. According to H. M. Smith (23), it is also employed in foreign countries 'in jellies, candies, pastries, and many desserts, in all of which it is superior to animal isinglass. ' It has recently also attained popularity as a therapeutic agent in chronic constipation, being sold under various trade names, either plain or impregnated with laxative drugs, as cascara or phenolphthalein.i Kombu enters into the dietary of every Japanese family, being cooked with meat, soups, etc., and also served as a vegetable, or made into a relish with Soy-bean sauce. Amanori is eaten fresh or else is chopped and sun-dried in thin sheets, which are toastsd over a fire before eating. The crisp amanori is crushed between the hands and dropped into sauces or soups to impart flavor; or broken into pieces, dipped in sauce and eaten alone. Sheets of amanori, spread with boiled rice and covered with strips of meat or fish, are rolled and cut into trans- verse slices, and take the place of the American sandwich. Wakame is eaten as a salad, or cooked like amanori. In Hawaii, edible algae are called "limu. " Of these there are over seventy distinct species used for food, more than forty being in general use (18). Tons of limu are gathered for eating in Hawaii annually, and large quantities are also imported from the Orient and San Fran- cisco. Some idea of the extent of their use may be gained from the following statement by Miss Reed (18): ''Ancient Hawaiians prob- ably seldom ate a meal without some kind of limu, and even today no Hawaiian feast is considered quite complete without several varieties served as a relish with meats or poi."^ Since, with the exception of a few experiments reported by Oshima (15) and Saiki (20), there are no iCf. Galactans, p. 283. ^Poi is a thick paste made from the root of the tare plant, and takes the place of rice or bread in the native diet. Nutrition Investigations. 255 data upon the digestibility of marine algae, an investigation of some of these Hawaiian limu seemed highly desirable; and through the kindness of Miss Reed, a number have been obtained for this purpose. Their occurrence and uses will therefore be described in some detail.* These limu are washed carefully after gathering, salted, and usu- ally broken, pounded, or chopped into small pieces. They may then be eaten uncooked, as a relish with poi, meats or fish; boiled with meats; put into soups for thickening or flavoring; or roasted with pig in a pit. Served raw and crisp, they take much the same place in the diet as our salads. Among the most popular varieties are Limu Eleele {Enter o- morpha of various species), Limu Kohu {Asparagopsls sanfordiana) and Limu Lipoa {Haliseris pardalis). Next in favor come Limu Ma- nauea {Gracilaria coronopifolia), Limu Huna {Hypnea nidifica) and Limu Akiaki {Ahnfeldtia concinna). Limu Pahapaha (Ulva fasciata and Ulva lactuca) is widely distributed but not very popular. Limu Uaualoli {Gymnogongrus vermicularis americana and Gymnogongrus disciplinalis) is limited to certain islands, and hence not in such gen- eral use and favor as some of the others. Limu eleele is a great favorite, forming a part of every native feast. It is generally eaten uncooked, sometimes being dropped into hot gravy, broth or meat stews just before serving. Limu kohu is always pounded in cleaning to free it from bits of coral and soaked 24 hours in fresh water to remove the bitter iodine flavor. It becomes slightly fermented and acquires a somewhat sour taste. Limu lipoa is popular on account of its penetrating spicy flavor, and is frequently used as a condiment, taking the place of sage and pepper in Hawaiian foods. Limu huna is especially prized for boiling with squid or octo- pus, though limu manauea and limu akiaki are often used as substi- tutes. These limus, as well as limu kohu, yield large amounts of mucilaginous extract on boiling, limu manauea being considered es- pecially fine for thickening chicken broth. Many of the seaweeds used in Hawaii and Japan occur also along the coasts of the United States and Europe, and are to some extent used as food in both regions. The very species of Gelidium from which the Japanese prepare their Kanten grow in abundance on our Pacific coast. Irish moss {Chondrus crispiis), the "Tsunomata" of Japan, has long had considerable commercial value as a foodstuff in Ireland. In this country it is found from North Carolina to Maine, being especially abundant north of Cape Cod. After cleansing, cur- 'For fuller description see Reed (18). 256 Mary Davies Swartz, ing, and bleaching it is to some extent used for making blanc mange or a demulcent for coughs. Through the kindness of Dr. C. F. Lang- worthy, Nutrition Expert, United States Department of Agriculture, I have obtained the following interesting data concerning the use of Irish moss, from the Journal of the South-Eastern Agricultural Col- lege, Wye, Kent (1): "Professor D. Houston, of the Royal College of Science, Dublin, has favored us with the following notes on this sub- ject: Chondrus crispus (carrageen, or Irish moss) is a seaweed plentifully distributed along our northern, western and southern coasts. It is gathered and sold to local chemists, who retail it, in some parts at all events, at 6d. per pound. It is used by- many people as an article of food in the west, and generally for colds, for which pur- pose it is boiled in milk. Several of my students tell me that it is used for feeding weak calves and with striking results, bringing about an alteration of condition within four days. One student tells me that in one case at his own farm a batch of twelve calves took a kind of wasting disease, and nine died; the other three on the verge of death were given this plant, and all three recovered. It is prepared by putting one pound of the "weed" in a net bag and boiling in a gallon of water. The water on coohng sets to a jelly. The calves are given one glass of jelly in their milk each meal and wonderful results are said to be obtained." The high proportion of mineral matter is noteworthy ;i but without making a fuller investigation, it is impossible to say precisely wherein lies the value of this seaweed. Purple laver {Porphyra laciniata), a source of Japanese amanori, is found in abundance on the rocky shores of America and Europe generally ; but it is not used in this country save sparingly by the Chi- nese, who usually import it directly from China, and by some of the Indians of our northwest coast. In Ireland it is known as 'sloak,' and is boiled and served with butter, pepper, and vinegar as an ac- companiment of cold meats, or is served with leeks and onions. Dulse {Rhodymenia palmata) is found abundantly on rocky shores both in this country and in Ireland. It is very abundant in New England, where it is rough-dried in the sun and eaten as a relish. In Philadelphia it is called sea-kale and eaten as a vegetable. In Scot- land it has long been used both in the fresh state and dried. In the Scotch Highlands, "a dish of dulse boiled in milk is," it is said, "the best of all vegetables." In Ireland, it is eaten with fish or boiled in milk with rye flour. Purple dulse {I r idea edulis), which occurs on the Pacific coast, is often eaten like Rhodymenia palmata. iCf. Analysis of Chondrus crispus, p. 254. Nutrition Investigations. 257 Besides such lichens and algae, and the bark of trees, various tubers are used as food for man. In Japan, the tubers of Hydrosme rivieri (Conophallus Konjaku) are extracted with lime water, and the result- ing gelatinous mass is cut into small cakes. These, cooked with "shoyu'' or Soy-bean sauce form a common article of diet. The tubers of many species of Orchis and Eulophia, native to Turkey, the Caucasus, Asia Minor and the greater part of Central and Southern Europe, furnish a food material known as Salep. The small ovoid, oblong or palmate tubers are decorticated, washed, heated till horny and semi-transparent, and finally dried. An abundant mucilaginous extract is obtained by macerating the bulbs in water. Frequently the tubers are ground to powder, and the powder used like sago or tapioca. Royal salep, said to be used as food in Afghanistan, is pre- pared from Allium Macleanii. A former instructor in the American College for Girls, in Constantinople, reports that salep is a very com- mon article of diet in Turkey. It is sold in the markets in powdered form, and is made into a sort of sweetened gruel with milk. Not only is it used as a warm drink in the household, much as we use cocoa or chocolate, but it is also sold in the streets by venders, who either stand in booths along the way, or go about carrying huge brass urns strapped to their shoulders, clinking their cups and calling " Taze- Sahlep!"' It is especially popular in districts of the city where peo- ple work late at night. In the month of Ramazon, the time of all-day fasting, hot salep finds a ready sale at night. It is no uncommon thing to see the workman standing with his salep cup in hand, waiting for the firing of the sunset cannon. In spite of the fact that there have been almost no scientific inves- tigations as to the digestibility of such mucilaginous plant substances there seems to be a special virtue attached to mucilages in the popular mind. The prevailing impression is shown in some of the following remarkable statements. The United States Dispensatory, 1908, not only says that the mucilaginous extract of slippery elm bark(L^/wM5 fulva, Michaux) is nutritious, but adds, "We are told that it has proved srufficient for the support of life in the absence of other food." Of salep Smith (25) says in his dictionary of economic plants: "It con- tains a chemical substance called bassorin, which is said to contain more nutritious matter than any other vegetable product, one ounce per diem being sufficient to sustain a man"! The United States Dis- pensatory also assures us that salep is "highly nutritious." Johnson ipresh salep. 258 Mary Davies Swartz, (7) particularly recommends Iceland moss {Cetraria islandica) as a diet for consumptives, as "it seems to be both extremely nutritious and very easy of digestion, though of course, only capable of use as a substitute for starchy matters." In regard to Irish moss {Chondrus crispiis), he is a little more uncertain. "It is much used for invalids, especially in cases of consumption, but with doubtful advantage when substituted for more nutritious food." Schneider (21) says of Ice- land moss: "Inhabitants of Iceland, Norway, and Sweden mixed this lichen with various cereals and mashed potatoes, from which an un- commonly healthful bread was prepared." Until the matter has been thoroughly investigated, we must suspend our judgment as to the ac- curacy of such statements. After a few metabolism experiments, Oshima (15) far more conservatively remarks concernmg the algae of Japan: "Their actual value doubtless depends in considerable measure upon the mineral salts they contain." In view of the scarcity of any scientific investigations as to the be- havior of all these substances in the body, further experiments upon their nature and digestibility seem highly desirable, since they are not only widely distributed, and already form a considerable portion of the diet of many persons; but because, if they possess any real nutri- tive value, a wider use of such comparatively cheap materials would be an economic advantage; and because, under the prevailing notions as to their food value, they are sometimes relied upon as a source of nutriment in diseases (as diabetes) where the character of the diet is particularly important. The present work has been undertaken to throw some light on this interesting subject. A survey of the litera- ture shows that even the chemical nature of many of these algae has scarcely been investigated; and if this were known, we should still be under the necessity of studying their behavior in the animal body, for it is impossible to tell from chemical analysis alone whether a given substance will or will not prove digestible, as Rubner has long since warned us. II. HISTORICAL PART. Introducticn. According to the current practice of agricultural analysts, the car- bohydrates of plants are reported as crude fiber and nitrogen-free extract. Crude fiber is the term applied to the resistant mixture form- ing the mature cell wall, shown as long ago as 1864 by Henneberg and Stohman (41) to have no definite chemical composition. It is there- fore not identical with cellulose, but consists of a mixture of cellulose with incrusting substances, lignin and cutin, the relative proportions of which have recently been exhaustively studied by Konig (51), Fiirstenberg (39), and Murdfield (63). Cellulose is the chief consti- tuent; the other two are usually present in varying proportions. Schulze (74) to whom much of our knowledge of the composition of the plant cell wall is due, has classified the carbohydrates of the nitro- gen-free extract as follows : I. Water-soluble carbohydrates. To this class belong the mono-, di-, and tri-saccharides, and some soluble polysaccharides. II. Carbohydrates insoluble in water, but yielding sugar under the action of diastase. The chief member of this group is starch. III. Carbohydrates insoluble in water and resistant to the action of diastase, never being changed by it into sugar. This group is called the Hemicelluloses. The term hemicellulose, as used by recent writers^ seems to be inter- preted to include some polysaccharides of the first group. It is there- fore used here as a group name for those carbohydrates which are dis- tinguished from cellulose by being capable of hydrolysis on boiling with dilute mineral acids, and from the other polysaccharide carbohy- drates by not being readily digested by diastase. According to the kind of sugar yielded on hydrolysis, the hemicelluloses are designated as Pentosans or Hexosans, the latter including Galactans, Mannans, Dextrans, Levulans, etc. After a general review of the chemical ^e.g., Lohrisch. 259 260 Mary Davies Swartz, nature of lichens and algae, each of these classes will be discussed separately in detail. The percentage composition of some common species of algae is shown in the following table: FOOD MATERIAL. WATER. PROTEIN. FAT. 15.74 11.37 .49 18.75 9.58 .46 13.53 19.35 1.73 23.08 7.11 .87 13.98 33.75 1.30 18.92 11.61 .31 80.00 1.4 0.0 80.00 3.7 0.0 80.00 1.8 0.0 13.40 13.06 2.59 0.32 1.2 CARBOHYDRATES. Nitrogen- free Extract. Crude I.* Cystophyllum fusiform dried Ecklonia bicyclis, dried. , Enteromorpha linza, dried (Limu eleele)... Laminaria sp., dried.. . . Porphyra laciniata, dried Ulopteryx pinnatifida, dried II. t Ahnfeldtia concinna, fresh (Limu akiaki).. , Ulva fasciata and U. Jactuca, fresh (Limu pahapaha) Gracilaria coronopifolia, fresh (Limu manauea) Ill.t Chondrus Crispus, dried. IV. § Cetraria islandica 54.84 51.63 9.79 46.18 47.70 41.22 37.81 14.4 12.5 14.1 54.16 2.57 43.3 5.3 17.56 9.79 19.21 21.24 9.75 31.35 4.2 3.8 4.1 14.2211 2.2 *Oshima (15). t Reed (18), (calculated on uniform water basis). JAnnet (1). § Schmidt (24), first studied the ash and reported a notable amount of calcium and potassium phosphates. He found no nitrogen. Blondeau (3) reported 21.36 per cent nitrogen. I! Brown (334). Until 1905 the chemical nature of the constituents of algae had received little attention. Analyses of many species of algae from Japan and China were reported recently by Konig and Bett£ls (8), the results of which are given in the following table on page 25'. According to Oshima and ToUens (16) the carbohydrates of Por- phyra laciniala consist largely of anhydrides of (/-mannose and i'-ga- lactose. Miither and ToUens (13) studying various species of Fucus {F. vesiculosus, F. nododus, F. serratiis), Laminaria, and Chondrus crispus, found a methyl-pentosan (fucosan), in Fucus and Laminaria; and glucose, fructose, galactose and pentose groups in Chondrus Krefting reports a reserve carbohydrate in Laminaria digitate in win- Nutrition Investigations. 261 en t/i tn m U OJ V U) en U2 tn c O C O i c c c d -u c c d C C d c d d c c d i'^ tn s tn t« tn tn tn O O O o o O O H u u 1 o u u c _£ c c; _c _rt (3 "ci "rt c: "S o o o p c j; •^ d c > E E 'e >1 p- -d ^ a c E u c c i c . JH ^ X o c en tr c c c3 c c "^ "c "o) rt -1- >. > ■^ c c d p. fl. C C C ►J C u c fa fa t3 6 c; re Tt' ~ CC t-- OC' cr c 2 262 Mary Davies Sivartz, ter only, which yields (i-glucose. The algae investigated are thus all seen to yield pentoses, very frequently fructose and methyl-pentose, sometimes glucose and galactose. Lichens are symbiotic forms embracing algae and fungi. Because of this symbiotic nature, they exhibit great variety in composition. From the investigations of Escombe (6), Ulander and Tollens (27), Karl Miiller (11), Nilson (14), Wisselingh (29) and others, i it appears that the cell walls are usually of cellulose, but occasionally of chitin.^ Many species yield on extraction with hot water a gelatinizing sub- stance, which Berzelius (2) in 1808 named " Flechtenstarke " (lichenm), but which later investigators' have shown to be, not a single substance, but a number of related carbohydrates yielding dextrose, such as lichenin from Cetraria and Ramalina fraxinea, and evernin from Ever- nia prunastre, usnin from Usnea harbata. Other species, on the con- trary yield little dextran, but mannan, galactan, pentosan and methyl- pentosan in varying proportions. The table on page 2.57 showing the hemi-celluloses occurring in a number of lichens, has been compiled from data given by Karl Miiller (11) and Ulander and Tollens (27). Occurrence and Nature of Cellulose. Cellulose is said to occur in pure form in the wall of the young plant cell. With increasing age, modifications take place by which the true cellulose becomes more and more encrusted with lignin and cutin, two substances shown by Konig (52), Fiirstenberg (39), and Murdfield (63) to be almost entirely indigestible. According to Wielen (87) and Hofmeister (43), even pure cellulose is not a simple substance, but can be separated into soluble and insoluble portions."* Much of our in- formation regarding the nature of cellulose is due to the work of Schulze and his pupils. Schulze (75) has defined cellulose as that part of the cell wall giving the typical cellulose reactions,^ and yielding dextrose on hydrolysis with concentrated sulphuric acid. ^For early literature see Czapek, Biochemie der Pflanzen, Vol. I, pp. 514-516. -Chitin occurs in Peltigera canina and Evernia prunastre. 3Cf. Miiller (11) and Ulander (26). ^According to its behavior in sodium hydroxide solutions, the quantitative rela- tions depending upon the source of the cellulose and the concentration of tlie solu- tion. ^Insolubility in dilute acids and alkalies; solubility in ammoniacal copper oxide solutions; and production of a blue color with iodine and sulphuric acid. Nutrition Investigations. 263 cfi t/l c/i t/2 c/l c/) OJ !U OJ 4J 1) OJ a a Cli &. Oh D. ">. "^^ ">. "^^ >. >. ^ J2 ^ -g -g ^ o cj o aj OJ lU fl tn U2 ^ ajcDa):/]tncnt/] J5000SSSS520000 "kIcJ Ch ri'^'^^.'^l'^el C C cl •^ u (u oj .'7 .iv i"? vV iJ i> J rj a c -c .5 gn -§ -§ S S o ^ y H Qj en J3 -5 •« S 2 l-l •- Ml S § a^ .^ ^ 3 o .— d) d 1— i(MCO'etiiOCOt-COCiOT-H(M 264 Mary Dairies Swartz, CYTASES IN THE VEGETABLE KINGDOM. By the early investigators, Haubner (40), Henneberg and Stohman (41), Klihn, Aronstein, and Schulze (54), it was accepted without much question that, since cellulose disappeared from the alimentary tract of herbivora, it is digested like starch, and equally valuable as a nu- trient. But after Tappeiner (78), in 1884, showed that cellulose could be decomposed by micro-organisms, and promulgated his theory that this was the only way to account for the disappearance of cellulose from the alimentary canal of ruminants, the matter fell into great dis- pute,' and the question is not yet definitely settled as to how cellulose is digested and what are the products of its digestion. A diligent search has been made for enzymes capable of attacking it {cytases), but so far, such cytases have been proved to exist only in plants and lower animals. Many of these so-called cytases act upon hemicel- lulose rather than true cellulose, and will be discussed in connection with the hemicelluloses, though it is not always possible to make a sharp distinction between the two. A careful review of the subject of cytases in plant physiology up to 1898, has been made by Bieder- mann and Moritz (34), from which it appears that the penetration of wood by the mycelia of moulds is due to such cytases, and that a powerful cellulose-dissolving enzyme has been derived from Peziza sclerotium by de Bary (37) and from another botrytis (presumably a Peziza) by Ward (84), while Brown and Morris (36) have described cytases existent in germinating grasses which dissolve their cell walls. That this is anything more than a diastatic enzyme is denied by Rei- nitzer (67) ; but Newcombe (64) considers the assumption of the iden- tity of all cell-wall dissolving enzymes with diastase as far from jus- tifiable. Bergmann (32) reports such cytases in hay and straw. Scheunert and Grimmer (71), on the contrary, find none in oats, corn, horse-beans, lupine seeds, buckwheat or vetch. Thus we see that even in the case of plants, these enzymes need to be isolated and identified before we can arrive at any satisfactory conclusions. That cellulose can be dissolved by bacteria has been demonstrated for such forms as Amylobacter butyricus, Vibrio regula and Clostridium polymyxa (34). Omelianski (65) has described two organisms which ferment cellulose, and Ankersmit (31) finding Omelianski's bacteria on hay, has studied their behavior when introduced into the alimen- tary canal of the cow on its food. He finds that they do not increase ^For a review of this discussion cf. Lohrisch (56). Nutrition Investigations. 265 in number during their passage through the digestive tract, and there- fore concludes that they play a very inconsiderable role in the decom- position of cellulose. According to Van Iterson (81), certain aerobic bacteria, attacking cellulose, form from it products which nourish other forms {spirilla); certain anaerobes are also shown to attack it. Eberlein (38), finding in the first stomach of herbivora Infusoria which utilize cellulose for food, suggests that these protozoa, digested farther along in the alimentary tract, serve as means of transforma- tion of cellulose into products which the animal can digest; but there is nothing to indicate that such forms occur in sufficient numbers to be worthy of much consideration. Since 1906 three investigators have given the problem careful at- tention. Scheunert (68) has concluded from experiments in vitro that bacteria play an exclusive role in the solution of crude fiber in the coe- cal contents of horses, swine, and rabbits. He found that filtered coecal fluid acted on cellulose much less than unfiltered or simply strained coecal contents. This is contrary to the opinion of Hof- meister (45) and Holdefleiss (48), who attribute the phenomenon to the action of enzymes, and explain the loss of power occasioned by filtering as due to the effect of exposure to the air upon the enzymes. Lohrisch (57) has reported that fresh coecal fluid is effective in destroy- ing cellulose while heated fluid is not. On the other hand, implanting the sterilized fluid with coecal bacteria and protozoa would not restore its activity. Coecal fluid kept at 38° C. any length of time gradually lost its celliflose-dissolving power, while that kept on ice remained active, v. Hoesslin and Lesser (47) have attempted to explain these apparent contradictions, and conclude from their own experiments that anaerobic bacteria are the most effective agents in cellulose de- composition in the intestine. Equal volumes of non-sterilized and sterilized coecal fluid of the horse, to which weighed amounts of cel- lulose had been added, were suspended in sterile physiological salt solu- tion under practically anaerobic conditions and digested for periods of from 9 to 35 days. The disappearance of cellulose with the non-sterfl- ized coecal fluid amounted to from 55.7 per cent to 71.2 per cent; with sterilized fluid, to from 6.2 per cent to 42.4 per cent. It was also found that the addition of 1-5 grams of dextrose would effectively protect the ceUulose from digestion by the non-sterilized fluid, the bacteria preferring the more easily attacked carbohydrate. The gases evolved in these fermentations were characteristic of bacterial action, being chiefly methane, carbon dioxide, and hydrogen. The retarding effect of exposure to the air is explained by the theory that anaerobes are 266 Mary Davies Swartz, the effective agents. So, also, the fact that Lohrisch was unable to get cellulose digestion in sterilized fluid again inoculated with unsteril- ized fluid is attributed to the medium's being an unfavorable one for the development of these organisms, inasmuch as the addition of pep- tones to similar preparations caused in several cases an increased de- composition. It seems fairly well established, therefore, that the action of the coecal fluid of the horse is due to enzymes of bacterial origin. CYTASES IN LOWER ANIMALS. There is no doubt that cytases occur in some of the lower forms of animal life. Biedermann and Moritz (34) found a powerful cellulase in the secretion of the liver of the common snail {Helix poniatia), and their observation was verified by E. MuUer (61), also by Lohrisch (57) who reports two series of experiments in which snails fed tender let- tuce leaves digested from 40.1 per cent to 81.6 per cent of the cellulose present. On the other hand, Miiller (61) could not verify Knauthe's report of a cellulase in the hepato-pancreas of the carp (50) ; Pacault found none in the saliva of Helix pomatia (66) ; and Biedermann none in the digestive juice of the meal worm {Tenebrio molitor) or of the cabbage worm {Pieris brassica) (34). Biedermann also examined the faeces of the cabbage worm microscopically and found unaltered par- ticles of leaves, from which he concluded that much of the plant food eaten is excreted unchanged. Lohrisch (56) has obtained similar re- sults with caterpillars of sphinx moths {Sphinx euphorbiae) , not only in experiments with intestinal juice in vitro, but also in feeding expe- riments in which the cellulose was quantitively excreted. Selliere (75-76) has recently added some interesting contributions to this subject, showing that cotton treated in various ways; namely, that recovered after solution in Schweitzer's reagent, that treated with concentrated zinc chloride, or with 25 per cent caustic alkali hot or cold until the fibers are swollen, and subsequently washed with 1 per cent acetic acid and water, is attacked by Helix pomatia much more readily than the untreated substance. Subsequent drying of the treated cotton diminished its digestibility somewhat, suggesting that the physical condition of the cellulose is a definite factor in its utilization. SeUiere believes that only the more tender portions of plant cellulose are attacked by the digestive juice of this snail. It would seem that the pre\dous treatment of th? cellulose is a factor to be kept in mind in the interpretation of the results of feeding experiments. ^ iCf. the experiments on cellulose utilization in the dog, p. 263. Nutrition Investigations. 267 CYTASES IN HIGHER ANIMALS. There is at present no proof of the existence of cytases in any of the higher animals. The literature on the subject has been exhaustively reviewed by Bergmann (32), and Lohrisch (55, 56, 57) and it appears that there is no cellulase in the saliva or pancreatic juice of swine, horses, cattle, or sheep. The old observation by MacGillawry^ (cited by Biedermann and Moritz(34) that a cytase can be extracted from the vermiform appendix of the rabbit has been denied by Zuntz and Degtiareff (88). Schmulewitsch's- statements (also cited by Bieder- mann and Moritz) are worthless because he employed no antiseptics. E. Miiller (61) found no sugar formed from the decomposition of cel- lulose in the stomach of the goat, and Lusk (59) observed no increase in sugar elimination after feeding a phlorhizinized dog 20 grams of cauliflower, or a phlorhizinized goat 10 grams of paper. Lohrisch (57) fed pure cellulose (5-20 grams) to a phlorhizinized rabbit and found that it had no marked influence on the sugar output, and no nitrogen- sparing effect. Scheunert (70) has made further investigation on the action of the saliva and salivary glands in sheep, and confirms the earlier experiments with the saUva of this animal. On the other hand, Selliere (77) reports that the specially treated cellulose mentioned above is converted into dextrose by the intestinal secretions of the guinea pig in some instances. Practically nothing is known concerning the way in which cellulose disappears from the alimentary tract of man. Schmidt and Loh- risch (73) fed pure cellulose to diabetics and observed a disappearance averaging 77.7 per cent, and no increase in the elimination of sugar. They believe that most of it is absorbed in soluble form and not de- stroyed by fermentation in the intestines. Lohrisch, having fed cel- lulose in various diseases of the aUmentary tract,^ calls attention to the fact that in constipation, where there is the least bacterial action, the utiUzation of cellulose is highest, while in fermentation dyspepsia, in which one might expect a marked disappearance, the utilization is lowest. He therefore considers the digestion of cellulose as due at least in part to enzymes. lArchiv Neerland, Vol. XI. ^Uber das Verhalten der Verdauungssafte zur Rohfaser der Nahrungsmittel. Bulletin de I'Academie Imperial de St. Petersburg, 1879. 'See results, p. 264. 268 Mary Davies Swartz, Digestion and Utilization of Cellulose by Animals. The literature on the digestion of cellulose up to 1909 has been so exhaustively reviewed by Lohrisch that it is unnecessary to enter into a detailed discussion of it. From tables (55) showing the results of all previous experiments on the utilization of crude fiber in herbivora, carnivora, and birds, it appears that in the case of herbivora, especi- ally ruminants, 20-28 per cent of the crude fiber ingested with food disappears from the alimentary canal; that in case of carnivora^ and birds^ there is no utilization whatever. Lohrisch (56) himself reported three experiments in which dogs were fed pure cellulose and digested 31.1 per cent, 37.45 per cent and 5.4 per cent respectively, but Scheu- nert and Lotsch (72) repeating Lohrisch's work with a somewhat dif- ferent method of determining cellulose found that the administration of 40 grams of prepared white cabbage, containing 7.37 grams of pure cellulose, resulted in the recovery of the total amount ingested. Cook- ing the cabbage in bouillon did not increase its digestibility. They attribute the apparent utilization in the preceding experiment to des- truction of cellulose by the reagents used for its purification. Since the publication of their paper, Lohrisch has repeated his work with the dog (57), and reports complete recovery of the cellulose fed. He explains the error in the earlier investigation as due to the fact that" the ingested cellulose was twice subjected to purification (before feed- ing and in faeces) with consequent increase in percentage of loss, which was not taken into account. He points out the inevitable loss of some cellulose by any method at present in use for its determina- tion, and defends his own as sufiiciently accurate for all practical pur- poses if conditions are carefully observed.^ ^The only experiments on record are by Voit and Hoffmann on the dog and by \'on Knieriem on the hen. ^Experiments by Weiske on the goose, and by von Knieriem on the hen. 'Lohrisch used the method of Simon and Lohrisch, in which the cellulose is dis- solved by heating for an hour on a water bath with 50 per cent potassium hydroxide, then adding f cc. of 30 per cent hydrogen peroxide, and digesting from § to f hour longer if necessary. The cellulose is then precipitated by adding to the solution one half its volume of 96 per cent alcohol and 6-7 cc. of concentrated acetic acid; filtered off, washed with water, dilute acetic acid, alcohol and ether, dried and weighed. Scheunert and Lotsch mix the substance to be analyzed with 100 cc. of cold water, add 100 grams of potassium hydroxide and heat for an hour on a water bath, then filter through a hard filter paper, wash the residue on the paper with boiling water till only a trace of alkali remains, transfer it to a beaker and thence to a weighed Nutrition Investigations. 269 Cellulose digestion in the dog has been almost simultaneously stud- ied by V. Hoesslin (46). Two dogs on a meat-fat diet to which was added daily 2 grams of specially prepared white cabbage (containing 63.25 per cent of pure cellulose), for five periods of live days each, excreted on the average 99.7 per cent and 94.5 per cent respectively. This long experiment is significant as showing no adaptation of the digestive glands to the type of food. By these independent workers it seems now well established that the dog is unable to utilize cellulose. Hoffmann (42) has just published the results of some investigations on the influence of cellulose on the nitrogen balance and on phlo- rhizin-diabetes in the rabbit, from which it appears that after inges- tion there is no increase of sugar excretion, and no glycogen formation, yet he thinks that cellulose and hemicelluloses have a favorable influ- ence in phlorhizin-diabetes.^ It seems to follow from this, that even in case of herbivora cellulose is not utilized in the manner customary for starch and sugar. DIGESTION AND UTILIZATION OF CELLULOSE BY MAN. A similar tabulation of results of feeding experiments on man, shows that cellulose is not so well utilized as by herbivora, but does disap- pear in appreciable amounts. With one exception, the cellulose in all these experiments was administered as crude fiber. Hofmeister (43) fed pure cellulose and reported 75.7 per cent soluble cellulose and 5.6 per cent insoluble cellulose digested. Konig and Reinhardt (53) added to a diet rich in protein and fat, but free from cellulose, in sev- eral experiments, green peas and ripe shelled peas, red cabbage, white filter, on which it is washed successively with hot water, dilute acetic acid, hot water, alcohol and ether, and finally weighed. Scheunert and Lotsch claim that by Lohrisch's method the cellulose is altered in character, and as much as 40 per cent lost in the process; and that subsequent treat- ment of the recovered material causes an even greater per cent of loss, while by their method the loss in the first case is not over 6.8 per cent, and that in the second case even less. For the details of this controversy over method see the following: Simon and Loh- risch; Zeitschrift fiir physiologische Chemie, Vol. 42, p. 55, (1904). Scheunert; Berhner tieriirztHche Wochenschrift, No. 47, p. 82G, (1909). Scheunert and Lotsch; Ibid., p. 867, (1909); also Biochemische Zeitschrift, Vol. 20, p. 10, (1909); and Zeitschrift fiir physiologische Chemie, Vol. 65, p. 219, (1910). Scheunert and Grimmer; Berliner tierarzthche Wochenschrift, No. 48, p. 152, (1910). Lohrisch; Zeitschrift fiir physiologische Chemie, Vol. 69, p. 143, (1910). 'Unfortunately the original paper was not accessible. 270 Mary Davies Swartz, beans, graham and soldiers' bread and found 30.27 per cent to 76.79 per cent of the added cellulose digested. Lohrisch (55) finds that the cellulose of a common vegetable diet disappears from the alimentary- tract in large amounts, the actual quantity varying with the age, source and tenderness of the cellulose. Thus he finds that for normal individuals, of cellulose from lentils, 45 per cent is digestible; from kohlrabi, 79.1 per cent; from white cabbage, 100 per cent. Under abnormal conditions in the digestive tract, he has obtained the fol- lowing results: CONDITION. CELLTJI.OSE UTILIZATION IN PER CENT. Normal Chronic Constipation Fermentation Dyspepsia Gastrogenic Diarrhea Fatty Faeces in Icterus Fatty Faeces in Disease of Pancreas 57.9 81.4 37.8 29.5 27.8 20.9 According to Lohrisch, two diabetics on a cellulose-free diet, to which white cabbage was added in quantities to yield about 6 per cent of cellulose per day, digested 68.6 per cent and 84,5 per cent respectively, without increased output of sugar in the urine. Since the only way to determine definitely the energy value to the organism of such amounts of cellulose as are absorbed, is by means of respiration experiments, Lohrisch (57) has performed such an expe- riment on man, using the Zuntz-Geppert apparatus. In fasting, the respiratory quotient averages about 0.76. After ingestion of carbo- hydrates such as starch, it rises gradually in two to three hours, to 0,9-1.0, and when the carbohydrate has been consumed, sinks again to a lower level. Since the respiratory quotient for fat is 0.7 and for protein about 0.8, it is possible to determine in this way to what extent the carbohydrate replaces protein and fat in metabolism. Hence if cellulose is absorbed and oxidized as a carbohydrate, the res- piratory quotient should rise. If it is decomposed by bacteria, the respiratory quotient should not rise, since the theoretical respiratory quotient fo^ fatty acids, such as butyric and acetic, is, according to Munk (62) and Mallevre (60), 0.6 and 0.5 respectively. Now Loh- risch, feeding a man moist cellulose equivalent to 73.6 grams of dry substance, of which 25 per cent was digested (18.5 grams) obtained the following results: Nutrition Investigations. 271 •NOIX -saoNi aso-umao io ONiNNioaa Haxiv 1 •NOiionaoHd zoo ? rtlri fHlN H[c^ WIN fe 1 1 1 1 1 + 1 + 0, ■NOIIdKaSNOD 10 W + 1 + + + + + + 0, •ainNui aaj NOiionaoHJ jod •axriNiPt Had NoixawnsNoo so s "C50005C30COOO t- f^ t- i^ t^ t^ o t^ ■Noixoaaoaa zoo P CO CO cococococoooroco 0, •NOixawnsNOOzoo •axoNm aad aaivHNi awmoA •saxfl -Nm Ni XNaicraaa -Xa iO NOIXVUQQ •xNawraaa -xa ao ONiNNioaa u CO lO r-Ht^OOCOO(MCO •XNaK -laadxa ao aaaimN 272 Mary Davies Swartz, The respiratory quotient attains its highest value in the fourth hour, instead of the second or third, showing that cellulose is absorbed more slowly than starch. The rise is too slight to indicate that cellu- lose exercises any considerable protein- or fat-sparing effect. It is unfortunate that the amount of cellulose absorbed was so small. It is striking that the 02-consumption decreases at the very time that the respiratory quotient rises, and the COo-production scarcely in- creases. Lohrisch interprets this as indicating that the increased 02- consumption required for oxidation of the cellulose is compensated by a sparing of protein and fat. The differences seem too small to draw any satisfactory conclusions as to the energy value of cellulose. The low respiratory quotient in the later hours of the experiment, together with the increased Oo-consumption, indicates the utilization of some of the cellulose in the form of fatty acids. We must bear in mind that no formation of sugar or glycogen from cellulose, in men or ani- mals, has been demonstrated. Further investigations would seem to be necessary before we can agree with Lohrisch in saying, " Wir wissen, dass Cellulose und Hemi-cellulosen vom Menschen reichlich verdant werden, wir haben alien Grund anzunehmen, dass ihre Verdauung nach Analogie der Starke ablduf I . . . Die resorhirten M engen werden im menschlichen Organismus vollstlindig verbrannt. Dabei wird Eiweiss und Felt von der Verbrennung geschiitzt.'" In any event, the quanti- ties of cellulose which the alimentary tract of man is capable of ab- sorbing are, apparently, too small for it to play a role of any impor- tance in the diet of a normal individual. Occurrence and Nature of Pentosans. The anhydrides of the 5-carbon sugars are collectively designated as pentosans. These are not reported to occur in the animal kingdom, but the pentose sugars are found forming a part of the nucleic acid radical of the nucleo-protein molecule. In the vegetable kingdom, pentosans are very widely distributed, as has been shown by many investigators, especially Tollens and his pupils. i They occur in all kinds of plants, from the lowest to the highest, and are limited to no 1 Tollens, Landw. Vers., V. 39, p. 401, (1891); Tollens, Jour. f. Landw., Vol. 44, p. 171 (1896). For an exhaustive review of the literature on the occurrence of the pentosans see V. Lippmann, Chemie der Zuckerarten, 3rd Edition, Vol. I, pp. 44-60; 116-123; and Czapek, Biochemie der Pflanzen, Vol. I, pp. 537-545 (1905). Nutrition Investigations. 273 particular organ or tissue, being found abundantly in roots, stems, leaves or seeds. In regard to solubility in water, pentosans show all possible varia- tions. De Chalmot (108) found them present in the watery extract of the leaves of many plants; Winterstein (167) in the somewhat mucila- ginous hot water extract of the seeds of Tropaeolummajus ; Schulze (146), in both soluble and insoluble form in the cotyledons and endosperms of the seeds of Lnpinus luteus and other legumes, where they are doubt- less stored as reserve material for the growing plant; and in the cell walls of the mature plants, where in most cases they approach true cel- lulose in character. It is difficult to differentiate these highly resis- tant pentosans of the cell wall, which are commonly included in the term crude fiber, from the ligno-celluloses and oxycelluloses also found there, which as Cross, Bevan and Beadle (104) have shown,* are like true pentosans in yielding furfurol on distillation with dilute hydrochloric acid. Besides hemicelluloses yielding pentoses {xylose and arabinose) exclusively, occur many yielding also methyl-pentoses (fucose, rhamnose) . These yield on distillation with dilute hydrochloric acid, methyl-furfurol, which is precipitated by phloroglucin, and hence included in quantitative estimations of pentosans by the method of Tollens andKrober (121). The distribution of methyl-pentosans has been studied especially by Tollens and his pupils. Japanese "Nori" {Porphyra laciniata, Laminar ia, and other seaweeds) (129), tragacanth and many other gums (163) contain fucosan. Rhamnose occurs also widely distributed in the plant kingdom, but more frequently in the form of a glucoside. Rohmann (134) reports a rhamnosan in Ulva lactuca. It is a very common thing to find pentosans and hexosans occurring together. In fact, it is absolutely impossible, in treating of hemicellu- loses, to draw any sharp dividing lines, for they are not only intimately associated, but frequently chemically combined. Schulze (146) has given the name paragalactan to the carbohydrate yielding arabinose and galactose, which occurs in the seeds of many legumes. Winter- stein (167) finds galacto-xylan in the water extract of Tropaeolum majus, and numerous other examples of such combinations might be cited. A class of substances to which has been given a distinctive name because of their peculiar gelatinizing property, is the Pectins. As Czapek^ remarks, "It is uncertain whether they form a definite ^For further details see v. Lippmann; Chemie der Zuckerarten, Vol. I, pp. 160-169. 'Die Pektin-Substanzen; Czapek, Biochemie der Pflanzen, Vol. I, p. 545. 274 Mary Davies Swartz, class of cell wall substances, or whether they should be classified as 'hemicelluloses' or 'pentosans.' " In 1868, Scheibler (141) found a sugar which he called pectinose, but which was later shown to be ara- binose (142). In 1875, Reichardt (132) obtained a pectin body from carrots and beets, which he called 'pararabin,' expressing the view that pectins should hardly be considered as a special class of carbo- hydrates. Tromp de Haas and ToUens (160) have found from numer- ous analyses, that the pectins do not differ from other carbohydrates in their relative proportions of hydrogen and oxygen so much as earlier workers supposed, and hence they may be classified with other hemi- celluloses according to the products of their hydrolysis (pentoses; galactose and other hexoses). Cross (106) believes them to be allied to the ligno-celluloses. The whole matter is still in a state of uncer- tainty. Herzfeld (116) has shown that arabinose can be obtained from most pectins, and consequently they have been included among the pentosans, though from the frequency with which they yield ga- lactose, they might equally well be discussed with the galactans. Ac- cording to Czapek while pectins occur frequently in phanerogams, ferns and mosses, their presence in algae is doubtful, although it is possible that soluble carbohydrates of algae yielding arabinose or ga- lactose are closely related to the pectins of other plants. ^ Role of the Pentosans in Plant Physiology. Comparatively Uttle is known of the role of pentosans in plant phys- iology. De Chalmot's (108) observation that they decrease in quan- tity in seeds — peas and corn — during germination, and reappear in the stems and roots of the growing plant, would seem to indicate that they form a part of the reserve material in the seed; but Schone and Tollens (145), finding no diminution in the amount of pentosans in grains during germination, but rather a slight increase, declare that they do not belong to the reserve-stuff of the seed ; so the question may be regarded as still unsettled. Changes in the relative amounts of pentosan in plants at different stages of growth, studied by Cross, Bevan and Smith (105), Gotze and Pfeiffer (113), Calabresi (98), and others, show that the increase of pentosans runs parallel to the forma- tion of the skeletal substance ; and have led to the idea that they arise through the transformation of a part of the cellulose, and along with lignin and cutin, take part in wood formation. Ravenna and Cereser ^Cf. also Bigelow, Gore, and Howard (92). Nutrition Investigations. 275 (131) find in the case of dwarf beans that when the food is wholly dex- trose administered to the leaves, pentosans increase greatly, especially in the light, and that when the functioning of chlorophyll is prevented for long periods the amount of pentosans decreases. They conclude that the simple sugars exert a preponderating influence in pentosan formation, and that these serve as a reserve material when the plant has exhausted its more readily available food materials. PENTOSANASES IN THE VEGETABLE KINGDOM. Our knowledge of enzymes inverting pentosans is meager, and rather indefinite. The action of such forms as Hymenomycetes upon wood seems to be of chemical nature. At any rate it is evident (107-146) that they are able to utilize xylan. Bourquelot and Herissey (95) have isolated an enzyme from malt diastase which produces reducing sugar from pectins, and call it pectinase. This is not to be confused with the so-called pectase which causes the coagulation of pectin bodies. Bigelow, Gore and Howard (92) also find that the enzymes of Asper- gillus partially hydrolyze the pectin of gentian root. According to Harrison {1\^) , Bacillus o^erace^ produces a cytase capable of dissolv- ing the cell walls of potatoes, turnips, cauliflower and allied plants, which acts particularly on the middle lameUa, the supposed seat of pectin. 1 The latter is not an inverting enzyme. In Persian Berries {Rhamnus) (162), in Penicilliwn glaucum, and Botrytis cinerea (90), an enzyme (rhamnase) has been found which splits off rhamnose from some of its glucosides {rhamnetin and rhamnazin). An early observa- tion of the presence of rhamnase in the rutin of garden rue was made by Borntrager (94). That some of the so-called cytases described under cellulose'- may act on pentosans seems possible, but there is no direct evidence that such is the case. On the contrary, Cross and Bevan (105) believe that pentosans once formed in the plant, remain thenceforth unaltered. Tollens and Glaubitz (159) assert that the pentosans do not undergo lactic or butyric acid fermentation, and are otherwise unaffected by yeast, as has also been shown by Lintner and Diill (125). The pento- sans are very resistant toward the action of bacteria. Slowtzoff (154) found that a small amount of pure xylan in a putrefying mixture. 'Cf. Czapek, Biochemie der Pflanzen. -a. Biedermann and Moritz (34), Brown (35), Brown and Morris (36), Berg- mann (32), Gruss (184), Newcombe (64). 276 Mary Davies Swarlz, kept at a temperature of 40^ C, did not entirely disappear from the solution before the ninth or tenth day. Two widely distributed fer- menting agents acting on hemicellulose {Bacillus asterosporus Arth. Meyer, and Bacillus clostridiejornie, Burri and Anker smit), studied b)' Ankersmit (89), are said by him to occur in insufficient numbers to make their activity of any significance in the alimentary canal of the cow. PENTOSANASES IN LOWER ANIMALS. Extensive investigations regarding the occurrence of pentosan- splitting enzymes in lower animals, have been made by Selliere since 1905. The secretion of the hepato-pancreas of the common snail {Helix pomatia) not only digests cellulose in vilro,^ but also xylan, ac- cording to this writer (148). In feeding experiments, analyses of the food (oak wood) and excreta of these xylophages showed a higher per- centage of xylan in the former than in the latter (149). Hence xylan must have been digested. In 1907, he showed that pentoses were actually liberated and absorbed, by testing the blood of these snails, which gave the phloroglucin reaction (151). That sugar can be found in their blood is denied by Couvreur and Bellion (99), but this Selliere attributes to the fact that the sugar content is much less than in higher animals, and hence has been entirely overlooked. Xylanase also occurs in other species of snail (150) such as Helix aspera Miilh, Helix nemoralis L., Liniax arborum Boiich., Limax variegatus Drap., Arion rufus L., Patella vidgata L., Littorina lit'orea L., Littorina littoralis L., and in a representative of the Coleoptera, Phy- matodes variabilis L. The presence of a xylanase in Patella vulgata and the Littorinae is especially significant, as their food consists in pento=an-rich algae. Selliere (150) and Pacault (130) have independ- ently discovered a xylanase in the salivary glands of Helix pomatia. According to Rohmann(134), Aplysia, which subsist largely upon Ulva lactuca, do not, digest the soluble methyl-pentosan {rhamnosan) present in this alga. He finds this carbohydrate present in the glands of the midgut, but regards it as a food residue. PENTOSANASES IN HIGHER ANIMALS. There have been only a few investigations as to the presence in higher animals of enzymes hydrolyzing pentosans. Slowtzoff (154) ^Cf. Biedermann and Moritz (34). Nutrition Investigations. 277 found that pure xylan was not digested by saliva, gastric or pancre- atic juice, but could be gradually hydrolyzed (in two or three d^ys) by 0.2 per cent hydrochloric acid. Bergmann (91) digested pure x>dan with extracts of the intestines of many animals (hen, goose, guinea- pig, sheep, ox, horse), and of the vermiform appendix of rabbits, but in no case found a xylanase. These experiments were performed with suitable antiseptics and controls in all cases. An old experiment by Fudakowski (112), attributing an inverting action upon gum arabic to pepsin, and another by Schmulewitsch (144), attributing such an action upon crude fiber to pancreatin,must be disregarded, as no anti- septics whatever seem to have been used. According to Selliere (152), neither the pancreatic juice of rabbits, nor a mixture pancreatic and in- testinal juices, will hydrolyze xylan. Negative results were also ob- tained by him with macerated intestines of these animals. On the other hand, chloroform extracts of the intestinal contents of rabbits and guinea-pigs fed fresh hay and bread, produced pentoses in a 5 per cent xylan solution after 48 hours digestion at 37 degrees C, while negative results were obtained with boiled controls. This indicates that the enzymes causing hydrolysis were of bacterial origin, a conclusion sub- stantiated by later work of the same author (153). No xylanase was detected in the excreta of carnivora such as the lion, panther, and wolf. From a centrifugalized extract of human faeces and soluble xylan, di- gested under aseptic conditions, xylose was obtained after 15-20 hours; but in meconium of calves and human beings in which bacteria were absent no xylanase could be found, although the intestinal glands were functioning. McCoUum and Brannon (126) have shown that in the case of the cow intestinal bacteria destroy pentosans under anaerobic conditions, the degree of destruction varying with the kind of plant. Corn, wheat and oat feeds were incubated with fecal bacteria of this animal, and digestions continued 14 days in atmospheres both of car- bon dioxide and hydrogen, with the following average results : MATERIAL. ATMOSPHERE. PER CENT OF PENTOSANS DISAPPEARING. Corn Fodder CO2 H CO.2 H CO2 H 51.78 Corn Fodder Wheat Straw 76.13 28.09 Wheat Straw 37.99 Oat Straw 30.66 Oat Straw 54.00 From this review it is evident that the presence of pentosanases in the higher animals has not yet been demonstrated. 278 Mary Davies Sivartz, DIGESTION AND UTILIZATION OF PENTOSANS BY ANIMALS. In the case of men and animals subsisting on a mLxed diet, the hex- oses and their derivatives so overbalance the pentosans, under normal conditions, that the utiHzation of the latter is a question of theo- retical rather than of practical importance. But in the case of herbi- vora, limited to a diet in which pentosans occur in considerable amounts, the extent of pentosan utilization becomes a question of economic importance. It is not surprising to find, therefore, that since the development of satisfactory methods of quantitative deter- mination, a considerable number of investigations have been made upon such utilization by animals. The results of these experiments are shown in tables on pages 274 and 275. The results in these experiments were obtained by analysis of food and faeces. Lindsey (123) Gotze and Pfeiffer (113) and Tollens (157) found no measurable amount of pentoses or pentosans excreted in the urine of sheep, but Neuberg and Wohlgemuth (128) state that pento- sans always occur in the urine of rabbits, only disappearing when the vegetable diet is compensated by pentose-free material. They report that 9 per cent of soluble araban (cherry gum) fed to rabbits was ex- creted in the urine. Slowtzoff (154) found 1.4-4.5 per cent of xylan in the urine of rabbits, but no reducing sugar. He also found that if the animal were killed shortly after xylan feeding, xylan could be de- tected in blood, liver and muscles. Hence xylan must have been ab- sorbed from the digestive tract. The feeding experiments show that herbivora digest, on the aver- age, 55-60 per cent of the pentosans in their diet, but since no anima,! enzymes hydrolyzing pentosans have been demonstrated, and there is always the possibility of bacterial decomposition in the intestines, the most conclusive experiments as to the actual nutritive value are those of Kellner (118) with the respiration calorimeter. From the slight difference in loss of potential energy, when the furfurol-yielding rye straw preparation was substituted for starch, he concludes that furfurol-yielding substances participate in the formation of fat in the animal body. DIGESTION AND UTILIZATION OF PENTOSANS BY MAN. We have seen that pentosans can be digested by herbivora to a considerable extent. Can they be digested by man? The only feeding experiments on record are by Konig and Reinhardt (120). Nutrition Investigations. 279 In 1902, they conducted researches on two men whose main diet con- sisted of meat and butter or other fat, and beer; to this, in the various experiments, were added respectively (along with sugar, butter, beef extract, etc., used in preparing them) the following substances: Experiment I. Green Peas. Experiment II. Ripe Shelled Peas. Experiment III. Red Cabbage. Experiment IV. Canned White Beans. Experiment V. Soldiers' Bread. Experiment VI. Graham Bread. From analyses of food and faeces the following results were obtained: TOTAL PENTOSANS IN GRAMS. EXP. I. II. ni. IV. V. VI. In Food 15.55 0.79 5.08 7.47 23.15 0.59 2.55 3.24 14.01 0.70 5.0 7.75 12.80 1.12 8.75 14.32 52.64 8.66 16.45 20.24 41.26 In Faeces 4.06 Percent not utilized, estimating Pen- tosans in Beer as unutilized Total per cent not digested 9.84 12.97 Hence we see that of the total pentosans in the diet 3.24-20.24 per cent were excreted. Only a little furfurol-yielding substance was found in the urine. From the small percentage recovered in these experiments, Konig and Reinhardt (120) conclude that the pentosans are to a high degree utilized by man, but they take no account of pos- sible destruction by bacteria. ^ Since pentosans do disappear from the alimentary tract of men and animals, it behooves us to consider whether, on the assumption that they are hydrolyzed like starch, the pentose sugars so produced are as well utilized as dextrose. Konig and Reinhardt (120) found some furfurol-yielding substance in the urine, and Blumenthal (93) observes that after eating huckleberries, cherries and prunes, pentosans are excreted, but no reducing sugar. Cominotti (100) finds pentoses ab- sent from the urine of man on a meat diet, but always present on a mixed diet. He agrees with Konig and Reinhardt that the output in the urine is small compared with the amount of pentosans in the food, and proposes to investigate the possibility of glycogen formation from pentosans. The behavior of pentoses in the body has been exhaustively re\dewed by Neuberg(127).2 It appears from the work of Cremer (102, 103), 1 Cramer (101) has shown (according to a recent review, the original paper was not accessible) that bacteria are essential to hemicellulose transformation. '^For a recent discussion of the absorption and utilization of pentoses see A. Mag- nus-Levy, Oppenheimer's Handbuch der Biochemie der Menschen und der Tiere, 1909, Vol. IV, pp. 395-407. 280 Mary Davies Swartz, o CO i-H 00 ci ? CO CO (N 05 lO (N CO -^ O O 1— I CI 05 pote potei • CO lO t^ lO CO o lO O •* •<* »0 (N -* Loss of 14.0% Loss of 10.1% a ^ a goo o Vh ,_^ lU <« ?^ 3 ^ -Q -a rt ^ ■ O .ti CO is -a -O M) • g 'S H be -a c !fi ^ 1^ TJ C rt -^ c 3 c ^O u S tn t« O c3 c^ cj u > o o to >, >, X) -i3 -Q s o ^ a. a a ■q a a is ^ a a a sr; a CJ CD O fl^ 0^ 1> CJ O Q^ GJ P:^C/2CAlpHPi^CAla)c75a2c/D •q _ 4) - o ;- as O O CO ^ .-H ■-( CO CO O "O CO O >0 05 U (N 00 05 CO fl (N 05 00 lO 4i (M (N CO •* lO GO t^ S 3 ti CO a « T3 ■^ + -w 11 3 71 -O >, ^ T1 ^ t^ O + \^ Ui "o CD + ti tn ^ ^ Ui rt lU d n a ^ ^ ^! X T) ^ c/2 H cyj C rt < « o a en rt d e3 S Ui U -C — i tn tn ^ g *j *j O O U U rt cS _ 43 4:4 OJ ,-tJ^ *- ?5424D43!^rr"!t; rt q o o o ■*": rt O r 1 r t T* & »>\ ^^ *T d u o cj u Pi 43 &: 42 O M 282 Mary Davies Swartz, Ebstein (109), Frantze (111), Neuberg and Wohlgemuth (128), Sal- kowski (137), V. Jacksch (117),Lindemann and May (122),Brasch (96) and others, that the pentoses and methyl-pentoses (rhamnose) are ex- creted more readily than the hexoses; that they exert an unfavorable effect in diabetes; and that there is no evidence of their acting as gly- cogen-formers in man. Consequently, even if further experiments justify Konig and Reinhardt's conclusions, the pentosans must appar- ently still play a very small part in the nutrition of man. Occurrence and Nature of Galactans. Next to the pentosans, no hemicelluloses seem to be so widely dis- tributed as the galactans; both occur together in the plant cell, and often in a more or less intimate chemical combination. The pure galactans, i.e., those yielding exclusively galactose upon hydrolysis, have been differentiated into several classes, chiefly by differences in s )lubility or specific rotation, namely: 1. a-galactan, so named by Miintz (199), the first to identify galactan as an anhydride of galactose; it composes 42 per cent of luzerne seeds and occurs also in beans, barley, and malt. 2. |3-galactan, isolated from the lime residues in the sugar beet industry by Lippmann (192). 3. 7-galactan, first isolated from Chinese moss {Sphaerococcus lichenoides) by Payen (262), in 1859, and by him called "gelose." He also identified it in agar-agar^ {Gelidium corneum) and other algae. The carbohydrates of agar-agar were again studied by Reichardt in 1876, who obtained a substance of the formula C12H22OU and con- sidered it identical with the "pararabin" which he found in carrots and beets.2 In 1881 and 1882, Greenish (180, 181) investigated the carbohydrates of Fucus amylaceus (Ceylon agar-agar) and obtained on hydrolysis a sugar-yielding mucic acid (galactose) . From Sphaero- coccus: lichenoides he also obtained a substance resembling Payen's "gelose." In 1884, Bauer (169) showed that agar-agar yields galac- tose; and in 1905, Konig and Bettels (190) gave the following per- centage composition of Japanese agar-agar from Gelidium: Per cent. Per cent- Galactans $$ Ash 3.5 Water 20 Pentosans 3.1 Protein 2.6 Crude fiber 0.4 'The term agar-agar is appHed to the hot water extract of various red algae, mainly species of Gelidium. ^See Pentosans, p. 268. Nutrition Investigations. 283 Another species of marine algae in which galactan has been fully identified, is Chondrus crispus (Irish moss). This is also a red alga. C. Schmidt (210) first examined it, in 1844; he demonstrated that the gelatinizing substance was a carbohydrate and yielded sugar on hydrolysis. Fluckinger and Mayer (178), in 1868, discovered that the water extract of this alga yielded considerable mucic acid. In 1875, Bente (171) obtained levulinic acid from the products of its hydrolysis, and in 1876, reported that it yielded a non-crystallizing syrup (172). The first quantitative analysis was made by Hadike, Bauer and Tollens (185), who showed that the water extract yielded mucic acid corresponding to about 25 per cent of galactan. Sebor (220), in 1900, found in the products of hydrolysis, glucose, fructose and a small quantity of pentose. These observations were verified by Miither (200) in 1903, who further identified the galactose as a J-galactose. From the large yield of mucic acid, the water extract of Chondrus may therefore be regarded as chiefly galactan, together with some dextran and levulan, and a very little pentosan; groups which, according to Hadike, Bauer and Tollens (185), may be partly or entirely bound into ester-like compounds. Examples of galactans occurring in combination, or close associa- tion with other hemicelluloses are numerous. Lupeose, from luzerne seeds, originally called /3-galactan, yields 50 per cent galactose and 50 per cent fructose (214). The tuberous roots of Stachys tuber if era contain a soluble crystallizable carbohydrate yielding 37 per cent mucic acid, along with an unidentified sugar (225). Para-galactan (galacto-araban) forms a large proportion of the reserve material of many seeds.i Rothenfusser (204) finds that the mucilaginous extract of flaxseed yields equal parts of pentosans and hexosans, the latter being mainly galactose. Galactans and pentosans, as already indicated,* occur together in many lichens and algae, and also in the pectins.' Herissey (187) has shown that the "galactine" of Miintz (199) yields equal parts of galactose and mannose. Galacto-mannans also fre- quently occur in the reserve material of seeds, as in those of the date and other species of palm, and in coffee beans; in the American honey iCf. Schulze (215), Schulze, Steiger and Maxwell (217), Schiilze and Castoro (218), Castoro (176), and Goret (179). Also Schulze and Godet, Zeitschrift fur physiologische Chemie, V. 61, p. 279, for a verj^ complete review of the work of Schulze and his pupils. ^See Chemical Nature of Lichens and Algae:- Konig and Bettels (8), Escombe (6), K. Muller (11), Ulander (26). ^Cf. Pentosans, p. 268. 284 Mary Davies Swartz, locust {Gleditschia tri acanthus), Goret (179) found the albumen to yield 66-70 per cent galactose and 22-23 per cent mannose; he has shown, in fact, that the carbohydrate reserve of almost all seeds with horny albumen consists largely of a mixture of mannans and galac- tans.i GALACTANASES IN THE VEGETABLE KINGDOM. The hydrolysis of the paragalactan of lupine seeds during germina- tion was first observed by Schulze and his co-workers. That ordi- nary diastatic enzymes do not form sugar from the para-galactan of Lupinus hirsutus was demonstrated by Schvilze and Castoro (218). Ptyalin, pancreatin, malt diastase and"taka" diastase, will, however, in the course of 5 or 6 days' digestion at 35^0° C. render this carbo- hydrate soluble in water to the following extent: Per cent. Per cent. Malt diastase 38 Ptyalin 40 Taka diastase 35 Pancreatin 15 Griiss (184) has made exhaustive microchemical investigations upon the germinating date endosperm, in which he has been able to observe the solution of the galactans by enzymes developed during germina- tion. Bourquelot and Herissey (174) find a soluble enzyme hydrolyz- ing galactan,- produced by the germinating embryos of the seeds of the carob, Nux vomica, fenugrec and luzerne. Shellenberg (208), studying the action of moulds on hemicelluloses, found at least four different ferments showing considerable specificity in their action; seeds of Lupinus hirsutus (containing paragalactan) were attacked by most of these moulds {Mucor neglectus, Mucor piriforme, Rhizopus nigricans, Thamnidium elegans, Penicillium glaucum). Similarly, Herissey (187) found galactose produced from manno-galactans by Aspergillus niger and Aspergillus fuscus; Saiki (205) obtained sugar from Irish moss by digesting it with inulase prepared from Aspergillus niger and Penicillium glaucum; and with "taka" diastase prepared from another mould, Eurotium oryzae. Little is known of the action of bacteria upon galactans. Gran (182) found sugar produced from agar-agar by Bacillus gelaticus, through the action of an enzyme which he calls " gelase." Saiki (105), iCf. Mannans, p. 283; for a further discussion of the occurrence of Galactans see V. Lippmann, Chemie der Zuckerarten, Vol. I, pp. 686-697. 2Cf. Mannans, p. 284. Nutrition Investigations. 285 in experiments with B. coli communis, on culture media containing different kinds of comminuted seaweed, found a slight gas production in one culture, in media with agar-agar and Irish moss. GALACTANASES IN THE ANIMAL KINGDOM. The only discovered instance of a galactanase in lower animals is cited by Bierry and Giaja (173), who found that the hepato-pan- creatic juice of Helix pomatia produced galactose from extracts of carob seeds (Ceratonia siliqua) ; later experiments upon agar-agar, with extracts from a number of crustaceans {Astacus fluviatilis Rondel., Homarus vulgaris Bel., Maja squinado Rondel., Carcinus moenas L., and Platycarcinus pagarus L.) were entirely negative; the galactans of luzerne and f enugrec were attacked with difficulty by the extract from Astacus. Strauss (221) could find no enzyme attack- ing agar-agar, in the larvae and puppae of various species of Lepidop- tera and Dlptera. No galactanases have been found in higher animals. Bierry and Giaja (173), using extracts of luzerne seeds, got negative results with digestive juices of dogs and rabbits , and Sawamura (207) ob- tained similar results with extracts of different sections of the alimen- tary canal of swine and horses. Saiki (205) found saliva, pancreatic, and intestinal juices unable to hydrolyze Irish moss. DIGESTION AND UTILIZATION OF GALACTAN BY ANIMALS AND MAN. The first study of the digestibility of galactans in higher animals was made in 1903, by Lindsey (191). Alsike clover-seed, containing 8 per cent galactan, was fed in connection with hay, the digestibility of which had been previously determined; from analyses of food and faeces, the galactan in the hay (1.72 per cent) was found to be 75 per cent digestible, and that in the clover 95.78 per cent digestible. Saiki (205) fed agar-agar and Irish moss to dogs and recovered a large part in the faeces, as shown by the increased amount of carbohydrate excreted. Lohrisch (194) fed dogs and rabbits agar-agar in its usual form, and also " soluble-agar " prepared from ordinary agar by Dr. Karl Dieterich of Dresden, Director of the Helfenberg Chemical Fac- tory. This product seems to be partially hydrolyzed in its prepara- tion, since it is not only readily soluble in water, but has slight reduc- ing action; it yields on boiling with Fehling's solution, 3.5-4.1 per cent sugar, and if a watery solution is allowed to stand 18 hours at 286 Mary Davies Swartz, 37° C.,it is further hydrolyzed and yields then 16.9-20.4 per cent sugar. The results of Lohrisch's experiments appear in the folowing table: ANIMAL. FOOD. HEMICELLULOSE HEMICELL- EQUIVALENT OF AGAR ULOSE FED. EXCRETED. HEMICELL- UIOSE DIGESTED. Rabbit I Rabbit II Rabbit III Dog Ordinary agar Ordinary agar Soluble agar (given in 9 days) Same as III 18.77 = 14.48 11.8 = 9.11 95.9 = 65.02 53.0 = 35.9 7.1 4.71 14.2 11.7 Per cent. 50.9 48.3 78.1 67.3 Lohrisch (194) has also studied the utilization of agar-agar in starv- ing herbi'vora. In two experiments, rabbits starved for two days were fed ordinary agar as long as they would eat it, other animals of the same weight being kept in starvation as controls; in a third expe- riment," soluble agar" was fed. Urine and faeces were collected and analyzed. Of the ordinary agar, about 50 per cent was excreted in the faeces; of "soluble agar," about 25 per cent. No positive evidence of any change in nitrogen excretion attributable to the agar fed, can be drawn from the protocols. One animal died through accident, another survived its control but one day, and the third, in spite of its apparently good digestion of the "soluble agar," died a week before its control. In the case of rabbits made diabetic with phlorhizin and then fed 20-40 grams of both ordinary and soluble agar, Lohrisch (194) found that the D : N ratio remained fairly constant throughout each experi- ment, showing no marked increase in sugar excretion. We see, there- fore, no grounds for assuming that agar-agar {galactan) forms glycogen in rabbits. The first studies on the utilization of ga'actan by man were made by Saiki (205) (1906). In feeding experiments in which various car- bohydrates were at different times added to a uniform diet, consisting of 513 grams beefsteak, 500-600 grams bread, 40 grams sugar, 31 grams butter, 2 eggs and 2 apples — a diet on which over 98 per cent of the carbohydrates were digested, he obtained the following results: Nutrition Investigations. 287 SUBSTANCE ADDED TO DIET. i EQUIVALENT OF SUBSTANCE IN DEXTROSE. CARBOHYDRATES IN FAECES CAL- CULATED AS DEXTROSE. HEMICELLULOSE DIGESTED. 20 grams agar. . . 24 grams agar . . . 40 grams wakame 45 grams kombu. Grams. 10 12 4.7 11.4 Grams. 9.2 8.8 3.4 2.5 Per cent. 8 27 28 78 Lohrisch has also studied the digestibility of "soluble agar" in man. Sometimes it is not well borne, especially if given in quanti- ties over 50-60 grams per day and causes gas formation, diarrhoea, and other intestinal disturbances; in other cases, large amounts (100 grams per day) cause no unpleasant symptoms whatever. The agar was dissolved in some beverage, and the diet was otherwise carbohy- drate-free. Some of the results are shown in the following table (194) : DURATION OF EXPERIMENT. AMOUNT DIGESTED. HEMICELLULOSE EXCRETED. HEMICELL- ULOSE DIGESTED. HEMICELL- NO. As Air Dry Soluble Agar. As Hemicel- lulose. m-OSE DIGESTED. Grams. Grams. Grams. Grams. Per cent. 1 1 day 100 61.9 46.06 15.84 25.6 2 1 day 100 61.9 39.1 22.8 36.8 3 3 days 235 145.4 90.5 54.9 37.7 4 3 days 240 148.5 40.8 107.7 72.5 5 1 day 100 61.9 25.4 36.5 58.9 6 1 day 110 67.8 23.4 44.4 65.5 No. 4 was a case of chronic constipation; the high percentage of hemi- cellulose digested is in accordance with the observations of Lohrisch (193) and Pletnew (203), on the extraordinarily good utilization of all foodstuffs in chronic constipation. Two of these experiments were on diabetics, and showed that the 18.36 grams of "soluble agar" ab- sorbed per day caused no increase of sugar in the urine, and had no noticeable effect on nitrogen metabolism. From these experiments, we see that ordinary agar is digestible to a very small extent, and that even when changed to an easily hydro- lyzed form, it is only digested to about 50 per cent. Is the part digested absorbed and utilized as galactose? The recent exhaustive 288 Mary Davies Swarlz, discussion of the behavior of galactose in the animal body by Brasch (175) renders any details on the utilization of this sugar unnecessary. Hofmeister (188) showed that of all sugars it is most readily excreted. That galactose can form glycogen in dogs and rabbits, has been shown by Weinland (226), Kausch and Socin (189), Cremer (177), Voit (223), Brasch (175), and others.^ Brasch (175) has shown that the assimila- tion limits for galactose lie, for normal man, between 30 and 40 grams, while for dextrose they lie between 100 and 150 grams. Voit (224), Sandmeyer (206), Bauer (170), and others have shown that galactose, even in small amounts increases the sugar excretion in diabetes. It would seem, therefore, that if soluble agar were absorbed as sugar, it would increase the sugar output in the urine. To throw some light on this problem Lohrisch (194) has conducted three respiration ex- periments on men after ingestion of 100-110 grams of soluble agar, of which, on the average, about 63 per cent was absorbed. The changes in the respiratory quotient are shown in the following table: Respiratory Quotient. IN FASTING. NUMBER OF HOURS AFTER INGESTION OF SOLUBLE AGAR. NO. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 I II III 0.768 0.786 0.739 0.768 0.766 0.835 0.794 0.815 0.860 0.825 0.800 0.770 0.767 0.774 0.735 0.724 0.714 IN FASTING. NUMBER OF HOURS AFTER I NGESTION OF SOLUBLE AGAR. NO. 8 9 10 11 12 13 I II III 0.768 0.786 0.739 0.693 0.730 0.703 0.618 0.669 The distinct rise in the respiratory quotient in the fourth hour (beginning in the third hour in Experiment I) would indicate that car- bohydrate was being oxidized, which in this case must come from the agar. The low value in the later hours seems due to the oxidation of fatty acids ;2 that such acids may be formed from soluble agar by bacteria, appears probable also from the intestinal fermentation pro- ber. Magnus-Levy, Verwerthbarkeit der Galactose in normalen Organismus : Op- penheimer's Handbuch der Biochemie der Menschen und der Tiere, Vol. IV, p. 379. ^Cf. respiration experiments described under Cellulose. Nutrition Investigations. 289 duced when large amounts of this preparation are taken. A slight increase in acetone output, shown in the metabolism experiments with diabetics, points to the same conclusion. Perhaps, as Lohrisch suggests, the very slow digestion of the carbohydrate, may enable the organism to utilize the galactose formed, and account for its non-ex- cretion, but this requires further demonstration. According to these experiments by Lohrisch, cellulose and the solu- ble galactan show little difference in their physiological behavior. Both can be digested to about 50 per cent. Ordinary agar, as Saiki's experiments show, is largely recovered in the faeces; in fact, a thera- peutic practice which has been recently established is based upon the recognized indigestibility of agar, namely, its employment as a remedy in cases of chronic constipation. It is especially valuable, as Mendel (196) points out, in those cases where the difficulty is due to an ex- tremely complete digestion and absorption of all foodstuffs from the alimentary tract, which causes the formation of dry, hard faecal masses (scybaUa) difficult to evacuate. The agar, remaining undigested and retaining a high percentage of water, gives bulk and softness to the faeces, and facilitates their daily elimination. Being resistant towards bacterial action, it causes neither gas formation nor produc- tion of harmful decomposition products. According to A. Schmidt (209), it can be advantageously taken in quantities up to 25 grams per day, part with the breakfast cereal, and part with sauce or cream, at another meal. In view of such facts as these, we are hardly prepared to agree with Lohrisch, that ' Cellulose and Hemicelluloses are readily digested. ' Occurrence and Nature of Mannans. As widely diversified in origin and character as the galactans, and very intimately associated with them are the Mannans. They show all possible degrees of solubility, from the readily soluble mucilage found in certain legumes, to the completely insoluble "reserve-cellu- lose," which forms the horny albumen in such seeds as the date, and which was long confused with true cellulose. A few examples will serve to show the diverse places in which man- nans may be found. They occur in yeast :i (258) in algae, as Por- phyralaciniata; (278) in moulds, as Penicillium glaucum; (285) in the leaves and roots of the Japanese plant, Conophallus konjaku (280) ; in the bark and wood of many American trees (272). ^For further discussion see v. Lippmann, Chemie der Zuckerarten, Vol.1, pp. 641- 649, and Czapck, Biochemie der Pflanzen, pp. 325-329. 290 Alary Davies Swartz, The most extensive study has been given to the mannans of various seeds, in which, as already shown, ^ mannans and galactans seem al- most invariably to occur together. The seeds of the carob tree {Ce- ratonia siliqua) contain a hemicellulose originally called "caruban" by Effront (241) (1897), but shown by van Ekenstein (282) to yield mannose, and by Bourquelot and Herissey (232) (1899), (^-galactose. The first elaborate studies of "reserve-cellulose" were made by Reiss (264), who showed that the horny albumen of the seeds of Phytelepas macrocarpa, Phoenix dactylifera and other species of palm, Allium cepa, Asparagus officinalis, Iris pseudacorus, Strychnos nux vomica and Caffea arabica, differed chemically from true cellulose in their color reactions, in the ease with which they can be hydrolyzed, and in yielding, instead of dextrose, a sugar which he called "seminose," but which proved to be identical with Fischer and Hirschberger's (242) previously described mannose. Mannan also occurs richly in the tubers of the many species of Or- chis and Eulophia which are the source of commercial salep. On ex- traction with water, they yield a mucilaginous extract which was first studied by C. Schmidt (270) in 1844, and called by him "salep- bassorin"; on hydrolysis with dilute sulphuric acid he obtained, be- s'des some gummy substance and cellulose, a fermentable sugar which he thought to be dextrose. Mulder (259) considered the salep mucilage a mixture of starch and gum or pectin acids, while Franck (243) thought it a modification of cellulose, and Girand (248) a trans- formation of a starchy substance into a variety of dextrin swelling in water. Pohl (263) by precipitation with neutral salts, distinguished an "a-Schleim" and a "j8-Schleim. " According to Thamm (276), who has made the most recent investigations, "a-Schleim" does not occur in German salep. ToUens and Gans (277) showed that on hydrolysis, besides dextrose, mannose or, as they called it, " isomanitose " was formed, but this was shown by Fischer and Hirschberger (242) to be identical with J-mannose. Thamm (276) and Hilger (254) have shown conclusively, that the starch-free water extract contains an anhydride of mannose only. A very resistant type of mannan occurring in some plants, has been designated as manno-cellulose by Schulze (273). Bertrand (227) finds it taking the place of xylan in the woody tissues of gymnosperms. ^Cf. Schulze and his coworkers, and Goret, under Galactans. Also Schulze and Godet, Zeitschrift fiir physiologische Chemie, V. 61, p. 279, for a very coraplete Nutrilion Investigations. 291 MANNANASES IN THE VEGETABLE KINGDOM. There is very little literature concerning the action of bacteria upon mannans. Sawamura (267) observed that extracts of Hydrangea pa- niculata, used in the manufacture of Japanese paper, which contain mannan (along with galactan and araban) , became liquefied on stand- ing. In bacteriological studies with extracts of this plant, and of roots of Conophallus konjaku, he found that only B. mesentericus vul- gatus dissolved these mannans. The action was greatly facilitated, and sugar formation increased if a certain wild yeast, in itself inactive, were present. Traces of a similar enzyme seem to occur in B. prodi- giosus. In his studies of the action of moulds on hemicelluloses, Schellen- berg (269) found that the seeds of Ruscus aculeata, which yield almost exclusively mannose (237-240), were attacked only by Penidllium glaucum. Herissey (253), using pure cultures and water extracts of cultures of Aspergillus niger (grown on media rich in mannose and ga- lactose to incite the development of mannanase and galactanase) , with suitable antiseptics and controls, obtained mannose — and galactose — from seeds of Ceratonia siliqua and Gleditschia triacanthus, and an abundant yield of mannose from salep; similar results were obtained with Aspergillus f us cus. As early as 1862, Sachs (266) observed the change of the thickened cell- walls of the date endosperm into sugar during germination. The cytases producing this change in 'reserve-cellulose' were later care- fully investigated by Reiss (264), Brown and Morris (230), Newcombe (261), Griiss (251), and others. Still more recently, Bourquelot and Herissey have made many studies on the specific characteristics of these plant enzymes. An exhaustive review of the literature on man- nans and the action of enzymes upon them has been published by Herissey (253), consequently this subject will only be reviewed very briefly here. Griiss (251) has demonstrated that the solution of the date embryo {Phoenix dactylifera) is due to a ferment, the product of whose activ- ity is galactan and mannose. Effront (241) (in 1897) attributed the solution of the albumen of carob seeds (called by him caruban) to a "caroubinase," but thought that the product of its activity was not identical with the products of hydrolysis; in 1899, however, Bourque- lot and Herissey (233) showed the possibility of obtaining mannose by the action of a soluble ferment derived from these seeds, which they called "seminase." Shortly afterwards, a similar enzyme was 292 Mary Davies Swartz, isolated by them from the seeds of Phoenix canariensis. Herissey (253) has been able to show that seeds of such legumes as luzerne, fenugrec, and common genet have, at least at the time of germination, ferments capable of transforming mannans — and galactans — into their corresponding sugars. Experiments in vitro show that they are not limited to action upon the seeds by whose embryos they are pro- duced, but act on the reserve-cellulose of seeds from very distinct groups of plants. However, the luzerne ferment does not digest all mannans and galactans; it will hydrolyze the mannans of the tubers of the Orchis family (and commercial salep prepared from them) , but not those of the albumen of palm seeds. Griiss (251) has also shown that the enzyme of the date endosperm hydrolyzes starch, although this does not occur in the date seed, and that malt diastase works on a-mannan (the soluble mannan of date seeds, according to Griiss) which does not occur in the barley endo- sperm. Griiss considers diastatic enzymes a group working not only on starch, but also on hemicelluloses. Herissey thinks that diastase and seminase are found together in varying proportions in barley, legumes, carob seeds, etc., and that neither is a simple ferment, but a "superposition de ferments," and defines "seminase" as a "ferment or group of soluble ferments, causing the transformation of the car- bohydrates of horny albumens of the seeds of Leguminosae into as- similable sugars." Gatin (247) has made further researches upon the nature of seminase, and states that during the germination of certain seeds whose reserve is in the form of mannan, the presence of mannose is exceptional, but dextrose occurs in abundance. This phenomenon he attributes to a "manno-isomerase," which transforms the mannose, as fast as formed by the seminase, into dextrose. Experiments in vitro seem to indicate that this is a soluble ferment. MANNANASES IN THE ANIMAL KINGDOM. There are only a few instances on record of mansases occurring in lower animals. Bierry and Giaja (228, 229) found that the hepato- pancreatic juice of Helix pomatia was capable of producing mannose from extracts of carob seeds and salep; that of Astacus fluviatilis, Ho- marus vulgaris, and Maja sqiiinado, from the ivory nut {Phytelepas ma- crocarpa), the two latter hydrolyzing it at ordinary room temperature. On the other hand, the mannans of fenugrec and luzerne were hydro- lyzed with difficulty, or not at all, by very pure gastro-intestinal juice. No mannanase was found by Strauss (275) in the larvae and Nutrition Investigations 293 puppae of Lepidoptera and Diptera. Similar negative results have been obtained with the digestive enzymes of higher animals. Kino- shita (257) found that emulsin and invertin did not hydrolyze the man- nans of Conophalliis konjaku and Gatin (245, 246) tried the blood of rabbits, chicken serum, the pancreatic juice of dogs, the macerated intestines and pancreas of chickens and cattle, upon salep and carob seeds with negative results; on the other hand, Sawamura (268) re- ports a mannanase in the extracts from different sections of the ali- mentary tract of swine and horses. DIGESTION AND UTILIZATION BY ANIMALS AND MAN. There are also very few records in the literature of feeding experi- ments with mannans. In a paper in the Zeitschrift fiir Biologic, Voit (283) in 18741 described one by Hauber, who fed a medium sized dog 390 grams of dry salep powder in the course of eight days. The faeces of the feeding period were roughly marked off, and Hauber reported no unchanged salep present in them, because there was no swelling in water as with the original powder. Calculations based on the yield of sugar from the faeces on hydrolysis showed that at least 50 per cent of the salep was absorbed. This seems to have been a very crude ex- periment, and cannot be considered of convincing value. In 1879, Weiske (284) fed carob-beans {Ceralonia siliqua) to sheep, along with meadow hay, and compared the nutritive value of this ra- tion with one in which the carob-beans (210 grams) were replaced by an equivalent weight of starch, sugar and protein (from crushed peas). The coefficients of digestibility and nitrogen balance were so nearly the same on the two rations, that Weiske pronounced "Johannis- brod" (carob beans) an acceptable and digestible feed for sheep. In 1890, Schuster and Liebscher (274) tried feeding the sawdust of ivory nut {Phytelepas macrocaypa) to sheep, having previously found that it had a favorable effect on cattle. Merino sheep gained consider- able fat when fed oat straw and vetch fodder, plus ivory nut sawdust furnishing 50 per cent of the digestible carbohydrates. The ration, exclusive of the ivory nut, did not yield enough energy for such a re- sult to be possible, hence the latter must have been utilized. The coefficient of digestibility, both for the nitrogen-free extract and crude fiber of this material, was at the same time shown by Niebling (262) to be 82 per cent for sheep. ^This paper reviews the early literature on gums. 294 Mary Davies Swartz, From these experiments, mannan would seem to be well utilized by herbivora. The only experimental data regarding the nutritive value of mannans to man, are cited by Oshima (15) from work by Kano and lishima (255), who found the coefficient of digestibility of konjaku 82 per cent (prepared from Conophallus konjaku) . Further investigations seem highly desirable, in view of the fact that in certain regions food stuffs like salep and konjaku, consisting of almost pure mannan, are among the chief articles of the poor man's diet. It is also a question whether the nutritive value of bark, especially of coniferous trees, is due to mannan present. According to Dillingham (239) the quantity of mannan present does not justify such an assumption, aside from the question of its digestibility. We have finally to inquire whether ' mannan can be hydrolyzed within the organism, and if so, whether the mannose produced can be retained and form glycogen. From the literature on the subject, it appears that mannose is well utilized by rabbits, dogs and men. Ac- cording to Neuberg and Mayer (260), the d-iorm is better utilized than the /- or i-form. Mannose is readily converted to dextrose in the organism; thus Neuberg and Mayer found that a rabbit, receiv- ing 10 grams of /-mannose per os, excreted 1 gram /-mannose and 4-5 grams /-glucose; 10 grams of (/-mannose given rabbits per os, or sub- cutaneously, were almost completely oxidized. Rabbits fed 30 grams (/-mannose by Cremer (238) excreted 3-4 grams in the urine, and dogs given 20 grams by Rosenfeld (265), excreted over 4 grams. This is somewhat more than would be excreted on giving equally large quan- tities of dextrose or levulose. Cremer (238) found no sugar in the urine of a man after feeding 3-12 grams of mannose. That mannose can act as a glycogen former in rabbits, has been demonstrated by Cremer (238) and also by Rosenfeld (265). Neu- berg and Mayer (260) found only a small amount of glycogen in the livers of starving rabbits after feeding /-mannose, but even this form is utilized to some extent. There is good reason for assuming, there- fore, that if mannans can be converted into mannose in the process of digestion, they may be considered as true nutrients for the organ- ism, the mannose being to a high degree capable of absorption and con- version into glycogen. Nutrition Investigations. 295 Occurrence and Nature of Levulans. A number of polysaccharide carbohydrates yielding levulose on inversion have been described. They are all levo-rotatory, more or less soluble in cold water and insoluble in alcohol, and easily hydro- lyzed by dilute acid, but have not been investigated sufl&ciently to permit any conclusion to be drawn respecting their relation to one another. The most important of these substances and their sources are shown in the following table:* INVESTIGATOR. Inulin Tubers of dahlia, artichoke, Jerusalem artichoke, elecampane; bulbs of onion, garlic, narcissus, hyacinth, and tube- rose; flowers, seed, etc., of various compositae Tanret (321) Chevastelon (291) Pseudo-inulin Inulenin Helianthin Synanthrin Tubers of dahlia, artichoke, Jerusalem artichoke, elecampane; bulbs of onion, garlic, narcissus, hyacinth, and tube- rose; flowers, seed, etc., of various compositae Tanret (321, 322) Levulin Tubers of Helianthus tuberosus (Jeru- salem artichoke) Reidemeister (314) and others Phlein Rootstalks of Phleum praetense (Tim- othy) Ekstrand and Jo- hanson (296) Cerosin Unripe grains Tanret (320) Graminin Rootstalks of various grasses, e.g., Trisetum alpestre Ekstrand and Johan- son (296) Harlay (301) Triticin Dracaena australis and rubra, Triti- cum repens (couch grass) Reidemeister (314) Sinistrin Levulan Bulbs of Scilla Maritima (Sea onions or squills) Schmiedeberg (318) Reidemeister (314) Molasses in beet-sugar industry V. Lippmann (309) * Cf. V. Lippmann, Chemie der Zuckerarten, Vol. I, pp. 795-807. 296 Mary Davies Swartz, The best known member of this group is inulin,i closely associated with which are the four levulans described by Tanret; these seem to be intermediate products between inulin and levulose, all having greater solubility than inulin, but less levo-rotatory power. The other carbohydrates mentioned are also more soluble than inulin, but have higher specific rotation. LEVULANASES IN THE VEGETABLE KINGDOM. Comparatively few studies have been made upon the action of enzymes on the levulans, and these have been for the most part lim- ited to inulin. Certain micro-organisms as B. Coli communis (295), Clostridium pastorianum (328), and several Schizomycetes, decom- pose inulin, but without any production of sugar. Yeast, according to Tanret (321) does not ordinarily ferment it, but Lindner (308) asserts that certain forms of top yeast change it readily. Levulin is fermented by yeast, according to Levy (307), and triticin, in the course of four or five days, according to Reidmeister (314); but it seems probable that the first changes are due to gradual hydrolysis on standing in water, or to other organisms. The effect of vegetable enzymes on these carbohydrates, as far as they have been studied, is shown in the following table: NAME OF LEVULAN. INVERTIN OF YEAST. MALT DIASTASE. "taka" diastase. inulase of aspergillus. Inulin -(8) + (1) -(2) -(3) -(4) + (5) -(6) -(3) + (7) Levulin Graminin .... 4- very slowly (4) Triticin Sinistrin (1) Levy (307) (2) Reidemeister (314) (3) Chittenden (292) (4) Harlay (301) (5) Reidemeister (314) (6) Schmiedeberg (318) (7) Dean (293) and others (8) Komanos (303) Discovery of the best known ferment for any levulan is due to Green (300) who, in 1888, extracted such an enzyme from the tubers of the Jerusalem artichoke {Helianthus tuberosus), and named it "in- ^For description and early literature see KiHani (302) and Dean (294). Nutrition Investigations. 297 ulase." Subsequently, Bourquelot (289) found inulase in Asper- gillus niger and Penicillium glaucum; and Chevastelon (291) showed that this enzyme would hydrolyze the inulin of the monoctyledons. Dean (293) has studied the properties of inulase exhaustively, and shown that in Aspergillus and Penicillium it exists only as an endo- enzyme. Went (327) has found inulase also in Monilia sitophila and other Amylomyces. LEVULANASES IN ANIMALS. The first instance of an inulase in an animal organism has been cited by Strauss (319). In 1908, he reported studies on the enzymes of seven species of Lepidoptera and Diptera, during their various stages of development {Euproctis chrysorrhea, Ocneria disparata, Bom- byneustria, Bonibyx mori, Galleria nielonella, Hyponomenta, Calliophera vomitoria), but found inulase present only in the eating larvae of Bombyx mori and Hyponomenta. No inulase was present in the larvae of these species after they had ceased eating, nor in the pupae and imagines. The results of Kobert (3(M) in 1903, with extracts of May beetles, cross spiders, scorpions, cockroaches, ascarides, pupae of pine spiders, and house flies, were entirely negative; so also have been the experi- ments in vitro with digestive juices of higher animals, as shown by table on following page. DIGESTION AND UTILIZATION BY ANIMALS. Inulin is hydrolyzed by very dilute acid (0.05-0.2 per cent at 40° C. according to Chittenden), so that its more or less complete inversion by the gastric juice is possible, and has led many to believe that in spite of the negative results obtained with amylolytic enzymes shown above, it might be converted into levulose, and as such be read- ily utilized by the animal organism. It has therefore frequently been recommended for the diet of diabetics, who show a special tol- erance for levulose; in fact, simply because inulin did not reappear in the urine as sugar, when fed to diabetics, its utilization has been as- sumed by many, no account being taken of its possible reappearance in the faeces. This reappearance is well demonstrated in an experi- ment of Sandmeyer (317) in which, after feeding 80 grams of inulin to a diabetic dog, over 46 grams were recovered in the faeces. 298 Mary Davies Swartz, AUTHORITY. DATE. SOURCE or ENZYME. KIND OP LEVUXAN. RESULT. Komanos (303) 1875 Saliva Inulin Pancreatic juice Inulin Schmiedeberg (318).... 1879 Saliva Sinistrin Chittenden (292) 1898 Saliva Inulin Pancreatic juice Inulin BierryandPortier(288) 1900 Macerated pancreas and intestines of dog, rabbit and seal Inulin Bierry andPortier (288) . 1900 Macerated pancreas and in- testines of dogs, rabbits; fed three months on arti- chokes to induce formation of an inulase* Inulin Harlay (301) 1901 Saliva Graminin Bierry (286) 1905 Pancreatic juice of dog Pancreatic juice of dog + Inulin macerated intestines of dogs and rabbits Inulin Bierry (287) 1910 Pancreatic juice of dog from pancreatic fistula after in- jection of secretin Inulin — Same pancreatic juice added to macerated intestines of dog and rabbit, in slightly acid, slightly alkaline and neutral solutions Inulin — Hepato-pancreatic juice of Helix pomatia Inulin Levulose Enzyme prepared from he- pato-pancreatic juice of Helix pomatia Inulin Levulose Weinland (326) 1905 Extract of small intestine of dog Inulin — • Cf. Rlchaud, (326). Attempts to induce glycogen formation in rabbits have not justi- fied the hopes of the dieto-therapists in regard to inuUn as a food for diabetics. The earHer experiments were either negative or open to criticism on account of faulty technique. The more discriminating work of recent investigators (Miura [313]; and Mendel and Naka- seko [312]), has shown that little glycogen is formed from inulin, even under the most favorable circumstances. A brief survey of the expe- riments in this field is given in the following table: o o 5 T-H O I— ' 3 S <" ii W -§ o ,"f S 3 -d <" Tn o 4^ >» ^ ^ a > "3 1 ^ (U 8 t-l 4) a fl cj :5 3 lU I 6 — , O lO 53 c^. (D 73 « O CO 5 "^ S CO O lO O ^ ■* (N TtH fCI t^ 00 (N O O (M CO r-H O O O O O O O --H (M CC ■*" iC S'&^C loocOGOdOt^io^ «£(Mt-irHiX)00iO.-H j^'-H'-'O ^'-IOO(MThiiOl>C,{2ocoooddoc)0 •2 T|H O "«) ^ > h4 g ;^ tn < & M =1 _^ 3 :3 :3 =3 ^ S .^ B B B B B c« c c c c c ^ CI c c c c^ c^ c3 c^ t/l t/3-*-»-4-»-*-'-4-»-*-*-*-'-*-J ^ OOOUCJOUOUC 334 Mary Davies Swartz, of a syringe, or intraperiioneally , by means of a needle and burette with pressure-bulb attached, always under aseptic conditions. After receiving injections, the animals were replaced in cages, and the urine collected under toluene. The excess of toluene was removed, at the time of examination, by means of a separatory funnel, and the urine measured, filtered, and tested for reducing substances with Fehling's solution. Qualitative tests for the carbohydrates were made in the following manner: (l) for dulse and salep, by boiling a few drops of urine with Fehling's solution, from which these hemicelluloses were precipitated in fine white flocks, even if only traces were present; (2) for Irish moss, by the reduction of Fehling's solution after hydrolysis of the urine with dilute hydrochloric acid;' (3) for sinistrin, by the marked increase in the levo-rotation of the urine. Isolation of the carbohydrates was accomplished by freeing the urine from inorganic salts with lead acetate, removing the excess of lead with hydrogen sulphide, and concentrating the salt-free solutions to a small volume. Dulse and Irish moss were then precipitated with absolute alcohol; salep with alcohol or Fehling's solution; sinistrin with milk of lime, being freed from its calcium compound by the method used in its preparation. ^ These substances were identified as carbohydrates, by their yield- ing reducing sugar on hydrolysis; salep and sinistrin were further identified by their levo-rotation, Irish moss by testing for mucic acid., and dulse by testing for furfurol. Quantitative determinations of dulse, salep and sinistrin were made by polariscopic examination in a 200 mm. tube, all samples of urine being clarified with equal volumes of alumina cream. A satisfactory quantitative method for the determination of Irish moss was not developed. It proved impossible to estimate any of these carbohy- drates quantitatively by the method of acid hydrolysis. In some instances, especially with Irish moss, a trace of reduction was ob- tained, but in most cases, the results were negative, although the hemi- cellulose was known to be present.^ 'Trial was made of Bauer's method (Zeitschrift fur physiologische Chemie, 51, p. 158, 1907) of determining galactose in urine as mucic acid, by concentrating 100 cc.of urine with 25-35 cc. of concentrated nitric acid (sp. gr. 1.4) to a volume of 20 cc, but owing probably to the low percentage of galactose from the small amount of Irish moss present, this test was unsatisfactor3\ 2Cf. p. 315. ^Samples were removed and tested every half hour for 2| hours. At the end of 1 hour they were usually neutral, or slightly alkaline in reaction. Addition of suf- Nutrition Investigations. 335 INJECTIONS or DULSE. 1. Subcutaneous. A dog weighing 11 kg. received 60 cc. of a dulse solution contain- ing 0.9 grams of pure substance. No reduction of Fehling's solution was observed at any time. The time and rate of dulse excretion are shown in the following table : Examination of Urine. ESTIMATED EXCRETION OF DULSE.* February 1, 12:30 P.M February 1, 1 P.M | Injection February 2, 10 A.M 226 February 3, 10 A.M : 250 February 4, 10 A.M 150 February 5, 10 A.M 210 February 6, 10 A.M j 310 February?, 10 A.M i Grams. -0.14°t - 0.62° 0.61 -0.55° 0.57 -0.41° 0.21 -0.34° 0.21 -0.28° 0.04 - 0.20° Total 1.64 2. Intraperitoneal. The same dog received in this experiment 75.6 cc. of a dulse solu- tion containing 1.4 grams of pure substance. No reduction of Feh- ling's solution was observed before or after the injection. The time and rate of dulse excretion are shown in the following table: Examination of Urine. ROTATION. ESTIMATED EXCRETION OF DULSE.* Grams December 3, 2 P.M December 3, 3 P.M Injection December 4, 10 A.M .133 December 5, 10 A.M 200 December 5, 12 M 115 December 6 and 7 383 December 8, 10 A.M 520 December 9, 10 A.M 350 -0.14°t - 0.62° 0.36 -0.52° 0.42 -0.28° 0.05 -0.48° 0.69 -0.28 0.24 -0.20 Total 1.76 ficient hydrochloric acid to make the strength 2 per cent caused no subsequent production of sugar. * All readings have been taken on the Ventzke scale, and calculated as angular degrees. t Estimating normal rotation of urine as — 0.17° (average). 336 Mary Davies Swartz, In both these experiments, the presence of dulse was readily detected by Fehling's solution in every urine which showed a high rotation. From the samples of the first 48 hours after injection, a considerable amount was isolated and identified as carbohydrate. It is evident that the excretion of this pentose-carbohydrate is gradual, commenc- ing soon after the injection, and continuing from four to five days. While any quantitative estimate of the amount excreted, based on the changes in rotation, is subject to a high percentage of error, owing to normal fluctations in the rotation of the urine, as well as to analyt- ical discrepancies unavoidable in dealing with solutions containing only minute quantities of the substance under investigation, it is evi- dent that most of the dulse must have been excreted, and that, too, without any essential change in character. INJECTIONS OF IRISH MOSS. 1. Subcutaneous. A dog weighing 9.4 kg. received 100 cc. of Irish moss solution, con- taining 1.5 grams of dry substance. No reducing substance occurred in the urine. Changes in rotation, due to the injection, are shown in the following table: Examination of Urine. VOLUME. ROTATION. IRISH MOSS CC. -0.04° ; — 128 + 0.34° 1 — 226 + 0.06° — 330 -0.20° — 370 1 -0.14° — May 18, 9 A.M. May 18, 4 P.M. May 19, 9 A.M . May 20, 9 A.M. May 21, 11 A.M. May 22, 9 A.M. Tests for Irish moss on May 19th were negative, but on May 20th- 22nd they were faintly positive. The experiment was discontinued at this point. The injection was not very well borne, the dog remain- ing lethargic throughout the period. 2. Intraperitoneal. Experiment A . A dog weighing 10 kg. received 160 cc. of an Irish moss solution containing 1.3 grams air dry material. Examination Nutrition Investigations. 337 for the presence of carbohydrate was made by testing the urine for reducing substances, before and after hydrolysis. The results are shown in the following table: Examination of Urine. REDUCTION OF FEHLING 's SOLUTION. Before Hydrolysis. After Hydroly- October 13, 11 A.M October 13, 12:30 P. M I Injection October 13, 2 P.M j 27 October 13, 5 P.M (30 October 14, 9 A.M 450 October 15, 5 P.M 45 October 16, 9:30 A.M I — The urine before the injection showed a rotation of —0.14°, a sample of the mixed urines of October 13, 5 P.M., and October 14, 9 A.M., showed a rotation of —0.034°, the diminished levo-rota- tion undoubtedly due to the presence of this dextro-rotatory carbohy- drate. On hydrolysis, 50 cc. of this mixed sample yielded sugar equivalent to 0.035 grams of dextrose (by Allihn's method). From the remainder of this sample, Irish moss carbohydrate was isolated; it formed a grayish-white powder, swelling in water, and yielding mucic acid on oxidation with nitric acid. Experiment B. - A dog weighing 9 kg. received intraperitoneally 100 cc. of a 2 per cent solution of Irish moss preparation. Examina- tion for carbohydrate was made as in the preceding experiments. The results appear in the following table: Examination of Urine. REDUCTION OF FEHLING 'S SOLUTION. TIME. VOLUME. Before Hydroly- sis. After Hydroly- sis. October 30, 1 P.M CC. Injection — October 30, 2:30 P.M October 31, 9 A.M 250 I 200 — 115 — November 1, 10 A.M -f November 2, 10 A.M Irish moss was isolated and identified in the urine of November 1st. 338 Mary Davies Swartz, INJECTIONS OF SALEP. I. Subcutaneous. A dog weighing 7.2 kg. received 56 cc. of salep solution, containing 0.75 grams of pure mannan. No reducing substance was found in the urine. The changes in rotation, due to salep, are shown in the following table : Examination of Urine. ROTATION. ESTIMATION OF AMOUNT OF SALEP EXCRETED. May 17, May 18, 3:30 P.M May 19, 9 A.M... May 20, 9 A.M... May 21, 9 A.M... May 22, 9 A.M... May 22, 5P.M... Injection 138 132 114 127 0.17' - 0.27° -0.27° -0.20° -0.14° Grams. 0.3 0.3 0.04 Salep was isolated and identified in the urines of May 20, 21, and 22. 2. Intraperitoneal. Experiment A. A dog weighing 7 kg. received 68 cc. of salep solu- tion, containing 1.2 grams of air dry mannan. No reducing substance was present in the urine at any time. Tests for the presence of salep by means of Fehling's solution, gave the following results: Examination of Urine. TIME. VOLUME. SALEP PRESENT. October 21 12 M CC. Injection 125 190 140 October 21 2-30 P.M October 22 9 A.M + October 23 9 A.M + October 24, 9 A.M The salep was easily isolated and identified in the urine of October 22 and 23, the sugar obtained on hydrolysis being equivalent to 0.33 grams salep. Experiment B. A dog weighing 9.2 kg. received 80 cc. of salep so- Nutriiion Investigations. 339 lution, containing 1.4 grams of air dry substance. No reducing sub- stance was detected in any of the urines. Tests for salep with Feh- ling's solution gave the following results: Examination of Urine. SALEP PRESENT. October 24, 11 A.M October 24, 12 M.. October 25, 12 M . . October 26, 10 A.M October 27, 10 A.M October 28, 10 A.M Injection 155 180 180 + + + From the urine of October 25, salep was isolated, which yielded on hydrolysis 0.39 grams reducing sugar as dextrose; it was also isolated from the urines of the next two days, but was not estimated quanti- tatively. Experiment C. A dog weighing 9.2 kg. received 90 cc. of salep solution, containing 1.8 grams of pure mannan. No reduction of Fehling 's solution occurred with any of the samples. Tests for salep with Fehling's solution gave the following results: Examination of Urine. VOLUME. ! ROTATION. SALEP PRESENT. December 2, 10 A.M . . December 2, 2:30 P.M Decembers, 10 A.M.. December 4, 10 A.M . . December 5, 10 A.M . . Injection 960 234 520 -0.17' -0.41° -0.27° + + (0.6gm.) + (0.5gm.) Unfortunately this experiment was unavoidably interrupted at this point. The salep was precipitated from 50 cc. of the urine for December 3, hydrolyzed, and sugar determined gravimetrically as dextrose, from which the total amount of salep in this day's urine was calculated as 0.67 gram. Salep determined in the same way on De- cember 4, showed an elimination of 0.18 gram; hence 0.85 gram was actually recovered in these two days. The influence of the \e\o- rotatory carbohydrate on the rotation of the urine was marked. 340 Mary Davies Swartz, Experiment D. A dog weighing 6.4 kg. received 98 cc. of salep solution containing 1 gram of pure mannan. No reduction of Feh- ling's solution was observed throughout the experiment. The changes in rotation due to the salep are shown in the following table: Examination of Urine. salep precipitated by fehling's solution. January 31 February 1 February 2 February 3 February 4 February 5 116 Injection 152 238 154 137 - 0.41° -0.41° -0.13° -0.13° - 0.20° + The results in this experiment are very puzzling. The normal rota- tion was high ( — 0.41°) for several weeks before this experiment but fairly constant, averaging —0.44°. If salep were excreted as mannan, the levo-rotation should have increased, yet it was decid- edly low on a day when salep was shown to be present, and also on a day when none could be detected. The absence of any positive tests for sugar, excluded the idea that the salep was being excreted in this form, but finally a sample of February 4, was tested with yeast, and marked fermentation observed. Unfortunately, this was after all the other samples had been discarded, hence no further tests could be made. Experiment E. A dog weighting 9.8 kg. received intraperitoneally 97.5 cc. of salep solution containing 1.3 grams pure mannan. No re- duction of Fehling's solution was observed. The changes in rotation are shown in the first table on the next page. Salep was isolated and identified as carbohydrate, in the urines of May 19, 20, and 21, although the amount in the last two days was ap- parently too small to be detected by any change in the rotation. INJECTIONS OF SINISTRIN. /. Subcutaneous. A dog weighing 6.5 kg. received 49 cc. of sinistrin solution, contain- ing 3.3 grams pure substance. This solution showed a rotation of Nutrition Investigations. 341 Examination of Urine. ESTIMATION OF AMOUNT 01' SALEP EXCRETED. May 17, 10 A.]\I May 18, 10 A.M May 18, 3 P.M May 19, 9 A.M May 20, 9 A.M May 21, 11 A.M May 22, 9 A.M Injection 165 250 405 200 0.14° 0.14° 0.34° 0.14° 0.14° 0.14° Grams. 0.4 Salep present — ^pre- cipitated bj' Feh- ling's Solution. Salep present. No Salep present. — 3.88*' in a 200 mm. tube. The urine contained no reducing substance at any time. The changes in rotation, due to sinistrin in- jection, are shown in the following table: Examination of Urine. ROTATION. ESTIMATION OF AMOUNT OF SINISTRIN EXCRETED.* January 15, 12 M January 15, 2:30 P.M \ Injection January 16 j 260 January 17 and 18 1 165 January 19 60 January 20 108 - 0.41° - 0.97° -0.41° -0.41° - 0.47° Grams. 2.5 ' Calculating for alnlatrin la] d = — 29.1°. 2. Intraperitoneal. Experiment A. A dog weighing 6.5 kg. received 110 cc. of sinis- trin solution, containing 2 grams pure substance. This solution showed a rotation of —1.18° in a 200 mm. tube. No reducing sub- stance was found in the urines examined. The changes in rotation, due to sinistrin injection, are shown in the following table: 342 Mary Davies Swartz, Examination of Urine. ROTATION. ESTIMATION OF AMOUNT OF SINISTRIN EXCRETED.* January 11,10:30 A.M. January 11, 3 P.M January 12, 9:30 A.M.. January 13, 9:30 A.M.. January 14, 9:30 A.M.. * Calculating for slnlstrln Injection 88 127 116 -0.48° -2.04° -0.48° - 0.48° Grams. 2.7 = —29.1°. Experiment B. A dog weighing 4.6 kg. received 108 cc. of sinis- trin solution, containing 2.3 grams pure substance. The rotation of this solution was —1.38° in a 200 mm. tube. No reducing sub- stance was detected in the urine at any time. The changes in rota- tion are shown in the following table: Examination oj Urine. TIME. VOLUME. ESTIMATION OF AMOUNT ROTATION. . !0F SINISTRIN EXCRETED.* January 26 CC. Injection 148 95 155 -0.14° Grams. January 27, 9:30 A.M January 27, 5 :P.M January 28, 9:AM -1.38° : 2.1 -0.41° 0.4 January 29, 9 :A.M -0.14° * Calculating for sinlstrln [a] d = — 29.1° In all these experiments, the sinistrin was isolated and identified as a levo-rotatory carbohydrate, yielding reducing sugar on hydrolysis. It was apparently excreted quantitatively in every case. FEEDING EXPERIMENTS. Methods and Technique. Feeding experiments were conducted with dogs and human sub- jects, under conditions as nearly normal as possible. The dogs were kept in metal cages, arranged for the separate collection of urine and faeces. They were fed once a day, on a uniform weight diet, consist- ing of chopped lean meat, lard, and cracker meal, in suitable portions Nutrition Investigations. 343 and amounts to maintain a constant body weight. The carbohydrate under investigation was dissolved or suspended in water, and mixed with this basal ration. In the earlier experiments the periods were divided as follows : Fore = 3 days on the basal ration ; mid = 3 days in which some preparation was added, the amount being the same each day; after = 3 days like the fore period. Separation of the pe- riods in the faeces was accomplished by marking with soot or carmine capsules. In all later experiments, two days constituted the fore pe- riod, and a day on the normal diet was included at the beginning and end of the mid period, making thus four days, to insure against any of the material under investigation being carried into the faeces of the after period. In several cases, the presence or absence of galactans or mannans in the faeces has been verified by testing the hydrolyzed material for mucic acid or mannose-hydrazone. For analysis, the faeces, collected and weighed, were rubbed to a thin mud with alcohol, dried to constant weight on a water bath, weighed air dry, and ground finely in a coffee mill. The portions constituting each period were thoroughly mixed, and from 2 to 5 grams taken for hydrolysis, according to the yield of carbohydrate anticipated. The samples were boiled on a reflex condenser with 100 cc. of 2 per cent hydrochloric acid, for two hours; or longer if thought to contain a carbohydrate which previous analysis^ had shown to require more time for complete hydrolysis. The products of hydrolysis, cooled and neutralized, were made up to 250 cc. and sugar determined as dextrose by Allihn 's gravimetric method. It was found that the copper reduction w^as often very in- complete, and that much more satisfactory results came from clari- fying the solutions with charcoal after making up to volume. Not only were duplicate analyses in closer agreement, but in some cases the yield of cupric oxide was two or three times greater than before this treatment. Owing to the complexity and diversity of the prod- ucts of hydrolysis, results are at best only approximate. In experiments with dulse, the pentosans were determined by the phloroglucin method. ^ The human subjects were healthy, active young women. Their diet was not weighed, but was kept as uniform as possible. All cel- 1 Cf. table, p. 317. ^Cf. Official and Prov'sional Methods of Analysis, Bulletin No. 107 (1907), Bureau of Chemistry, United States Department of Agriculture. 344 Mary Davies Swartz, lulose-containing foods, such as nuts, fruits, green vegetables, peas and beans, coarse bread and cereals, were carefully avoided; so that the carbohydrates were limited almost entirely to bread and crackers made from fine white flour, a small quantity of potato, and sugar. To this diet the gelatinizing carbohydrates were added in the form of blanc mange or jelly; dulse was dissolved in some beverage, and the insoluble preparations boiled half an hour in a little water and eaten as a vegetable, seasoned with salt, butter, and vinegar. The blanc manges or jellies made from the Hawaiian seaweed preparations were equally attractive in texture and flavor with those made from Irish moss. Periods were marked, and the analyses of faeces conducted in the manner already described for the experiments with dogs. The Digestibility of Pentosans. Four preparations were fed, Dulse, ' Limu Eleele,^ Limu Lipoa,^ and Limu Pahapaha,' without production of unpleasant symptoms in any case. The results of all trials are shown in the tables on the following pages. 1 Cf. p. 303. 2 Cf. p. 307. 3 Cf. p- 308. SE RE- EKED. s o •* '^ (M CO it 1 M. »C ■* S IN IN gfc g (M TjH K CO I-H l> t>^ i^ " (J m Q C. m O lO a ^ 1 CO O 00 1—1 d CO d d 00 d i-O IN IN .-H 05 d b, O !J O in u> O O z o s ° ^ p ^ M ,13 g s s S CO o o i— 1 Oi 00 00 '^ (M t^ 'st* ■i*< o S ^ (N s 00 i-H >-H l-H ^ (m' c^ (N d CO 00 t^ W < Q u i-H (M (M T-H (rq i CO CI .-H o 3 o to 00 Tt< o Oi io t s U IN IN l-H a a a a aj OJ -i u a a a a . 4) . aj - 4- •7^ ^ en "^3 en >> "^ >, tn "^' ^ en cd d rt nj cS c? OS d d ed -a -o -a •S -o T3 T3 T3 -o t3 2 CO CO CO c^ ■* C<) (M -* IN IN Tt< (N II II II II II II II II II II II II r2 OJ -a -a 1-t (U ^ o § _< ^ i O fa i <^ o fa ^ ^^ ""^ *" 3 u 8 Oh O --i g « i a o ■* ■* 1 CO lO ui 3 Q 1 m s I:^ 't O (N ^ CD 00 CD o V o CO O 1-H t-- ^ ■-< '1^ ^ 11 CJ Z o « H OJ O C5 CO t^ CO ^ o CO TtH 00 g ' ' fe ^ ci o 00 00 ci '*< lO TJH s (^ o O ^ " s s 3 < Q ^ i-O CD •o CO (M CO 1> (N "O g o lO o 'tl -* 00 t^ i-t oi (N K e; ^ CO T— 1 '-< 00 .-H Tt< 00 (M H . W H 2 2 o CO o CO t^ CO oi CO t^ a tY lO th o ^ t^ d o lO 3 ° < CO ^D (M CO (M (M lO o CD % a CJ > -^3 -d >> a -1^ 1 d (M "^ (M c^ -# C 1— ( 6 e. > 1 U9 ^ O P P N § "3 CD t>. saigas < < < a « £ -H CO (M 00 00 .55, T)1 00 rt< ■>* o »o O ^^ lO o o O I^ lO 00 CD -* '^^ »o C-. Tf< Tf CO ,-1 GO O (N o '^ '^ CO 00 > >. >» cd nj c<3 'o' -Td -§ (M '^ IM II II II -a 1-1 U^ S < (M ,_i > be O C C5 < 34S Mary Davies Swartz, The coefficients of digestibility of the pentosan preparations, as determined in the usual way from the preceding experiments, are set forth in the following table: SERIES A. EXPERIMENT NO. PENTOSAN. COEFFICIENT OF DIGESTIBILITY. For the Dog. For Man. 1 Diilse 80 2 Dulse 66 3 Dulse 100 4 Dulse 100 5 Limu Eleele 50 6 Limu Eleele 20 7 Limu Eleele 69 8 Limu Pahapaha 34 9 Limu Lipoa 16 It is evident from these figures, that pentosans in soluble form dis- appear from the alimentary tract of dogs to a very considerable extent (average 73 per cent) , and that small quantities, ingested by man, do not reappear in the faeces. The insoluble limu preparations appear much more indigestible, an average of 28 per cent being digested by dogs, and 51 per cent by man. It must be borne in mind, in interpreting the results of these metabo- lism experiments, that they are at best only approximate. The dif- ficulty of strict separation of the faeces, the fact that the human sub- jects were not kept on a uniform weighed diet, and the errors unavoid- ably introduced by determining many different kinds of sugar as dex- trose, make all of the figures given as "coefficients of digestibiUty," in this and succeeding sections, comparative rather than absolute. The Digestibility of Galactans. In these experiments, preparations of the water extracts of Irish moss, Limu Manauea, Limu Huna and Limu Akiaki have been fed, without any disagreeable symptoms. The results are given in the tables which follow: Q Si O (N 00 CO oo CO (M o o CO ""• o Tt< CO IM o '"' Tf O ^ 00 7— 1 t- o CO CO CO CO Tf< 05 iO T-H d r-H lO CD ^ t^ o lO 00 00 CO o CO Jo ?« 00 05 CO CO J5 C3 CO C5 C3 t- t- CO CO fe 00 § lO CD CO CO CO t/J in O _ S S -c bo I— I O ui '=' s 0) O S (M o H ?3 C S 1-5 O C/3 O M r3 O cd P^ 6 '" o . O t/1 ^ S _r to Ah (U 0 00 o o o § > ^^ -^ «o t- O '^ 3 P, V. »— * o Id ^ Bi . (M -* ir- TjH (M 1 O -* d Tt^ d s< S o ►J ^-- 8 2 <■ CO o CO lO 1> Tfl O o (M t^ b- 02 Oi « « s o a ■rt^ ,-H t^ CO Tl cJ d CO r^ --1 d t^ ^ s 7-t CO ■-1 CO T-H >* oc CO ■* o o (N ej H • CO O CO o t^ 00 o t^ Tt< o CO kO 00 i o J2 s O rH b- ^ lO IQ 00 t~- d d d c^ d 3 o ^ CO C5 - rt C C s| ii 2 i ij 2 "" 5 r" ci <-i ci g c g C i ^^ 6^ CO % 1-! CJ C/D cMu ci CO CJ ci c! c/3 tn ci U3 ifi Cfi tn t« tn tn tn cfl tn tn i" en >. >, X >> >. >> >> >i >. >. >^ ^ X ci c3 rt ci cd cS cS rt rt ci rt J3 rt ■T3 Td "U -o TJ T3 'O ts T3 t3 -a ^ -c ' Q (M '^ (M (M ^ (N IM lO (M (M o ^ -i -a u £i -^3 CLt JJ ■^ i^ £i -z, -d OJ o i ^ f2_ i li^ i i i ^ H o c O > P s o PL, 1 d U3 O t^ 00 K C2 PQ PQ PQ s< - So .-I 00 ^ ^ o ^ t^ CO CO O (M t^ CI 00 t^ ^ t~- o CO O 05 t^ CI lo >o (M 00 l> § lO CO CO Ci CO I> Tl< CO »c lO lO CO '* Tt< CO ■—1 IM I— ( il M g bC g w ^" S ffi rt bC O t. 5 '^ + -i o ;-< o o rri t^ "Y iH \^ rt en O + .2 a -; rt d krJ ^ >-; c3 a .-f rt -d 'd Td -X3 T3 oa (M lo < fa > O O PQ X « o ■<*< (N t^ CO O lO '"' o (M o CO M^ o 00 O lO (M lO -* OJ Tt^ (M t^ (M j t3 00 1—1 0) Ir^ i-H ° M TtH lO ^ '3 I— ( -^ & s h-1 c n -d "J o c 'T', u m rt Ph n o i + 13 fa O r1 D SI OJ d < s (t! rt U CA! cn en rn >, >. >. ei3 C3 Cj Td -xs -d fa S < C ctf B o ^ pq (N I— 1 « 352 Mary Davies Swartz, The coefficients of digestibility of the galactan preparations are given in the following table: SERIES B. GALACTAN. COEFFICIENT 01 DIGESTIBILITY. EXPERIMENT NO. For the Dog. For Man. Per cent. Per cent. 1 Irish Moss 46 2 Irish Moss 20 3 Irish Moss 11 4 Irish Moss 0 5 Limu Manauea 55 6 Limu Manauea 12 7 Limu Manauea 30 8 Limu Manauea 30 (av.) 9 Limu Huna 30 (20 gms. fed) 10 Limu Huna 83 (7 gms. fed) 11 Limu Huna 10 12 Limu Akiaki 60 Although these preparations were administered in small quanti- ties, under the most favorable conditions for digestion in, the only instance where the utilization in any degree approaches that of starch (Limu Huna), the quantity fed (7 grams) was so small that this exper- iment can hardly be taken as a criterion of digestibility. Exclusive of this experiment, the average of five trials with dogs is 32 per cent, while that of sLx trials with human subjects is 23 per cent. In both cases, the-averages are lower than that of Lohrisch (194) for "soluble agar," 50 per cent. Where the quantity of galactan fed was 10 or more grams, the in- fluence on the character of the faeces was usually noticeable. The increase in bulk, after ingestion of 45 grams of Irish moss, is well illus- trated in a photograph of the dried and ground faeces of the dogs used in experiments 1 and 2:^ A represents the fore-period (3 days), B the mid-period, during which 15 grams of moss were ingested daily (3 days), and C the after-period (3 days). The separation of the faeces at the beginning of experi- ment 1 (on the right) was not very satisfactory. The dog had pre- viously been fed bone-ash, and the marked faeces were undoubtedly contaminated with this, so that they appear unusually bulky. Exper- iment 2 is typical of the results obtained in most of the experiments ' Cf. p. 343. Nutrition Investigations. 353 with human subjects. In these, the undigested hemicelluloses gave frequently a pecuHar, wax-like consistency, especially noticeable with Limu Huna in the experiment recorded,^ and in another not reported, because the faeces for part of the time were lost. In the experiment with Limu Akiaki (No. 12),^ the galactan was excreted after the first day's feeding, in a tough mass almost impossible to break up with a EXP. 2 EXP. 1 I. The Influence of Irish Moss upon the Mass of the Faeces. A. Fore Period: 3 Days on a Cellulose-free Diet. B. Mid Period: 3 Days on a Cellulose-free Diet to Which 15 grams of Irish Mops were Added Daily. C. After Period: 3 Days of a Cellulose-free Diet. spatula. That of the second day was not excreted till the third day after feeding, the subject being inclined to constipation. It seems likely that the high coefficient of digestibility is due to this fact, or else to the method of determination, which is not altogether satisfac- tory, in view of the complexity of the products of hydrolysis, the dan- ger of decomposing a part of the sugar from the easily inverted polysaccharides by the long boiling necessary for the more resistant, and the great difference in reducing power of the sugars so produced. The Digestibility of Mannan. In four experiments, the commercial salep powder (containing 19 per cent mannan and 26 per cent starch) was administered; in the others, pure mannan prepared from the Orchis tubers. The results of seven trials are tabulated on the following pages. 1 Of. p. 345. Q B, PS § o CO 3 > *** CO S 8 (j; OS Q , g o o w „ 2 K CO CO (M Ofl S^ CJ H u ^ < g !>• Ci (M t^ lO (N O LO .— 1 00 t^ CO fe RATES trose] g d ^ ^ CI ».o CO (M TtH (>i d LO CO »4 O o '^ !S a M 2 W P N o £3 o « J2 3 S S t>- Ci '-; Tt< CO o t- CO CO TtH CO Tt< s 5 1^ lo t^ t^ O 00 LO LO 00 -*' CO a CO o 1^ CO 1— I O H >; -* lO 05 T-l (M 00 CO ^_i T)< »o b- 1-H W oj a O Q CO o c; d iO CO ci Ol t^ N i5 CO lO CO o S S lO 00 CD t^ lO oi S o 2 1— 1 t^ lO lO CO o ^ S (J ^~' o d) ^ ,A o OJ i-t 1 o O Tt* fe O bo S ^ fiH *^ CO Ph **T^ CO Ph O + tn o o fe + tn + rf en O + en ^•~ _r -^ . >, >. >. >. >> >, >. >^ >> >. P-^ ci rt rt n! oS rt a ni n! rt rt d -a -o "O Td T3 -o -o -o ■a T3 -o -O a CO CO CO CO CO CO < 1 d ^ (N CO z O o O O 1 .s > i ^ H H ^ a u b OS e H H o iJ > ^ C5 •< O to u 11. U a , EP FE sDex rose). ^ o o o "3 CI GO 00 7—1 ^ < ii ^ Ul < — 1 H " N t ,< m a o ac l> lO c^ CO »o o ^ w^ 2 ,_i O) d ,_i ^ c^ (N CO ^ !•< •< o tj O b: S 2! O w ^ H 0 — ^ o C9 c/1 i Tf< »o (N TtH o o CO o 00 h h QC t^ CO IC CO CO CO !> CO O (J: iM u * ^ 'd t^ 00 CO CO 00 o t^ ,—1 o (M w « g O 0 a ,—4 c^ c« U CO -i oi cj CU cd n! CJ nJ oj f-^ O Cfi C/2 o C/2 C/D U m m m en en ~~[n [« tn tn in ifi X >. >, >. >% >, >> >\ >> rt rt nj cj rt ci ci ci -d 'O -a -c -6 T3 X! -a "^ Q O (M CO n C^l "^ iM C^l "TtH (M II II II II II II II II II w U4 I-. 1-1 o 3 ■i-J r2 OJ 3 Lohrisch.) (49) Kellner: Untersuchungen iiber denStofi-und Energieumsatz der erwach- senen Rinder bei Erhaltungs und Productionsfutter. Landwirtschaftliche Versuchs- Stationen, V. 53, p. 457, (1900). (50) Knauthe: Uber die Verdauung und den Stoffwechsel die Fische. Archiv fiir Anatomic und Physiologie, Physiologische Abthcilung, V. 22, p. 149, (1898). (51) Konig: Zur Bestimmung der Rohfaser und zur Trennung von Cellulose, Lignin und Cutin in derselben. Berichte der deutschen chemischen Gesellschaft, V. 41, p. 46, (1908). (52) Konig: Die Zellmembran und ihre Bestandtheile in chemischer und phj'siologischer Hinsicht. Landwirtschaftliche Versuchs-Stationen, V. 65, p. 55, (1907). (53) Konig and Reinhardt: Uber die Ausnutzung der Pentosane beim Men- chcn. Zeitschrift fiir Nahrungs- und Genussmittel, V. 5, p. 110, (1902). (54) KtJHN, Bronstein and Schulze: Bericht iiber die auf der landwirt- schaftlichen Versuchs-Station Weende ausgefiihrten Versuche. Journal fur Land- wirtschaft, V. 14, p. 269, (1866). (55) Lohrisch: Uber die Bedeutung der Cellulose im Haushalte des Menschen. Zeitschrift fur physiologische Chemie, V. 47, p. 200, (1907). (56) Lohrisch: Uber die Verdauung und Verwertung der Rohfaser und Zellu- lose im tierischen und menschlichen Organismus. Zentralblatt fiir die gesammte Physiologie und Pathologic des Stoffwechsels, V. 21, (1907). 368 Mary Davies Swartz, (57) Lohrisch: Der Vorgang der Cellulose und Hemicellulosen Verdauung beim Menschen, und der Nahrwerth dieser Substanzen fiir den menschlichen Organismus. Zeitschrift flir experimentelle Pathologie und Therapie, V. 5, p. 478, (1908). (58) Lohrisch: Bemerkungen zur Frage der Celluloseverdauung beim Hund und iiber die Methoden der quantitativen Cellulosebestimmung. Zeitschrift fiir physiologische Chemie, V. 69, p. 143, (1910). (59) Lusk: On the Question Whether Dextrose Arises from Cellulose in Diges- tion. American Journal of Physiology, V. 6, p. xiii, (1901-2). (60) Mallevre: Der Einfluss der als Gahrungsprodukt der Cellulose gebildeten Essigsaure auf den Gaswechsel. Pfliigers Archiv fiir Physiologie, V. 49, p. 460, (1891). (61) jNIuller, E.: Ein Beitrag zur Frage der Cellulose verdauung im Darm- canale. Pflugers Archiv fur Physiologie, V. 83, p. 619, (1901). (62) Munk: Der Einfluss des Glycerins, der fliichtigen und festen Fettsauren auf den Gaswechsel. Pfluger's Archiv fiir Physiologie, V. 46, p. 303, (1890). (63) Murdfield: Das Lignin und Kutin in chemischer und physiologischer Hinsicht. Inaugural Dissertation, Miinster, 1906. (Cited by K6m"g, Fiirsten- berg and Murdfield.) (64) Newcombe: Cellulose Enzymes. Annals of Botany, V. 13, p. 49, (1899). (65) Omelianski: Sur la Fermenentation Formique de la Cellulose. Cen- tralblatt fiir Physiologie, V. 16, p. 522, (1902). (From Archives des Sciences Biologiques, St. Petersbourg, V. IX, No. 3, p. 251.) (66) Pacault: Sur deux proprietes diastatiques de la salive de I'escargot. Comptes Rendus de la Societe de Biologic, V. 59, p. 29, (1909). (67) Reinitzer: tjber das Zellwandlosende Enzym der Gerste. Zeitschrift fiir physiologische Chemie, V. 23, p. 175, (1897). (68) Scheunert: Beitrage zur Kenntniss der Zelluloseverdauung im Blinddarm und des Enzymgehaltes des Caecalsekretes. Zeitschrift fiir phj'siologische Chemie, V. 48, p. 9, (1906). (69) Scheunert: tJber die Celluloseverdauvmg bei den Haustieren. 2. Mitteil- ung. Vermag der Hund Cellulose zu verdauen? Berliner tierarztliche Wochen- schrift. No. 47, p. 867, (1909). (70) Scheunert: Vermag Schafspeichel Zellulose zu losen? Berliner tierarzt- liche Wochenschrift, No. 48, p. 113, (1910). (71) Scheunert and Grimmer: Zur Kenntniss der in den Nahrungsmitteln enthaltenen Enzyme und ihrer Mitwerkung bei der Verdauung. Zeitschrift fiir physiologische Chemie, V. 48, p. 27, (1906). (72) Scheunert and Lotsch: Vermag der Hund Cellulose oder Rohfaser zu verdauen? Biochemische Zeitschrift, V. 20, p. 10, (1909). (73) Schmidt and Lohrisch: tJber die Bedeutung der Cellulose fiir den Kraft- wechsel der Diabetiker. Deutsche medicinische Wochenschrift, No. 47, p. 1938, (1907). (74) Schulze: tJber die zur Gruppe der stickstofiffreien Extractstoffe gehoren- den Pflanzenbestandtheile. Die Landvvirtschaftliche Versuchs-Stationen, V. 52, (1904). (75) Schulze, Steiger and Maxwell: Zur Chemie der Pflanzenzellmem- branen. Zeitschrift fiir physiologische Chemie, V. 14, p. 227, (1890). Nutrition Investigations. 369 (76) Selliere: Remarques sur I'hydrolyse diastatique de la Cellulose du Coton et de quelqucs autres Polysaccharides. Comptes Rendus de la Societe de Biologie, V. 63, No. 34, (1907); Centralblatt fur Biochemie, V. 7, p. 88, (1908). (77) Selliere: Sur la digestion de la cellulose. Comptes Rendus de la Societe de Biologie, V. 68, p. 107, (1910). (78) Tappeiner: Untersuchung iiber die Garung der Cellulose, insbesondere iiber deren Losung im Darmkanale. Zeitschrift flir Biologie, V. 20, p. 52, (1884). (79) ToLLEXS: Untersuchungen iiber Kohlenhydrate. Die Landwirtschaft- liche Versuchs-Stationen, V. 39, p. 401, (1891). (80) UsTjANZEW: Zur Frage iiber die Rolle der Rohfaser in dem Stickstoffum- satz des tierischen Organismus. Die Landwirtschaftliche Versuchs-Stationen, V. 56, p. 463, (1902). (81) Van Iterson. Die Losung der Cellulose durch aerobe Microorganis- men. Biochemisches Zentralblatt, V. I, p. 678, (1903). (82) VoiT AND Hoffman: Sitzungsberichte der Bayerischen Akademie, 1869. (Cited by Tappeiner.) (83) vonKnieriem: Uber die Verwertung der Cellulose im tierischen Organis- mus. Zeitschrift fur Biologie, V. 21, p. 67, (1885). (84) Ward: On a Lily Disease. Annals of Botany, V. 2, p. 319, (1889). (85) Weiske and Mehlis: tjber das Verhalten der Rohfaser im Verdauungs- apparate der Giinse. LandwirtschaftHche Versuchs-Stationen, V. 21, p. 411, (1878). (86) Weiske: Beeinflussen die in Vegetabilien vorkommenden Fermente der Ausnutzung der Nahrung im Organismus? Zeitschrift fiir physiologische Chemie, V. 19, p. 282, (1894). (87) Wieler: Analysen der Jmigholzregion von Pinus Silvestris und Salix Petendra nebst einem Beitrag zur Methodik der Pflanzenanalyse. Landwirt- schaftliche Versuchs-Stationen, V. 32, p. 307, (1886). (88) ZuNTz: Gesichtspunkte zum Kritischen Studium der neueren Arbeiten auf dem Gebiete der Ernahrung. Landwirtschaftliche Jahrbiicher, V. 8, p. 65, (1879). in. pentosans. (89) Ankersmit: Untersuchungen iiber die Bakterien im Verdauungskanal des Rindes. Centralblatt fiir Bakteriologie, Parasitenkunde und Infectionskrank- heiten, V. 40, Abt. I, p. 100, (1905). (90) Behrens: Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Obstfaulnisse. Chemisches Cen- tralblatt, V. 98b, p. 1027, (1898). (91) Bergmann: Studien iiber die Digestion der Pflanzenfresser. Skandi- navisches Archiv fiir Physiologie, V. 18, p. 119, (1906). (92) BiGELOW, Gore and Howard: Studies on Apples. United States De- partment of Agriculture, Bulletin of the Bureau of Chemistry, No. 94, (1905). (93) Blumenthal: Die Pentosurie, Deutsche Khnik, Vol. 3, (1903). (Cited by Lohrisch.) (94) Borntrager: t)ber die Rutinsaure. Liebig's Annalen, V. 53, p. 385, (1845). (95) Bourquelot and Herissey: Sur I'existence dans I'orge germee d'un ferment soluble agissant sur la pectine. Comptes Rendus, V. 127, p. 191, (1898). 370 Mary Davies Swartz, (96) Brasch: Uber das Verhalten nicht-gahrungsfahiger Kohlenhydrate im tierischen Organismus mit Beriicksichtigung des Diabetes. Zeitschrift fiir Biolo- gie, V. 50, p. 113, (1907). (97) Brown: On the Search for a Cellulose-dissolving (Cytohydrolytic) Eii- zyme in the Digestive Tract of Certain Grain-feeding Animals. Journal of the Chemical Society, London, V. 61, p. 352, (1892). (98) Calabresi: Uber die Bildung und die physiologische Aufgabe der Pento- sane in den Pflanzen. Centralblatt fiir Agriculturchemie, V. 37, p. 93, (1908). (99) CouvREUR AND Bellion: Sur le sucre dans le sang d'escargot. Comptes Rendus de la Societe de Biologie, V. 63, p. 339, (1907). (100) CoMiNOTTi. Ueber das Vorhandensein der Pentosen im Harne des Men- schen und der Tiere. Biochemische Zeitschrift, V. 22, p. 106, (1909). (101) Cramer: Untersuchungen iiber Hemicellulosevergarung durch mensch- lichen Kot. Dissertation, Halle, 1910. (Cited in Zentralblatt fiir Biochemie und Biophysik, V. 10, p. 800, (1910). (102) Cremer: tjber das Verhalten einiger Zuckerarten im thierischen Organis- mus. Zeitschrift fiir Biologie, V. 29, p. 484, (1892). (103) Cremer: Uber die Verwertung der Rhamnose im tierischen Organismus, und einige damit zusammenhangende Fragen der Physiologic der Kohlehydrate. Zeitschrift fur Biologie, V. 42, p. 428, (1901). (104) Cross, Bey an and Beadle: Die natiirlichen Oxycellulosen. Berichte der deutschen chemischen Gesellschaft, V. 27, p. 1061, (1894). (105) Cross, Bevan, and Smith: Uber einige Vorgange in der Gerstenpflanze. Berichte der deutschen chemischen Gesellschaft, V. 28, p. 2604, (1895). (106) Cross: tJber die Constitution der Pektinstoffe. Ibid.,.V. 28, p. 2609, (1895). (107) Czapek: Zur Biologie der liolzbewohnenden Pilze. Berichte der deut- schen botanischen Gesellschaft, V. 17, p. 166, (1899). (108) De Chalmot: Pentosans in Plants. American Chemical Journal, V. 15, p. 276, (1893). (109) Ebstein: Einige Bemerkungen zum Verhalten d i Pentosen im mensch- lichen Organismus. Virchow's Archiv, V, 129, p. 401, (IJiii')- (110) FRAPS : The Digestibihty of some Non-nitrogenous Constituents of Certain Feeding Stuffs. North Carolina Experiment Station, Bulletin No. 172, (1900). (111) Frentzel: tJber Glycogenbildung im Thierkorper nach Fiitterung mit Holzzucker. PHuger's Archiv fur Physiologic, V. 56, p. 273, (1894). (112) FuDAKOWSKi: Spaltung der Arabinsaure durch Pepsin. Berichte der deutschen chemischen Gesellschaft, V. 11, p. 1069, (1878). (113) GoTZE AND Pfeiffer: Beitrage zur Frage iiber die Bildung resp. das Verhalten der Pentaglykosen in Pflanzen- und Thierkorper. Die Landwirtschaft- liche Versuchs-Stationen, V. 47, p. 59, (1896). (114) Harrison: A Bacterial Disease of Cauhflower (Brassica and Oleraceae), and Allied Plants. Centalblatt fur Bakteriologie, Abtheilung II, V. 13, p. 185, (1904). (115) Hofmeister: Die quantitative Trennung von Hemicellulose, Cellulose, und Lignin, und das Vorkommen der Pentosane in diesen. Die Landwirtschaft- liche Versuchs-Stationen, V. 50, p. 347, (1898). (116) Herzfeld: Die Pektinsubstanzen. Chemisches Centralblatt, V. II, p. 618, (1891). Nutrition Investigations. 371 (117) V. Jacksch: Uber Alimcntare Pentosurie. Zeitschrift fiir Heilkunde- V. 20, p. 195, (1899). (118) Kellner and Kohler: Untersuchungen iiber den Stoff- und Energie- umsatz des erwachsenen Rindes bei Erhaltungs- und Productionsfutter. Die Landwirtschaftliche Versuchs-Stationen, V. 53, p. 457, (1900). (119) Konig: Die Zellmembran und ihre Bestandteile in chemischer und physiologischer Hinsicht. Die Landwirtschaftlichen Versuchs-Stationen, V. 65, p. 55, (1907). (120) Konig and Reinhardt: Ausnutzung der Pentosane beim Mensclien. Zeitschrift fiir Untersuchung der Nahrungs- und Genussmittel, V. 5, p. 110, (1902); V. 7, p. 729, (1904). (121) Krober: Untersuchungen iiber die Pentosanbestimmungen mittelst der Salzsaure-Phloroglucin Methode, nebst einiger Anwendungen. Journal fiir Landwirthschaft, V. 48, p. 357, (1900). (122) Lindemann and May: Die Verwerthung der Rhamnose vom normalen und vom diabetischen menschlichen Organismus. Deutsches Archiv fiir klinische Medicin, V. 56, p. 283, (1895-6). (123) Lindsey: The Pentosans. Fifteenth Massachusetts State Report, p. 69, (1903). (124) Lindsey and Holland: Twelfth Massachusetts State Report, p. 175, (1900). (Cited by Lindsey.) (125) LiNTNER AND DtJLL: Uber die chemische Natur des Gerstengummi. Chemiker Zeitung, V. 15, Repertorium p. 266, (1891). (126) McCoLLUM AND Brannon: The Disappearance of Pentosans from the Digestive Tract of the Cow. Journal of the American Chemical Society, V. 31, p. 1252, (1909). (127) Neuberg: Die Physiologie der Pentosen und der Glukuronsauren. Ergebnisse der Physiologie, V. 3, p. 421, (1904). (128) Neuberg and Wohlgemuth: Uber das Verhalten stereo-isomer Sub- stanzen im Tierkorper. Zeitschrift fiir physiologische Chemie, V. 35, p. 41, (1902). (129) OsHiMA AND ToLLENS: Uber das IsTori aus Japan. Berichte der deutschen chemischen Gesellschaft, V. 34, p. 1422, (1901). (130) Pacault: Sur deux proprietes diastatiques de la salive de I'escargot. Comptes Rendus de la Societe de Biologie, V. 59, p. 29, (1905). (131) Ravenna and Cereser: Origin and Physiological Function of Pen- tosans in Plants, Journal of the London Chemical Society, V. 96, p. 1946, (1909). (From Atti R. Accad. Lincei, 1909 [V] 18, ii, p. 177.) (132) Reichardt: Pararabin, ein neues Kohlehydrat. Berichte der deut- schen chemischen Gesellschaft, V. 8, p. 807, (1875). (133) Reinhardt: Die Bestimmung der Cellulose und ihr Verhalten, sowie das der Pentosane im Darmcanal des Menschen. Dissertation, Miinchen, (1903) . (134) Rohmann: Einige Beobachtungen iiber die Verdauung der Kohlehydrate bei Aplysien. Centralblatt fur Physiologie, V. 13, p. 455, (1899). (135) Rubner: Uber den Werth der Weizenkleie fiir die Emahrung des Menschen. Zeitschrift fiir Biologie, V. 19, p. 45, (1883). (136) Rltdzinski: tjber die Bedeutung der Pentosane als Bestandtheilc der Futtermittel, insbesondere des Roggenstrohes. Zeitschrift fiir physiologische Che- mie, V. 40, p. 317, (1904). (137) Salkowski : Uber die Giihrung der Pentosen. Zeitschrift fiir physiolo- gische Chemie, V. 30, p. 478, (1900). 372 Mary Davies Swartz, (138) Salkowski: Uber das Verhalten der Pentosen im Thierkorper. Cen- tralblatt fiir die medicinische Wissenschaften, No. 11, p. 193. (1893). (139) Salkowski: tJber das Verhalten des Arabans zu Fehling'scher Losung. Zeitschrift fur physiologische Chemie, V. 35, p. 240, (1902). (140) Salkowski: Ueber die Darstellung des Xylans. Ibid., V. 34, p. 162, (1901-2). (141) Scheibler: tJber den Pectinzucker (Pectinose), eine neue durch Spal- tung der Metapectinsaure entstehende Zuckerart. Berichte der deutschen chemi- schen Gesellschaft, V. 1, p. 108, (1868). (142) Scheibler: Uber das Vorkommen der Arabinsaure (Gummi) in den Zuckerriiben und iiber den Arabinzucker (Gummizucker). Berichte der deut- schen chemischen Gesellschaft, V. 6, p. 612, (1873). (413) Sherman: The Insoluble Carbohydrates of Wheat. Journal of the American Chemical Society, V. 19, p. 308, (1897). (144) Schmulewitsch: Bulletin de I'Academie de St. Petersbourg, V. 25, p. 549, (1879). (Cited by Bergmann.) (145) Schone and Tollens: Untersuchungen iiber Kohlehydrate. Die Landwirtschaftlichen Versuchs-Stationen, V. 40, p. 377, (1892). (146) Schorstein: Zur Biochemie der Holzpilze. Centralblatt fiir Bakterio- logie, Abtheilung II, V, 9. p. 446, (1902). (147) ScHULZE, Steiger and Maxwell: Zur Chemie der Pfianzenzellmem- branen. Zeitschrift fiir physiologische Chemie, V. 14, p. 227, (1892). (148) Selli^re: Sur la presence d'une diastase hydrolysant dans le sue gastro- intestinal d'escargot. Comptes Rendus de la Societe de Biologic, V. 58, p. 409, (1905). (149) Selli^re: Sur une diastase hydolysant la xylane dans le tube digestif de certaines larves de Coleopteres. Ibid., V. 58, p. 940, (1905). (150) Selliere: Sur la presence de la xylanase chez differents mollusques gasteropodes. Ibid., V. 59, p. 120, (1906). (151) Selliere: Sur I'absorption et la presence dans le sang chez I'escargot des produits de I'hydrolyse digestion de la xylane. Comptes Rendus de la Society de Biologie, V. 63, No. 36, (1907). (152) Selliere: Sur la digestion de la xylane chez quelques mammiferes herbivores. Ibid., V. 64, p. 941, (1908). (153) Selliere: Sur la digestion de la xylane chez les mammiferes. Comptes Rendus de la Societe de Biologie, V. 66, p. 691, (1909). (154) Slowtzoff: Uber das Verhalten des Xylans im Thierkorper. Zeit- schrift fur physiologische Chemie, V. 34, p. 181, (1901). (155) Stone: Die VerdauHchkeit der Pentosane. Berichte der deutschen chemischen Gesellschaft, V. 25, p. 563, (1892). (156) Stone and Jones: VerdauHchkeit der Pentosane. Centralblatt fiir Agriculturchemie, V. 22, p. 677, (1893). (157) Tollens: tlber die in den Pflanzenstoffen und besonders den Futter- mitteln enthaltenen Pentosane, ihre Bestimmungsmethoden und Eigenschaften. Journal fiir Landwirthschaft, V. 44, p. 171, (1896). (158) Tollens: Untersuchungen iiber Kohlenhydrate. Die Landwirtschaft- lichen Versuchs-Stationen, V. 39, p. 401. (1891). (159) Tollens and Glaubitz: tjbor den Pentosan-gehalt verschiedener Materialien, welche zur Ernahrung dieneii, und in den Giirungs-Industrieen ange. Nutrition Investigations. 373 wendet vverden, und iiber den Verbleib des Pentosans bei den Operationen, welcher die obigen Materialien unterworfen werden. Journal fiir Landwirthschaft, V. 45, p. 97, (1897). (160) Tromp De Haas and Tollens: Untersuchungen uber die Pectionstoffe. Zeitschrift des Vereins fiir die Riibenzucker-Industrie der Deutschen Reiches, V. 45, p. 473, (1895). Liebig's Annalen, V. 286, p. 278, (1895). (161) Utzjanzew: Zur Physiologie des Blinddarmes bei den Pflanzenfressern. Biochemische Zeitschrift, V. 4, p. 154, (1907). (162) Ward and Dunlop: On Some Points in the Histology and Physiology of the Fruits and Seeds of Rhamnus. Annals of Botany, V. I, p. 1, (1887). (163) WiDTSOE AND ToLLENS: "Dber Arabinose, Xylose und Fucose aus Traganth. Berichte der deutschen chemischen Gesellschkft, V. 33, p. 132, (1900). (164) Weiser: tjber die Verdaulichkeit der Pentosane. Die Landwirt- schaftlichen Versuchs-Stationen, V. 58, p. 238, (1903). (165) Weiser and Zaitschek: Beitrage zur Methodik der Starkebestimmung und zur Kenntnis der Verdaulichkeit der Kohlenhydrate. Pfliiger's Archiv fur Physiologie, V. 93, p. 98, (1903). (166) Weiske tJber die Verdaulichkeit der in den vegetabilischen Futter- mitteln enthaltenen Pentosane. Zeitschrift fiir physiologische Chemie, V. 20, p. 489, (1895). (167) Winterstein: Uber das pflanzliche Amyloid. Zeitschrift fur physiolo- gische Chemie, V. 17, p. 353, (1893). (168) ZuNTZ AND Utzjanzew: Zur Bedeutung des Blinddarmes fiir die Ver- dauung beim Kaninchen. Archiv fur Anatomie und Physiologie, physiologische Abtheilung, 1905, p. 403. IV. GALACTANS. (169) Bauer: Ueber den aus Agar-agar entstehenden Zucker, iiber eine neue Saure aus der Arabinose nebst dem Versuch einer Classification der Gallertbilden- den Kohlehydrate nach den aus ihnen enstehenden Zuckerarten. Journal fiir praktische Chemie, V. 30, p. 36, 7, (1884). (170) Bauer: Weitere Untersuchungen iiber Alimentare Galaktosurie. Zen- tralblatt fiir innere Medizin, 1906, p. 1176. (171) Bente: Ueber anderweitige Darstellung von Levulinsaure. Berichte der deutschen chemischen Gesellschaft, V. 8, p. 417, (1875). (172) Bente: Zur Darstellimg der Levuhnsaure und iiber Carragheenzucker. Berichte der deutschen chemischen Gesellschaft, V. 9, p. 1157, (1876). (173) BiERRY AND GlAjA: Digestion dcs maunancs ct des galactancs. Comp- tes Rendus, V. 148, No. 8, p. 507, (1909). (174) BouREUELOT AND Herissey: Germination de la graine de Caroubier. Comptes Rendus, V. 129, p. 614, (1899). (175J Brasch: Ueber das Verhalten nicht-garungsfahiger Kohlehydrate im tierischen Organismus mit Beriicksichtigung des Diabetes. Zeitschrift fiir Biolo- gic, V. 50, p. 113, (1907). (176) Castoro: Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Hemicellulosen. Zeitschrift fur physiologische Chemie, V. 48, p. 96, (1905); V. 49, p. 96, (1906). (177) Cremer: Ueber das Verhalten einiger Zuckerarten im tierischen Organis- mus. Zeitschrift fiir Biologie, V. 29, p. 484, (1892). 374 Mary Davies Swartz, (178) Fluckinger and Mayer: Neues Repertorium fur Pharmacie, 1868, p. 350. (Cited by Haedike, Bauer and ToUens.) (179) Goret: Etude chimique et physiologique de quelques albumens comes de graines de Legumineuses. These, Paris, 1901. (Cited by Herissey.) (180) Greenish: Untersuchung von Fucus Amylaceous. Berichte der deut- schen chemischen Gesellschaft, V. 14, p. 2253, (1881). (181) Greenish: Die Kohlehydrate des Fucus Amylaceous. Ibid., V. 5, p. 2243, (1882). (182) Gran: Die Hydrolyse des Agars durch ein Enzym. Centralblatt fiir Bacteriologie, Abtheilung II, V. 9, p. 562, (1902). (183) Gruss: Studien liber Reservecellulose. Botanisches Centralblatt, V. 70, p. 242, (1897). (184) Gruss: Ueber den Umsatz bei der Keimung der Dattel. Berichte der botanischen Gesellschaft, V. 20, p. 36, (1902). (185) Hadike, Bauer and Tollens: Ueber Galactose aus Carragheenmoos. Liebig's Annalen, V. 238, p. 302, (1887). (186) Herissey: Isolement du galactose crystallise dans les produits de digestion par la seminase, des galactans, des albumens cornes. Comptes Rendus de la Societe de Biologic, V. 54, p. 1174, (1902). (187) Herissey: Recherches chimiques et physiologiques sur la digestion des mannanes et des galactanes, par la seminase, chez les vegetaux. Revue Generate de Botanique, 1903, p. 345. (188) Hofmeister: Ueber Resorption und Assimilation der Nahrstoffe. Archiv fur experimentelle Pathologic und Pharmakologie, V. 25, p. 240, (1888). (189) Kausch and Socin: Sind Milchzucker und Galactose directe Glycogen- bildner? Archiv fiir experimentelle Pathologic und Pharmakologie, V. 31, (1893). (Cited by Lohrisch.) (190) KoxiG AND Bettels: Die Kohlenhydrate der Meeresalgen und daraus hergestellter Erzeugnisse. Zeitschrift fiir Untersuchung der Nahrungs- und Genuss- mittel, V. 10, p. 487, (1905). (191) Lindsey: The Digestibility of Galactan. 17th Annual Report, Massa- chusetts State Experiment Station, p. 78, (1905). (192) LrppMANN: Ueber ein neues Galactan und einige Eigenschaften der Galactose. Berichte der deutschen chemischen Gesellschaft, V. 20, p. 1001, (1890). (193) Lohrisch: Die Ursachen der chronischen habituellen Obstipation im Lichte systematischer Ausnutzungsversuche. Deutsche Archiv fiir klinische Medizin, V. 79, p. 383, (1904). (194) Lohrisch: Der Vorgang der Cellulose- und HemiceUulosenverdauung beim Menschen und der Nahrwerth dieser Substanzen fiir den menschlichen Or- ganismus. Zeitschrift fiir experimentelle Pathologic und Pharmakologie, V. 5, p. 478, (1908). (195) Mallevre: Der Einfluss der als Giihrungsprodukt der Cellulose gebil- deten Essigsaure auf dem Gaswechsel. Pfliiger's Archiv fiir Physiologic, V. 49, p. 460, (1891). (196) Mendel: Das Verhalten einiger unverdaulicher Kohlehydrate im Ver- dauungstrakt. Zentralblatt fiir die gesammte Physiologic und Pathologic des Stoffwechsels, No. 17, p. 1, (1908). (197) Muller, Karl: Die chemische Zusammensetzung der ZcUmembranen bei verschiedenen Krj^ptogamen. Zeitschrift fiir physiologische Chemie, V. 45, p. 264, (1905). Nutrition Investigations. 375 (198) Munk: Der Einfluss des Glycerins, der fluchtigen und festen Fettsauren auf den Gaswechsel. Pfliiger's Archiv, V. 46, p. 303, (1890). (199) MtJNTZ: Sur la Galactine. Comptes Rendus, V. 94, p. 453, (1882). (200) MtJTHER: Untersuchungen iiber Fucusarten. Laminaria und Carraghe- enmoos, sowie die hydrolytisch daraus entsehenden Substanzen und iiber Derivate derselben, besonders Fucose und Fuconsaure. Inaugural Dissertation, Gottingen, 1903. (201) MtJTHER AND ToLLENS : Ucber die Producte der Hydrolysc von Scctang (Fucus) Laminaria, und Carragheen-Moos. Berichte der deutschen chemischen GeseUschaft, V. 37, p. 298, (1904). (202) Payen: Sur la gelose et les nids de salagane. Comptes Rendus, V. 49, p. 521, (1859). (203) Pletnew: Vergleichende Ausnutzungsversuche an normalen und habi- tuell obstipirten Menschen. Zeitschrift fur experimentelle Pathologic und Thera- pie, V. 5, p. 186, (1908). (204) RoiHENEUSSER : Der Schleimkorper des Leinsamens. Jahresbericht fiir Thierchemie, V. 34, p. 78, (1904). (205) Saiki: The Digestibility and Utilization of some Polysaccharide Carbo- hydrates derived from Lichens and Marine Algae. The Journal of Biological Chemistry, V. 2, p. 251, (1906). (206) Sandmeyer: Ueber die Folgen der partiellen Pankreasextirpation beim Hund. Zeitschrift fur Biologie, V. 31, p. 32, (1895). (207) Sawamura: Uber Enzyme im Verdauungskanal. Bulletin of the Col- lege of Agriculture, Tokyo Imperial University, V. No. 2, (1902); Jahresbericht fur Thierchemie, V. 32, p. 419, (1902). (208) Schellenberg: Untersuchungen iiber das Verba] ten einiger Pilze gegen Hemicellulose. Flora, V. 98, p. 257, (1908). Biochemisches Centralblatt, V. 7, p. 767, (1907). (209) Schmidt, A.: Neue Beobachtungen zur Erklarung und rationellen Behandlung der chronischen habituellen Obstipation. Miinchener medizinische Wochenschrift, V. 52, p. 1970, (1905). (210) Schmidt, C. : Ueber Pflanzenschleim und Bassorin. Liebig's Annalen, V. 51, p. 56, (1844). (211) Schmidt and Lohrisch: Weitere Beobachtungen iiber die Bedeutung der Zellulose (Hemicellulose) fUr die Ernahrung der Diabetiker. Deutsche medizi- ische Wochenschrift, No. 47, p. 1, (1908). (212) Schulze: Ueber die Zellwandbestandtheile der Cotyledonen von Lupi- nus luteus und Lupinus angustifolius, und iiber ihr Verhalten wahrend des Keim- ungsvorganges. Zeitschrift fiir physiologische Chemie, V. 21, p. 392, (1896). (213) Schulze: Uber die zur Gruppe der stickstofffreien Extractstoffe gehoren- den Pflanzenbestandtheile. Journal fiir Landwirtschaft, V. 52, (1904). (214) Schulze: Zur Kenntnis des j8-Galactans. Berichte der deutschen chemischen GeseUschaft, V. 25, p. 2213, (1893). (215) Schulze: Ueber das Vorkommen eines unloslichen Schleimsuure gebenden Kohlehydrats in den Rothklee- und Luzeme-pflanzen. Die Landwirt- schaftliche Versuchs-Stationen, V. 42, p. 9, (1893). (216) Schulze: Zur Kenntnis der in den Leguminosensamen enthaltenen Kohlehydrate. Ibid., V. 41, p. 207, (1892). (217) Schulze, Steigee and Maxwell: Zur Chemie der Pflanzenzellmem- branen. Zeitschrift fiir physiologische Chemie, \'. 14, p. 227, (1890). 376 Mary Davies Swartz, (218) ScHULZE AND Castoro: Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Hemicellulosen. Ibid., V. 37, p. 41, (1902); V. 39, p. 318, (1904). (219) ScHULZE AND Steiger: Untersuchungen viber die stickstofffreien Reser- vestoffe der Samen von Lupinus luteus und liber die Umwandlungen derselben wahrend des Keimungsprozesses. Die Landwirtschaftliche Versuchs-Stationen, V. 36, p. 391, (1889). (220) Sebor: Ueber die Kohlenhydrate des Carragheen-Moos. Botanisches Centralblatt, V. 86, p. 70, (1901). (221) Strauss: Ueber das Vorkommen eini ger Kohlehydratefermente bei Lepidopteren und Dipteren in verschiedenen Entwicklungsstadien. Zeitschrift fiir Biologic, V. 52, p. 95, (1908). (222) Ulander: Untersuchungen iiber die Kohlenhydrate der Flechten. Dissertation, Gottingen, 1905. (223) Voit: Ueber die Glykogenbildung nach Aufnahme verschiedener Zuckerarten. Zeitschrift fur Biologic, V. 28, p. 245, (1891). (224) Voit: Ueber das Verbal ten der Galactose beim Diabctiker. Zeit- schrift fur Biologic, V. 29, p. 147, (1892). (225) Von Planta and Schulze: Ueber ein neucs krystallisirbares Kohle- hydrat. Berichte der deutschen chemischen Gesellschaft, V. 23, p. 1692, (1890). (226) Weinland: Ueber die Bildung von Glykogen nach Galactose-fiitterung. Zeitschrift fiir Biologic, V. 40, p: 374, (1900). V. mannans. (227) Bertrand: Sur la presence de la mannoccllulose dans le tissu ligneux des plantes gymnospermes. Comptes Rendus, V. 129, p. 1025, (1899). (228) Bierry and Giaja: Sur la digestion des mannanes et des galactanes. Comptes Rendus de la Societe de Biologic, V. 60, p. 945, (1906). (229) Bierry and Giaja: Digestion des mannanes et des galactanes. Comptes Rendus, V. 148, pp. 735 and 507, (1909). (230) Brown and Morris: On the Existence of a Cellulose-dissolving Enzj'me (Cytohydrolyst) in the Germinating Seeds of the Grasses. Journal of the Chemical Society, London, V. 57, p. 497, (1890). (231) Bourquelot and Herissey: Sur la composition de I'albumen dc la graine du Phoenix canariensis et sur Ics phenomencs chimiqucs qui accompagnent la germination de cettc graine. Comptes Rendus, V. 133, p. 302, (1901). (232) Boxirqitelot and Herissey: Sur la composition de I'albumen de la graine de caroubier: production de galactose et dc mannosc par hydrolyse. Ibid., V. 129, p. 228, (1899). Sur la composition dc la graine de caroubier. Ibid., V. 129, p. 391, (1899). (233) Bourquelot and Herissey: Germination de la graine de caroubier: l^roduction de mannosc par un ferment soluble. Ibid., V. 129, p. 614, (1899). (234) Bourquelot and Herissey: Sur Ics ferments solubles produits pendant la germination par les graines a albumen come. Comptes Rendus, V. 130, p. 42, (1900). (235) Bourquelot and Herissey: Sur I'individualite dc lascminase, ferment soluble secrete par les graines de legumincuses a albumen corne pendant la germina- tion. Ibid., V. 130, p. 340, (1900). Nutrition Investigations. 377 (236) BoiiRQUELOT AND Herissey: Sur la mecanisme de la saccharification des mannanes du corrozo par la seminase de la luzerne. Ibid., V. 136, p. 404, (1903). (237) Castoro: Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Hemicellulosen. Zeitschrift fiir physiologische Chemie, V. 49, p. 96, (1906). (238) Cremer: Verhalten einiger Zuckerarten im tierischen Organismus. Zeitschrift fur Biologie, V. 29, p. 484, (1892). (239) Dillingham: A Contribution to the History of the Use of Bark Bread. Bulletin of the Bussey Institution, Vol. Ill, Part V. 120, (1906). (240) Dubat: Composition des hydrates de carbone de reserve de I'albumen des graines de quelques Liliacees et en particulier du Petit Haux. Comptes Rendus, V. 133, p. 942 (1901). (241) Effront: Sur une nouvelle enzyme h3'drolytique, "la caroubinase." Ibid.. V. 125, pp. 38 and 116, (1897). Sur la caroubinase. Ibid., V. 125, p. 309, (1897). (242) Fischer and Hirschberger: Ueber Mannose. Berichte der deutschen chemischen Gesellschaft, V. 21, p. 1805, (1888); V. 22, pp. 365 and 1155, (1889). (243) Franck: Ueber die anatomische Bedeutung und die Enstehung der vegetabilischen Schleime. Jahrbiicher fiir wissenschaftHche Botanik, V. 5, p. 161, (1866). (244) Gans and Tollens: Ueber die Bildung von Zuckersaure aus Dextrose haltenden Stoffen, besonders aus Raffinose, und liber die Untersuchung einiger Pflanzenschleimarten. Liebig's Annalen, V. 249, p. 215, (1888). (245) Gatin: Action de quelques diastases animales sur certaines mannanes. Comptes Rendus de la Societe de Biologie, V. 58, p. 847, (1905). (246) Gatin and G.^tin: Uber die Verdaulichkeit der Mannanen durch Dias- tasen der hoheren Tiere. Chemisches Centralblatt, 1907 (2), p. 1181. (247) Gatin: Isomerisation de mannose en glycose sous Taction d'un ferment soluble. Comptes Rendus de la Societe de Biologie, V. 64, p. 903, (1908). (248) Girand: Etude comparative des gommes et des mucilages. Comptes Rendus, V. 80, p. 477, (1875). (249) Goret: Sur la composition de I'albumen de la graine de fevier d'Ameri- que (Gleditschia triacanthos L., Legumineuses) . Comptes Rendus, V. 131, p. 60, (1900). (250) Grijss: Studien iiber Reserve-Cellulose. Botanisches Centralblatt, V. 70, p. 242, (1897). (251) Gruss: Ueber den Umsatz bei der Keimung der Dattel. Berichte der deutschen botanischen Gesellschaft, V. 20, p. 36, (1902). (252) Herissey: Sur' la digestion de la mannane des tubercules d'Orchidees. Comptes Rendus, V. 134, p. 721, (1902). (253) Herissey: Recherches chimiques et physiologiques sur la digestion des mannanes et galactanes par la seminase chez les vegetaux. Revue Generale de Botanique, 1903, p. 345. (254) Hilger: Zur Kenntnis der Pfianzenschleime. Berichte der deutschen chemischen Gesellschaft, V. 36, p. 3198, (1903). (255) Kano and Iishima: Bulletin of the College of Agriculture. Tokyo Im- perial University, II, No. 2, 1894. (Cited by Day, Bulletin 202. Office of Ex- periment Stations, United States Department of Agriculture.) 378 Mary Davies Swartz, (25G) Kinoshita: On the Occurrence of two kinds of Mannan in the Root of Conophallus Konjaku. Bulletin of the College of Agriculture, Tokyo Imperial University, No. V, p. 205, (1902). (257) Kinoshita: On the Occurrence of Mannan. Ibid., No. V, p. 253, (1902). (258) Meigen and Spreng: Ueber die Kohlehydrate der Hefe. Zeitschrift fur physiologische Chemie, V. 55, p. 48, (1908). (259) Mulder: Ueber Pflanzenschleim. Journal fiir praktische Chemie, V. 37, p. 334, (1846). (260) Neuberg and Mayer: Schicksal der drei Mannosen im Kaninchenleib. Zeitschrift fur physiologische Chemie, V. 37, p. 530, (1902). (261) Newcombe: Cellulose Ehzymes. Annals of Botany, V. 13, p. 49, (1899). (262) Niebling: Untersuchungen liber die kiinstliche Verdauung landwirth- schaftlicher Futtermittel nach Stutzer, und Pepsinwirkungen im allgemeinen. Landwirtschaftliche Jahrbucher, V. 19, p. 149, (1890). (263) Pohl: Ueber die Fallbarkeit coUoider Kohlenhydrate durch Salze. Zeitschrift fur physiologische Chemie, V. 14, p. 159, (1890). (264) Reiss: Ueber die Natur der Reserve-Cellulose. Berichte der deutschen botanischen Gesellschaft, V. 7, p. 322, (1889). (265) Roseneeld: Untersuchungen uber Kolilehydrate. Centralblatt fiir innere Medizin, V. 21, p. 177, (1900). (266) Sachs: Zur Keimungsgeschichte der Battel. Botanische Zeitung, 1862, p. 241. (267) Sawamura: On the Liquefaction of Mannan by Microbes. Central- blatt fur Bakteriologie, Abtheilung II., V. 11, p. 21, (1903-4). (268) Sawamura: On the Digestive Power of the Intestinal Canal. Bulletin of the College of Agriculture, Tokyo Imperial University, No. V, p. 155, (1902). (269) Schellenberg : Untersuchungen iiber das Verhalten einiger Pilze gegen Hemicellulosen. Flora, V. 98, p. 257, (1908). (270) Schmidt, C: Ueber Pflanzenschleim und Bassorin. Liebig's Annalen V. 51, p. 29, (1844). (271) Storer: Testing for Mannose. Bulletin of the Bussey Institution, Vol. Ill, Part II, p. 13, (1902). (272) Storer: Notes on the Occurrence of Mannan in the Wood of Some Kinds of Trees, and in Various Roots and Fruits. Ibid., V. Ill, Part III, p. 47, (1903). (273) Schulze: Zur Chemie der pflanzhchen Zellmembranen. Zeitschrift fiir physiologische Chemie, V. 16, p. 387, (1892). (274) Schuster *and Liebscher: Der Nahrwerth der Steinnussspahne. Landwirthschaftliche Jahrbucher, V. 19, p. 143, (1890). (275) Strauss: Ueber das Vorkommen einiger Kohlehydratefermente bei Lepidoptercn und Dipteren in verschiedenen Entwicklungsstadien. Zeitschrift fiir Biologic, V. 52, p. 95, (1908). (276) Thamm: Ein Beitrag zur Kenntnis der Pflanzenschleime. Dissertation, Miinchen, 1903. (277) Tollens and Gans: Mannose oder Isomanitose aus Salepschlcim. Berichte der deutschen chemischen Gesellschaft, V. 21, p.2150, (1888). (278) Tollens and Oshima: Uber das Nori aus Japan. Berichte der deut- schen chemischen GeseUschaft, V. 34, p. 1422, (1901). (279) Tollens and Widstoe: tjber die Reactionen des Methvl-Furfurols und der Methyl-Pentosane. Ibid., V. 33, p. 132, (1900). Nutrition Investigations. 379 (280) Tsuji: Mannan as an Article of Human Food. Bulletin of the College of Agriculture, Tokyo Imperial University, No. II, p. 103, (1894). (281) TsuKAMATO: Ueber die Bildung von Mannan in Amorphophallus Konjak. Chemisches Centralblatt, V. 97a, p. 930, (1897). (282) Van Ekenstein: Sur la caroubinose et sur la d-mannose. Comptes Rendus, V. 125, p. 719, (1897). (283) Voit: Ueber die Aufnahme des Pflanzenschleiras und des Gummis aus dem Darme in die Safte. Zeitschrift fiir Biologic, V. 10, p. 59, (1874). (284) Weiske: Versuche iiber die Verdaulichkeit und den Nahreffect des Johannisbrodes. Journal fiir Landwirthschaft, V. 27, p. 321, (1879). (285) Zanotti: Untersuchungen iiber einige zusammengesetzte Kolhehy- drate. Chemisches Centralblatt, V. 99a, p. 1209, (1899). VT. LEVULANS. (286) Beerry: Recherches sur la digestion de I'inuUne. Comptes Rendus de la Societe de Biologie, V. 59, p. 256, (1905). (287) Bierry: Recherches sur la digestion de I'inuhne. Comptes Rendus, V. 150, p. 116, (1910). (288) BiERM AND Porter: Recherches sur la digestion de I'inuline. Ibid., V. 52, p. 423, (1900). (289) BouRQXJELOT: Inulase et fermentation alcoholique indirecte de I'inuline. Comptes Rendus, V. 116, p. 1143, (1893). (290) Bourquelot: Remarques sur les ferments solubles secretes par I'As- pergillus et le P^nicilliimi. Comptes Rendus de las Societe de Biologie, V. 9, p. 653, (1893). (291) Chevastelon: Sur Tinuline d'ail, de la jacinthe, de I'asphodele et de la tub6reuse. Journal de Pharmacie, V. 4, p. 2, (1895). (Cited by Dean.) (292) • Chittenden: The Behavior of InuHn in the Gastro-intestinal Tract. American Journal of Physiology, V. 2, p. XVII, (1898). (293) Dean: Experimental Studies on Inulase. Botanical Gazette, V. 35, p. 24, (1903). (294) Dean: On Inulin. American Chemical Journal, V. 32, p. 69, (1904). (295) Ducamp: Beitrag zum Studium der Unterscheidung des Colibazillus, Wirkung der Bazillen der Cohtyphusruhrgruppe auf die Kohlehydrate. Jahres- bericht fur Thierchemie, V. 37, p. 952, (1907). (296) Ekstrand AND Johanson: ZurKenntnis der Kohlehydrate, I. Berichte der deutschen chemischen Gessellschaft, V. 20, p. 3310, (1887). ZurKenntnis der Kohlehydrate, II. Ibid., V. 21, p. 594, (1888). (297) Finn: Experimentelle Beitrage zur Glycogen- und Zuckerbildung in der Leber. Arbeiten aus dem physiologischen Laboratorium, Wiirzburg, 1877. (Cited by Miura.) (298) FiTz: Ueber Schizomycetengahrungen. Berichte der deutschen chemi- schen Gesellschaft, V. 11, p. 42, (1878). (299) Frerichs: Zur Glykogenbildung in der Leber. Dissertation, Wiirz- burg, 1876. (Cited by Miura.) (300) Green: On the Germination of the Jerusalem Artichoke (Helianthus tuberosus). Annals of Botany, V. I, p. 223, (1888). (301) Harlay: De I'hydrate de carbone de reserve dans les tubercules de 'avoine a chapelets. Comptes Rendus. V. 132, p. 423, (1901). 380 Mary Davies Swartz, (302) KiLiANi: Ueber Inulin. Liebig's Annalen, V. 205, p. 145, (18S0). (303) KoMANOS: Ueber die Verdauung des Inulins und seine Vervvendung bei Diabetes Mellitus. Dissertation, Strassburg, 1875. Jahresbericht fiir Thier- chemie, V.6, p. 180, (1876). (304) Kobert: Ueber einige Enzyme wirbelloser Tiere. Pfliiger's Archiv fiir Physiologie, V. 99, p. 116, (1903). (305) KiJLz: Beitrage zur Pathologic und Therapie des Diabetes Mellitus. Jahresbericht fur Thierchemie, V. 4, p. 448, (1874). (306) KuLZ: Beitrage zur Kenntnis des Glycogens. Centralblatt fiir Physio- logie, 1890, p. 789. (307) Levy: De la fermentation alcoholique des topinambours, sous I'influence des levures. Comptes Rendus, V. 116, p. 1381, (1893). (308) Lindner: Garversuche mit verschiedenen Hefen und Zuckerarten. Chemisches Centralblatt, 1901, p. 56. (309) V. Lippmann: Ueber das Lavulan, eine neue, in der Melasse der Riiben- zucker-fabriken vorkommende Gummiart. Berichte der deutschen chemischen Gesellschaft, V. 11, p. 57. (1881). (310) Luchsinger: Zur Glykogenbildung in der Leber. Pfliiger's Archiv fur Physiologie, V. 8, p. 289, (1874). (311) Mendel and Mitchell: On the Utilization of Various Carbohydrates without Intervention of the Alimentary Digestive Processes. American Journal of Physiology, V. 14, p. 239, (1905). (312) Mendel and Nakaseko: Glycogen Formation after Inulin Feeding. Ibid., V. 4, p. 246, (1900). (313) Miura: Wird durch Zufuhr von Inulin die Glykogenbildung gesteigert? Zeitschrift fur Biologic, V. 32, p. 255, (1895). (314) Reidemeister: Sinistrin, Lcvulin, und Triticin. Chemisches Central- blatt, 18S0, p. 808; Jahresbericht fur Thierchemie, V. 11, p. 68, (1881). (315) Richaud: Sur quclques points relatifs a I'histoire physiologique dc I'inulinc chez les animau.\. Comptes Rendus de la Societe de Biologic, V. 52, p. 416, (1900). (316) Saiki: Anti-inulase. Journal of Biological Chemistry, V. 3, p. 395, (1907). (317) Sandmeyer: Ueber die Folgcn der partiellen Pancrease.xtirpation beim Hund. Zeitschrift fur Biologic, V. 31, p. 32, (1895). (318) ScHMiEDEBERG : Ucbcr cin ncues Kohlehydrat. Zeitschrift fiir physio- logische Chemie, V. 3, p. 112, (1879). (319) Strauss: Ueber das Vorkommen einiger Kohlehydrate fermente bei Lepidoptcren und Dipteren. Zeitschrift fiir Biologic, V. 52, p. 95 (1908). (320) Tanret: Sur la levulosanc, nouvcau principe immediat des cereales Comptes Rendus, V.: 112, p. 293, (1891). (321) Tanret: Sur I'inuline et deu.x principes immediats nouvcaux. Ibid., V. 116, p. 514, (1893). (322) Tanret: Sur les hydrates de carbone du topinambour. Ibid., V. 117, p. 50, (1893). (323) Tanret: Sur unc nouvelle glucosane, la levoglucosane. lbid.,V. 119, p. 158, (1894). (324) Von Merino: Zur Glykogenbildung in der Leber. Pfliiger's Archiv fur Physiologie V. 14, p. 274, (1877). Nutrition Investigations. 381 (325) Wallach: Zur Kcnntnis der Kohlehydrate. Liebig's Annalen, V. 234, p. 364, (1886). (326) VVeinland: Ueber das Auftreten von Invertin im Blut. Zeitschrift fur Biologic, V. 47, p. 280, (1906). (327) Went: Monilia sitophila (Mont.) Sacc, ein technischer Pilz. Che- misches Centralbiatt, V. (1901) b, p. 650. (328) WiNOGR-ADSKY: Clostridium pastorianum, seine Morphologie und seine Eigenschaften als Buttersaureferment. Chemisches Centralbiatt, V. 1902, b, p. 709. Vn. DEXTRANS. (329) Bauer: Ueber eine aus Leinsamenschleim entstehende Zuckerart. Die Landwirtschaftlichen Versuchs-Stationen, V. 40, p. 480. (330) Bauer: Ueber eine aus Laminariaschleim entstehende Zuckerart. Berichte der deutschen chemischen Gesellschaft, V. 22, p. 618, (1899). (331) Bauer: Ueber die Arabonsaure und die aus Lichenin entstehende Zuckerart. Journal fiir praktische Chemie, V. 34, p. 46, (1886). (332) Berg: Jahresbericht fur Chemie, 1873, p. 848. (From Russ. Zeitschr. Pharm., 1873, pp. 129 and 161.) (333) Berzelius: Recherches sur la nature du lichen d'Islande, et sur son emploi comme aHment. Annales de Chimie, V. 90, p. 277, (1814). (334) Brown: Notes on Cetraria Islandica. American Journal of Physiology, V. I, p. 455, (1898). (335) Escombe: Chemie der Membranen der Flechten und Pilze. Zeitschrift fiir physiologische Chemie, V. 22, p. 288, (1896). (336) Ho NIG AND St. Schubert: Ueber Lichenin. Monatshefte fiir Chemie, V. 8, p. 452, (1887). (337) Klason: Uber die durch Inversion von Lichenin entstehende Zucker. Berichte der deutschen chemischen Gesellschaft, V. 19, p. 2541, (1886). (338) Meyer: Ueber Reservestoffe, Kerne und Sporenbildung der Bakterien. Chemisches Centralbiatt, V. 1900, b. p. 56, (1900). (339) Meigen and Spreng: Ueber die Kohlehydrate der Hefe. Zeitschrift fiir physiologische Chemie, V. 55, p. 49, (1908). (340) Mendel: Das Verhalten einiger unverdauhcher Kohlehydrate im Ver- dauungstrakt. Zentralblatt fiir die gesammte Physiologic und Pathologic des Stoffwechsels, No. 17, p. 1, (1908). (341) MuLLER, Karl: Die Chcmischc Zusammensetzung der Zellmcmbranen bci vcrschiedenen Kryptogamen. Zeitschrift fiir physiologische Chemise, V. 45, p. 264, (1905). (342) Nilson: Kenntnis der Kohlenhydrate in den Flechten. Upsala Lakareforenings Forhandlingar, V. 28. (Jahresbericht fiir Thierchemie, V. 23, p. 53, (1893). (343) O'Sullivan: Amylam in Wheat, Rye and Barley. Chemical News, V. 44, p. 258, (1881). (344) Poulsson: Untersuchungen iiber das Verhalten einiger Flechten- kohlehydrate im menschlichen Organismus und iiber die Anwendung derselben bci Diabetes-MelHtus. Festschrift fiir Olof Hammarsten XIV, Upsala Lakarefore- nings Forhandlingar, (1906). 382 Mary Davies Swartz. (345) RoTHENTUSSER : Der Schleimkorper des Leinsamens. Dissertation, Miinchen, 1903. Qahresbericht fur Thierchemie, V. 34, p. 78, 1904. (346) Saiki: The Digestibility and Utilization of Some Polysaccharide Carbo- hydrates derived from Lichens and Marine Algae. Journal of Biological Chem- istry, V. 2, p. 251, (1906). (347) Torup: A New Carbohydrate from Laminaria Digitata. Biochemisches Centralblatt, V. 8, p. 770, (1909). (From Pharmacia, V. 6, p. 153.) (348) Ulander: Untersuchungen iiber die Kohlenhydrate der Flechten. Dissertation, Gottingen, (1905). (349) Voit: Hermann's Handbuch der Physiologie, V. 6, p. 413, (1881). (350) Winxerstein: Zur Kenntnis der in den Membranen der Pilze enthal- tenen Bestandtheile. Zeitschrift fur physiologische Chemie, V. 19, p. 521, (1895). V. 21, p. 152, (1897). (351) Von Mering: Zur Glykogenbildung in der Leber. Pfliiger's Archiv fur. Physiologie, V. 14, p. 274, (1877). (352) YoSHisruRA: Ueber einige Pfianzenschleime. Jahresbericht fiir Thier- chemie, V. 25, p. 51, (1895). (Bulletin II, No. 4, College of Agriculture, Tokyo Imperial University.) TRANSACTIONS OF THE CONNECTICUT ACADEMY OF ARTS AND SCIENCES Incorporated A. D. 1799 VOLUME 16, PAGES a83-«7 JUNE, 1911 New Spiders from New England BY H. EMERTON PUBLISHED UNDER THE AUSPICES OF YALE UNIVERSITY NEW HAVEN, CONNECTICUT 191 1 I ryid TRANSACTIONS OF THE CONNECTICUT ACADEMY OF ARTS AND SCIENCES Incorporated A. D. 1799 VOLUME 16, PAGES 383407 JUNE, 1911 New Spiders from New England BY J. H. EMERTON PUBLISHED UNDER THE AUSPICES OF YALE UNIVERSITY NEW HAVEN, CONNECTICUT 191 1 WEIMAR: PRINTED KY R. WAGNER SOHN. New Spiders irom New England BY J. H. Emerton. This paper describes 25 new species and 15 described species of spiders found in New England since the completion of the Supple- ment to the New England Spiders published in the Transactions of the Conn. Acad., Vol. 14, January, 1909. Two of these are Euro- pean species apparently lately introduced : Teutana grossa, found in a museum basement in company with T. triangulosa and Epeira diademata, found at Newport, R. I., and evidently well established around the house of the Historical Society and for several blocks along the adjoining street. The two European species of Zilla are now abundant : Z. x-notata all over Cape Cod and the South shore of Massachusetts and Rhode Island and Z. atrica on Cape Ann and the adjoining country as far south as Fall River and Newport, but not far inland. Zora spinimana, a European spider, has been found several times in one locality only, but in a situation where there seems little probability of its being introduced. Four species first described from the Canadian Rocky Mountains have now been found in Northern New England. Of these Linyphia humilis is abundant among the dwarf firs and spruces at a height of 2000 to 4000 ft. on Greylock, Mass., Mt. Mansfield and Camel's Hump, Vt., Mt. Washington, N. H., and at the sea level in eastern Maine at Eastport. Pedanostethus fuscus described first from the Rocky Mountains under the name of Steatoda occurs at several places at about 2000 ft. ele- vation around Mt. Washington. The other two species are Lycosa quinaria and L. beanii found at Bangor and on Mt. Desert, Me. Ot the native species, two were formerly included in others to which they are nearly related, Ceratinella carinata in C. laetabilis and Pisaura brevipes in P. (Ocyale) undata. The two species formerly included in Phrurolithus alar ins have been separated and the larger one named P. borealis. The systematic relations of several species are doubtful, especialh^ Tmeticus armatus Bks. which has pits in the sides of the head like Lophocarenum and male palpi like Erigone or Gongylidium with long set^e at the base of the tarsus as in Tmeticus longisetosus and flaveolus. Histagonia nasutus resembles H. (exechophysis) palustris Bks. but has the peculiar character of 386 J. H. Emcrton, the head exaggerated. Another species of special interest is Micro- neta olivacea. The male was described from Mt. Washington in 1882, the female was found by Britcher on Mt. Katahdin in 1901 ; but the relation between the two was not noticed until the dis- covery of both sexes in several localities in 1910. The female has a peculiar projection of the front of the head and thickened palpi resembling those of an undeveloped male and an epigynum of the Microneta type of unusual size corresponding to the large palpi of the male. List Ceratinella sphaerica. „ carinata. Araeoncus bispinostis. Dicymbium pectinatmn. Histagonia nasutus. Lophocarenum excavatum. „ arenarium. „ douikilionim. " flagellatum. Tmeticus aestivalis. „ tarsal is. ~ „ entomologicns. „ teniiipalpis. of New Species. Bathyphantes intricata. „ tlieridiformis. Diplostyla brevis. Dictyna terrestris. Argemm obesa. Pisaura brevipes. Pardosa muscicola. Liocranuiu cakaratiun. Micaria longispina. Phrurolitlms borealis. Prosthesima transversa. Sittacus striatus. Described species lately found in New England. 1 eiUana grossa K. Pedanostetlms fit sea Em. Lophocaremim bilobatiiui Bks. „ e.xigiinni Bks. Tmeticus ar matt is Bks. Grammonota trivittata Bks. Linyphia humilis Em. Epeira diadeniata CI. Lailiys foxii Marx. Lycosa qiiinaria Em. Lycosa beanii Em. Phrurolitlms mimttiis Bks. „ formica Bks. Zora spinimana Snd. Dendtypliantes caslaneiis Hentz. Theridion globosum, Hentz. The male of this species is 2 mm. long with the first leg 5 mm. long. The head extends forward a little more than in the female and the front middle eyes are as far from the upper middle pair as they are from each other. The abdomen is romid and not as much elevated as in the female ; it has a black spot on the hinder half, but the light area around it is not as distinct as in the female. There is a black spot in the middle of the under side of the ab- domen. PI. I, fig. 1. The male palpus has the tarsus prolonged into a slightly curved horn, and opposite this on the outer side of the palpus the bulb extends into a sharp point curved like the horn, but half as large. Figs, la, lb. Fitzwilliam, N. H., with female, July 21, 1907. Blue Hills, Milton, Mass., Miss Bryant, June 25, 1904. Cold Spring Harbor, Long Island, N. Y., July 4, 1907. Teutana grossa, Koch. Female 8 mm. long, cephalothorax 3 mm. The cephalothorax is shaped as in triangulosa, but the sternum is heartshaped and does not extend backward between the fourth coxae. The cephalothorax and legs are dull yellow without an}' markings. The abdomen is purplish brown with lighter markings forming a half circle near the anterior end and a middle row of triangles. PI. I, fig. 2. On the under side the abdomen is of the same color with fine obhque lighter lines at the sides. The epigynum has a dark semicircle across it in front, much as in triangulosa. Fig. 2 a. One female in company with triangulosa in cellar of the building of the Boston Soc. Nat. Hist. A European species probably in- troduced. Pedanostethus fuscus. Steatoda fusca, Em. Canadian Spiders, Trans. Conn. Acad., 1894. This species has now been found in the White Mountains in the Carter Notch, Crawford Notch and the Great Gulf of Mt. Washington. It resembles P. piimilus but is one-half larger. In size and color it is like TnieticHS brnniicus with which it lives. The epigynum is without 388 J. H. Eiucrtoii, any anterior hard appendage. See Trans. Conn. Acad. 1894. The palpus has the tarsus shaped as in pnmilns. At the base of the palpal organ on the inner side the process is longer and sharper at both ends than in pmnilus. Figures are given of this process in the four species of Pedanostethus. PI. I, figs. 3, 3a, 3b, 3c. Ceratinella sphaerica, new. Males 1 mm. long. Cephalothorax as wide as long and two-thirds as high in front as it is wide. Abdomen round, as wide as long and nearly as high, extending forward over the cephalothorax half its length. Hard covering of the abdomen extending underneath as far as the pedicel and the spinnerets, and covered as in other species with minute pits and hairs. PI. I, figs. 4, 4 a. The color is dull, the cephalothorax and abdomen nearly black, and the legs 3'ellowish gray. The sternum is wider than it is long and between the fourth coxse as wide as it is in front. The male palpi are as long as the cephalothorax. The patella and tibia are of the same length and the tibia but little widened at the front. The outer process is slightly curved outward and downward. Fig. 4 c. The palpal organ is of the usual structure in the genus, with all the parts of moderate size and length. Fig. 4 b. Two males under leaves in moist woods, Tyngsboro, Mass. Ceratinella carinata, new. Like C. laetabilis except in the palpi of the male. The palpi have the tibia narrower than in laetabilis^ not more than twice as wide as long and the wide black tooth is a fourth smaller. The tarsus has on the outer edge three dark ridges that from some directions look like spines and between the two outer ridges are a few minute hairs. The whole tarsus is slightly smaller than in laetabilis. All the males found in a bog at Springfield, Mass., and near the Wayside Inn in Sudbury are of this species. In Concord, Mass., this and laeta- bilis were found together. The tarsus of the male palpus of C. laeta has ridges on the outer edge similar to those in carinata. PI. I, figs. 5, 5 a, ob, 5 c, show the tarsus and tibia of males of this species compared with laetabilis, laeta and briinnea. Grammonota trivittata, Bks. Journ. N. Y. Ent. Soc, 1895. 2 mm. to 2.5 mm. long, more slender than G. ornata and with longer legs. The palpi of the male are as long as the cephalo- thorax, while in ornata the}' are shorter. The color is generall}' lighter than in ornata, the head is lighter than the thorax, while in New Spiders from New England. 389 ornata the head is darkest. PL I, figs. 6, 6 a. The hght spots of the abdomen are united more closely than in ornata, and form two serrated longitudinal stripes. The male palpus has the patella and tibia both longer than the}^ are wide, and the whole palpus longer than in ornata. The palpal organ resembles that of ornata, but is slightly smaller. Figs. 6 b, 6 c. Salt marshes from Gloucester, Mass. to Long Island N. Y. Grammonota gigas, Em. Trans. Conn. Acad., 1909. Erigonoplus gigas, Bks. Canadian Entomologist, 1896. Plum Island, Mass., June 17, 1910, under straw on growing grass at edge of salt marsh. The markings of the abdomen are more uniform than in ornata, the front light spots not much larger than the others. The female has the head slightly raised behind the eyes. The epigynum has the middle depression square instead of narrowed in front as it is in ornata. Araeoncus bispinosus, new. Male 1.5 mm. long. Cephalothorax as wide as long and a little narrowed in front. The top of the head is elevated abruptly with shallow grooves, but without any holes at the sides. PL I, fig. 7. The sternum is convex and as wide as long. Fig. 7 c. The upper middle eyes are farther from the front middle eyes than from each other and are farther back than the posterior lateral eyes. The male palpi have the patella more than twice as long as wide. The tibia is short and widened on the inner side where it has a long, fine spine, .slightly curved and extending over the back of the tarsus. Near the base of the spine is a shorter one sharp-pointed and curved inward. Fig. 7 a. Two males only, Springfield, Mass., Sept. 20, 1909. Dicymbium pectinatum, new. Male 1.5 mm. long, dull gray, with lighter 3-ellowish legs. The cephalothorax is high in front with the head highest just behind the eyes, PL I, fig. 8, but without any holes at the side of the head. The upper middle eyes are very little larger than the front middle eyes. The first legs are a little thicker than the others, and the first metatarsus has on the upper side a single row of seven large hairs. Figs. 8, 8a. The male palpi are as long as the cephalothorax. The patella is long, nearly as long as the femur. The tibia is short and wide and hollow on the under side, in the middle of which the tarsus is 390 J. H. Emerton, attached. Fig. 8d. The end of the tibia is obHquely truncated and the outer corner has a small recurved point. Fig. 8 c. The tarsus is round and the palpal organ small and simple. The palpus re- sembles that of Dicymbiiim gracilipes of Europe. One male only under leaves at Three Mile Island, Lake Winnipe- saukee, Oct. 10, 1909. Histagonia nasutus, new. Male 2 mm. long. The front of the head extends forward beyond the mandibles and upward as high as the front eyes, covered on the highest part with short hairs directed upward and backward. The head is elevated and the eyes all turned upward. PI. I, figs. 9, 9a. Seen from above the cephalothorax appears pointed in front as in H. palustris. The abdomen is oval and the whole body dull gra}^ without markings. The male palpi resemble those of H. palu- stris but the tibia is more simple and the parts shorter and less pointed without the distinct wedge-shape when seen from above in palustris. The palpal organ is much as in palustris with the tube shorter and the support longer and more pointed. One male only with palustris in dust and leaves washed up on the shore at Three Mile Island, Lake Winnipesaukee, N. H. Lophocarenum bilobatum. Dicyphus bilobatus. Banks. Canadian Entomologist, 1896. In size and color this resembles L. decemoculatum. The cephalo- thorax and legs are bright orange and the abdomen bluish black. The cephalothorax is nearly as wide as long, rounded in front and without the projection over the mandibles which is so distinct in deceuioculatum. The hump is divided into two distinct lobes, each oval, and about twice as long as wide. PL II, fig. 1. The holes in the head are close behind and a little higher than the upper lateral eyes, fig. 1 a, appearing from in front like an additional pair of eyes as in decemoculatum. Behind the two lobes and around their outer sides the cephalothorax is slightly elevated. The male palpi are more slender and the palpal organs smaller than in decem- oculatum. The tibia has on the upper and inner side a slender, slightly curved hook, extending along the edge of the tarsus more than half its length. Fig. 1. The palpal organ is simple, the tube and a soft conductor arranged as in decemoculatum and Jlorens, but smaller and more slender. Fig. 1 b. So. Framingham, Mass., from low plants on the edge of a flooded meadow, May 15, 1910. Neiv Spiders from Nciu England. 391 Lophocarenum exiguum, Bks. Proc. Phil. Acad., 1892. Length of male 1.5 mm. Legs pale, but the rest of the body dark ; the cephalothorax yellow brown and the abdomen gray. The sternum is dark brown but the coxae as well as the rest of the legs are pale. The head of the male is high and has a narrow vertical hump with the upper middle eyes on top of it. PI. II, fig. 2, 2 a. There are grooves in the head extending forward over the upper lateral eyes so that the edge can be seen from in front. Fig. 2 a, 2 c. The female has no trace of the hump. The male palpus has the patella short and the tibia flattened and divided into two branches, the upper branch flat and turned nearly vertical, and the lower branch curved in a flat hook over the back of the tarsus. Figs. 2 a, 2 b. The upper branch of the tibia is irregularly toothed with a large tooth at the upper and one at the lower corner. Fig. 2 b. Woodbridge, near New Haven, Conn. Miss E. B. Bryant in Mus. Comp. Zool. Found by Banks at Ithaca, N. Y. Lophocarenum excavatum, new. Male and female 2 mm. long. Abdomen punctate all over with short scattered hairs in the depressions. In the male there is a thickened shield covering the dorsal half of the abdomen as in Ceratinella. PI. II, fig. 3. The abdomen and cephalothorax are chestnut brown, except the top of the hump on the head of the male, which is pale like the legs and palpi. In the male the head is divided into two parts by a notch in front and the upper hall forms a rounded hump carrying in front the upper middle eyes. Figs. 3, 3 a. On each side of this hump is a deep oval depression. In the female the middle eyes are far apart but there is no trace of the hump. The male palpus has the patella long and the tibia short, with a long process on the upper side ending in a small hook. Figs. 3, 3 b. The tarsal hook and the parts of the palpal organ are all small. Fig. 3 b. The epigynum is flat and simple in form. Fig. 3 c. Ipswich, Aug. 18, 1908, under straw on the edge of the salt marsh. Lophocarenum arenarium, new. Head slightly raised as in simplex and erigonoides. The pits are only a little farther back than the upper middle eyes, and are small and not easily seen. The lower middle eyes are higher than the lower lateral pair. The face below the eyes extends forward and 392 J. H. Emerton, is covered with short, stiff, black hairs directed upward. PL II, Figs. 4, 4 a. The first and second legs have similar short, stiff hairs on the under side. On the femur the hairs are clustered at the base and are smaller and in two rows toward the tip. On the tibia they are longer and in eight or ten pairs, and on the meta- tarsus and tarsus the}' are finer and more like ordinar}' hairs. The first and second legs are slightly thicker than the others. The cephalothorax is as wide as it is long. The sternum is as wide as long, and extends between the fourth legs where it is as wide as one of the coxas. The male palpi are short with the patella about twice as long as wide and widened at the end. The tibia is not widened laterally but extends upward over the tarsus, ending in a slightly curved tip on which is a small incurved point. Figs. 4, 4 b. The tarsal hook is simple in form, and its base follows the curve of the tibia. The tube of the palpal organ is long and slender, and makes one turn around the end of the bulb, supported at the end b}' a thin appendage half its own length. Fig. 4 b. The female is the same size and color as the male and has the head a little elevated, but no unusual arrangement of hairs on the head or front legs. The epigynum is short and wide, showing- through the skin round receptacles more than twice their diameter apart. Fig. 4 c. One male, Ipswich, Mass., May 12, 1908 under straw at Lakeman's Beach. Males and females on salt marsh at Oak Island, L3'nn, Mass. Lophocai'enum domiciliorum, new. From cellar of Boston Society of Natural Histor}-, November, 1910. The head is only slightly elevated behind the e3'es. The upper row of eyes, seen from above, is nearly straight. At the sides of the head beginning just behind the upper lateral eyes are deep grooves extending backward half the length of the head, with shallow and pointed pits near the anterior end. PL II, figs. 5, 5 a. The male palpus has the patella as long as wide and the tibia a little longer, widened at the anterior end, with a long, sharp point on the inner side. The tarsus is oval and the palpal organ small and simple. Figs. 5 b, 5 c. During the autumn flights great numljers of small spiders are 1)lown into Boston and alight on the fences of the common and the streets west of it. This spider probably came into the cit}' in this wa}-. New Spiders from New England. 393 Lophocarenum flagellatum, new. Male a little over 1 mm. long. The cephalothorax high in front and highest behind the eyes. At the sides of the hump are grooves with a round pit at the anterior end. The grooves are unusuall}' far behind the e3'es and when seen from above resemble those of L. minutum ; the head, however, is much higher than in that species. PL II, figs. 6, 6 b. The male palpi also resemble those oi niiimtum. Their patella and tibia are both short but the tibia shortest. The tibia is widened at the end and has a long, slender process extend- ing over the outer side of the tarsus nearly its whole length, and slightly hooked at the tip. Fig. 6. One male from Seal Harbor, Mt. Desert, Me., July 1, 1909. Lophocarenum florens and decemoculatum. Several females found with males in the earl}- summer of 1909 show the differences between these two species which in general appearance closely resemble each other. The epig3'num oi florens is alread}^ well figured in N. E. Therididte, Trans. Conn. Acad., 1882. That of decemoculatum is .shown in a new figure, PI. II, fig. 7 b. The eyes oi florens are farther apart than those of decem- octdatuin and the upper middle eyes are higher and farther from the front middle pair than they are from each other. In decem- oculatum the middle eyes nearly form a square, the upper pair being only a httle farther apart than the front pair. Figs. 7, 7 a. Lophocarenum (Tmeticus) armatum Bks. Proc. Ent. Soc. of Wash- ington, Feb. 1, 1906. Male 4 mm. long. Cephalothorax and legs orange yellow, abdomen bluish gray. The head is slightly elevated and there is a shallow groove and a small round hole close behind the lateral eyes. PL II, Figs. 8, 8 a. The upper middle eyes are farther from the front eyes than from each other. The mandibles are large and with several large spines. In front and showing from above is a large pointed tooth pointing downward. On the inner side of the mandible, near the middle, is a large tooth and nearer the base two others, and there are several small teeth and processes around these larger ones. Figs. 8, 8 a, 8 b. The maxillae are wide and project sidewise beyond the sternum. Their front edge has a double tooth at the outer corner. The sternum is widest in front, where it is nearly as wide as long. At the hinder end it has a narrow projection 1)etween the fourth coxae. Fig. 8 b. The palpi are long and resemble those of Erigone having a similar tooth directed downward on the patella. 394 J. H. Emerton, Fig. 8 f. The tibia is widened at the end as in Erigone and Gongy- Hdium. At the base of the tarsus are three stiff bristles like those of Tmeticus longisetosus. Fig. 8e. The female is 3 mm. long, colored as in the male, but paler. The eyes have a similar arrangement, but are not elevated above the cephalothorax. The mandibles are large but without unusual processes and have five teeth on the front of the claw groove. The maxillae are wide and project a little beyond the sternum. The sternum is wide in front, widest between the first and second legs, and projects backward between the fourth coxae. The epi- gynum is shown in Fig. 8d. White Mountains, N. H., near the Crawford Notch, sifted from leaves, Sept. 25, 1908. Banks described it from Manitoba. Tmeticus aestivalis, new. 1.5 mm. long. Cephalothorax nearly as wide as long and the abdomen narrower and oval. The sternum is as wide in front as it is long, and varies in shape. In some males it is almost triangular, with the sides straight and the widest part just behind the first legs, but usually the sides are slightly curved to the fourth coxce, where the sternum is very narrow and extends between them. The male palpus has the tibia nearly as wide as long and divided at the front end, the outer branch curving outward. The tarsal hook is larg^e and grooved on the outer side with two teeth at the end, the outer one largest and curved toward the other. At the end of the palpal organ is a black forked appendage bent toward the bulb and pointed forward and outward. PI. Ill, figs. 1, la, lb. The female is as large as the male, with the cephalothorax not quite as wide. The epigynum appears without magnifying as two parallel dark stripes, at the anterior end of which the small round receptacles show through the skin. Fig. 1 c. Mt. Toby and Holden, Mass., in June under leaves. Tmeticus tarsalis, new. 2 mm. long. Cephalothorax nearly as wide as long, with the whole anterior half elevated. PL III, fig. 2. The e3'es are slightly raised above the rest of the head and the front of the cephalo- thorax from the eyes to the mandibles is nearly vertical. The male palpi are as long as the cephalothorax, with the tarsus and palpal organ large and rounded, and a very long tube thick at the liase and coiled entirely around the tarsus. Fig. 2 a. The tibia is short and small, showing above two short teeth. The tarsal hook New Spiders from New Eug/aiuf. 395 is bent at a sharp angle, as in T. debilis. The outer edge of the tarsus which is without hairs and separated from the rest by a sharp ridge has a wide rounded lobe in front of the tarsal hook. Fig. 2 b. Fall River, Mass., Mt. Mansfield, Vt., Crawford Notch, N. H. Tmeticus entomologicus, new. Only 1 mm. long and dull gray. The cephalothorax is one-fourth longer than wide and the head low, and a little narrowed. The front row of eyes is one-fourth shorter than the upper row, the front eyes are close together and the middle eyes only half the diameter of the lateral. The male palpi have the tibia elongated on the upper side and truncate at the end. The tarsal hook is curved in a half circle and simple in form. PI. Ill, fig. 3. The tarsus is short and round and the palpal organ large with a short tube and two large processes. Ipswich, L. R. Reynolds, and Tyngsboro, Mass., F. Blanchard, under leaves in May and June. Tmeticus tenuipalpis, new. Males and females 3 mm. long. Abdomen high and round and marked as in T. probatns with light spots in pairs. The legs and palpi are long and slender. The general color is dull gray without markings except the spots on the abdomen. The mandibles are very large in both sexes. In the male the mandible has on the front and outer side a row of five stout teeth, smallest toward the head. PL III, figs. 4, 4 b. On the under and inner side are two rows of long teeth, four in the outer and five in the inner row, between which the claw is folded. Fig-. 4 a. The maxillee are long and wide, with blunt teeth at the sides, extending beyond the sternum. The trochanter has also a short tooth on the under side. The male palpi are unusually slender and nearly twice as long as the cephalothorax. The tibia is slightly widened at the end with short teeth around it. The tarsus is more than twice as long as wide and the palpal organ occupies only the basal half. The tarsal hook is short and without any prominent points or hooks. Figs. 4 c, 4d. The female has the same rows of spines on the mandibles as the male, but all much smaller. The epigynum is very simple. Fig. 4e. Ipswich, under straw on the edge of the salt marsh, August 1908 and 1909. 396 J. H. Emerton, Microneta olivacea, Emerton. N. E. Therididae, Trans, Conn. Acad. 1882. The male is 2 mm. long, the cephalothorax 1 mm. The cephalo- thorax is as wide as long and wider than the abdomen. In front it extends forward slightly beyond the eyes and beyond the mandibles. The eye area is a little elevated. PI. Ill, fig. 5, 5 b. The mandibles are narrowed at the ends and have one very small tooth near the inner angle. The male palpi are of the microneta type but unusually large. The tarsus is angular and has a small spur at the base. Figs. 5, 5 a. The tarsal hook is wide and flat with a tooth at the end and a wider one at the angle. The female is as long as the male but has the cephalothorax a fourth longer than wide. Fig. 5g. The color is lighter than in the male and yellowish brow^n rather than gray. The cephalothorax extends forward beyond the eyes farther than in the male and projects distinctly beyond the mandibles. Fig. 5 c. The mandibles are slightly curved forward at the ends as they are in the male, but are not much narrowed, and the single tooth is large. Fig. 5f. The palpi have the tarsus thickened in the middle so that it appears like that of an immature male. Figs. 5d, 5h. The epigj'num is folded and resembles that of other Microneta and Bathyphantes. Figs. 5i, 5 k. The female was found by the late H. C. Britcher on Mt. Katahdin, Me., in 1901, and has since been found with males on Grey lock and Mt. Mansfield. Three females found with two males at Norcross, Me. June 30, 1910, resemble those from other places except that the palpi are not swelled at the end. Fig. 5 e. The males agree with those from other places. Bathyphantes theridiformis, new. Cephalothorax 1 mm. long. Whole body 2 mm. long in male and 3 mm. in female. Color pale with gray markings resembling Theridion sexpunctatum. The cephalothorax has a wide middle dark stripe as wide in front as the e3'es and tapering slightly back- ward. There is a dark line along the sides of the cephalothorax nearly to the e3-es. The legs are slight!}- gray on the ends and middle of each joint. The abdomen has on the back a dark mark over the dorsal vessel and a series of pairs of irregular dark spots more or less united with spots along the sides and with each other. On the under side the coxai and mouth parts are pale and the sternum gray. The abdomen is gray, lighter in the middle, and New Spiders from Neiv England. 397 darker along the sides, the markings varying in individuals and sometimes broken into irregular spots. The male palpi have the tarsus with a small process at the base on the upper side. The tarsal hook is curved outward at the end where it has two points, the distal one much the longer. Fig. 6 a. The mandibles of the male are turned apart from the middle, where two of the teeth along their edge are much larger than the others. Fig. 6 b. The epigynum is short and wide, the outer fold in two lateral lobes, with a small middle one. Fig. 6 c. Jackson, N. H., June 1, 1910. Bathyphantes intricata, new. 3 mm. long and pale, without any markings. Cephalothorax and legs yellowish and the abdomen gray. The legs long and slender, the front pair 8 mm. long. The male palpi have the tibia and patella short and of the usual form, without processes, but the tar- sus and its appendages are extrem.ely complicated, as best shown in the figures. The tarsus has a sharp angle on the upper side and a process at the base and both these are elongated into sharp, curved teeth. PI. Ill, figs. 7, 7d. The tarsal hook is hard to de- scribe. It has all the curves and angles found in this genus and all exaggerated into teeth and ridges. Three Mile Island, Oct. 20, 1909. Diplostyla brevis. Like nigrina in size and color, varying in length from 2 mm. to 3.5 mm. and in color from pale to dark gray, almost black. As in nigrina the markings of the back of the abdomen, especially near the front end, may be small gray spots in pairs on a pale ground or they may be pale spots in a general dark gray. On the under side this species is generally lighter than nigrina, having two pale stripes sometimes extending the whole length or sometimes only partway backward from the epigynum with the space between the stripes, in some individuals, nearly as pale as the stripes them- selves. The epigj-num has the two median finger-like appendages not more than half as long as in nigrina. PI. IV, fig. lb. The male palpi have the tarsus a little shorter and less angular than in nigrina. Figs. 1, la. The tarsal hook has a blunt point not widened at the tip as in nigrina. Fig. 1. The palpal organ has the middle pro- cess on the under side not straight as it is in nigrina, but curved 398 J. H. Emcrton, around the base of the tube, and usually pointed at the tip with a tooth on the outer side; but this varies in different individuals. Fig. la. Under leaves at all seasons. Tyngsboro, Cambridge, Mt. Mans- tield. White Mountains. Flying from fences, Readville, Mass., in November. Linyphia humilis, Em. Canadian Spiders, Trans. Conn. Acad. Vol. IX, 1894. This species first described from the Rock}^ Mountains of Canada has now been found on the upper part of the Green Mountains, from Mt. Mansfield, Vermont, to Greylock, Mass., on Mt. Willard in the White Mountains, and at the sea level at Eastport and Machias, Me. It lives in the low firs and spruces that cover the tops of Greylock and Mansfield, and has not been found there below 2000 feet; and from 2000 to 4000 feet on Mt. Washington, most abun- dant in the dwarf trees along the road near the Half-way House, and becoming scarcer downward as far as the path to Hermit Lake. Found in the Great Gulf near the Appalachian Club camps. In Maine it lives also where the forest consists largely of stunted spruces in company with Theridion zelotypum. Both males and females are found in the Green Mountains in great abundance in the middle of yune, and the young in September. The shape of the abdomen of the female is slightly pointed behind and high in the middle. PI. IV, fig. 2 c. The dorsal marking is divided by two notches at the sides into three parts, the middle part much smaller than the other two. Fig. 2 b. The colors resemble conwmnis, for which it may be some- times mistaken. In the male the colors are much brighter, the cephalothorax and legs light orange and the abdomen brown. The head of the male is as high as it is wide and black between the eyes. The male palpi resemble those of L. marginata and have the tarsal hook showing plainly from above, curved in a half circle with the end slightly widened. Fig. 2 a. The epigynum is shown in fio-. 2d. See also figures in Trans. Conn. Acad. Vol. IX. Epeira diademata, CI. Newport, R. I. on window frames, fences and vines around the Imilding of the Historical Societ}' and fences of neighboring gardens on Touro Street, Sept. 20, 1910. One adult $ under fence cap. Large females with nest above the web. A common European species reported from Vancouver, Wisconsin and Newfoundland, but now found far the first time in New EuPfland. New Spiders from Neiv England. 399 Zilla x-notata, Z. atrica. Z. x-notata described in Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. VI, 1884 from Woods Hole, Mass. is abundant at Provincetown, on wharves, bams and houses near the shore ; also at Wellfleet and Harwich and at Newport, R. I., on the street fences ; New Bedford on wharves and fish houses ; and Fall River on boat houses, but in small numbers. None were found at Dighton and Taunton. On the same street at Newport where Z. x-notata is found on the fences Z. atrica occurs in hedges. It is also common at Fall River on hedges, fences and garden shrubs. At Taunton this species was absent, as well as x-notata. Dictyna terrestris, new. 2 mm. long and resembling closel}- D. volupis. The front middle eyes are farther forward than in volupis, so that the middle eye area is longer than wide. PI. IV, figs. .3c, 3d. The male palpus has the tibia short, not longer than wide, except on the outer side. The tarsus and palpal organ are very large and both curved down- ward more than in volupis. Fig. 3 b. The mandibles of the male are not turned forward at the ends as much as in volupis. Three INIile Island, N. H., June 1. Plum Island, Mass., June 17. Argenna obesa, new. Female 2.5 to 3 mm. long. Cephalothorax 1 mm. The whole body pale, cephalothorax a little darker than the abdomen. The hinder half of the abdomen indistinctl}- marked with angular spots. PI. IV, fig. 4 a. The abdomen is oval and longer than the cephalo- thorax. The head is wide and but little elevated. The front middle eyes are smallest, but only a little smaller than the upper middle pair, and the front eyes form a nearly straight row at equal distances from each other. The sternum is nearly as wide as long, and with a blunt point behind that extends backward between the fourth coxae. The cribellum is small and undivided. Fig. 4. The fourth metatarsus is slightly curved and the calamistrum extends about half its length. The male differs from the female in the smaller abdomen and longer and larger front legs. The male palpi have both the patella and tibia short and wide. The tarsus is nearly as wide as long and pointed at the end. The tibia has a wide process that extends for- ward along the outer side of the tarsus and against this lies a wide pointed appendage of the palpal organ supporting the end of the tube, somewhat as in Dictyna. Figs. 4 c, 4d, 4e. Tkans. Conn. Acad., V'oI. XVI. 26 Jcne, 1911. 400 J. H. Emerton, Abundant under straw on the edge of salt marshes at Ipswich and Plum Island. Adult males in June and July, Cold Spring Harbor, Long Island, N. Y., Miss Bryant. Lathys foxii = Prodalia foxii, Marx. Ent. Soc. Washington, 1891. 2 mm. long. Pale, with the cephalothorax a little darker than the abdomen. Abdomen marked with a middle row of brown angular marks that in some individuals join a row of spots along the sides. PI. IV, fig. 5. In the male the dark marks are wider so that there appear to be light marks on a darker ground. The front row of eyes is shorter than the upper row and the front middle e3'es much smaller than the others. PI. IV, fig. 5e. The sternum is nearly as wide as long, with a blunt point behind which extends between the fourth coxae. The cribellum is small and undivided. Fig. 5 a. The male palpi have the patella and tibia both very short. The patella is widened at the end so that seen from above it is twice as wide as at the base. The til^ia is also widened at the end and has a groove above in which rests the end of the tube of the palpal organ, which extends along the outer side of the tarsus and turns inward and upward between tarsus and tibia. Fig. 5 d. Under leaves at all times in summer and autumn. Males from Mollis, Me., June 12. Females from Old Orchard Beach, Me., Holden, Carlisle, Huntington, Williamstown, Mass., Kent, Conn. Pisaura brevipes, new. A smaller and dark form of Pisaura formerly placed with P. iindata. It is one-sixth smaller than undata and dark brown even when small and freshly molted, and the middle stripe has nearly straight sides, both on cephalothorax and abdomen, with a bright white line along its edges. The sides of cephalothorax and abdomen are dark brown. The legs are brown without rings. The first leg is shorter than the fourth and without the femur is shorter than the bod}', while in P. iindata the first leg without the femur and patella is as long as the body. PI. IV, figs. 6, 6 b. The epig3'num is slightly shorter and rounder than in undata. Figs. 6 a, 6 c. Females from Mt. Tom, July, 1873, So. Framingham, May, 1910. Lycosa quinaria, Em. Canadian Spiders, Trans. Conn. Acad., \Q)\. IX, 1894. The male is 8 mm. long, the cephalothorax 5 mm. long, the fourth leg 14 mm. and the first leg 13 mm. The cephalothorax shows no markings in alcohol, and the legs have no spots or rings, but are irregularly strijoed lengthwise as in Pardosa glacialis. The male Neiv Spiders from Nciu England. 401 palpi are long and the tibia as long as the tarsus. The abdomen is gray with a white middle stripe more than half its length, con- tinuing to the end in a row of spots. At the sides are similar spots in irregular rows. PI. V. figs. 1, la. Male in sphagnum bog, Bangor, Me., June 29, 1910. Female from Laggan in the Rocky Mountains in Canada. See Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. IX. Lycosa beanii, Em. Canadian Spiders, Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. IX, 1894. This species has the general appearance oi frondicola. The middle stripe of the cephalothorax is straight at the sides and narrowed from the eyes backward. The femora are marked with indistinct rings and there are traces of rings on the other joints. The under side is somewhat lighter than the back and has no black spots or stripes. The epigynum is well shown in the figure in the paper on Canadian spiders. Seal Harbor, Mt. Desert, Me., July 1, 1909. Pardosa muscicola, new. The male of this species has been confounded with uncata and the female with g/acialis. The markings are much like glacialis, with the middle stripe of the cephalothorax more distinctly divided into three at the anterior end. The lance-shaped spot at the front end of the abdomen is equally distinct in both. The femora of muscicola, however, are marked with four distinct but somewhat broken rings resembling the femora of tachypoda and uncala rather than glacialis. PL V, fig. 2. The epigynum is wide as in glacialis iDut the anterior pit is single and the middle lobe straight with parallel sides in the posterior half. Fig. 2c. The male is rather lighter colored than that of glacialis and the tarsus and tibia of the male palpus are not black as in that species but colored as in uncata. The basal process of the palpal organ is shaped as in uncata but the long branch is longer and extends entirely across the tarsus, ending in a slightly curved blunt point. Fig. 2a, 2 b. This species lives with glacialis, uncata and tachypoda on the moss ot the upper part of the Green Mountains and White Mountains and in Labrador and Newfoundland. Pirata montanus, Emerton. Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. VI, 1885. The female only is described in N. E. Lycosidae, Trans. Conn'' Acad., 1885. The male resembles the female in size and markings 402 /. H. Emertou. but has greater contrasts in colors, and the legs marked with black, It is 5 mm. long and the cephalothorax 3 mm. The e3'es as in the female extend over nearly the whole width of the head and the two upper pairs are nearly as large and conspicuous as in Pardosa. The femora of legs 1 and 2 are black and the other femora have black spots near the end. The cephalothorax is black with the usual light middle stripe divided in front into three, and extending for- ward between the eyes. Fig. V, fig. 3. The abdomen is gray, turning a little reddish in alcohol. It has a distinct light and dark pattern consisting of the usual pointed middle mark in front, and a series of bright white spots of hairs and narrow white marks along the sides toward the front, varying in different individuals. The front of the head and mandibles are black and the under side of the body gray, with a narrow light line on the sternum as in the female. The male palpi are very simple, much as in P. minuta. Fig. 3 a. The basal part of the palpal organ has a flat border that extends forward, nearly covering the short tube and a thin appen- dage of variable shape near the outer end of the tarsus. Males and females from Mt. Tob}^ in the central j^art of Massachu- setts, June 12, 1902. Mt. Everett, Mass. Ithica, N. Y. Liocranum calcaralum, new. Both sexes 2.5 mm. long. Cephalothorax slightly longer in the male than in the female. The cephalothorax and legs are pale yellow brown, the cephalothorax sometimes brighter and redder than the legs. The abdomen is short, oval, and pale, with gra}' markings, — a middle stripe extending from the front to the middle and four or five transverse stripes, the second and sometimes the first connected with the middle stripe. PL V, figs. 4, 4 c. Legs 1 and 2 have five pairs of long spines under the tibia and three pairs under the metatarsus in both sexes. Fig. 4 b. The head is narrowed toward the front. The eyes are in two rows, nearly parallel, the front row shortest with the middle eyes much smaller than the lateral. The upper row of eyes is slightly curved downward at the ends and the eyes are of the same size and equal distances apart. The male palpus has the tibia half longer than wide with a short process curved forward on the middle of the outer side. The tarsus is nearly as wide as long and pointed at the end. The tube of the palpal organ is short and has opposite to it a supjiorting process about the same size and shape. Figs. 4e, 4f Females, Crawford Notch, Sept. 20, Great Gulf of Mt. Washing- ton, Aug. 1. Males, Jackson, N. H. June 1, Katahdin. Me. Juh' 4. Nciv Spiders from Neiv England. 403 Zora spinimana, Snd. 5 mm. long, cephalothorax 2 mm. long and 1.5 mm. wide. The cephalothorax is narrowed in front where it is less than 1 mm. wide. The eyes are all nearly of the same size, the front row slightly curved backward, and the upper row strongly curved as in Dolo- medes. The color is pale with distinct dark brown stripes and spots. The cephalothorax has two dark stripes extending straight backward from the lateral e3'es and two less definite stripes along the edges. The abdomen has two stripes made up of irregular spots a little farther apart than the stripes of the cephalothorax, and l)etween these two rows of smaller spots converging behind. PI. V, fig. 5. On the under side the whole body is pale with scattered dark spots. The under pair of spinnerets have a brown stripe on the outer side. The legs are spotted and have a dark ring at the end of the metatarsus, which in the first legs covers nearly the whole joint. The tibia of the first leg is thickened in the middle and has underneath two rows of spines 7 on the outer and 8 on the inner side. Fig. 5 b. The metatarsus of the first leg has underneath three pairs of long spines. The second leg has the same thickening in a less degree and similar, but smaller spines. The epigynum has two indistinct openings in front between and behind which a pair of curved tubes and large round receptacles show through the skin. Fig. 5 a. Tyngsboro, Mass under leaves, mature female, Oct. 16 and im- mature female in January. A common species in Europe. Micax'ia longispina, new\ Male 2.5 mm. long, resembling in form and color M. geniilis, but smaller than the usual size of that species. The male palpus has the tibia and patella both short, together as long as the tarsus. The tibia has a long process on the outer side, turned obliquel}'^ upward along the edge of the tarsus. PI. V, figs. 6, 6 a, 6 b. Ellisville, Plymouth, Mass., May 10. Phrurolithus formica. Banks. Journal N. Y. Ent. Soc, 1895. Found only in nests of the ant Cremastogaster lincolata. Males and females are 3 mm. long, in life dark gray, turning to brown in alcohol. PI. \T, fig. 1. The legs are a little paler and the ab- domen a little darker than the general color. The abdomen has a hard shining shield covering the whole upper surface. The front half of the under side of the abdomen is pale, the spot varying in size in different individuals. The epigynum shows externally a large 404 J. H. Emcrton, dark brown area, widest behind and nearly square, with rounded corners, behind which the receptacles show indistinctly through the skin. Fig. \ h. Smaller and apparentl}^ younger females have the epigynum more distinct without the opaque brown area. Fig. 1 c. The male palpi are large and of characteristic form. Figs. Id, 1 e. The femur has a knob-shaped process on the middle of the under side. The process on the outer side of the tibia is short and wide with a long pointed tooth on the vipper corner. Figs. 1 d, 1 e. On the inner side of the tibia is a large blunt tooth. The palpal organ has a large thick bulb with a long slender tul^e turned inward to- ward the tip of the tarsus. Forest Hills, Boston, Mass., W. M. Wheeler, Tyngsboro, Mass., F. Blanchard. Found b}' Banks on Long Island, N. Y. In the spring when the ants come up and rest in large numbers under stones over their burrows, the spiders are found among them. If not frightened the}- move slowly about like the ants and disappear under ground. If frightened they move much more rapidly than the ants and down into the nest or out into the surrounding grass. Phrurolithus minutus Bks. Ithaca Spiders, Proc. Phil. Acad., 1892. Male 2 mm. long. Abdomen covered with a hard shiny plate and strongly iridescent. Cephalothorax with a narrow light band extending back from the e3'es to the dorsal groove behind this widening into a nearly square spot. PI. VI, fig. 2. The legs are pale except the first pair, which have the tibia black with a white tip and the patella and end of the femur also black, and the second pair which have less distinctly the same markings. The palpi are dark but not black. The tibia of the male palpus has on the outer side a long slender process divided at the end into a short, square lower tooth and a long slender, sickle-shaped upper tooth. The tibia is longer than wide and the outer process starts from its basal half Figs. 2 a, 2 b. On the under and inner side of the tibia is a short, blunt tooth directed forward. Tyngsboro, Apr. 5, 1909, in open field under straw. One adult male and several immature males and females. Phrurolithus borealis. P. alarius (in part) Em. Trans. Conn. Acad., 1890. Male 2 to 2.5 mm. long. Cephalothorax light in the middle and dark at the sides without an}- defined markings. Abdomen dark and iridescent with traces of a pattern on the hinder half Legs 3 and 4 pale without any spots. Leg 1 has the tibia black with Neiv Spiders from N^ew England. 405 a white tip and leg 2 has the same colors less strongl}' marked. The patella and end of the femur of leg 1 are also dark colored. The male palpus is dark colored its whole length. The tibia is as wide as long and has on the outer side, starting in the middle, a long process that widens toward the end where it is truncated obliquely and has on the upper corner a short, slighth' curved tooth turned inward. PI. VI. fig. 3, 3a. The female is a little larger than the male, with the abdomen larger and less iridescent and with the hinder half marked with light and dark chevrons. The front half has the markings absent or indistinct and is sometimes gray and sometimes paler than the rest of the back. The epigjaium has the receptacles twice their diameter apart. Under side of abdomen pale or with two faint longitudinal lines. New Haven, Conn., T3-ngsboro, Mass., Three Mile Island, Lake Winnipesaukee, N. H., Crawford Notch. Phrurolithus alarius, Hentz. Phrurolithus palustris Bks. Ithaca Spiders, Proc. Phil. Acad. 1892. P. alarius (in part) Em. Trans. Conn. Acad. 1890. This species and borealis were included under the name P. alarius Hentz in New England Drossidae, etc. in Trans. Conn. Acad. 1890. Male and female 2 to 2.5 mm. long. The cephalothorax is pale with a black line along the edges and two dark bands extending l^ack from the eyes and nearly meeting behind. The abdomen is marked by short lines and chevrons more or less broken into spots, especially in the female. Legs 1 and 2 have the tibia marked with black and white and legs 3 and 4 have the joints tipped with gray and a gray mark in the middle of the tibia. In pale individuals the legs are sometimes without markings, even the dark color of tibia 1 being almost absent. In very dark males the bands of the cephalothorax may be united with the black edges and the abdomen may have the markings covered with gray so as to be very indistinct. The male palpus PL VI, figs. 4, 4 a, has the process of the tibia tapering toward the point and curved inward as figured in Trans. Conn. Acad. 1890, PI. VI, fig. 5e and 5g. The epigynum has the receptacles not more than their diameter apart. The under side of the abdomen has usually two gray spots near the middle, one just in front of the spinnerets and others along the sides. Around Boston Mass., HoUis, Me., Lake Winnipesaukee, N. H., south to No. Carolina. 406 J. H. Emerlon, Prosthesima rufula Bks. Phil. Acad. 1892. This is the only brown species found in New England, the others all being black or gray. A new figure is given of the male palpus, showing better the form of the palpal organ than the one in Trans. Conn. Acad. 1909, PL V, fig. 7. The peculiar form of the tibial hook is correct in both figures, but the tube of the palpal organ is slender and does not extend the whole length of the outer side of the tarsus. Prosthesima depressa Em. Conn. Trans. Acad., Vol. Ill, 1890. Only the female was described in 1890. The males are 5 mm. long and resemble the female. The general color is black but the tcirsus and metatarsus of legs 1 and 2 are pale, contrasting strongly with the black of the other joints. The legs 3 and 4 are pale with darker color toward the ends of the joints, nearty covering the tibia. The male palpi have the tarsus more pointed than in atra, with the tube of the palpal organ directed toward the tip. PI. V, fig. 8 c. The tibia has a process on the outer side that varies in form. In some individuals it is sharply pointed, as long as the diameter of the tarsus, and nearly straight ; in others it is of the same length and curved, while in others it is short and rounded at the end and curved nearly at a right angle. Figs. 8, 8 a, 8 b. All these forms of the tibia have been found in specimens collected in the same place at the same time. Blue Hills, Milton, near Boston, Mass., Three ^lile Island N. H. Prosthesima transversa^ new. Male 5 mm. long. Two specimens dark-colored and one light, apparently lately molted, but neither showing the contrast between light and darks markings which is conspicuous in depressa. The palpi have the tarsus larger than in depressa and the tibia thicker, with the process straight and the tip flattened and rounded and not much curved. PI. V, fig. 9. The palpal organ is distinctly different from that of the other species, the tube turns forward and ends in the notch at the tip of the tarsus as usual, but at its base begins a slender process nearly as long as the tube which crosses it to the outer edge of the tarsus. The basal processses of the bulb differ slightly in the different individuals, but in all are longer and more slender than in depressa, Figs. 9 a, 9 b. Blue Hills and Middleboro, Mass., New Haven, Conn. Neiv Spiders /f out Nciv England. 407 Dentryphantes castaneus, (Hentz), Peckham. Revision of the Attidse of North America, Trans. Wis. Acad., 1909. Female 6 mm. long. Cephalothorax 3 mm. The cephalothorax is covered with short gray hairs but in alcohol the whole front half appears black and the hinder half brown. The abdomen is brown with a white stripe around the front. There are fine waving black lines running irregularly lengthwise and in the middle of the hinder half a middle row of indistinct herringbone markings, hi alcohol the markings are more distinct and there is none of the red color which is so evident in the other species of Dendryphantes. PI. VI, fig. 5. The legs are pale with faint brown marks across the middle of the joints which are deeper colored on the patella, tibia and femur of the first legs. On the under side the legs are pale, including the coxae and sternum, with no marking except on the front pair. The under side of the abdomen has three black stripes from the epigynum, nearly to the spinnerets and at the sides the waving black lines extend underneath. Fig. 5 a. The epigynum has a short rounded notch showing nothing distinctive. Gloucester, Mass. in a sphagnum bog, Aug. 25, 1910. Found before l^y Banks in the southern states from Washington to North Carolina. Sittacus striatus, new. Female 5 mm. long. Male 3.5 mm. Cephalothorax in both sexes 2 mm. long. The cephalothorax is less narrowed in front and has the sides straighter than in S. palustris. The cephalothorax has three narrow light stripes. The markings of the abdomen are much like those of the female Dendryphantes militaris, the middle markings only slightly larger than the others. PI. VI, figs. 6, 6 b. Neither specimen has the large middle light mark which is conspicuous in palustris. The legs are striped lengthwise, while in palustris they are ringed crosswise, but on the under side there are indistinct rings on the femura. The general color is light yellow-brown like straw, much lighter than the usual color of palustris. The male palpus has a sharp process on the outside of the tibia nearly as long as the rest of the joint, as in palustris, but the bulb of the palpal organ is circular while in palustris it always has a depression on the outer edge. Figs. 6, 6e. A male and female were taken in straw on a salt marsh at Plum Island, Mass., June 17 and another female in a sphagnum bog at Bangor, Me. June 30. PLATE I 1 Theridion globosum, side oi S. la cephalothorax, eyes and palpi from above, lb sternum and palpi from below. 2 Teutana grossa, dorsal markings of c?. 2 a sternum and maxillae. 3 Pedanostethus fuscus, base of palpal organ, 3 a same of P. pumilus, 3 b same of P. riparius, 3 c same of P. spiniferus. 4 Ceratinella sphaerica, side of 6- 4 a dorsal view of cJ. 4 b male palpus. 4 c tibia and tarsal hook of male palpus. 5 Ceratinella carinata, tibia and tarsus of male palpus. 5 a same of C. laetabilis. 5 b same of C. laeta. 5 c same of C. brunneus. 6 Grammonota trivittata, cephalothorax and palpi of S- 6 a same of G. ornata. 6 b male palpus of G. trivittata. 6 c same of G. ornata. 7 Araeoncus bispinosus, side of cephalothorax of c?. 7 a head and palpi of S. 7 b male palpus. 7 c sternum. 8 Dic3'mbium pectinatum, side of cephalothorax ofd. 8 a metatarsus of first leg. 8 b upper side of male palpus. 8 c outer side of right palpus. 8d under side of male palpi. 9 Histagonia nasuta, cephalothorax of cJ. 9 a side ol cephalothorax of J. 9 b, 9 c male palpi. Plate I PLATE II 1 Lophocarenum biloliatum, male from above, la side of cephalo- thorax. lb male palpus. 2 Lophocarenum exiguum, side of cephalothorax of male. 2a front of male and palpus. 2b left palpus. 2c top of head. 3 Lophocarenum excavatum, side of male. 3a head of male from in front and above. 3b male palpus. 3 c epigynum. 4 Lophocarenum arenarium, dorsal view of male. 4a side of cephalo- thorax. 4b male palpus, outer side. 4c epigynum. 5 Lophocarenum domiciliorum, head and palpi of male. 5 a side of head, ob male palpus. 5 c tibia of male palpus, inner side. 6 Lophocarenum flagellatum, head and palpi of male. 6 a cephalo- thorax slightly turned to show grooves in head. 6h side of cephalothorax. 7 Lophocarenum decemoculatum and florens. 7 eyes of decemocu- latum. 7 a eyes of florens. 7 b epigynum of decemoculatum 7 c epigynum of florens. 8 Lophocarenum (Tmeticus) armatum. 8 dorsal view of cephalo- thorax showing pits in the head, eyes and mandibles. 8a side of cephalothorax. 8b under side of cephalothorax. 8c head and eyes of female. 8d under side of female. 8e male palpus. 8f patella of male palpus from the side. 8g front of head and mandibles of male. 8h tarsal hook and base of tarsus. Plate II I PLATE III 1 Tmeticus aestivalis, male palpi from below. 1 a palpus from outer side, lb palpus from above. Ic epigynum. 2 Tmeticus tarsalis, side of cephalothorax of (5. 2 a palpal organ. 2b male palpus showing tarsal hook and wide tarsus. 3 Tmeticus entomologicus, head and palpi of S- 3 a male palpus from side. 4 Tmeticus tenuipalpis, side of c?. 4 a maxillae and mandibles of S. 4 b front of head and mandibles of cJ. 4c male palpus from below. 4d male palpus from above. 4e epig3'num. 5 Microneta olivacea, cephalothorax and palpus of d. 5a male pal- pus, outer side, ob side of cephalothorax of male. 5 c side of cephalothorax of female. 5d palpus of female. 5e palpus of female from Narcross, Me., without enlarged tarsus. 5f mandible of female. 5g top of cephalothorax of female. 5h front of female showing enlarged palpi. 5i and 5 k epigynum. 6 Bath3'phantes theridiformis, back of male. 6 a male palpus. 6 b mandibles of male. 6 c epigynum. 7 Bathyphantes intricata. 7, 7 a, 7 b, 7 c, 7d male palpus. Plate III PLATE IV 1 Diplostyla brevis, outer side of male palpus, la under side of male palpus, lb epigynum. 2 Linyphia humilis, front and mandibles of male. 2 a top of head and palpi of male. 2 b dorsal markings of female. 2 c side of abdomen. 2d epigynum. 3 Dictyna terrestris, side of head and palpus of male. 3a mandibles of d. 3b male palpus. 3c head and palpus of male. 3d head and palpus of D. volupis for comparison. 4 Argenna obesa, under side of female. 4 a back of female. 4 b, 4 c, 4d, 4e male palpus. 5 Lathys foxii, dorsal markings. 5 a under side of female, ob, 5 c male palpus. 5d male palpus from above. 5e eyes. 6 Pisaura brevipes, dorsal markings and diagram showing relative length of tirst leg. 6 a epigynum. 6 b diagram showing rel- ative length of first leg of P. undata. 6c epigynum of P. undata. Plate IV PLATE V 1 Lycosa quinaria, back of S with palpus, la palpus of S under side. 2 Pardosa muscicola, dorsal markings of S. 2 a male palpus from below. 2 b male palpus from the side. 2 c epigynum. 3 Pirata montana, dorsal markings. 3 a palpus of S, under side. 4 Liocranum calcaratum, back of $. 4a under side of $. 4 b first leg of $ showing spines. 4 c back of d- 4 d epigynum. 4emale palpus. 4f male palpus showing palpal organ. 5 Zora spinimana, dorsal markings of $. 5a epigynum, 5b first leg showing spines. 6 Micaria longispina, palpal organ. 6 a, 6 b, palpus of S showing tibial spine. 7 Prosthesima rufula, palpus of c^. 8 Prosthesima depressa. 8, 8a, 8b three forms of tibial spine. 8 c palpus of S showing palpal organ. 9 Prosthesima transversa, palpus of S showing palpal organ. 9 a tibial spine from above. 9 b tibial spine from outer side. Plate V I PLATE VI 1 Phrurolithus formica, back of female, la sternum and maxillae. lb epigynum of old female. Ic epigynum of young female. 1 d palpus of male. 1 e palpus of S from above. 2 Phrurolithus minutus, back of c?. 2 a paljDus of »//'■.>■; ^ .V , -A- ; p^4 ■^'::^' V '^'' ''■-^^'•'/w:-. ^;m i""^' ^xK' ' i ■ -^ \ - ''^'^ ;^T v^/.